RU2613603C2 - Staples unit with compressible components resistant to deformation - Google Patents

Abstract

FIELD: medicine.

SUBSTANCE: invention relates to medicine. Unit with cross-linking elements can comprise support part, tissue thickness compensator and multiple connecting elements placed inside support part and/or tissue thickness compensator. Tissue thickness compensator is located relative to support part. Connecting elements are used for suturing of tissue. When using, unit with cross-linking elements is installed in first branche of surgical suturing device. Second branche or support can be placed opposite to first branche. Staples driving element is moved through unit with cross-linking elements for moving of cross-linking elements to stop. After placing cross-linking elements can capture at least, part of tissue thickness compensator together with at least part of sutured tissue.

EFFECT: staples unit with compressible components resistant to deformation is disclosed.

21 cl, 389 dwg

Description

CROSS RELATIONS TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This unconditional patent application is a partial continuation application, pursuant to §120 of section 35 of the United States Code, US patent application serial number 12 / 894,345, entitled “Sewing Elements Supported by a Support for a Block with Sewing Elements”, filed September 30, 2010, the contents of which are fully incorporated herein by reference.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

The present invention relates to surgical devices and, in various embodiments, to surgical dissecting and stapling devices and the brace blocks used therein, which are designed to dissect and staple tissue brackets.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

Features and advantages of the present invention, as well as methods for their implementation, will be apparent, and the essence of the invention will be better understood after reading the following description of embodiments of the present invention in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.

In FIG. 1 is a sectional view of an embodiment of a surgical apparatus.

In FIG. 1A is a perspective view of one embodiment of an implantable brace unit.

In FIG. 1B-1E show portions of an end clamp holding and stitching tissue with an implantable brace unit.

In FIG. 2 is a partial cross-sectional side view of another end clamp connected to a part of the surgical apparatus, the end clamp supporting the surgical brace unit and its stop in the open position.

In FIG. 3 is another partial side cross-sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 2, in the closed position.

In FIG. 4 is another partial side cross-sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 2 and 3, on which the cutting element begins to advance through the end clamp.

In FIG. 5 is another partial side cross-sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 2-4, on which the cutting element is partially advanced through the end clamp.

In FIG. 6 is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of a brace unit mounted in a surgical dissecting and stapling device.

In FIG. 7 is a top view of a surgical brace unit and an elongated groove of the device of FIG. 6.

In FIG. 8 is a top view of another embodiment of a surgical brace unit mounted in an elongated end channel groove.

In FIG. 9 is a bottom view of the stop.

In FIG. 10 is a partial perspective view of a plurality of brackets forming part of a series of brackets.

In FIG. 11 is another partial perspective view of a series of brackets shown in FIG. 10, wherein the brackets are shown after forming a surgical dissecting and stapling device as a result of contact with the abutment.

In FIG. 12 is a partial perspective view of alternative brackets forming part of another row of brackets.

In FIG. 13 is a partial perspective view of alternative brackets forming part of another row of brackets.

In FIG. 14 is a partial perspective view of alternative brackets forming part of another embodiment of a series of brackets.

In FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view of an end clip supporting a bracket unit.

In FIG. 16 is a sectional view of a portion of the elongated end channel groove shown in FIG. 15, after removing from it parts of the body of the implantable bracket unit and brackets.

In FIG. 17 is a cross-sectional view of an end clip supporting another bracket unit.

In FIG. 18A-18D show a deformation diagram of a surgical brace located in a case of a crushable brace unit in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 19A is a diagram illustrating a bracket located in a case of a crushable bracket unit.

In FIG. 19B is a diagram illustrating a creasing process of a crumpled bracket unit body shown in FIG. 19A, focusing.

In FIG. 19C is a diagram illustrating a process for further creasing the crumpled bracket unit shown in FIG. 19A, focusing.

In FIG. 19D is a diagram illustrating a bracket shown in FIG. 19A, in a fully formed configuration, as well as a collapsible bracket unit shown in FIG. 19A, in a completely crushed state.

In FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating a bracket located opposite the supporting surface of the bracket unit and its possible relative movement.

In FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view of a support surface of a bracket unit containing a groove or groove configured to stabilize the base of the bracket shown in FIG. twenty.

In FIG. 22 is a sectional view of a bracket containing a molded head and a groove or groove configured to receive a portion of the head in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment.

In FIG. 23 is a plan view of a bracket block in accordance with at least one embodiment comprising brackets placed in a case of a crushable bracket block.

In FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the bracket unit shown in FIG. 23.

In FIG. 25 is a perspective view of a bracket unit in accordance with at least one embodiment comprising a protective layer surrounding brackets located in a case of a crushable bracket unit.

In FIG. 26 is a sectional view of the bracket unit shown in FIG. 25 along line 26-26 of FIG. 25.

In FIG. 27 is a perspective view of a bracket block in accordance with at least one embodiment comprising brackets that extend at least partially outside the body of the crumpled bracket block and the protective layer surrounding the bracket body.

In FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view of the bracket unit shown in FIG. 27 along the line 28-28 shown in FIG. 27.

In FIG. 29 is a partial cross-sectional view of a bracket block in accordance with at least one embodiment comprising brackets at least partially placed in a crushable bracket block housing, the brackets at least partially located in the voids of the bracket spaces in the bracket block housing.

In FIG. 30 is a sectional view of the bracket unit shown in FIG. 29 along line 30-30 shown in FIG. 29.

In FIG. 31 is a partial sectional view of a bracket unit in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 32 is a partial cross-sectional view of a bracket unit in accordance with at least one embodiment comprising brackets at least partially placed in a case of a crushable bracket unit, and an alignment matrix connecting the brackets and the alignment brackets with respect to each other.

In FIG. 33 is a cross-sectional view of the bracket unit shown in FIG. 32 along line 33-33 shown in FIG. 32.

In FIG. 34 is a partial partial cross-sectional view of an inner layer of a body of a crushable bracket unit.

In FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating an inner layer shown in FIG. 34, compressed between the transfer plate and the support plate.

In FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating brackets inserted in the compressed inner layer shown in FIG. 35.

In FIG. 37 is a schematic diagram of a support plate shown in FIG. 35, in the process of separation from the inner layer.

In FIG. 38 is a diagram of a subassembly containing an inner layer shown in FIG. 34, and the brackets shown in FIG. 36 during insertion into the outer layer.

In FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating the sealing process of the outer layer shown in FIG. 38 to form an airtight bracket unit.

In FIG. 40 is a cross-sectional view of the sealed bracket unit shown in FIG. 39.

In FIG. 41 is a cross-sectional view of a brace block and a chute for a brace block in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating a portion of the bracket unit shown in FIG. 41, in a deformed state.

In FIG. 43 is a perspective view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising an abutment in an open position and a brace block located in a groove for the brace block.

In FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the end clip shown in FIG. 43 illustrating the stop in the closed position and the bracket block sandwiched between the stop and the groove for the bracket block.

In FIG. 45 is a perspective view of an end clip shown in FIG. 43 illustrating the bracket unit shown in FIG. 43, located alternatively in the gutter for the bracket unit.

In FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising a collapsible brace unit located in a groove for the brace unit and a fragment of support material attached to the abutment.

In FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 46 illustrating a stop in a closed position.

In FIG. 48 is a cross-sectional view of an alternative embodiment of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising a brace unit comprising a waterproof layer.

In FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of another alternative embodiment of an end clamp of a surgical stapler.

In FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view of an alternative embodiment of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising a step stop and a brace block comprising a step block body.

In FIG. 51 is a cross-sectional view of another alternative embodiment of an end clamp of a surgical stapler.

In FIG. 52 is a sectional view of an alternative embodiment of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising inclined tissue-contacting surfaces.

In FIG. 53 is a cross-sectional view of another alternative embodiment of an end clamp of a surgical stapler containing inclined tissue-contacting surfaces.

In FIG. 54 is a sectional view of an alternative embodiment of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising a support insert configured to support a brace unit.

In FIG. 55 is a sectional view of an alternative embodiment of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising a brace unit containing a plurality of crease layers.

In FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of an alternative embodiment of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising a brace unit comprising a stepped case of a crush unit.

In FIG. 57 is a cross-sectional view of another alternative embodiment of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising a brace unit comprising a stepped case of a crush unit.

In FIG. 58 is a sectional view of an alternative embodiment of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising a brace unit comprising a curved tissue contact surface.

In FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view of an alternative embodiment of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising a brace unit having an inclined tissue contact surface.

In FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view of a crushable bracket unit containing brackets and at least one drug stored therein.

In FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating a collapsible bracket unit shown in FIG. 60, after compression and deformation of the brackets contained therein.

In FIG. 62 is a partial cross-sectional view of a bracket unit according to at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 63 is a cross-sectional view of the bracket unit shown in FIG. 62.

In FIG. 64 is a perspective view of an implanted brace unit in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment.

In FIG. 65 is a sectional view of the implanted brace block shown in FIG. 64.

In FIG. 66 is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of a brace block containing deformable elements extending from the outer layer of the brace block.

In FIG. 67 is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of a bracket block comprising an outer layer of a bracket block arranged with an inner layer.

In FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view of an alternative embodiment of a bracket unit comprising a plurality of brackets, a crease layer and a pad layer.

In FIG. 69 is a perspective view of the gasket layer of FIG. 68.

In FIG. 70 is a perspective view of a gasket separated from the gasket layer of FIG. 68, and brackets aligned with a groove in the gasket.

In FIG. 71 is a perspective view of two interconnected gaskets from the gasket layer of FIG. 68.

In FIG. 72 is a perspective view of a support frame for laying the gasket layer shown in FIG. 68, which is removed from the separated gaskets.

In FIG. 73 is a perspective view with a spatial separation of the components of an alternative embodiment of a crushable brace unit comprising, within the brackets, a bracket advancement system close to the stop.

In FIG. 73A is a partial partial cross-sectional view of an alternative embodiment of the bracket unit shown in FIG. 73.

In FIG. 74 is a sectional view of the bracket unit shown in FIG. 73.

In FIG. 75 is a perspective view of a slide arranged to move along the bracket unit shown in FIG. 73, and moving the brackets in the direction of the stop.

In FIG. 76 is a diagram of the ejector brackets, which can be lifted against the stop by the slide provided in FIG. 75.

In FIG. 77 is a partial cross-sectional view of a bracket unit in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment comprising brackets located in the ejector brackets.

In FIG. 78 is a cross-sectional view of the bracket unit shown in FIG. 77 located in the groove for the bracket unit.

In FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view of the bracket unit shown in FIG. 77 illustrating an emphasis moved to a closed position and brackets located in a bracket block deformed by an emphasis.

In FIG. 80 is a sectional view of the bracket unit shown in FIG. 77 illustrating brackets moved up in the direction of the stop.

In FIG. 81 is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of a bracket unit comprising jumpers connecting the flexible side walls of the bracket unit.

In FIG. 82 is a perspective view of a slide assembly and a cutting member.

In FIG. 83 is a schematic diagram of a slide assembly and a cutting member shown in FIG. 82, which is used to raise the brackets from the bracket block shown in FIG. 77.

In FIG. 84 is a diagram illustrating a slide configured to engage and raise the brackets against the stop, as well as a locking system configured to selectively provide distal movement of the slide.

In FIG. 85A-85C show the process of inserting a bracket into a bracket head.

In FIG. 86 is a cross-sectional view of a bracket unit containing a support tray or holder.

In FIG. 87 is a partial sectional view of a collapsible bracket unit according to at least one alternative embodiment.

In FIG. 88 is a diagram illustrating a bracket unit shown in FIG. 87, in an implanted state.

In FIG. 89 is a partial cross-sectional view of a crumpled brace unit in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment.

In FIG. 90 is a partial sectional view of the bracket unit shown in FIG. 89.

In FIG. 91 is a diagram illustrating a bracket unit shown in FIG. 89, in the implanted state.

In FIG. 92 is a partial cross-sectional view of a collapsible bracket unit in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment.

In FIG. 93 is a partial partial cross-sectional view of a crumpled brace unit in accordance with at least one embodiment comprising a plurality of crumpled elements.

In FIG. 94 is a perspective view of a crease member shown in FIG. 93, in an unregulated state.

In FIG. 95 is a perspective view of a crease member shown in FIG. 94, in a crumpled state.

In FIG. 96A is a partial cross-sectional view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising a jaw located opposite the jaw of the gutter of the brace unit and a brace block located in the gutter of the brace unit, the jaw containing a holding matrix attached thereto.

In FIG. 96B is a partial cross-sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 96A illustrating a jaw moved to a gutter for a brace block, the brace block being crushed by a stop and a holding matrix, and the bracket continues at least partially through the fabric located between the holding matrix and the brace block.

In FIG. 96C is a partial cross-sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 96A illustrating the jaw in the final position and holding the matrix in mesh with the bracket shown in FIG. 96B.

In FIG. 96D is a partial cross-sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 96A illustrating a jaw and chute for a brace block movable from an implanted brace block and a holding matrix.

In FIG. 97 is a perspective view of a holding hole of a holding matrix in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment, which comprises a plurality of holding elements configured to engage with a leg of the stapling element passing through them.

In FIG. 98 is a perspective view of a holding hole of a holding matrix in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment, comprising six holding elements.

In FIG. 99 is a perspective view of a holding hole of a holding matrix in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment comprising eight holding elements.

In FIG. 100 is a perspective view of a holding hole of a holding matrix in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment comprising a plurality of holding elements configured to engage with a leg of a stapling element passing through them.

In FIG. 101 is a perspective view of a holding hole of a holding matrix in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment comprising six holding elements.

In FIG. 102 is a perspective view of a holding hole of a holding matrix in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment comprising eight holding elements.

In FIG. 103 is a perspective view of a holding hole of a holding matrix in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment comprising a plurality of holding elements made by stamping from a metal sheet.

In FIG. 104 is a perspective view of a holding hole of a holding matrix in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment comprising a plurality of holes extending around the perimeter of the holding hole.

In FIG. 105 is a plan view of a holding hole of a holding matrix in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment.

In FIG. 106 is a plan view of a holding hole of a holding matrix in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment.

In FIG. 107 is a plan view of a holding hole of a holding matrix in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment.

In FIG. 108 is a plan view of a holding hole of a holding matrix in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment.

In FIG. 109 is a plan view of a holding hole of a holding matrix in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment.

In FIG. 110 is a plan view of a holding hole of a holding matrix comprising a holding tab extending into the holding hole in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 111 is a plan view of a holding hole of a holding matrix comprising a holding tab extending into the holding hole in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment.

In FIG. 112 is a perspective view of a crosslinking system comprising a plurality of brackets, a holding matrix engaged with the brackets, and an alignment matrix configured to align the brackets.

In FIG. 113 is a perspective view of a holding matrix shown in FIG. 112.

In FIG. 114 is a perspective view of the alignment matrix shown in FIG. 112.

In FIG. 115 is a partial top view of a retaining matrix shown in FIG. 112, engaged with the brackets shown in FIG. 112.

In FIG. 116 is a partial bottom view of a holding matrix shown in FIG. 112, engaged with the brackets shown in FIG. 112.

In FIG. 117 is a partial elevational view of the crosslinking system shown in FIG. 112.

In FIG. 118 is a partial perspective view of the crosslinking system shown in FIG. 112.

In FIG. 119 is a partial cross-sectional view of a holding matrix shown in FIG. 112, engaged with the brackets shown in FIG. 112.

In FIG. 120 is a partial cross-sectional view of the crosslinking system of FIG. 112.

In FIG. 121 is a perspective view of a crosslinking system shown in FIG. 112, further comprising protective caps mounted on the legs of the brackets.

In FIG. 122 is a perspective view from below of the structure of the crosslinking system shown in FIG. 121.

In FIG. 123 is a partial perspective view of the structure of the crosslinking system shown in FIG. 121.

In FIG. 124 is a partial cross-sectional view of the structure of the crosslinking system shown in FIG. 121.

In FIG. 125 is a perspective view of an end clip in accordance with at least one embodiment comprising a jaw in an open position, a holding matrix and a plurality of protective caps located in a jaw, as well as a brace block located in a groove for the brace block.

In FIG. 126 is a perspective view of the end clip shown in FIG. 125, in the closed position.

In FIG. 127 is a perspective view of the end clip shown in FIG. 125, in the actuated position.

In FIG. 128 is a perspective view of a holding matrix and protective caps shown in FIG. 125 mounted on the bracket unit shown in FIG. 125.

In FIG. 129 is a detailed view of the structure shown in FIG. 128.

In FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the end clip shown in FIG. 125, illustrating the jaw in the open position with a thinner tissue located between the holding matrix and the bracket unit.

In FIG. 131 is a perspective view of the end clip shown in FIG. 125, illustrating the jaw in the closed position, close to the thinner fabric shown in FIG. 130.

In FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the end clip shown in FIG. 125, illustrating the jaw in the actuated position for gripping the thinner tissue shown in FIG. 130, between the holding matrix and the bracket unit.

In FIG. 133 is a perspective view of the holding matrix and the protective caps shown in FIG. 125 mounted on the bracket unit shown in FIG. 125, with the thin fabric interposed between them, shown in FIG. 130.

In FIG. 134 is a detailed view of the structure shown in FIG. 133.

In FIG. 135 is a cross-sectional view of a protective cap located on the tip of a bracket leg in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment.

In FIG. 136 is a perspective view of a plurality of protective caps placed on a sheet of material.

In FIG. 137 is a perspective view of a jaw containing a plurality of recesses configured to receive a plurality of protective caps.

In FIG. 138 is a detailed view of a portion of a jaw containing a sheet covering the protective caps located in the jaw shown in FIG. 137.

In FIG. 139 is a cross-sectional view of a protective cap located on the tip of a bracket leg in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment, in which the protective cap comprises an inner forming surface.

In FIG. 140 is another cross-sectional view of the protective cap shown in FIG. 139 illustrating a bracket leg that deforms against a forming surface.

In FIG. 141 is a top view of an alternative embodiment of a holding matrix comprising a plurality of related matrix elements.

In FIG. 142 is a top view of an alternative embodiment of a holding matrix comprising a plurality of related matrix elements.

In FIG. 143 is a plan view of an alternative embodiment of a holding matrix comprising a plurality of related matrix elements.

In FIG. 144 is a top view of an alternative embodiment of an array of holding matrices containing a plurality of related matrix elements.

In FIG. 145 is a top view of an alternative embodiment of a holding matrix comprising a plurality of related matrix elements.

In FIG. 146 is a partial exploded view of the components of a jaw containing a holding matrix including a compressible coating.

In FIG. 147 is a detailed view of a holding matrix shown in FIG. 146.

In FIG. 148 is a partial cross-sectional view of a cross-linking system comprising a retaining matrix, including a compressible layer and a plurality of cells hermetically sealing one or more drugs.

In FIG. 149 is a diagram illustrating the brace legs that pierced the cells shown in FIG. 148, as it engages with the holding matrix.

In FIG. 150 is a partial cross-sectional view of a crosslinking system comprising a retaining matrix, including a compressible layer.

In FIG. 151 is a perspective view of an insertion unit of a block with stapling elements comprising a holder, a first block with stapling elements and a second block with stapling elements.

In FIG. 152 is a perspective view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising a first jaw and a second jaw, the second jaw being shown in an open configuration.

In FIG. 153 is a perspective view of the end clip shown in FIG. 152 illustrating a second jaw in a closed configuration and an insertion unit of a block with stapling elements shown in FIG. 151 used to load the first block into the first jaw and the second block into the second jaw.

In FIG. 154 is a perspective view of the charged end clip shown in FIG. 153 illustrating an insertion assembly of a block removed from an end clamp, a second jaw in an open configuration, and tissue placed between the first jaw and the second jaw.

In FIG. 155 is a perspective view of a charged end clip shown in FIG. 154, in a powered configuration.

In FIG. 156 is a perspective view of the first block and the second block in an implanted state.

In FIG. 157 is a perspective view of an end clip shown in FIG. 152 illustrating a portion of a first block still engaged with a first jaw in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 158 is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of an insertion unit of a block with stapling elements comprising a holder, a first block with stapling elements, and a second block with stapling elements.

In FIG. 159 is a perspective view of a block insertion unit with stapling elements shown in FIG. 158 and used to load the first block into the first jaw of the end clamp and the second block into the second jaw.

In FIG. 160 is a cross-sectional view of a charged end clip shown in FIG. 159.

In FIG. 161 is a perspective view of a surgical stapler comprising a lower jaw and an upper jaw in accordance with at least one embodiment in which some parts of the surgical stapler are removed.

In FIG. 162 is a perspective view of a surgical stapler shown in FIG. 161, with the upper jaw removed.

In FIG. 163 is a perspective view of a sliding stop system of the upper jaw of a surgical stapler shown in FIG. 161 comprising a first sliding stop and a second sliding stop.

In FIG. 164 is an end view of the sliding stop system shown in FIG. 163.

In FIG. 165 is a plan view of the sliding stop system shown in FIG. 163.

In FIG. 166 is a diagram illustrating a sliding stop system shown in FIG. 163, inoperative.

In FIG. 167 is a diagram illustrating a first sliding stop of the sliding stop system shown in FIG. 163, in the idle position, as well as brackets located in the lower jaw in an unplaced position.

In FIG. 168 is a diagram illustrating the brackets in the lower jaw in the deployed configuration and the first sliding stop shown in FIG. 167, stretched proximally to deform the first group of legs of brackets.

In FIG. 169 is a diagram illustrating a first group of brackets shown in FIG. 168 deformed to a fully deformed state.

In FIG. 170 is a diagram illustrating a second sliding stop of the sliding stop system shown in FIG. 163 distally pushed to deform the second group of legs of brackets.

In FIG. 171 is a partial perspective view of an abutment comprising a plurality of forming recesses in at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 172 is an end view in cross-section of an abutment shown in FIG. 171.

In FIG. 173 is a diagram illustrating a first stage in the production of forming recesses shown in FIG. 171.

In FIG. 174 is a diagram illustrating a second stage of the production of forming depressions shown in FIG. 171.

In FIG. 175 is a plan view of an arrangement of formative recesses of an abutment shown in FIG. 171.

In FIG. 176 is a diagram illustrating the first stage of the manufacturing process used to produce the stop.

In FIG. 177 is a diagram illustrating a second stage of the manufacturing process shown in FIG. 176.

In FIG. 178 is a diagram illustrating a third stage of the manufacturing process shown in FIG. 176.

In FIG. 179 is a perspective view of the left and front surgical stapling and dissecting apparatus with a handle including a lever automatic retraction mechanism and a ratchet manual retraction mechanism.

In FIG. 180 is a perspective view of the right and rear surgical dissecting and stapling apparatus shown in FIG. 179, on which a portion of the elongated shaft is trimmed, and the right half of the shell of the handle housing is removed to show an automatic post-launch retraction mechanism and a manual trigger retraction mechanism.

In FIG. 181 is a perspective view of the right and rear with a spatial separation of the components of the handle and the elongated shaft of the surgical stapling and dissecting apparatus shown in FIG. 179.

In FIG. 182 is a perspective view of the right and rear surgical stapling and dissecting apparatus of FIG. 31, in which the right half of the shell and the outer parts of the working part are removed to show the closing mechanism and the trigger mechanism in the initial state.

In FIG. 183 is a right side elevational view of a partially disassembled surgical stapler and dissecting apparatus shown in FIG. 182.

In FIG. 184 is a perspective view of the partially and partially disassembled surgical stapling and dissecting apparatus shown in FIG. 182, with a closing mechanism in a closed and clamped state, and a trigger mechanism with a side fuse that performs the first cycle, and with a manual retraction mechanism retracted to show the distal link of the connecting rail that triggers the automatic retraction of the trigger mechanism.

In FIG. 185 is a perspective view of the partially and partially disassembled surgical stapling and dissecting apparatus shown in FIG. 183, from which the trigger with the side fuse is disconnected, and in which the distal link approaches the automatic retraction.

In FIG. 186 is a left side elevational view of a partially disassembled surgical stapler and dissecting apparatus shown in FIG. 183, in the initial state, with an open end clamp and a reverse gear locking mechanism engaged.

In FIG. 187 is a detailed left side view of the right half of the shell and the lever for releasing the reverse lock of the handle shown in FIG. 186.

In FIG. 188 is a detailed left side elevational view of the disassembled surgical stapler and dissecting apparatus shown in FIG. 179, on which the closing trigger is clamped, the trigger hook performs the final cycle and the distal link is in the gripping position for automatic retraction.

In FIG. 189 is a detailed left side elevational view of the disassembled surgical stapler and dissecting apparatus shown in FIG. 188, immediately after the distal link has been actuated and locked in the forward position, the backstop release lever is allowed, allowing the connecting rail to retract.

In FIG. 190 is a perspective view of the right side with a spatial separation of the components of the intermediate and rear gears, the manual retraction lever and the ratchet safety mechanism of the manual retraction mechanism of the surgical stapling and dissecting apparatus shown in FIG. 179.

In FIG. 191 is a perspective view on the right of the manual retraction mechanism shown in FIG. 190, with the manual back lever partially cut away to show a smaller diameter ratchet gear located on the rear gear and engaging the ratchet mechanism safety catch.

In FIG. 192 is a left side elevational view of a partially disassembled surgical stapler and dissecting apparatus shown in FIG. 179, with a backstop lock mechanism coupled to a fully actuated connecting rail that is disconnected from the combined tension / compression spring before actuating the manual retraction lever shown in FIG. 190.

In FIG. 193 is a left side elevational view of a partially disassembled surgical stapler and dissecting apparatus shown in FIG. 192, with hidden parts of the reverse lock release lever, rear gear and manual start lever, shown in half section.

In FIG. 194 is a left side elevational view of a partially disassembled surgical stapler and dissecting apparatus shown in FIG. 193, after the actuation of the manual start lever caused a manual retraction of the connecting rail.

In FIG. 195 is a left side elevational view of a partially disassembled surgical stapler and dissecting apparatus shown in FIG. 194, with a missing connecting rail, showing a manual start lever detachable from a backstop.

In FIG. 196 is a detailed left side view of an alternative backstop release lever and handle body of a surgical stapling and dissecting apparatus shown in FIG. 179.

In FIG. 197 is a perspective view of the left in the spatial separation of the components of the alternative lever release the reverse lock, the shaft of the rear gear and the cam circle of the automatic backward mechanism shown in FIG. 196.

In FIG. 198 is a right side elevational view of an alternative backstop release mechanism shown in FIG. 196, in which the connecting rail is in the retracted position and the backstop release lever is located proximate to the backstop lock plate engaged with the starter rod.

In FIG. 198A is a detailed right side elevational view of the rear gear, the cam circle of the automatic retraction mechanism, and the most distal link shown in FIG. 198.

In FIG. 199 is a right side elevational view of the backstop release mechanism shown in FIG. 198, after the first start cycle.

In FIG. 199A is a detailed right side elevational view of the rear gear, the cam circle of the automatic backward mechanism, and the second link shown in FIG. 199.

In FIG. 200 is a right side elevational view of the backstop release mechanism shown in FIG. 199, after the second start cycle.

In FIG. 200A is a detailed right side elevational view of the rear gear, the cam circle of the automatic retraction mechanism, and the third link shown in FIG. 200.

In FIG. 201 is a detailed right side elevational view of the backstop release mechanism shown in FIG. 200, after the third and final start cycle.

In FIG. 201A is a detailed right side elevational view of the rear gear, the cam circle of the automatic retraction mechanism, and the proximal fourth link shown in FIG. 201.

In FIG. 202 is a right side elevational view of the automatic release mechanism shown in FIG. 201, after the final start-up stroke caused the cam circle of the automatic retraction mechanism to slide into the distal position and lock the release lever of the backstop by disconnecting the backstop.

In FIG. 203 is a perspective view of the left and front open brace overlay assembly with the right half of the interchangeable bracket unit included in the bracket groove.

In FIG. 204 is a perspective view with a spatial separation of the components of the overlay bracket shown in FIG. 203, with a fully assembled replaceable bracket unit and a non-articulated rod configuration.

In FIG. 205 is a perspective view of a two-component cutting element and a trigger rod (three-horned element) of the brace overlay assembly shown in FIG. 203.

In FIG. 206 is a perspective view of a wedge-shaped slide of the bracket unit of the bracketing unit.

In FIG. 207 is a left side elevational view taken in longitudinal section along the center line 207-207 of the stapling assembly shown in FIG. 203.

In FIG. 208 is a perspective view of an open bracket overlay assembly shown in FIG. 203, without a removable bracket unit, with a portion of the gutter for the brackets located next to the middle pin of the two-component cutting element and the launch rod, and without the distal part of the gutter for the brackets.

In FIG. 209 is a front elevational view taken along section line 209-209 of the stapling assembly shown in FIG. 203, showing the internal ejectors of the brackets of the bracket unit and parts of a two-component cutting element and a trigger rod.

In FIG. 210 is a left side elevational view made substantially along the longitudinal center line 207-207 of the closed brace overlay assembly shown in FIG. 203, to include central points of contact between the two-component cutting element and the wedge-shaped slide, but also with a lateral offset, to show the brackets and the ejectors of the brackets inside the bracket block.

In FIG. 211 is a detailed left side elevational view of the brace overlay assembly shown in FIG. 210, wherein the two-component cutting element is pushed back slightly more than is typically the case for replacing the bracket unit.

In FIG. 212 is a detailed left side elevational view of the parenthesis overlay assembly shown in FIG. 211, where the actuation of the two-component cutting element begins, in accordance with the configuration shown in FIG. 210.

In FIG. 213 is a left side elevational cross-sectional view of the closed brace overlay assembly shown in FIG. 210, after the actuation of the two-component cutting element and the launch rod in the distal direction.

In FIG. 214 is a left side elevational cross-sectional view of the closed brace overlay assembly shown in FIG. 213, after activating the bracket unit and retracting the two-component cutting element.

In FIG. 215 is a detailed left side elevational sectional view of the parenthesis overlay assembly shown in FIG. 214, where the two-component cutting element is given the opportunity to move to the locked position.

In FIG. 216 is a perspective view of a bracket unit comprising a rigid support portion and a compressible tissue thickness compensator for use with a surgical stapler in accordance with at least one embodiment of the present invention.

In FIG. 217 is a partially exploded view of the components of the brace block shown in FIG. 216.

In FIG. 218 is a view with a complete spatial separation of the components of the bracket unit shown in FIG. 216.

In FIG. 219 is another view of the spatial separation of the components of the bracket unit shown in FIG. 216, without a sheath covering the tissue thickness compensator.

In FIG. 220 is a perspective view of a housing, or support portion, of a bracket unit shown in FIG. 216.

In FIG. 221 is a perspective view from above of a slide arranged to move within a bracket unit shown in FIG. 216, to bring into operation the brackets from the bracket unit.

In FIG. 222 is a perspective view from below of the slide shown in FIG. 221.

In FIG. 223 is a perspective view of the slide shown in FIG. 221.

In FIG. 224 is a perspective view from above of an ejector configured to hold one or more brackets and to be lifted up using the slide shown in FIG. 221 to eject the brackets of the bracket unit.

In FIG. 225 is a perspective view from below of the ejector shown in FIG. 224.

In FIG. 226 illustrates a shell configured to at least partially surround a compressible tissue thickness compensator of a bracket unit.

In FIG. 227 is a partial partial cross-sectional view of a bracket unit containing a rigid support portion and a compressible tissue thickness compensator, showing brackets moving during a first sequence from an idle position to an actuated position.

In FIG. 228 is a perspective view of the bracket unit shown in FIG. 227.

In FIG. 229 is a detailed vertical view of the bracket unit shown in FIG. 227.

In FIG. 230 is an end view in section of the bracket unit shown in FIG. 227.

In FIG. 231 is a bottom view of the bracket unit shown in FIG. 227.

In FIG. 232 is a detailed bottom view of the bracket unit shown in FIG. 227.

In FIG. 233 is a longitudinal sectional view of an abutment in a closed position and a brace unit comprising a rigid support portion and a crease-compensating tissue thickness compensator, showing brackets moving during a first sequence from an idle position to an actuated position.

In FIG. 234 is another cross-sectional view of the stop and the brace block shown in FIG. 233, depicting a stop in the open position after the completion of the starting sequence.

In FIG. 235 is a partial detailed view of the bracket unit shown in FIG. 233, with the image of the brackets in the idle position.

In FIG. 236 is a vertical sectional view of a bracket unit containing a rigid support portion and a crease-compensating tissue thickness compensator, showing brackets in the idle position.

In FIG. 237 is a detailed view of the bracket unit shown in FIG. 236.

In FIG. 238 is a view in vertical projection of an emphasis in an open position and a bracket block containing a rigid support part and a crease-compensated tissue thickness compensator, depicting the brackets in an inactive position.

In FIG. 239 is a perspective view of an abutment in the closed position and a brace unit containing a rigid support portion and a crease-compensator for tissue thickness, depicting brackets in the idle position and tissue sandwiched between the abutment and the tissue thickness compensator.

In FIG. 240 is a detailed view of the stop and bracket unit shown in FIG. 239.

In FIG. 241 is a perspective view of an abutment in the closed position and a brace unit containing a rigid support portion and a crease-compensating fabric thickness compensator, showing brackets in the idle position and a thicker fabric located between the abutment and the brace unit.

In FIG. 242 is a detailed view of the stop and bracket unit shown in FIG. 241.

In FIG. 243 is a perspective view of a stop and a bracket unit shown in FIG. 241, depicting tissue of different thicknesses, located between the emphasis and the bracket unit.

In FIG. 244 is a detailed view of the stop and bracket unit shown in FIG. 241, as presented in FIG. 243.

In FIG. 245 is a diagram illustrating a tissue thickness compensator that compensates for different tissue thicknesses clamped in different brackets.

In FIG. 246 is a diagram illustrating a tissue thickness compensator applying compressive pressure to one or more vessels dissected by a line of brackets.

In FIG. 247 is a diagram illustrating a situation in which one or more brackets are not formed correctly.

In FIG. 248 is a diagram illustrating a tissue thickness compensator capable of compensating for malformed brackets.

In FIG. 249 is a diagram illustrating a tissue thickness compensator located in a tissue site where a plurality of rows of brackets intersect.

In FIG. 250 is a diagram illustrating a fabric gripped by a bracket.

In FIG. 251 is a diagram showing a fabric and tissue thickness compensator captured by a bracket.

In FIG. 252 is a diagram illustrating a fabric gripped by a bracket.

In FIG. 253 is a diagram illustrating thick tissue and a tissue thickness compensator captured by a bracket.

In FIG. 254 is a diagram illustrating thin tissue and a tissue thickness compensator trapped in a bracket.

In FIG. 255 is a diagram illustrating an intermediate thickness fabric and a tissue thickness compensator captured by a bracket.

In FIG. 256 is a diagram illustrating a fabric of a different intermediate thickness and a tissue thickness compensator captured by a bracket.

In FIG. 257 is a diagram illustrating thick tissue and a tissue thickness compensator trapped in a bracket.

In FIG. 258 is a partial cross-sectional view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler illustrating a launch rod and a slide for bracketing in a retracted, inoperative position.

In FIG. 259 shows another partial cross-sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 258 illustrating a launch rod and a slide for actuating the brackets in a partially extended position.

In FIG. 260 is a cross-sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 258 showing a launch rod in a fully extended, or actuated, position.

In FIG. 261 is a cross-sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 258, showing the launch rod in the retracted position after being actuated and the slide for actuating the brackets remaining in the fully actuated position.

In FIG. 262 is a detailed view of the launch rod in the retracted position shown in FIG. 261.

In FIG. 263 is a partial cross-sectional view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler including a staple unit comprising a tissue thickness compensator and brackets at least partially located within it.

In FIG. 264 is another partial cross-sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 263 illustrating brackets at least partially displaced and / or rotated relative to a stop located opposite the bracket unit.

In FIG. 265 is a partial cross-sectional view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 266 is a partial cross-sectional view of an end clamp in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment.

In FIG. 267 is a partial cross-sectional view of an end clamp in accordance with another alternative embodiment.

In FIG. 268 is a perspective view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 269 is a partial cross-sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 268, in a bent state.

In FIG. 270 is a partial sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 269, in an exempted state.

In FIG. 271 is a perspective view of an end clip containing a coulter for a tissue thickness compensator.

In FIG. 272 is a perspective view from the rear of the coulter of the tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 271.

In FIG. 273 is a perspective view of an end clamp comprising a plurality of rail guides extending from a support portion and a tissue thickness compensator having a longitudinal cavity formed therein.

In FIG. 274 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 273.

In FIG. 275 is a perspective view of an end clamp comprising a plurality of teeth extending from a support portion and a tissue thickness compensator engaged with them.

In FIG. 276 is a perspective view of a stop containing an array of recesses in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 277 is a partial detailed view of the emphasis shown in FIG. 276.

In FIG. 278 is a partial longitudinal sectional view of an abutment shown in FIG. 276.

In FIG. 279 is a cross-sectional view of an abutment shown in FIG. 276.

In FIG. 280 is a perspective view of a powered bracket having a substantially B-shaped configuration.

In FIG. 281 is a perspective view of a powered bracket, one leg of which is deformed inward and one leg is deformed outward.

In FIG. 282 is a perspective view of a powered bracket, both legs of which are curved outward.

In FIG. 283 is a partial perspective view of a support portion of a bracket unit containing detachable and / or replaceable ejector legs of brackets.

In FIG. 284 is a partial sectional view of the bracket unit shown in FIG. 283, after placing the brackets from the bracket block.

In FIG. 285 is a detailed sectional view shown in FIG. 284, after activating the bracket unit.

In FIG. 286 is a view with a spatial separation of the components of the bracket unit, including a tissue thickness compensator containing voids formed therein.

In FIG. 287 is a diagram illustrating a tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 286 implanted close to the tissue.

In FIG. 288 is another diagram illustrating a tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 286 implanted close to the tissue.

In FIG. 289 is a perspective view in section of a bracket unit containing lateral retaining elements extending from its support portion, configured to hold the tissue thickness compensator in a desired position.

In FIG. 290 is a sectional view of the bracket unit shown in FIG. 289, which is used for stitching tissue.

In FIG. 291 is another cross-sectional view of the bracket unit shown in FIG. 289 illustrating a support portion separated from an implanted tissue thickness compensator.

In FIG. 292 is a perspective cross-sectional view of a bracket unit containing lateral retaining elements configured to hold a tissue thickness compensator on a support portion.

In FIG. 293 is a cross-sectional view of the bracket unit shown in FIG. 292, which is used for stitching tissue.

In FIG. 294 is another cross-sectional view of the bracket unit shown in FIG. 292 illustrating a support portion separated from an implanted tissue thickness compensator.

In FIG. 295 is a detailed cross-sectional view of a holding member that holds a tissue thickness compensator on a support portion of a bracket unit in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 296 is a partial partial cross-sectional view of a bracket unit comprising brackets ejectors having different heights in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 296A is a diagram illustrating the ejector brackets shown in FIG. 296, and brackets held thereon having different heights in an idle state.

In FIG. 297 is a diagram illustrating a tissue thickness compensator having different thicknesses, bracket ejectors having different heights, and brackets having different heights in an unformed state.

In FIG. 298 is a diagram illustrating brackets and fabric thickness compensator shown in FIG. 297 implanted in tissue.

In FIG. 299 is a partial cross-sectional view of a bracket unit comprising a tissue thickness compensator having a different thickness in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 300 is a cross-sectional view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler in an open configuration.

In FIG. 301 is a sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 300, in a partially powered configuration.

In FIG. 302 is a cross-sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 300 in reopened configuration

In FIG. 303 is a cross-sectional view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising ejector brackets having different heights and a contoured panel surface in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 304 is a cross-sectional view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising ejector brackets having different heights and a stepped panel surface in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 305 is a perspective view of a brace block loaded into a clamp of a surgical stapler using a brace block applicator.

In FIG. 306 is a perspective view from below of the applicator of the bracket unit shown in FIG. 305.

In FIG. 307 is a side view of the applicator of the bracket unit shown in FIG. 305, complete with bracket unit.

In FIG. 308 is a sectional view of the assembly of FIG. 307.

In FIG. 309 is a perspective view of an applicator assembly of a brace unit, further including an upper tissue thickness compensator located on the upper surface of the brace unit applicator in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 310 is an exploded view of the components of the upper tissue thickness compensator and the bracket unit applicator shown in FIG. 309.

In FIG. 310A is an exploded view of the components of an applicator assembly of a brace unit containing a push member configured to detach an upper tissue thickness compensator adherently attached to the brace unit applicator.

In FIG. 311 is a partial exploded view of components of an applicator assembly of a brace unit in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment.

In FIG. 312 is a perspective view of an applicator assembly of a bracket unit containing an upper tissue thickness compensator including a plurality of retaining elements extending from it, and a bracket assembly comprising a lower tissue thickness compensator.

In FIG. 313 is a perspective view of the applicator assembly of the bracket unit shown in FIG. 312, located inside the gutter for the bracket unit, and a stop that is closed on the applicator assembly of the bracket unit.

In FIG. 314 is a perspective view of the stop shown in FIG. 313, in the re-opened position and the applicator of the bracket unit shown in FIG. 312 removed from the end clamp.

In FIG. 314A is a cross-sectional view of a fabric located between the upper fabric thickness compensator and the lower fabric thickness compensator shown in FIG. 312.

In FIG. 314B is a cross-sectional view illustrating an upper fabric thickness compensator and a lower fabric thickness compensator sewn to the fabric and dissected by a cutting member.

In FIG. 315 is a diagram illustrating a tissue thickness compensator inserted in an abutment according to at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 316 is a cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 315.

In FIG. 317 is an exploded view of components of a tissue thickness compensator and an abutment according to at least one alternative embodiment.

In FIG. 318 is a perspective view of an applicator assembly of a brace unit comprising an upper tissue thickness compensator configured to attach to a stop in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 319 is a perspective view of the applicator assembly of the bracket unit shown in FIG. 318 located inside the gutter for the bracket unit, and a stop moving to the upper compensator for the thickness of the fabric.

In FIG. 320, the bracket unit applicator shown in FIG. 318, removed from the end clamp after engaging the upper fabric thickness compensator with a stop.

In FIG. 321 is an end view in cross-section of an abutment moved to the upper tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 318.

In FIG. 322 is an end view in cross section of an abutment meshed with an upper compensator for tissue thickness.

In FIG. 323 is a sectional view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising a brace unit including a segmentable tissue thickness compensator attached to a support portion of the brace unit using a plurality of fasteners.

In FIG. 324 is a cross-sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 323 illustrating a starting element in a partially actuated position.

In FIG. 325 is a sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 323 illustrating a support portion moved from a partially implanted tissue thickness compensator.

In FIG. 326 is a partial perspective view of the support portion shown in FIG. 323.

In FIG. 327 is a perspective view of a slide for mounting brackets in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 328 is a perspective view of the slide shown in FIG. 327.

In FIG. 329 is a perspective view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising a brace unit including a tissue thickness compensator and a plurality of ejectors for brackets located on the tissue thickness compensator.

In FIG. 330 is a partial sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator and pusher brackets shown in FIG. 329, in an idle configuration.

In FIG. 331 is a partial cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator and pusher brackets shown in FIG. 329, in the powered configuration.

In FIG. 332 is a cross-sectional view of a bracket unit comprising a tissue thickness compensator and a support portion in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 333 is a partial cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator, a layer of ejectors of brackets and brackets in the idle position.

In FIG. 334 is a partial cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator, a bracket ejector layer, and a bracket in an idle position in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment.

In FIG. 335 is a partial cross-sectional view of a fabric thickness compensator, a bracket pusher layer, and a bracket in an idle position in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment.

In FIG. 336 is a partial cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator, a bracket pusher layer, and a bracket in an idle position in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment.

In FIG. 337 is a partial cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator, a bracket pusher layer, and a bracket in an idle position in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment.

In FIG. 338 is a partial cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator, a bracket pusher layer, and a bracket in an idle position in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment.

In FIG. 339 is a partial cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator, a bracket pusher layer, and a bracket in an idle position in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment.

In FIG. 340 is a detailed view of the portion surrounding the tip of the bracket shown in FIG. 339.

In FIG. 341 is a partial cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator, a bracket pusher layer, and a bracket in an idle position in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment.

In FIG. 342 is a detailed view of the portion surrounding the tip of the bracket shown in FIG. 341.

In FIG. 343 is a partial cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator, a bracket pusher layer, and a bracket in an idle position in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment.

In FIG. 344 is a perspective view of a bracket pusher layer and a plurality of brackets in an idle position in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment.

In FIG. 345 is an end view of a tissue thickness compensator configured to be used with a circular surgical stapler.

In FIG. 346 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator and a circular surgical stapler shown in FIG. 345.

In FIG. 347 is an end view of a tissue thickness compensator adapted for use with a circular surgical stapler in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment.

In FIG. 348 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator and a circular surgical stapler shown in FIG. 347.

In FIG. 349 is an end view of a tissue thickness compensator configured to be used with a circular surgical stapler.

In FIG. 350 is an end view of the tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 349, in a partially disassembled configuration.

In FIG. 351 is a perspective view of a surgical stapler comprising a brace unit in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 352 is an end view of a surgical stapler shown in FIG. 351 located relative to the fabric.

In FIG. 353 is an end view of the surgical stapler shown in FIG. 351, further comprising a tissue thickness compensator located between the bracket unit and the fabric.

In FIG. 354 is a partial perspective view of brackets brought into tissue from the surgical stapler shown in FIG. 351, without compensator for tissue thickness.

In FIG. 355 is a partial perspective view of the brackets brought into tissue from the surgical stapler shown in FIG. 351, with compensator for tissue thickness.

In FIG. 356 is a partial cross-sectional view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler shown in FIG. 351 comprising a thrust plate in a first position.

In FIG. 357 is a partial cross-sectional view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler shown in FIG. 351 illustrating the thrust plate shown in FIG. 356, in the second position.

In FIG. 358 is a cross-sectional view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising a brace unit including an element for forming a gap.

In FIG. 359 is a perspective view illustrating a starting element dissecting an element for forming a gap shown in FIG. 358, at the end of the start cycle of the starting element.

In FIG. 360 is a cross-sectional view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising a brace unit including a flexible nose.

In FIG. 361 is a cross-sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 360 illustrating the bow in a bent configuration.

In FIG. 362 is a cross-sectional view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising a brace unit including a sliding portion.

In FIG. 363 is a cross-sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 362 illustrating a sliding portion in distal sliding.

In FIG. 364 is a cross-sectional view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising a support portion comprising an inclined surface of a panel and a tissue thickness compensator having a different thickness.

In FIG. 365 is a cross-sectional view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising a support portion comprising an inclined surface of a panel and a tissue thickness compensator having a uniform thickness.

In FIG. 366 is a perspective view of a bracket unit containing a tissue thickness compensator having a different thickness.

In FIG. 367 is an end view of the bracket unit shown in FIG. 366.

In FIG. 368 is a perspective view in cross section of a tissue thickness compensator comprising longitudinal layers.

In FIG. 369 is a perspective sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator comprising multiple layers in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment.

In FIG. 370 is a perspective view of a disposable loading device comprising holding elements configured to detachably hold a tissue thickness compensator.

In FIG. 371 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator including retaining elements configured to detachably hold a tissue thickness compensator on a disposable loading device.

In FIG. 372 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 371 attached to a disposable boot device.

In FIG. 373 is an end view of a disposable loading device shown in FIG. 372.

In FIG. 374 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator including retaining elements configured to detachably hold a tissue thickness compensator on a disposable loading device.

In FIG. 375 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 374 attached to a disposable boot device.

In FIG. 376 is an end view of a disposable loading device shown in FIG. 375.

In FIG. 377 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator including a holding member configured to detachably hold a tissue thickness compensator on a disposable loading device.

In FIG. 378 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 377 attached to a disposable boot device.

In FIG. 379 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator applicator located inside a clip of a disposable loading device.

In FIG. 380 is a perspective view from above of a tissue thickness compensator applicator shown in FIG. 379.

In FIG. 381 is a perspective view from below of the tissue thickness compensator applicator shown in FIG. 379.

In FIG. 382 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator applicator disposed within a clamp of a disposable loading device in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment.

In FIG. 383 is a top perspective view of the tissue thickness compensator applicator shown in FIG. 382.

In FIG. 384 is a perspective view from below of the tissue thickness compensator applicator shown in FIG. 382.

In FIG. 385 is a perspective view of a disposable loading device including a jaw configured to rotate and support a brace unit.

In FIG. 386 is a cross-sectional view of a bracket unit containing a tissue thickness compensator attached to a support portion of the bracket assembly in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 387 is a cross-sectional view of a bracket unit containing a tissue thickness compensator attached to a support portion of the bracket assembly in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 388 is a cross-sectional view of a bracket unit comprising a tissue thickness compensator attached to a support portion of the bracket assembly in accordance with at least one embodiment, and

In FIG. 389 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 387.

To indicate similar elements in different images, similar numeric notations are used. The illustrations attached to this document are intended solely to demonstrate certain embodiments of the present invention and do not limit the scope of the present invention.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

The applicant of this application also owns the following US patent applications, filed September 30, 2010 and fully incorporated herein by reference:

US Patent Application No. 12 / 894,360, entitled “Surgical Stapler with a Variable Bracket Formation System”;

US Patent Application No. 12 / 894,322, entitled “Surgical Stapler with Interchangeable Brace Unit Designs”;

US patent application No. 12 / 894,351 entitled "Surgical dissecting and stapling apparatus with the placement of different and separate stapling elements and tissue dissection systems";

US Patent Application No. 12 / 894,339, entitled “Surgical Stapler with Compact Articulated Control”;

US Patent Application No. 12 / 894,327 entitled “Surgical Closure Closure Designs”;

US Patent Application No. 12 / 894,311, entitled "Surgical Appliances Containing Reconfigurable Shaft Segments";

US patent application No. 12 / 894,340 entitled "Surgical brace blocks supporting non-linear brackets, and surgical staplers with common recesses to form brackets";

US patent application No. 12 / 894,350 entitled "Surgical brace blocks with detachable support structures and surgical staplers with systems to prevent starting movements in the absence of a brace block";

US patent application No. 12 / 894,338 entitled "Implantable block with stapling elements having a heterogeneous arrangement of elements";

US patent application No. 12 / 894,312 entitled "Implantable block with stapling elements containing multiple layers";

US Patent Application No. 12 / 894,377 entitled “Selectively Oriented Implantable Unit with Stapling Elements”;

US patent application No. 12 / 894,383 entitled "Implantable block with stapling elements containing bioabsorbable layers";

US Patent Application No. 12 / 894,389 entitled “Crumpled Block with Staple Elements”;

US patent application No. 12 / 894,345 entitled "Staple Elements Supported by a Supporting Element of a Block with Staple Elements";

US Patent Application No. 12 / 894,306 entitled “Crumpled Unit with Staple Elements”;

US Patent Application No. 12 / 894,318, entitled “A Crosslinking System Containing Many Related Elements of a Retention Matrix”;

US Patent Application No. 12 / 894,330 entitled “Crosslinking System Containing a Retention Matrix and an Alignment Matrix”;

US patent application No. 12 / 894,361 entitled "Crosslinking System Containing a Retention Matrix";

US patent application No. 12 / 894,367 entitled "Stapler for accommodating a staple system containing a retention matrix";

US patent application No. 12 / 894,388 entitled "Crosslinking System Containing a Retention Matrix and a Coating";

US Patent Application No. 12 / 894,376, entitled “Crosslinking System Containing Multiple Blocks with Crosslinking Elements”; and

US patent application No. 12 / 894,369 entitled "Implantable block with stapling elements containing a support holder."

The author of this application also owns the following US patent applications, filed on the same day as this application, and fully incorporated into this application by reference:

US Patent Application No. ______, entitled “Crumpled Bracket Assembly”, Patent Attorney File No. END6848USCIP1 / 100533CIP1;

US Patent Application No. ______, entitled “Tissue Thickness Compensator Containing Parts with Different Properties,” Patent Attorney Dossier No. END6849USCIP1 / 100534CIP1;

US Patent Application No. ______ entitled “Brace Unit Containing an Adjustable Distal Part”, Patent Attorney Dossier No. END6847USCIP1 / 100532CIP1;

US Patent Application No. ______ entitled “Tissue Thickness Compensator for a Surgical Stapler,” Patent Attorney Dossier No. END6736USCIP1 / 100060CIP1;

US Patent Application No. ______, entitled “An emphasis for a surgical stapler containing a plurality of forming recesses,” Patent Attorney Dossier No. END6735USCIP1 / 100059CIP1;

US Patent Application No. ______, entitled “Bracket Unit Loading Unit”, Patent Attorney File No. END6855USCIP1 / 100540CIP1;

US Patent Application No. ______, entitled “Brace Unit Containing a Crumpled Part of Variable Thickness”, Patent Attorney File No. END6840USCIP1 / 100525CIP1;

US Patent Application No. ______, entitled “Fabric Thickness Compensator Containing Detachable Parts,” Patent Attorney Dossier No. END6842USCIP1 / 100527CIP1;

US Patent Application No. ______, entitled “Tissue Thickness Compensator for a Surgical Stapler, Containing an Adjustable Stop”, Patent Attorney File No. END6843USCIP1 / 100528CIP1;

US Patent Application No. ______, entitled “Crumpled Bracket Block Containing Leveling Elements”, Patent Attorney File No. END6856USCIP1 / 100541CIP1;

US Patent Application No. ______, entitled “Bracket Block Containing Releaseable Part”, Patent Attorney File No. END6857USCIP1 / 100542CIP1;

US Patent Application No. ______, entitled “Brace Block Containing Fabric Thickness Compensator,” Patent Attorney Dossier No. END6859USCIP1 / 100544CIP1;

US patent application No. ______, entitled “Bracket containing brackets located inside its crumpled part”, file of patent attorney No. END6841USCIP1 / 100526CIP1.

For a general understanding of the design, principles of operation, production and use of the devices and methods described herein, the following is a description of individual embodiments of the present invention. One or more examples of such embodiments are presented in the accompanying drawings. Those skilled in the art will understand that the devices and methods described in detail herein and shown in the accompanying drawings are non-limiting examples of implementation, and the scope of various embodiments of the present invention is determined solely by the claims. The features illustrated or described in relation to one embodiment may be combined with the features of other embodiments. The scope of the present invention is intended to cover all such modifications and changes.

Throughout this document, reference is made to “various embodiments”, “certain embodiments”, “one embodiment”, “one embodiment”, and the like. means that a particular design feature, structural member, or characteristic described in connection with this embodiment is included in at least one embodiment of the present invention. Thus, the phrases “in various embodiments,” “in some embodiments,” “in one embodiment,” “in one embodiment,” and the like, as used herein, do not necessarily refer to the same same embodiment. In addition, specific design features, structures, or characteristics may be combined in any suitable manner in one or more embodiments. Thus, specific design features, structures, or characteristics shown or described in connection with one embodiment may, without limitation, be combined, in whole or in part, with the design features, structures, or characteristics of one or more other embodiments. The scope of the present invention is intended to cover all such modifications and changes.

The terms "proximal" and "distal" in this document are defined with respect to the physician managing the handle of the surgical device. The term "proximal" refers to the part closer to the doctor, and the term "distal" refers to the part removed from the doctor. It is also proposed for convenience and clarity in relation to the drawings to use in this document such spatial terms as “vertical”, “horizontal”, “top” and “bottom”. However, surgical devices can be used in many orientations and positions, therefore, these terms are not absolute and / or do not limit the present invention.

Various examples of devices and methods for performing laparoscopic and minimally invasive surgical procedures are provided herein. However, it will be understood by those skilled in the art that the various methods and devices described herein can be used to perform a variety of surgical procedures, as well as in many fields of application, including, for example, those associated with open surgical procedures. In the course of this detailed description, specialists with sufficient experience in this field will be able to further appreciate that the various devices described in this document can be inserted into the body in any way - either through natural openings, or through an incision or a puncture opening, done in tissues, etc. The working bodies or distal working nozzles of such devices can be inserted directly into the patient’s body or through an access device having a working channel through which the distal working nozzle and the elongated trunk of the surgical device can be passed.

In the drawings, similar numerical designations are used to indicate similar elements in different images. In FIG. 1 shows a surgical apparatus 10 in which a number of unique advantages are realized. The surgical stapler 10 is configured to manipulate and / or actuate end clamps 12 of various shapes and sizes that are functionally attached to it. For example, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 1-1E, the end clamp 12 includes an elongated groove 14 forming the lower jaw 13 of the end clamp 12. The elongated groove 14 is configured to support the implantable brace unit 30, and also to support the stop 20, which acts as the upper jaw 15 of the worker apparatus 12.

In various embodiments, the elongated trough 14 can be made, for example, of stainless steel 300 & 400, 17-4 & 17-7, titanium, etc., and also be formed by side walls located at some distance from each other friend 16. The thrust plate 20 can be made, for example, of stainless steel 300 & 400, 17-4 & 17-7, titanium, etc. and have an inner surface for forming brackets, which is usually indicated by the number 22 and in turn has many brackets forming the brackets of the recesses 23. See FIG. 1B-1E. In addition, the stop 20 has a node 24 forked inclined surface, protruding from it proximally. A stop pin 26 protrudes from each side of the inclined surface assembly 24 to insert into the corresponding groove or hole 18 in the side walls 16 of the elongated groove 14 to facilitate its fastening on the groove with the possibility of movement or articulation.

With various embodiments of the surgical apparatus described herein, various forms of implantable brace blocks can be used. The specific configurations and designs of the bracket blocks are described in detail below. However, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 1A, an implantable brace unit 30 is shown. In at least one embodiment, the brace unit 30 has a body portion 31 that consists of a crushable hemostatic material, such as, for example, oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC) or bioabsorbable foam, in which are located a series of unformed metal brackets 32. In at least some embodiments, in order to prevent exposure to the brackets and activation of the hemostatic material during insertion When the unit is installed and placed, the entire unit can be completely coated or wrapped in a film 38 of bioabsorbable material, such as a polydioxanone film sold under the brand PDS®, or a polyglycerol sebacinate (PGS) film or other absorbable film made from PGA (polyglycolic acid available on the market under the Vicryl brand name), PCL (polycaprolactone), PLA or PLLA (polylactic acid), PHA (polyhydroxyalkanoate), PGCL (polyglycaprone 25, commercially available under the Monocryl brand name), or a mixture of PGA, PCL , PLA, PDS, Nepron -permeable film to rupture. The housing 31 of the bracket unit 30 is dimensioned to support it in an elongated groove 14 with the possibility of extraction, as shown in the drawings, so that each bracket 32 located in it is aligned with the corresponding recesses 23 to form the brackets in the stop when the stop 20 is brought into the forming contact with bracket unit 30.

When used after placing the end clamp 12 near the target fabric, the end clamp 12 is manipulated to grip or clamp the target fabric between the upper side 36 of the bracket unit 30 and the surface 22 to form the brackets of the stop 20. The brackets 32 are formed by moving the stop 20 along a path that is essentially parallel to the elongated groove 14, to bring the surface 22 to form the brackets and, more specifically, the recesses on it to form the brackets 23 essentially in contact with the upper side 36 of the brackets full-time unit 30. As the stop 20 continues to move to the bracket unit 30, the legs 34 of the brackets 32 come into contact with the corresponding recesses 23 to form the brackets on the stop 20, which serves to bend the legs 34 of the bracket to give the brace 32 a V-shape. Further movement of the stop 20 along the elongated groove 14 leads to further compression and molding of the brackets 32 until the final desired formed height “FF” is obtained.

The above process of forming the brackets is essentially depicted in FIG. 1B-1E. For example, in FIG. 1B shows an end clip 12 with a target tissue T between the abutment 20 and the upper side 36 of the implantable brace unit 30. FIG. 1C shows the initial compression position of the stop 20, in which the stop 20 is closed on the target fabric “T” to clamp the target fabric “T” between the stop 20 and the upper side 36 of the bracket unit 30. FIG. 1D, the first step of forming the bracket is shown, in which the stop 20 began to compress the bracket block 30 so that the formation of legs 34 of the brackets 32 with recesses 23 begins to form the brackets of the stop 20. In FIG. 1E, a bracket 32 is shown in a final formed state passing through the target fabric T, with the stop 20 removed for clarity. After forming the brackets 32 and connecting them to the target tissue “T”, the surgeon moves the emphasis 20 to the open position to allow the block body 31 and the brackets 32 to remain in the target tissue when the terminal clip 12 is removed from the patient’s body. The end clamp 12 forms all the brackets simultaneously as two branches 13 and 15 are pressed together. The remaining materials of the “crumpled” case 31 simultaneously serve as a hemostatic agent (ORC) and to strengthen a number of brackets (PGA, PDS or a film of any other composition from the above 38 ) In addition, since the brackets 32 do not need to exit the block body 31 during formation, the likelihood of incorrect formation of the brackets 32 during formation is minimized. As used herein, the term “implantable” means that in addition to the brackets, the materials of the block body that hold the brackets also remain in the patient’s body and, ultimately, can be absorbed by the patient. Such implantable brace blocks differ from previous block designs, which remain entirely in the end clamp after being actuated.

In various embodiments, the working apparatus 12 is configured to connect to an elongated barrel assembly 40 that protrudes from the handle assembly 100. The working apparatus 12 (in the closed state) and the elongated barrel assembly 40 may have similar cross-sectional shapes and sizes that allow functional passage through the tube trocar or working channel of an access device of another form. As used herein, the term “pass through functionally” means that the working apparatus and at least a portion of the elongated stem assembly can be inserted through a channel or opening of the tube and can be manipulated within them in a manner that is necessary to conduct a surgical procedure for stitching tissue. In some embodiments, when the jaws 13 and 15 of the working apparatus 12 are in a closed position, they can give the working apparatus an approximately circular cross-sectional shape, which facilitates its passage through a round hole or channel. However, the working apparatuses of various embodiments of the present invention, as well as embodiments of an elongated barrel assembly, may have other cross-sectional shapes that can be differently drawn through access channels and openings having a non-circular cross-sectional shape. Thus, the total cross-sectional size of the working apparatus in the closed position is related to the size of the channel or hole through which it is intended to be introduced. Thus, for example, the work apparatus can be designated as the work apparatus “5 mm in size”, which means that it can be functionally carried out through an opening that has a diameter of at least about 5 mm.

In various embodiments, the implementation of the node of the elongated rod 40 may have essentially the same outer diameter as the outer diameter of the end clamp 12 in the closed position. For example, a 5 mm working apparatus can be connected to an elongated barrel assembly 40 with a cross-sectional diameter of 5 mm. However, as the description of the detailed description below sets forth, it will become clear that various embodiments of the present invention can be effectively used in connection with different sized work apparatuses. For example, a 10 mm working device can be attached to an elongated barrel with a cross-sectional diameter of 5 mm. Conversely, for applications in which there is a channel or access hole of 10 mm or more in size, the elongated barrel assembly 40 may have a cross-sectional diameter of 10 mm (or more), but may also drive an end clip of 5 mm or 10 mm in size. Accordingly, the outer barrel 40 may have an outer diameter equal to or different from the outer diameter of the working apparatus 12 mounted thereon in the closed position.

According to the description, the elongated stem 40 protrudes in the distal direction from the handle module 100, forming an almost straight line along the longitudinal axis AA. In various embodiments, for example, the elongated stem 40 may have a length of about 229-406 mm (9-16 inches). However, the elongated stem 40 may also be available in a different length and, in other embodiments, may be hinged or have any other configuration that facilitates changing the position of the distal working nozzle 12 relative to other parts of the stem or handle module, as will be discussed in detail below. In various embodiments, the implementation of the elongated shaft assembly 40 includes an axle member 50, which extends from the handle assembly 100 to the working device 12. The proximal end of the elongated groove 14 of the end clamp 12 has a pair of locking supports protruding therefrom 17 configured to receive respective support holes , or cavities, 52 located at the distal end of the trunnion element 50, which allows connection with the possibility of removing the end clamp 12 to the node of the elongated shaft 40. The trunnion element 50 can be made n, for example, aluminum alloy 6061 or 7075, stainless steel, titanium, etc.

In various embodiments, the handle assembly 100 comprises a pistol-type housing that, for ease of assembly, may be made of two or more parts. For example, the handle assembly 100 shown in the figures comprises a right housing element 102 and a left housing element (not shown) cast or otherwise made of a polymer or plastic material and configured to be mated. Such housing elements can be connected to each other by means of snap elements, pins and recesses obtained by molding or by other methods, and / or by means of adhesive compositions, screws, etc. The trunnion element 50 has a proximal end 54, which has a flange formed on it. The flange 56 is rotatably mounted in a groove 106 formed by mating ribs 108 that protrude inwardly with each of the elements of the housing 102 and 104. This design facilitates the fastening of the trunnion element 50 on the handle assembly 100, allowing the trunnion member 50 to rotate 360 ° about the handle assembly 100 around the longitudinal axis AA.

As further presented in FIG. 1, an axle member 50 extends through a mounting sleeve 60 that is rotatably mounted on and supported by a handle assembly 100. The mounting sleeve 60 has a proximal flange 62 and a distal flange 64, which form a groove for rotation 65, configured to receive the nose 101 of the handle assembly 100 for rotation. This design allows the mounting sleeve 60 to rotate around the longitudinal axis AA relative to the handle assembly 100. The trunnion element 50 is fixedly mounted to the mounting sleeve 60 with a pin 66. In addition, a rotary handle 70 is also mounted on the mounting sleeve 60. For example, in one embodiment the rotary handle 70 has a hollow portion of the mounting flange 72, the size of which allows the portion of the mounting sleeve 60 to be received. In various embodiments, the rotary handle 70 may be made, for example, of nylon, polycarbonate, Ultem® material, etc., reinforced with fiberglass or carbon fiber, and is also fixed to the mounting sleeve 60 with a pin pin 66. In addition, a retaining flange 74 protruding inwardly formed on the part of the mounting flange 72 is configured to extend into the radial groove 68 formed on the mounting sleeve 60. Thus, the surgeon can rotate the trunnion element 50 (and the working apparatus 12 mounted on it) around the longitudinal axis AA by 360 ° by gripping the rotary handle 70 and rotating it relative to the node p lodging 100.

In various embodiments, the stop 20 is held open by the spring of the stop 21 and / or other biasing structure. The stop 20 is arranged to selectively move from an open position to various closed or locking and starting positions by a trigger system, essentially referred to as element 109. The trigger system 109 includes a “trigger element” 110, which in various embodiments is a hollow trigger tube 110. The hollow launch tube 110 is capable of axial movement along the axle member 50 and thus forms the outer part of the elongated barrel assembly 40. The launch tube 110 may be b is made of polymer or other suitable material and may have a proximal end attached to the trigger beam 114 of the trigger system 109. For example, in various embodiments, the trigger beam 114 can be fabricated using multi-component molding at the proximal end of the trigger tube 110. However, other designs of the fastener.

As represented in FIG. 1, the launch yoke 114 can be rotatably supported in a support sleeve 120 configured to axially move in the handle assembly 100. In various embodiments, the support sleeve 120 has a pair of transversely extending ribs, the size of which allows them to slide into the grooves under the ribs, formed on the right and left elements of the body. Thus, the retaining collar 120 can slide axially inside the handle housing 100, at the same time as the trigger clip 114 and the trigger tube 110 rotate relative to each other around the longitudinal axis A-A. In various embodiments, the launch tube 110 has a longitudinal slot that allows the protruding pin 66 to extend along the shaft 50, which facilitates the axial movement of the tubular launch guide 110 along the spigot member 50.

The starter system 109 further comprises a trigger 130, which controls the axial movement of the starter tube 110 along the spigot element 50. See FIG. 1. Such an axial movement of the working tube 110 in the distal direction in working interaction with the thrust plate 20 in this document is called the working movement or actuation. As seen in FIG. 1, the trigger trigger 130 is movably or pivotally connected to the handle module 100 with the help of an axial pin 132. To tilt the trigger 130 in the direction from the pistol-like handle part of the handle 100 of the handle 100 to the inoperative “open”, or initial, position, a torsion spring 135 is used As presented in FIG. 1, the trigger 130 has an upper portion 134 that is movably connected (via pins) to the trigger rods 136, which are movably connected (via pins) to the support sleeve 120. Thus, the movement of the starter 130 from its initial position (FIG. 1) in the direction of the end position next to the pistol grip part 107 of the handle assembly 100, causes the trigger clamp 114 and the trigger tube 110 to move “DD” in the distal direction. The movement of the trigger 130 from the pistol grip part 107 of the handle assembly 100 (due to the bias of the torsion spring 135) causes the trigger clamp 114 and the trigger tube 110 to move in the proximal direction “PD” on the axle member 50.

Various embodiments of the present invention may be used with implantable brace blocks of various sizes and configurations. For example, the surgical apparatus 10, when used in combination with the first trigger adapter 140, can be used with an end clamp 12 of size 5 mm and a length of approximately 20 mm (or another length) that supports the implantable bracket unit 30. This size of the working apparatus may be particularly suitable, for example, to perform relatively small incisions and surgical intervention on the vessels. However, as described in more detail below, the surgical device 10 can also be used, for example, in combination with end clamps and brace blocks of other sizes when replacing the first trigger adapter 140 with a second trigger adapter. In other embodiments, the implementation of the node of the elongated barrel 40 may be configured to attach to the working device of only one shape or size.

The method of removable connection of the working device 12 with the pin element 50 will be described below. The connection process begins by inserting the holding supports 17 on the elongated groove 14 into the receiving cavities 52 in the pin element 50. The surgeon then moves the trigger 130 to the pistol grip 107 of the handle assembly 100 to advance the trigger tube 110 and the first trigger adapter 140 distally along the proximal end portion 47 of the elongated groove 14 so as to fix the supports 17 in the respective cavities 52. This is the position of the first trigger hell The pter 140 on top of the pins 17 is called a “connected position”. Various embodiments of the present invention may also have a locking assembly for locking the trigger 130 in a certain position after the end clamp 12 is attached to the trunnion member 50.

More specifically, one embodiment of the end clamp blocking assembly 160 includes a holding pin 162 supported to move in the upper portion 134 of the trigger 130. As described above, the trigger tube 110 must first be distally advanced to a connected position in which the first trigger adapter 140 holds the retaining supports 17 of the end clamp 12 in the receiving cavities 52 in the trunnion member 50. The surgeon pushes the trigger adapter 140 distally to the connected position by pulling the trigger hook and 130 from the initial position in the direction of the pistol grip 107. After the initial actuation of the trigger 130, the holding pin 162 moves distally until the trigger tube 110 pushes the first trigger adapter 140 into a connected position in which the holding pin 162 is shifted to a locking cavity 164 formed in the housing element. In various embodiments, when the locking pin 162 enters the locking cavity 164, the pin 162 may emit a distinctive “click” or other sound, as well as provide the surgeon with a tactile signal that the working device 12 is locked on the trunnion element 50. In addition, the surgeon cannot accidentally continue actuating the trigger 130 to start forming the brackets 32 in the end clamp 12 without intentionally displacing the locking pin 162 from the locking cavity 164. Similarly, if the surgeon releases the trigger 130 in the joint the two- position, it is held in such a position fixing pin 162, not allowing the trigger 130 to return to its original state, thereby disconnecting the working device 12 from the stud member 50.

Various embodiments of the present invention may further include a lock button for the launch system 137, which is pivotally mounted on the handle assembly 100. In one form, the lock button for the launch system 137 has a latch 138 formed at the distal end and oriented to engage the launch beam 114, when the trigger release button is in the first lock position. As represented in FIG. 1, a locking spring 139 is used to shift the lock button of the trigger system 137 to a first locking position. In various situations, the latch 138 is used to engage the launch yoke 114 at a point at which the position of the launch yoke 114 on the trunnion element 50 corresponds to the point at which the first launch adapter 140 is ready to start moving distally upward along the inclined surface of the latch 28 on the abutment 20. It should be understood that when the first start adapter 140 moves axially upward along the inclined surface of the fixation 28, the stop 20 moves along such a path that its part of the surface for forming the brackets 22 remains essentially parallel Yelnia upper side 36 of the clevis block 30.

After connecting the working device 12 with the element of the trunnion 50, the process of forming brackets begins, the first stage of which is pressing the lock button of the trigger system 137 to ensure further movement of the launch beam 114 distally along the element of the trunnion 50 and ultimately pushing the stop 20 into the bracket block 30. After pressing the lock button of the trigger system 137, the surgeon continues to actuate the trigger hook 130 in the direction of the pistol grip 107, thereby feeding the first bracket cuff 140 up the corresponding inclined surface for forming the brackets 29 for bringing the stop 20 into forming contact with the brackets 32 in the bracket unit 30. The lock button of the trigger system 137 protects against inadvertent formation of the brackets 32 until the surgeon is ready to begin this process. In this embodiment, the surgeon must press the lock button of the trigger system 137 to be able to further trigger the trigger 130 to start the brace formation process.

If desired, the surgical device 10 can be used exclusively as a device for stitching tissue. However, various embodiments of the present invention may also include a tissue dissection system substantially designated as element 170. In at least one form, the tissue dissection system 170 includes a cutting element 172 that can be selectively pulled out of position near the proximal end of the end the clamp 12 in the working position by actuating the trigger mechanism of the cutting element 200. The cutting element 172 is supported with the possibility of movement in the element of the journal 50 and is fixed on the rod 180 of the cutting element, or otherwise protruding from it. The cutting element 172 can be made, for example, of stainless steel grade 420 or 440 with a hardness of more than 38 HRC (Rockwell hardness, scale C) and can have an edge for cutting tissue 176 formed at its distal end 174, and can also be made with the possibility of sliding passage through the groove in the abutment 20 and the centrally located groove 33 in the bracket block 30 for dissecting the tissue clamped in the end clamp 12. In various embodiments, the rod 180 of the cutting element passes through the element of the journal 50 and has a proximal end h st, capable of transmitting force to the gear cutting element actuator operatively connected to the trigger extension 200 of the cutting element. In various embodiments, the cutter trigger 200 is attached to the pivot pin 132 so that it can rotate or otherwise be actuated without pressing the trigger 130. In various embodiments, the first gear pin 192 is also attached to the pivot pin 132, so that the actuation of the trigger mechanism 200 of the cutting element also leads to rotation of the first gear 192 of the cutting element. Between the first gear 192 of the cutting element and the housing of the handle 100 is fixed return spring trigger 202, biasing the trigger mechanism 200 of the cutting element to its original, or inoperative, position.

Various embodiments of the gear drive of the cutting member drive also include a second cutting gear drive gear 194, which is rotatably supported on the spindle of the second gear and engaged with the first cutting gear drive gear 192. The second cutting gear drive gear 194 is engaged with the third cutting gear drive gear 196, which is supported on the spindle of the third gear. Also on the spindle of the third gear 195 is the fourth gear 198 of the cutting element. The fourth gear drive gear 198 of the cutting element is adapted to engage with the transmission of the driving force to a series of ring teeth or gear rings at the proximal end of the rod 180 of the cutting element. Thus, this design allows the fourth cutting gear 198 to axially push the cutting bar 180 in the distal direction DD or the proximal direction PD, allowing the trigger bar 180 to rotate around the longitudinal axis AA relative to the fourth gear of the cutting bar 198. Accordingly, the surgeon can axially advance the trigger bar 180 and ultimately the cutting element 172 distally by pulling the trigger 200 to extend the cutting element in the direction of the handle 107 pistol a handle assembly 100 type.

Various embodiments of the present invention further include a cutting element locking system 210 that prevents the cutting element 172 from advancing until the trigger 130 is fully engaged. Thus, this design feature prevents the advancement system 170 of the cutting element from triggering until the brackets are first brought to the working position or formed in the fabric. As shown in FIG. 1, various embodiments of a cutting element lock system 210 comprise a cutting element lock 211 that is pivotally mounted in a portion of the handle 107 of the pistol type of the handle assembly 100. The cutting element lock 211 has a driving end 212 that is engageable with a trigger 130 when the trigger 130 is in the fully operational position. In addition, at the other end, the cutter lock 211 has a holding hook 214 adapted to engage with the lock pin 216 on the first gear 192 of the cutting element. The cutting spring lock 218 is designed to bias the cutting element lock 211 into a locked position in which the holding hook 214 is engaged with the locking bar 216 and prevents the cutting element trigger 200 from being actuated until the trigger 130 is turned into fully working position.

After applying (forming) brackets in the target tissue, the surgeon can press the release button of the trigger 167 to allow the trigger 130 to return to its original position under the biasing action of the torsion spring 135, which allows the stop 20 to move to the open position under the action of the spring 21. When the device is in the open position, the surgeon can remove the working device 12 from the patient’s body, leaving the implantable bracket unit 30 and brackets 32 in it. In those applications in which the working device is inserted into the patient’s body through the hole, the working channel, etc., the surgeon puts the emphasis 20 back into the closed position by pressing the trigger 130 to allow the working device 12 to be brought out through the hole or working channel. However, if the surgeon wants to dissect the target tissue after braces are applied, he actuates the trigger 200 of the cutting element in the manner described above to push the holder 172 of the cutting element through the target tissue to the end of the end clamp. Then the surgeon can release the trigger mechanism 200 of the cutting element, which will allow the trigger return spring 202 to return the holder 172 of the cutting element to its original (inoperative) position through the trigger gear. After the cutting element holder 172 has returned to its original position, the surgeon can open the jaws 13 and 15 of the end clamp to release the implantable block 30 in the patient’s body and then remove the end clamp 12 from the patient. Thus, such surgical devices facilitate the use of small implantable brace blocks that can be inserted through the working channels and openings of a relatively small size, while allowing the surgeon to lay brackets without cutting the tissue or, if necessary, also to cut the tissue after braces.

In various unique and innovative embodiments of the present invention, a collapsible bracket unit is used that supports the brackets in a substantially stationary position to form contact with a stop. In various embodiments, the emphasis is pushed into undeformed brackets, where in at least one such embodiment, the degree of formation of the brackets achieved depends on how far the emphasis has been extended into the brackets. This design allows the surgeon to adjust the forming or starting force applied to the brackets and thereby change the final height of the brackets in the formed state. In various other embodiments of the present invention, staple ejector elements that can raise the brackets against the abutment can be used in surgical stitching structures. Such embodiments are described in more detail below.

Taking into account the embodiments described in detail above, in various embodiments, the magnitude of the trigger movement applied to the stop is movable, depending on the degree of actuation of the trigger. For example, if the surgeon wants to get only partially formed brackets, then the trigger is only partially fed inward in the direction of the pistol grip 107. To achieve the formation of brackets to a greater extent, the surgeon simply additionally presses the trigger, which leads to a stronger advancement of the stop in forming contact with the brackets. As used herein, the term “forming contact” means that the surface for forming the brackets or recess for forming the bracket comes into contact with the ends of the legs of the brackets and begins to form or bend the legs to bring them into the formed position. The term "degree of formation of brackets" means the extent to which the legs of the brackets are bent, and ultimately refers to the height of the formation of the brackets, as described above. It will also be clear to those skilled in the art that, since the stop 20 moves substantially parallel to the bracket unit when starting movements are applied to it, the brackets are formed substantially simultaneously with obtaining substantially the same height in the formed state.

In FIG. 2 and 3, an alternative 12 ”end clamp is shown, similar to the 12’ end clamp described above, with the exception of the following differences, which make it possible to use the cutting element 172 ’. The cutting element 172 'is connected to or protrudes from the cutting element shaft 180 and otherwise functions in the manner described above with respect to the cutting element 172. However, in this embodiment, the cutting element 172' has a length sufficient to pass the entire pancake of the end clip 12 ”, and therefore, in the 12” end clip, there is no separate distal cutting element. The cutting element 172 ’has an upper transverse segment 173’ and a lower transverse segment 175 ’formed thereon. The upper transverse element 173 ’is oriented so as to slide freely in the corresponding elongated groove 250 in the retaining plate 20”, and the lower transverse element 175 ’is oriented so as to slide in the elongated groove 252 of the elongated groove 14” of the distal end clamp 12 ″. The stop plate 20 ”also has a disengagement groove (not shown), which is designed so that when the cutting element 172 'extends to its final position with a thin end clamp, the upper transverse element 173' slides out of the corresponding groove, allowing the stop plate 20 to move ”To the open position for disengagement with stapled brackets and dissected tissue. Otherwise, the stop 20 ”may be identical to the stop 20 described above, and the elongated groove 14” may otherwise be identical to the elongated groove 14 described above.

In this embodiment, the stop 20 ”is moved to the fully open position (FIG. 2) by the action of a spring or other opening mechanism (not shown). The stop 20 ”is moved between the open position and the fully locked position by axially moving the trigger adapter 150 in the manner described above. After the working adapter 150 extends to the full compression position (FIG. 3), the surgeon can extend the cutting element 172 ”distally, as described above. If the surgeon needs to use the end clamp as a gripping device for working with tissue, he can move the trigger adapter proximally to ensure that the stop 20 ”moves away from the elongated groove 14”, as shown by the dotted line in FIG. 4. In this embodiment, as the cutting element 172 ″ moves distally, the upper transverse element 173 ′ and the lower transverse element 175 ′ bring together the stop plate 20 ″ and the elongated groove 14 ″, providing the desired degree of formation of the brackets as as the cutting element 172 "extends distally through the end clamp 12". See FIG. 5. Thus, in this embodiment, the formation of the brackets is carried out simultaneously with the dissection of the fabric, but the brackets themselves can be formed sequentially as the cutting element 172 ”moves distally.

Unique and new features of various surgical brace blocks and surgical apparatuses of the present invention allow brackets to be placed in these blocks in the form of one or more linear or non-linear rows. Many of these rows of brackets can be made on each side of the elongated groove, which runs in the center of the bracket unit for receiving the cutting element into it. In one embodiment, for example, the brackets in the same row can be substantially parallel to the brackets in the adjacent row (s) of the brackets, but with an offset relative to them. In other embodiments, one or more rows of brackets may be non-linear. This means that the base of at least one bracket in a row of brackets can extend along an axis that essentially intersects the bases of other brackets located in the same row of brackets. For example, as described in more detail below, in alternative embodiments, the rows of brackets on each side of the elongated groove may have a zigzag shape. Such a non-linear arrangement of brackets can lead to better stapling results when using fewer brackets compared to the various linear arrangements of brackets used in prior art bracket blocks.

In FIG. 6 illustrates the use of an embodiment of a surgical brace unit 900 in an embodiment of an end clamp 612 ’. As represented in FIG. 6 and 7, an embodiment of the surgical brace unit 900 has a block body 902 that has a centrally located elongated groove 904 extending through the proximal end 903 to an area adjacent to the distal end 905. The elongated groove 904 is configured to provide axial movement of the cutting element through it. during surgical dissection of tissue as described above. In at least one embodiment, the case of block 902 consists of a crushable hemostatic material, such as, for example, oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC), or a bioabsorbable foam made of, for example, PGA (polyglycolic acid, commercially available under the trademark Vicryl ), PCL (polycaprolactone), PLA or PLLA (polylactic acid), PDS (polydioxanone), PHA (polyhydroxyalkanoate), PGCL (polyglecaprone 25, commercially available under the brand name Monocryl) or from a mixture of PGA, PCL, PLA and PDS, where supported by rows 920, 930 unformed staples 922. However, the block body 902 may be made of other materials which provide the maintenance of unformed staples 922 in position so that they can be compressed under the influence of abutment 910 'in contact with it. As in the various other embodiments described above, the brace unit 900 is implantable and remains attached to the stitched tissue after the stapling procedure is completed. In at least some embodiments, in order to prevent exposure to the brackets 922 and activation of the hemostatic material during insertion and placement of the block, the entire block 900 can be coated or wrapped in a biodegradable film 906, such as a polydioxanone film available in sold under the brand name PDS®, or polyglycerin sebacinate (PGS) film, or other biodegradable films made, for example, of PGA (polyglycolic acid, commercially available under the trademark Vicryl), P CL (polycaprolactone), PLA or PLLA (polylactic acid), PHA (polyhydroxyalkanoate), PGCL (polyglecaprone 25, commercially available under the Monocryl trademark), or a mixture of PGA, PCL, PLA, PDS, impervious until the film is torn. The housing 902 of the bracket block 900 has a size that allows it to be removably supported in the elongated groove of the end clamp 612 ’.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, 10 and 11, the surgical brace unit 900 functionally supports the first row 920 of brackets 922 on one side 90 of the elongated groove 904 and the second row 930 of brackets 922 on the other side 909 of the elongated groove 904. In various embodiments, the brackets 922 can be made of metal material, such as, for example, titanium, alloys of titanium (for example, titanium of class 6AI-4V, 3al-2.5V), stainless steel and the like, and they have a bracket base 924 and two brackets 926 protruding vertically from it. Each bracket leg 926 may have a tip formed therein for piercing the fabric 928. In the first row 920 of the bracket 922, the base 924 of at least one bracket 922 overlaps the base of the other bracket 922. In a preferred embodiment, the base 924 of each bracket 922 overlaps the base 924 of two adjacent brackets 922, with the exception of the base 924 of the bracket 922 at each end of the first row 920 of brackets. See FIG. 10. Thus, the first row of brackets 920 has a substantially non-linear shape. In particular, in a plan view, the first row 920 of brackets has a substantially zigzag appearance.

As represented in FIG. 9, the stop 90 has two successive longitudinal recesses 912 for forming brackets, each of which has a substantially zigzag shape corresponding to the shape of the first row 920 of brackets 922, so that when the stop 910 is brought into forming contact with the brackets 922, legs are formed 926, as presented in FIG. 11. Thus, the distal leg of one bracket falls into the same recess as the proximal leg of the bracket following it in the longitudinal direction. This design allows you to provide a more dense arrangement of the recesses, up to the position in which the brackets act on each other (for example, nested one into the other). In previous embodiments, the location of the recesses for the brackets, as a rule, was from 0.127 to 0.381 mm (0.005 to 0.015 inches) of metal / space from one set of recesses to another. However, in this embodiment of the present invention, the spatial arrangement provides from 0 to 0.508 mm (0 to 0.02 inches) of interaction / overlap sites (substantially -0.508 mm (-0.020 inches)), since, for example, one bracket mates with the following brace. These location options allow you to place 15-30% more brackets in the same space. Moreover, when the brackets engage each other, the need for a plurality of transverse rows of brackets is reduced. Previous layouts typically included three rows of brackets on each side of the tissue incision line to prevent the possibility of open areas that could leak blood. When using rows of interconnected brackets, the preservation of open areas that can let blood through is less likely. Another notable advantage when using different arrangements of interconnected brackets that are the subject of the present invention relates to an increase in “tensile strength”, which refers to the amount of force required to break the seam formed by a number of brackets.

Another arrangement of the recesses for forming the brackets may comprise a common recess for forming the brackets. As used herein, the term “common recess for forming brackets” means that one forming recess can arrange all brackets in the same row of brackets, in contrast to prior art emphasis designs that provide a separate forming recess for each leg of each bracket.

In FIG. 12 shows yet another embodiment of the bracket 922 ’, in which the base 924’ has an offset portion 929 to provide a closer overlap of the bases 924 ’. As indicated above, the bracket block 900 has a second row 930 of brackets 922 located on the second side 909 of the elongated groove 904. The second row 930 of brackets 922 is essentially identical to the first row 920 of brackets 922. Thus, the stop 910 has a second common recess for forming brackets 912, which corresponds to the second row of brackets 930 and is intended to form brackets in contact with them. However, in alternative embodiments, the second row 930 of brackets 922 may differ from the first row 920 of brackets in shape and possibly the number of brackets.

In FIG. 8 shows a surgical brace unit 900 ’, which is essentially identical to the brace unit 900 described above, with the exception of rows 920’, 930 ’of brackets 922 that are supported therein. For example, in this embodiment, the row 920 'of brackets 922 is positioned relative to the other so that the axis of the base SS of at least one base of the bracket 924 substantially intersects the axis SS of the base 924 of at least one other adjacent bracket 922. Such a predetermined arrangement of the brackets the top view has a substantially zigzag appearance. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 13, the respective bases 924 of the brackets 922 may additionally have a base support element 927 molded over the bracket as shown in the figure. In various embodiments, the implementation of the base support element 927 can be made, for example, of non-absorbable plastic, such as polyetheretherketone (PEEK), or absorbable plastic, such as, for example, polyglycolic acid (PGA), polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone ( PDS), PCL (polycaprolactone), PHA (polyhydroxyalkanoate), PGCL (polyglexaprone 25, commercially available under the trademark Monocryl) or various composite mixtures of PGS, PDS, PLA, PGA and PCL. Supporting elements 927 of the base provide engagement between the brackets without overlapping brackets. Thus, such arrangement patterns may contribute to the formation of the brackets. A B-shape or an inverted W shape without overlapping the legs of the brackets. However, the heads are connected by supporting elements of the base, thus, they act as overlapping brackets. Such layouts allow the use of combined recesses to obtain two separate paths for each leg.

The implementation option presented in FIG. 14, comprises a row 920 ”of brackets in which the legs 926 of adjacent brackets 922 are connected to each other by a connecting part 929 attached to them by molding molding or in another way. Each connecting part 929 can be made, for example, of non-absorbable plastic, such as polyetheretherketone (PEEK), or absorbable plastic, such as, for example, polyglycolic acid (PG), polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), PCL ( polycaprolactone), PHA (polyhydroxyalkanoate), PGCL (polyglecaprone 25, commercially available under the brand name Monocryl) or various composite mixtures of PGS, PDS, PLA, PGA and PCL. Such a series of brackets 920 ”in a plan view has a substantially zigzag appearance. Although various embodiments of the surgical brace unit 900, 900 'have been described in conjunction with the use of end clamp 612', it is contemplated that the brace blocks 900, 900 'can be effectively used with the various different end clamps and surgical apparatus described above if in the stops of these devices there will be appropriately located recesses for forming the brackets for forming the necessary number of brackets when moving the stops in the forming contact t with brackets.

In FIG. 15 and 16 show another embodiment of a surgical brace unit 940 located in an elongated groove 14 of the surgical apparatus 10. In at least one embodiment, the surgical brace unit 940 includes a block body 942 that has a central elongated groove 944, at least partially passing through the body. The elongated groove 944 is configured to allow axial movement of the cutting element of the surgical device 10 during surgical dissection of the tissue as described above. In various embodiments, the implementation of the block body 942 consists of a crushable hemostatic material, such as, for example, oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC) or bioabsorbable foam of the above or below types, in which rows 946, 948, 950, 952 of unformed brackets 922 are located. in some embodiments, in order to prevent exposure to the brackets 922 and activation of the hemostatic material during insertion and placement of the brace block, the entire block 940 can be coated with a layer or wrap in a biodegradable film 954, such as a polydioxanone film commercially available under the PDS® trademark, or a polyglycerin sebacinate (PGS) film, or other biodegradable film made, for example, from PGA (polyglycolic acid, commercially available under trademark Vicryl), PCL (polycaprolactone), PLA or PLLA (polylactic acid), PHA (polyhydroxyalkanoate), PGCL (polyglecaprone 25, commercially available under the trademark Monocryl) or a mixture of PGA, PCL, PLA, PDS, impervious to the moment tearing film.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 15, the block 940 further includes a block support member 960 connected to the block body 942. In various embodiments, the block support member 960 may be made of rigid material, such as, for example, titanium, stainless steel, aluminum, or an alloy of any of the above metals and the like, and may be partially embedded in the block body 942. In various embodiments, the block support member 960 may be held in place by, for example, film 954. In other embodiments where a limited bond is required, cyanoacrylate can be used to “glue” the two components together. In other embodiments, the implementation of the block housing 942 can be heated and "welded" or "fused" with the supporting element 960 of the block. In various embodiments, the block support member 960 forms at least a portion of the bottom surface of the block body 942 for interfacing with the elongated groove 14. In at least one embodiment, the block support member 960 has one or more latching elements 962 protruding therefrom and intended to detachably connecting the block support member 960 to the elongated groove 14. Other forms of snap / fasteners may be used to removably connect the block support member 960 and the elongated groove 14 .

In various embodiments, the block support member 960 has a series of support ribs 964, 966, 968, 970, 972, 974, 976 formed thereon to provide some lateral support for the bases 924 of the brackets 922 in rows of 946, 948, 950, 952 brackets, as represented in FIG. 15. Thus, in at least some embodiments, the support ribs are substantially the same in length with the rows of brackets. In FIG. 17 shows an alternative embodiment of the bracket block 940 ', which is essentially identical to block 940, except for the inclusion of the vertical parts of the ribs 978, 979, 980, 981, 982, 983, which protrude from the supporting ribs 964, 966, 968, 970, 972, 976, respectively, to provide additional lateral support for the brackets 922. In various embodiments, portions of the ribs may be formed integrally with the block support member 960, and their height may be approximately ½ or less of the block height. Thus, in various embodiments, for example, the height of any vertical elements supporting the foam cannot be greater than the maximum height of the foam in a compressed state. Thus, if the block is made, for example, for compression 1/3 of the original height, the height of the ribs can be from 66% of the height before compression to 10% of the height before compression.

When used after forming the brackets 922 in contact with the stop 20, as described above, the stop 20 goes into the open position, and the end clamp ‚12 is pulled out of the sutured fabric. When the end clamp 12 is pulled from the sutured fabric, the block body 942 remains attached to the stitched fabric and then disconnected from the block support member 960, which remains connected to the elongated groove 14. In various embodiments, the block support member 960 has a color different from the color of the material, from which the block body 942 is made, as well as the color of the elongated trough 14. This design allows the surgeon to clearly see that there is no bracket block inside the working device. Thus, this frees the surgeon from unintentional re-insertion / use of the end clamp before first inserting the bracket unit into it. To do this, the surgeon simply detaches the clamping elements of the block support element 960 from the elongated groove 14 to allow folding of the new bracket block 940 into the support element. Although this document describes the use of bracket blocks 940, 940 ’in combination with a surgical device 10, it is contemplated that these blocks can be effectively used with many other surgical device embodiments described herein without departing from the spirit and scope of the present invention.

In various embodiments, the brace block may comprise a block body and a plurality of brackets located within the block body. In use, the brace block can be inserted into the surgical field and placed on one side of the tissue on which the intervention is performed. In addition, on the opposite side of the fabric can be placed forming a bracket stop. In various embodiments, the emphasis can be positioned on the first jaw, and the bracket block can be positioned on the second jaw, wherein the first jaw and / or the second jaw can move toward each other. After the location of the bracket unit and the stop relative to the fabric, the brackets can exit the bracket body so that the brackets can pierce the fabric and interact with the bracket forming the bracket. After the brackets are removed from the bracket unit housing to the working position, it can be removed from the surgical field. In the various embodiments described herein, a brace block or at least a portion of the brace block can be implanted together with brackets. In at least one such embodiment, which is described in more detail below, the bracket unit may comprise a block body that can be compressed, collapsed and / or wrinkled when interacting with a stop when moving from an open position to a closed position. When compressing, breaking and / or creasing the block body, the emphasis may deform the brackets located in the block body. In an alternative embodiment, the jaw carrying the bracket unit can be moved in the direction of the stop to the closed position. In any case, in various embodiments, the brackets may be deformed when they are at least partially located in the block body. In certain embodiments, the brackets may not be removed from the bracket unit, while in some embodiments, the brackets may be removed from the bracket unit together with a portion of the block body.

As represented in FIG. 18A-18D, a crushable brace block, such as, for example, brace block 1000, may comprise a crushable casing of implantable block 1010 and, in addition, a plurality of brackets 1020 located in the casing of crushable block 1010, although in FIG. 18A-18D, only one bracket 1020 is represented. In FIG. 18A, a bracket block 1000 is shown supported by a bracket member or chute for bracket bracket 1030, bracket bracket 1000 being shown in an uncompressed state. In such an uncompressed position, the emphasis 1040 may be in contact with the fabric "T" or not in contact with it. In use, the emphasis 1040 can be moved from the open position into contact with the fabric "T", as shown in FIG. 18B, thereby bringing the fabric “T” to a specific position relative to the block body 1010. Although the emphasis 1040 can provide the location of the fabric T close to contacting with the fabric of the surface 1019 of the housing of the bracket unit 1010, as shown in FIG. 18B, the bracket block body 1010 in this position may experience a slight compressive effect or pressure (if applicable), and the brackets 1020 may remain in an unformed, or inoperative, state. As represented in FIG. 18A and 18B, the bracket body 1010 may comprise one or more layers, and the legs 1021 of the brackets 1020 may extend upward through these layers. In various embodiments, the block body 1010 may comprise a first layer 1011, a second layer 1012, a third layer 1013, the second layer 1012 may be located between the first layer 1011, the third layer 1013 and the fourth layer 1014, the third layer 1013 may be located between the second layer 1012 and a fourth layer 1014. In at least one embodiment, the bases 1022 of the brackets 1020 can be located in the cavities 1015 in the fourth layer 1014, and the legs of the brackets 1021 can extend upward from the bases 1022 and, for example, through the fourth layer 1014, the third layer 1013 and second th layer 1012. In various embodiments, each deformable leg 1021 may comprise a tip, such as, for example, a sharp tip 1023, which, for example, may be located in the second layer 1012 when the brace unit 1000 is in an uncompressed state. In at least one such embodiment, the tips 1023 may not extend into and / or through the first layer 1011, and in at least one embodiment, the tips 1023 may not protrude through the tissue-contacting surface 1019 when the brace unit 1000 is in an uncompressed state . In other specific embodiments, the sharp tips 1023 may be located in the third layer 1013 and / or any other appropriate layer when the bracket unit is in an uncompressed state. In various alternative embodiments, the bracket body may have any suitable number of layers, such as, for example, less than four layers or more than four layers.

In various embodiments, which are described in more detail below, the first layer 1011 may consist of a support material and / or plastic material, such as, for example, polydioxanone (PDS) and / or polyglycolic acid (PGA), and the second layer 1012 may consist of bioabsorbable foam and / or compressible hemostatic material, such as, for example, oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC). In various embodiments, one or more of the first layer 1011, the second layer 1012, the third layer 1013, and the fourth layer 1014 can hold the brackets 1020 inside the bracket block body 1010 and, moreover, provide the necessary arrangement of the brackets 1020 relative to each other. In various embodiments, the third layer 1013 may consist of a support material or a completely crumple-free or inelastic material, which may be configured to hold the legs 1021 of the brackets 1020 in position relative to each other. Moreover, the second layer 1012 and the fourth layer 1014, which are located on opposite sides of the third layer 1013, can stabilize or reduce the movement of the brackets 1020, even if the second layer 1012 and the fourth layer 1014 can consist of compressible foam or elastic material. In certain embodiments, the ends 1023 of the brace legs 1021 may be at least partially inserted into the first layer 1011. In at least one such embodiment, the first layer 1011 and the third layer 1013 may be configured to jointly and firmly hold the brace legs 1021 . In at least one embodiment, the first layer 1011 and the third layer 1013 may be bioabsorbable plastic sheets, such as, for example, polyglycolic acid (PGA), commercially available under the trade name Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglexaprone 25 (PGCL), commercially available under the trade name Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL) and / or a mixture of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and / or PCL, and each of the second layer 1012 and fourth layer 1014 may consist of at least one hemostatic one material or agent.

Although the first layer 1011 can be cremated, the second layer 1012 can be substantially more cremable than the first layer 1011. For example, the second layer 1012 can be, for example, about two times more compressible, about three times more compressible, about four times more compressible, about five times more compressible and / or about ten times more compressible than the first layer 1011. In other words, with this force, the second layer 1012 can be compressed about two times, about three times, about four a factor of about five times and / or about ten times stronger than the first layer 1011. In certain embodiments, the second layer 1012 can be, for example, about two to ten times more compressible than the first layer 1011. At least in one embodiment, the second layer 1012 may contain a plurality of air voids formed therein, and the number and / or dimensions of air voids in the second layer 1012 can be controlled to provide the necessary compressibility of the second layer 1012. Similar to that described e, although the third layer 1013 may be compressible, the fourth layer 1014 may be substantially more compressible than the third layer 1013. For example, the fourth layer 1014 may, for example, be approximately two times more compressible, approximately three times more compressible, approximately four times more compressible, about five times more compressible and / or about ten times more compressible than the third layer 1013. In other words, with this force, the fourth layer 1014 can be compressed about two times, about three times, will approximate four times, about five times, and / or about ten times stronger than the third layer 1013. In certain embodiments, the fourth layer 1014 can be, for example, about two to ten times more compressible than the third layer 1013. By in at least one embodiment, the fourth layer 1014 may contain a plurality of air voids formed therein, the number and sizes of air voids in the fourth layer 1014 can be controlled to provide the necessary compressibility of the fourth layer 1014. In various In situations, the compressibility of the block body or layer of the block body can be described as a compression coefficient, i.e. the distance that the layer compresses when a certain force is applied. For example, a layer with a higher compression ratio will compress over a greater distance when a certain compressive force is applied to it, compared to a layer with a lower compression ratio. This means that the second layer 1012 can have a higher compression ratio than the first layer 1011, and the fourth layer 1014 can likewise have a higher compression ratio than the third layer 1013. In various embodiments, the second layer 1012 and the fourth layer 1014 can consist from the same material and can have the same compression ratio. In various embodiments, the second layer 1012 and the fourth layer 1014 may consist of materials with different compression ratios. The first layer 1011 and the third layer 1013 can similarly consist of the same material and can have the same compression ratio. In certain embodiments, the first layer 1011 and the third layer 1013 may consist of materials with different compression ratios.

When the emphasis 1040 moves to its closed position, it can come in contact with fabric T and apply a compressive force to fabric T and bracket unit 1000, as shown in FIG. 18C. In such situations, the abutment 1040 may push the upper surface, or the fabric contacting surface 1019, of the housing of the block 1010 down towards the support element of the bracket unit 1030. In various embodiments, the support element of the bracket unit 1030 may comprise a surface for the support of the block 1031, which can be made with the possibility of supporting the bracket block 1000 when the bracket block 1000 is compressed between the surface for the support 1031 of the block and the contact surface 1041 of the stop 1040. Due to the pressure applied rum 1040, the block body 1010 can be compressed, and the abutment 1040 can interact with the brackets 1020. More specifically, in various embodiments, squeezing the block body 1010 and moving the fabric contacting surface 1019 downward can pierce the ends of the brackets 1021 of the first layer 1011 with the tips 1023 the block body 1010, piercing the tissue T and their entry into the forming recesses 1042 on the stop 1040. Upon further compression of the block body 1010 under the influence of the stop 1040, the tips 1023 can contact the walls forming the the recesses 1042, and thus the legs 1021 can, for example, deform or bend inward, as shown in FIG. 18C. After deformation of the legs 1021 brackets, as shown in FIG. 18C, the bases 1022 of the brackets 1020 may be in contact with or supported by the support member of the bracket unit 1030. In various embodiments, as described in more detail below, the support element of the bracket unit 1030 may comprise a plurality of support elements, such as, for example, support grooves, grooves or grooves 1032, which may be configured to support the brackets 1020 or at least the bases 1022 brackets 1020 after deformation of brackets 1020. As shown in FIG. 18C, the cavities 1015 in the fourth layer 1014 may collapse when a compressive force is applied to the body of the bracket unit 1010. In addition to the cavities 1015, the housing 1010 of the bracket unit may further comprise one or more voids, such as, for example, voids 1016, which may or may not contain part of the brackets located in them and which can be configured to crush the block body 1010. In various embodiments, the cavities 1015 and / or voids 1016 can be wrinkled so that the walls forming the cavities deflect downward and come in contact with the surface for the block support 1031 and / or come in contact with the layer of the block body 1010 located under the cavities and / or voids.

From a comparison of FIG. 18B and FIG. 18C, it is apparent that the second layer 1012 and the fourth layer 1014 were essentially compressed by applying a compressive force with a stop 1040. It can also be noted that the first layer 1011 and the third layer 1013 were also compressed. When the abutment 1040 is moved to the closed position, it can continue to compress the block body 1010, pushing the fabric contacting surface 1019 downward in the direction of the brace block support member 1030. With further compression of the block body 1010, the emphasis 1040 may deform the brackets 1020, giving them the final shape, as shown in FIG. 18D. As represented in FIG. 18D, the legs 1021 of each bracket 1020 may be deformed downward to the base 1022 of each bracket 1020 to grip at least a portion of the fabric T, the first layer 1011, the second layer 1012, the third layer 1013 and the fourth layer 1014 between the deformable legs 1021 and the base 1022. Of comparison FIG. 18C and 18D, it is also apparent that the second layer 1012 and the fourth layer 1014 were substantially further compressed by applying compressive force by the abutment 1040. When comparing FIG. 18D and 18C, it can also be noted that the first layer 1011 and the third layer 1013 were also further compressed. After the brackets 1020 are completely or at least sufficiently formed, the abutment 1040 can be lifted from the fabric T, and the bracket element 1030 can be retracted and / or detached from the bracket unit 1000. As shown in FIG. 18D, as a result of the above, the block body 1010 can be implanted together with brackets 1020. In various situations, the implanted block body 1010 can support tissue along a series of brackets. In some situations, a hemostatic agent and / or any other appropriate therapeutic drug contained in the implanted block body 1010 may act on the tissue for some time. A hemostatic agent, as described above, can reduce bleeding of stitched and / or cut tissue, while a binding agent or tissue adhesive can provide tissue strength over time. The implanted block body 1010 may consist of materials such as, for example, ORC (oxidized regenerated cellulose), protein matrix, polyglycolic acid (PGA), commercially available under the trademark Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglexaprone 25 (PGCL), commercially available under the trademark Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL) and / or a mixture of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and / or PCL. In certain situations, block body 1010 may contain an antibiotic and / or antimicrobial material, such as, for example, colloidal silver and / or triclosan, which can reduce the risk of infection in the surgical field.

In various embodiments, the layers of the block body 1010 may be connected to each other. In at least one embodiment, the second layer 1012 can be attached to the first layer 1011, the third layer 1013 can be attached to the second layer 1012, and the fourth layer 1014 can be attached to the third layer 1013 using at least one adhesive, such as, for example, fibrin and / or protein hydrogel. In certain embodiments, although not shown, the layers of the block body 1010 can be connected to each other by interconnected mechanical elements. In at least one such embodiment, each of the first layer 1011 and the second layer 1012 may comprise corresponding interconnected elements, such as, for example, a tongue and groove structure and / or dovetail type connecting elements. Each of the second layer 1012 and the third layer 1013 may similarly contain corresponding interconnected elements, while each of the third layer 1013 and the fourth layer 1014 may contain corresponding interconnected elements. In certain embodiments, although not shown, the bracket block 1000 may comprise one or more rivets, which, for example, may pass through one or more layers of the block body 1010. In at least one such embodiment, each rivet may comprise a first end, or a head, located next to the first layer 1011, and a second head, located next to the fourth layer 1014, which can be formed by or attached to the second end of the rivet. Due to the compressibility of the block body 1010 in at least one embodiment, rivets can compress the block body 1010 so that the rivet heads can be recessed, for example, relative to the fabric contacting surface 1019 and / or bottom surface 1018 of the block body 1010. In at least one such embodiment, the rivets may be composed of bioabsorbable materials such as, for example, polyglycolic acid (PGA), commercially available under the trademark Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA) ), polyglecaprone 25 (PGCL), commercially available under the brand name Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL) and / or a mixture of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and / or PCL. In certain embodiments, the layers of the block body 1010 can only be connected to each other by the brackets 1020 included in them. At least in one such embodiment, friction engagement between the legs of the brackets 1021 and the block body 1010, for example, can hold the layers of the block body 1010 together, and after the formation of the brackets, the layers can be captured by the brackets 1020. In certain embodiments, at least a portion of the brackets legs 1021 may comprise a rough surface or a rough coating, which may reinforce with lu friction between the brackets 1020 and 1010 housing unit.

As described above, the surgical device may comprise a first jaw including a support member of the brace unit 1030 and a second jaw that includes a stop 1040. In various embodiments, which are described in more detail below, the brace block 1000 may include one or more holding elements that can be adapted to engage with the support element 1030 of the bracket unit and, thus, can provide a removable holding connection of the bracket unit 1000 with the support element 1030 of the bracket unit. In certain embodiments, the brace unit 1000 may be coupled to the brace unit support member 1030 using at least one adhesive, such as, for example, fibrin and / or protein hydrogel. When used in at least one situation, especially in laparoscopic and / or endoscopic surgery, the second jaw can be moved to the closed position opposite the first jaw, for example, so that the first and second jaws can be inserted through the trocar into the surgical field. In at least one such embodiment, the trocar may form a lumen, or cannula, of approximately 5 mm in size, into which the first and second branches can be inserted. In certain embodiments, the second jaw can be moved to a partially closed position between the open and closed positions so that the first and second jaws can be inserted through the trocar without deforming the brackets 1020 contained in the housing of the bracket block 1010. In at least one such embodiment the abutment 1040 may not exert a compressive force on the body of the brace unit 1010 when the second jaw is in a partially closed intermediate position, while in other certain embodiments, Lenia stop 1040 may compress the staple housing unit 1010, when the second jaws are in a partially closed intermediate position. Even if the emphasis 1040 can compress the body of the bracket block 1010 when it is in such an intermediate position, the emphasis 1040 may not sufficiently compress the housing of the bracket block 1010 so that the emphasis 1040 can contact the brackets 1020, and / or so that the brackets 1020 are deformed under the influence of the stop 1040. After the first and second branches are inserted through the trocar into the surgical field, the second branch can be opened again, and the stop 1040 and the bracket unit 1000 can be positioned in the necessary position relative to the tissue, as described above.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 19A-19D, the end clamp of the surgical stapler may include an implantable brace unit 1100 located between the abutment 1140 and the support element 1030 of the brace unit. Similar to the above, the abutment 1140 may comprise a fabric contacting surface 1141, the bracket unit 1100 may comprise a tissue contacting surface 1119, and the bracket block supporting member 1130 may comprise a bearing surface 1131 that may be configured to support the bracket 1100. As shown in FIG. 19A, the abutment 1140 can be used to position the fabric T adjacent to the tissue-contacting surface 1119 of the brace unit 1100 without deforming the brace unit 1100, and when the abutment 1140 is in this position, the fabric-contacting surface 1141 can be spaced 1101a from the abutment surface 1131 of the bracket unit, and the surface contacting the fabric 1119 may be located at a distance 1102a from the supporting surface 1131 of the bracket unit. After that, when the emphasis 1140 is moved to the supporting element 1130 of the bracket unit, as shown in FIG. 19B, the abutment 1140 may push the upper surface or the fabric contacting surface 1119 of the bracket unit 1100 down and compress the first layer 1111 and the second layer 1112 of the block body 1110. As the layers 1111 and 1112 compress, referring again to FIG. 19B, the second layer 1112 can be crushed, the legs 1121 of the brackets 1120 can pierce the first layer 1111 and enter the tissue “T”. In at least one embodiment, the brackets 1120 can be at least partially located in the brackets or voids 1115 for the brackets in the second layer 1112 and, when the second layer 1112 is compressed, the cavities 1115 can be wrinkled and, as a result, allow the second layer 1112 to wrinkle around the brackets 1120. In various embodiments, the second layer 1112 may include cover portions 1116 that can extend over the brackets 1115 and close or at least partially close the brackets 1115. In FIG. 19B illustrates cover portions 1116 that, when broken, fall down into the bracket cavity 115. In certain embodiments, the second layer 1112 may contain one or more weakened parts that can crease the second layer 1112. In various embodiments, such weakened parts may include, for example, notches, perforations, and / or thin sections that can provide controlled crushing the block body 1110. In at least one embodiment, the first layer 1111 may comprise one or more weakened parts that may allow the legs of the brackets 1121 to pass through the first layer 1111. In various embodiments, such weakened parts may include, for example, notches, perforations, and / or thin a cross-section of parts that can be combined or at least substantially aligned with the legs of the brackets 1121.

When the stop 1140 is in a partially closed, inoperative position, as shown in FIG. 19A, it may be located at a distance 1101a from the abutment surface of the bracket unit 1131 so that a gap is formed between them. This gap can be filled with a brace block 1100 with a height of 1102a and body tissues “T”. As the stop 1140 moves down to compress block 1100, referring again to FIG. 19B, the distance between the contact surface 1141 and the abutment surface 1131 can be defined as a distance 1101b that is shorter than the distance 1101a. In various situations, the space between the fabric contacting surface 1141 of the abutment 1140 and the block supporting surface 1131, indicated by the distance 1101b, may be larger than the initial height 1102a of the undeformed bracket unit. When the stop 1140 is moved closer to the supporting surface 1131 of the block, as shown in FIG. 19C, the second layer 1112 may continue to wrinkle, and the distance between the bracket legs 1121 and the forming recesses 1142 may decrease. Similarly, the distance between the fabric contacting surface 1141 and the block supporting surface 1131 may decrease to a distance 1101c, which in various embodiments may be greater, less than, or equal to the initial height 1102a of the undeformed bracket block. As represented in FIG. 19D, the abutment 1140 can be moved to the final, actuated position in which the brackets 1120 are fully formed or at least formed to the desired height. In this position, the fabric contacting surface 1141 of the abutment 1140 may be at a distance 1101d from the block supporting surface 1131, the distance 1101d may be less than the initial height 1102a of the undeformed block. As represented in FIG. 19D, the bracket cavities 1115 may be completely or at least substantially wrinkled, and the brackets 1120 may be completely or at least substantially surrounded by a crushed second layer 1112. In various situations, thereafter, the stop 1140 may be moved away from the bracket block 1100. After disengaging the abutment 1140 from the bracket block 1100, the block housing 1110 may at least partially experience backward expansion in various sections, that is, for example, in sections between adjacent brackets 1120. In at least one embodiment, the crumpled block housing 1110 may use ytat inelastic reverse extension. In various embodiments, the formed brackets 1120, as well as the block body 1110 located between adjacent brackets 1120, can exert pressure or compressive force on tissue T, which can provide various therapeutic effects.

As described above, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 19A, each bracket 1120 may include brace legs 1121 extending from it. Although the brackets 1120 shown in the figures contain two brace legs 1121, various brackets may be used that may contain one brace leg or, in an alternative embodiment, more than two brace legs, such as three brace legs or four brace legs. As represented in FIG. 19A, each bracket leg 1121 can be placed in the second layer 1112 of the block body 1110 so as to secure the brackets 1120 in the second layer 1112. In various embodiments, the brackets 1120 can be inserted into the bracket cavities 1115 in the block body 1110 so that the ends 1123 legs 1121 brackets enter the cavity 1115 before the bases 1122. After inserting the tips 1123 into the cavity 1115 in various embodiments, the tips 1123 can be pressed into the covering parts 1116 and cut the second layer 1112. In various embodiments, the brackets 1120 can be installed in watts a second layer 1112 to a sufficient depth so that the brackets 1120 are stationary or at least substantially stationary relative to the second layer 1112. In certain embodiments, the brackets 1120 can be installed in the second layer 1112 to a sufficient depth so that the bases 1122 are located or inserted into cavity 1115 brackets. In other various embodiments, the implementation of the base 1122 may not be located or installed in the second layer 1112. In certain embodiments, as shown in FIG. 19A, the bases 1122 may extend beneath the lower surface 1118 of the block body 1110. In certain embodiments, the bases 1122 may lie on the block support surface 1130 or may be located directly opposite it. In various embodiments, the implementation of the support surface 1130 of the block may contain support elements extending from it and / or formed in it, and in at least one such embodiment, the base 1122 of the brackets 1120 can be supported, for example, by one or more supporting grooves, grooves or grooves 1132 on the bracket member 1130, as described in more detail below.

In addition to the above, as shown in FIG. 20, the bases 1122 of the brackets 1120 can be positioned directly opposite the abutment surface 1131 of the abutment element 1130 of the bracket unit. In various embodiments, including embodiments where the brace bases 1122, for example, include circular or curved lower surfaces 1124, the brace bases 1122 may move or slide along the supporting surface 1131 of the bracket unit. Such sliding can occur when the stop 1140 puts pressure on the ends 1123 of the legs 1121 of the bracket during the formation of the brackets. In certain embodiments, as described above and presented in FIG. 21, the brace block support member 1130 may comprise one or more support grooves 1132, which may be configured to eliminate or at least reduce relative movement between the brace bases 1122 and the block support surface 1131. In at least one such embodiment, each abutment groove 1132 can be formed by a surface contour that matches or at least substantially coincides with the contour of the bottom surface of the bracket located thereon. For example, the lower surface 1124 of the base 1122 shown in FIG. 21 may comprise a circular or at least substantially circular surface, and the support groove 1132 may also comprise a circular or at least substantially circular surface. In at least one such embodiment, the radius of curvature of the surface forming the groove 1132 may be greater than or equal to the radius of curvature of the lower surface 1124. Although the grooves 1132 can help prevent or reduce relative sliding movement between the brackets 1120 and the support element of the bracket unit 1130, the grooves 1132 can also be configured to prevent or reduce relative rotational movement between the brackets 1120 and the supporting element of the bracket unit 1130. In particular, at least in one embodiment, the slots 1132 may be configured to introduce therein a dense bases 1122 to prevent or reduce rotation of the brackets 1120, for example, around the axes 1129 so that the bracket 1120 can not rotate or twist during the deformation process.

In various embodiments, in addition to the above, each bracket 1120 can be formed from a round or at least substantially round cross-section of the wire. In certain embodiments, the legs and base of each bracket can be made of wire with a non-circular cross section, such as, for example, a rectangular cross section. In at least one such embodiment, the support element of the bracket unit 1130 may comprise corresponding non-circular grooves, such as, for example, rectangular grooves configured to receive the bases of such brackets. In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 22, each bracket 1120 may comprise a head, such as, for example, a head 1125 molded on the base 1122, wherein each head 1125 can be positioned inside a support groove in the support element of the bracket unit 1130. In at least one such embodiment, each head 1125 may have, for example, a square and / or rectangular section that can be adapted to enter, for example, square and / or rectangular grooves 1134 in the support element of the bracket unit 1130. In various embodiments, the head 1125 could They must be made of bioabsorbable plastic such as, for example, polyglycolic acid (PGA), commercially available under the trade name Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglycaprone 25 (PGCL), commercially available under the trade name Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL) and / or a mixture of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and / or PCL, and it can be formed around the bases 1122 of the brackets 1120, for example, by injection molding. Various heads and methods for producing various heads are disclosed in US Patent Application No. 11 / 541,123 entitled “SURGICAL BRACKETS WITH COMPRESSIBLE OR MOLDED ELEMENTS FOR FASTENING TISSUES IN THEM, AND SEWING APPLIANCES FOR SEPTEMBER 29, 2006, FOR PLACEMENT a description of which is fully incorporated herein by reference. As represented in FIG. 22, the grooves 1134 may further comprise guides, or chamfers, 1135, which may be configured to facilitate insertion of the heads 1125 into the grooves 1134. In various embodiments, the base and / or the head 1120 of the brackets may be located within the grooves 1134 when the bracket unit 1100 is installed into the support element 1130 of the bracket unit. In certain embodiments, the heads 1125 of the brackets 1120 can be aligned with the slots 1134 when the bracket unit 1100 is installed in the support element 1130 of the bracket unit. In at least one such embodiment, the heads 1125 may not fit into the slots 1134 until a compressive force is applied to the legs 1121 of the brackets and the bases and / or heads 1120 of the brackets are pushed down into the grooves 1134.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 23 and 24, a brace block, such as, for example, brace block 1200, may comprise a casing 1210 of a crushable implantable brace block comprising an outer layer 1211 and an inner layer 1212. As described above, the brace block 1200 may comprise a plurality of brackets 1220 located inside the case 1210 blocks. In various embodiments, each bracket 1220 may comprise a base 1222 and one or more brace legs 1221 extending from it. In at least one such embodiment, the brace legs 1221 can be inserted into the inner layer 1212 and set to a depth at which, for example, the bases 1222 of the brackets 1220 are adjacent and / or are adjacent to the bottom surface 1218 of the inner layer 1212. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 23 and 24, the inner layer 1212 does not contain cavities for the brackets configured to receive part of the brackets 1220, while in other embodiments, the implementation of the inner layer 1212 may contain such cavities for the brackets. In various embodiments, in addition to the above, the inner layer 1212 may consist of a compressible material, such as, for example, bioabsorbable foam and / or oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC), which can be configured to crush block 1210 when applied compressive load to it. In various embodiments, the inner layer 1212 may consist of lyophilized foam containing, for example, polylactic acid (PLA) and / or polyglycolic acid (PGA). ORC is sold under the trade name Surgicel and may take the form of sparse weave (like surgical swabs), loose fibers (cotton balls) and / or foam. In at least one embodiment, the inner layer 1212 may consist of a material including medications, such as frozen dried thrombin and / or fibrin, which are located inside the layer or applied as a coating and can, for example, be activated by exposure to water and / or body fluids. In at least one such embodiment, dry frozen thrombin and / or fibrin can be applied, for example, to a matrix of Vicryl material (PGA). Under certain circumstances, however, activated medications may be inadvertently activated when the brace unit 1200 is delivered to the surgical site. In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 23 and 24, the outer layer 1211 may be formed of a waterproof or at least substantially waterproof material such that liquids cannot come into contact or at least substantially cannot come into contact with the inner layer 1212 until the housing 1210 is compressed block and penetration of the legs of the brackets through the outer layer 1211 and / or until the dissection of the outer layer 1211 in one way or another. In various embodiments, the outer layer 1211 may consist of a support material and / or plastic material, such as, for example, polydioxanone (PDS) and / or polyglycolic acid (PGA). In certain embodiments, the outer layer 1211 may include a wrapper surrounding the inner layer 1212 and brackets 1220. In particular, in at least one embodiment, the brackets 1220 can be inserted into the inner layer 1212, and the outer layer 1211 can be wrapped around a subnode containing the inner layer 1212 and brackets 1220, and then tightly close.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 25 and 26, a brace unit, such as, for example, a brace unit 1300, may include a creaseable implantable unit body 1310 including an outer layer 1311 and an inner layer 1312. Similar to the above, the brace unit 1300 may further comprise brackets 1320 located inside block bodies 1310, each bracket 1320 may include a base 1322 and one or more legs 1321 extending from it. Similarly to the bracket block 1200 of the base 1322, the brackets 1320 may extend under the lower surface 1318 of the inner layer 1312, and the outer layer 1311 may roughen the bases 1322. In at least one such embodiment, the outer layer 1311 may be flexible enough to surround the base 1322 of each bracket so that the outer layer 1311 matches the outline of the bases 1322. In at least one alternative embodiment, as shown in FIG. . 24, the outer layer 1211 may be stiff enough to extend around the bases 1222 without matching the contour of each base 1222. In any case, in various embodiments, the outer layer 1311 may be located between the bases 1322 of the brackets 1320 and the abutment surface for the bracket unit, such as, for example , supporting surfaces 1031 or 1131 supporting the brace unit 1300. In at least one such embodiment, the outer layer 1311 may be located between the bases 1322 and supporting grooves, such as, for example, grooves 1032 or 1132 formed in the abutment surface for the bracket unit. In at least one such embodiment, in addition to the above, the outer layer 1311 may be configured to limit the movement of the bases 1322 and / or increase the coefficient of friction between the bases 1322 and the abutment surface for the bracket unit and / or abutment grooves to reduce them displacement relative to each other. In various alternative embodiments, as presented in FIG. 27 and 28, the outer layer of the bracket block, such as, for example, the bracket block 1400, may not completely surround the brackets located therein. In at least one such embodiment, the outer layer 1411 of the crushable implantable block 1410 body 1410 can be attached to the inner layer 1412 before the legs 1421 of the brackets 1420 are inserted into the block body 1410. As a result of the above-described base 1422, the brackets 1420 can extend outward from the outer layer 1411, and in at least one such embodiment, the bases 1422 can be located, for example, directly in the supporting grooves 1032 or 1132 of the supporting surfaces 1031 or 1131 of the bracket unit. In various embodiments, brace legs 1421 may dissect the outer layer 1411 during insertion. In various situations, the openings created by the bracket legs 1421 can surround the bracket legs 1421 so that fluid leakage between the bracket legs 1421 and the outer layer 1411 is very small or absent, which can reduce or eliminate the risk of premature activation and / or leakage of the drug contained inside the bracket block body 1410.

As described above and presented in FIG. 23 and 24, the legs 1221 of the brackets 1220 can be placed in the block body 1210, and the bases 1222 of the brackets 1220 can extend outward from the bottom surface 1218 of the inner layer 1212. In various embodiments, in addition to the above, the inner layer 1212 may not contain a cavity for brackets, configured to receive brackets 1220. In other various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 29 and 30, a brace unit, such as, for example, a brace unit 1500, may comprise a case 1510 of a crushable implantable unit 1510 containing brace cavities 1515 that can be configured to receive at least a portion of the brackets 1520. In at least one such In an embodiment, the upper part of the legs 1521 of the brackets 1520 can be installed in the inner layer 1512, while the lower part of the legs 1521 of the brackets and the base 1522 can be located in the cavities 1515 of the brackets. In certain embodiments, the bases 1522 may be completely located in the brackets 1515, while in some embodiments, the bases 1522 may extend at least partially below the bottom surface 1518 of the inner layer 1512. As described above, the outer layer 1511 may include an inner layer 1512 and brackets located therein 1520. In other specific embodiments, implementation, as shown in FIG. 31, the bracket block 1600 may include brackets 1620 located in the brackets 1615 of the brackets in the housing 1610 of the crushable implantable block 1610, with at least a portion of the brackets 1620 not surrounded by an outer layer 1611. In at least one such embodiment, each bracket 1620 may comprise legs 1621 brackets, which are at least partially installed in the inner layer 1612, as well as the base 1622, which extend outward around the outer layer 1611.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 32 and 33, a brace block, such as, for example, a brace block 1700, may comprise a casing 1710 of a crushable implantable block 1710 and a plurality of brackets 1720 at least partially located within the casing 1710 of the block. The block body 1710 may include an outer layer 1711, an inner layer 1712, as well as a leveling matrix 1740, which can be configured to align and / or hold the brackets 1720 in the required position inside the block body 1710. In at least one embodiment, the inner layer 1712 may comprise a recess 1741, which may be configured to receive the alignment matrix 1740. In various embodiments, the alignment matrix 1140 may be secured to the recess 1741 by pressing and / or otherwise secured in the inner layer 1712 using at least one adhesive, such as, for example, fibrin and / or protein hydrogel. In at least one embodiment, the recess 1741 may be configured so that the bottom surface 1742 of the alignment matrix 1740 aligns or at least substantially aligns with the bottom surface 1718 of the inner layer 1712. In certain embodiments, the bottom surface 1742 of the alignment matrix may be recessed in the lower surface 1718 of the second layer 1712 and / or may extend from it. In various embodiments, each bracket 1720 may comprise a base 1722 and one or more legs 1721 extending from the base 1722, wherein at least a portion of the legs of the bracket 1721 may extend through the alignment matrix 1740. The alignment matrix 1740 may further comprise a plurality of holes passing therethrough and / or grooves, which can be configured to receive the legs of the brackets 1721. In at least one such embodiment, each hole can be made with the possibility of tight introduction ozhki bracket 1721 so that relative movement between the foot bracket and the side walls 1721 holes was low or absent. In certain embodiments, the holes of the alignment matrix may not completely extend through the alignment matrix 1740, and it may be necessary to cut the alignment matrix 1740 with the legs of the bracket 1721 while pushing the legs of the bracket 1721 through it.

In various embodiments, the alignment matrix 1740 may consist of a molded plastic housing, which in at least one embodiment may be more rigid and less compressible than the inner layer 1712 and / or the outer layer 1711. In at least one such embodiment, the alignment matrix 1740 may consist of a plastic material and / or any other suitable material, such as, for example, polydioxanone (PDS) and / or polyglycolic acid (PGA). In certain embodiments, the alignment matrix 1740 can be attached to the inner layer 1712, and then the brackets 1721 can be inserted through the alignment matrix 1740 and installed in the inner layer 1712. In various embodiments, the bottom surface 1742 of the alignment matrix 1740 may comprise, for example, one or more grooves, grooves or grooves that can be configured to at least partially receive the bases 1722 of the brackets 1720. Similar to the above, the outer layer 1711 can then be positioned b around the subassembly containing the inner layer 1712, the alignment matrix 1740 and the brackets 1720. In an alternative embodiment, the outer layer 1711 can be arranged around the subassembly containing the inner layer 1712 and the alignment matrix 1740, after which the brackets 1720 can be inserted through the outer layer 1711, the alignment the matrix 1740 and the inner layer 1712. In any case, as a result of the above, the inner layer 1712, the alignment matrix 1740 and / or the outer layer 1711 can be made to hold the brackets 1720 in the required position d the time and / or after their deformation under the influence of stops, as described above. In at least one such embodiment, the alignment matrix 1740 may serve to hold the brackets 1720 in position until the brace block 1700 is implanted in the patient’s body, and also to attach tissue along the brace line after implantation of the brace 1700. In at least one embodiment brackets 1720 can be fixed, for example, in the alignment matrix 1740 without being installed in the inner layer 1712 and / or the outer layer 1711.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 34-40, a brace block, such as, for example, brace block 1800, can be installed by compressing the inner layer 1812, introducing brackets, such as, for example, brackets 1820, into the inner layer 1812, and also wrapping the inner layer 1812 with the outer layer 1811. As mainly represented in FIG. 34, the compressible inner layer 1812 contains a plurality of parenthesis cavities 1815 formed therein, although other embodiments are possible in which the inner layer 1812 does not contain a cavity for the brackets, as described above. As represented in FIG. 35, a compressible inner layer 1812 may be located between the transfer plate 1850 and the support plate 1860 and compressed between the compression surfaces of the plates 1852 and 1862, respectively. As represented in FIG. 35, the upper and lower surfaces of the inner layer 1812 can be pressed against each other, and thus, the inner layer 1812 can protrude outward in the lateral directions. In certain embodiments, the inner layer 1812 may be compressed, for example, to a height of about one third of its original height, and its height or thickness may be, for example, from about 1.524 mm (0.06 inches) to about 2.032 mm (0, 08 inches) in a compressed state. As represented in FIG. 35, the transfer plate 1850 may further comprise a plurality of brackets, such as, for example, brackets 1820 located in a plurality of recesses for the brackets 1853. In addition, the transfer plate 1850 may further comprise a plurality of ejectors 1851, which may be configured to push the brackets 1820 up and out of the recesses for the brackets 1853. As shown in FIG. 36, the pushers 1851 can be used to push the legs 1821 of the brackets 1820 inward and through the compressed inner layer 1812. In various embodiments, the pushers 1851 can be designed so that their upper surfaces are at the same level or at least almost at the same level with the surface compressing 1852 the transfer plate 1850 when the brackets 1820 are completely placed from the recesses for the brackets 1853 of the transfer plate 1850. In certain embodiments, as shown in FIG. 36, the support plate 1860 may comprise a plurality of receiving holes 1861, which may be configured to receive the legs of the brackets 1821 or at least the ends of the legs of the brackets 1821 after pushing them through the inner layer 1812. The receiving holes 1861 or the like. may be necessary in embodiments where the inner layer 1812 is compressed to a height that is less than the height of the brackets 1820, and thus, when the brackets 1820 are completely removed from the recesses for the brackets 1853, the legs of the brackets 1821 may protrude from the upper surface of the compressed inner layer 1812. B In other specific embodiments, the inner layer 1812 can be compressed to a height that is greater than the height of the brackets 1820, and thus receiving holes 1861 in the support plate 1860 may not be necessary.

After inserting the brackets 1820 into the inner layer 1812, as shown in FIG. 37, the support plate 1860 can be moved away from the transfer plate 1850 to decompress the inner layer 1812. In such situations, the inner layer 1812 may experience elastic back expansion to its original or at least close to its original height before compression. When the inner layer 1812 undergoes back expansion, the height of the inner layer 1812 can increase so that it becomes larger than the height of the brackets 1820, and that the legs 1821 of the brackets 1820 will no longer protrude from the upper surface of the inner layer 1812. In various situations, the receiving holes 1861 may be made with the possibility of holding the legs of the brackets 1821 in the required position at least until the moment when the support plate 1860 will be moved a sufficient distance so that the legs 1821 are no longer located in inimayuschih holes 1861. In such situations receiving apertures 1861 can help maintain mutual alignment of staples 1820 in the inner layer 1812 after despreading. In various situations, the inner layer 1812 and the brackets 1820 located therein may contain a subassembly 1801, which, as shown in FIG. 38, it is possible to insert, for example, into the outer layer 1811. In at least one such embodiment, the outer layer 1811 may comprise a cavity 1802, which may be configured to receive a subunit 1801. In various situations, an apparatus such as, for example, tongs 1855, for pulling the outer layer 1811 onto the subassembly 1801. After the subassembly 1801 is sufficiently positioned inside the outer layer 1811, as shown in FIG. 39, the outer layer 1811 can be sealed. In various embodiments, the outer layer 1811 may be sealed by applying thermal energy to a portion thereof. In particular, in at least one embodiment, the outer layer 1811 may consist of a plastic material, the open end of the outer layer 1811 can be heat-sealed using one or more heating elements, or heat-sealing devices, 1856 for bonding and / or sealing the perimeter of the open the end of the outer layer 1811. In at least one such embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, the excess portion 1857 of the outer layer 1811 can be removed, and then the bracket block 1800 can be used as described herein.

As described above, the bracket unit can be positioned inside the part for attaching the bracket unit and / or fixed to it. In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 41 and 42, the portion for securing the bracket block may comprise a groove for the bracket block, such as, for example, a groove for the bracket block 1930, which may be configured to receive at least a portion of the bracket block, such as, for example, the bracket block 1900. In at least one embodiment, the gutter for the brace unit 1930 may comprise a lower abutment surface 1931, a first transverse abutment wall 1940 and a second transverse abutment wall 1941. In use, the brace unit 1900 can be positioned inside the gutter the brace unit 1930 so that the brace unit 1900 is located on and / or adjacent to the lower abutment surface 1931 and also between the first transverse abutment wall 1940 and the second transverse abutment wall 1941. In certain embodiments, between the first transverse abutment wall 1940 and the second transverse support wall 1941 may be a transverse space. In at least one such embodiment, the bracket unit 1900 may have a width in the transverse direction 1903 that is equal to and / or greater than the width of the transverse space formed between the support walls 1940 and 1941 so that the housing 1910 of the crushable implantable bracket unit 1900 can tightly to enter between the walls 1940 and 1941. In other specific embodiments, the width in the transverse direction 1903 of the bracket block 1900 may be less than the width of the space formed between the first and second side walls kami 1940 and 1941. In various embodiments, at least a portion of the walls 1940 and 1941 and a lower abutment surface 1931 may be formed by a stamped metal trough, while in at least one embodiment, at least a portion of the transverse abutment wall 1940 and / or the transverse support wall 1941 may consist of a flexible material, such as, for example, an elastomeric material. As mainly represented in FIG. 41, each of the first side wall 1940 and the second side wall 1941 of the gutter for the brace unit 1930 may be formed from a rigid portion 1933 extending upward from a lower abutment surface 1931 and a flexible portion 1934 extending upwardly from the rigid portions 1933.

In various embodiments, in addition to the above, the housing 1910 of the bracket block 1900 may consist of one or more compressible layers, such as, for example, the first layer 1911 and the second layer 1912. When the housing 1910 of the block is compressed to the lower supporting surface 1931 under the influence stop, as described above, the side parts of the block body 1910 can expand in the transverse direction. In embodiments where the brace block 1930 consists of hard side walls, lateral expansion of the block body 1910 can be prevented or at least limited by the hard side walls, and thus significant internal pressure or stress can occur within the block body 1910 . In embodiments where at least a portion of the bracket unit 1930 is comprised of flexible side walls, the flexible side walls may be able to extend in the transverse direction, which helps to expand the lateral parts of the block body 1910 in the transverse direction and reduces internal pressure, or voltage arising inside the block housing 1910. In embodiments where the block chute does not contain lateral side walls or comprises lateral side walls that are relatively shorter than the bracket block, the side portions of the bracket block can expand unlimitedly, or at least substantially unlimitedly, in the transverse direction. In any case, as presented in FIG. 42, the chute for the brace block 2030 may include side walls 2040 and 2041, which can be completely formed from a flexible material, such as, for example, elastomeric material, the chute for the brace block 2030 may further comprise transverse grooves 2033 extending along the sides of the lower abutment surface 2031 grooves for the bracket unit 2030, which can be configured to receive and secure at least a portion of the transverse side walls 2040 and 2041. In certain embodiments, the transverse side walls 20 40 and 2041 can be secured in the grooves 2033 using snap and / or compression mechanisms, while at least in some embodiments, the transverse side walls 2040 and 2041 can be secured in the grooves 2033 using one or more adhesives. In at least one embodiment, the side walls 2040 and 2041 may be detached from the lower abutment surface 2031 during use. In any case, the casing of the crushable implantable block 2010 can be detached and / or disconnected from the transverse side walls 2040 and 2041 after they are implanted in brackets 2020 into the casing 2010 of the block.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 43, the surgical device may include a rod 2150 and an end clip extending from the distal end of the rod 2150. Similar to the above, the working device may include a groove 2130 for the bracket unit, an abutment 2140 configured to move between the open position and the closed position, and the bracket unit 2100 located between the groove 2130 of the bracket block and the stop 2140. Also, similarly to the above, the bracket block 2100 may comprise a housing 2110 of a crushable implantable block and a plurality of brackets 2120 located in the housing 2110 blocks. In various embodiments, the chute 2130 of the bracket block 2130 may comprise, firstly, a lower abutment surface 2131 on which the bracket block 2100 can be located, secondly, a distal end 2135 and thirdly, a proximal end 2136. At least in one embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43, the bracket block 2100 may comprise a first end 2105 that can be configured to install a bracket block at the distal end 2135 of the chute 2130, and a second end 2106 that can be configured to install a bracket block at the proximal end 2136. In various embodiments, the distal end 2135 of the bracket channel trough 2130 may comprise at least one distal retaining member, such as, for example, a retaining wall 2137, and the proximal end 2136 may likewise comprise at least one proximal retaining member, such as, for example retaining wall 2138. In at least one such embodiment, a space may be formed between the distal retaining wall 2137 and the proximal retaining wall 2138, which may be is equal to or smaller than the staple unit 2100 so that the bracket unit 2100 can tightly retained within gutter clevis block 2130 after inserting it in the clevis block 2100.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 23 and 24, a brace block, such as, for example, brace block 1200, may comprise a flat or at least substantially flat tissue-contacting surface 1219. In at least one such embodiment, the housing 1210 of the brace block 1200 may comprise a first end 1205 which may be determined by a first height, or thickness, 1207, and a second end 1206, which may be determined by a second height, or thickness, 1208, where the first height 1207 may be equal to or at least substantially equal to the second height 1208. In certain embodiments real A tapered block housing 1210 may comprise a constant or at least substantially constant height, or thickness, between the first end 1205 and the second end 1206. In at least one such embodiment, the tissue-contacting surface 1219 may be parallel or at least substantially parallel to the bottom surface 1218 of the block housing 1210. In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 43, the first end 2105 of the housing 2110 of the bracket block 2100 may be defined by a first height 2107 that is different from the second height 2108 of the second end 2106. In the illustrated embodiment, the first height 2107 is greater than the second height 2108, although in alternative embodiments, the second height 2108 may be larger a first height 2107. In various embodiments, the height of the block body 2110 may decrease linearly and / or exponentially between the first end 2105 and the second end 2106. In at least one such embodiment On the other hand, the fabric contacting surface 2119 extending between the first end 2105 and the second end 2106 can be oriented along an angle formed between them. In at least one such embodiment, the tissue-contacting surface 2119 may not be parallel to the bottom surface 2118 of the block body 2110 and / or parallel to the abutment surface 2131 of the gutter 2130 of the bracket block.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 43 and 44, the abutment 2140 may comprise a fabric contacting surface 2141, which may be parallel or at least substantially parallel to the abutment surface 2131 of the bracket block groove 2130 when the abutment 2140 is in the closed position, as shown in FIG. 44. When the abutment 2140 is in the closed position, it can be configured to compress the first end 2105 of the bracket block 2100 to a greater extent than the second end 2106 due to the greater height of the first end 2105 and the lower height of the second end 2106. In some situations, including situations where tissue T located between tissue contacting surfaces 2119 and 2141 has a constant or at least substantially constant thickness, the pressure generated inside tissue T and block 2100 may be greater at the distal end of the working apparatus than at at the maximal end of the end clamp. More specifically, when the fabric T located between the abutment 2140 and the brace unit 2100 has a substantially constant thickness, the fabric T located between the distal end 2145 of the abutment 2140 and the first end 2105 of the brace unit 2100 can be compressed more than the fabric T located between the proximal end 2146 of the abutment 2140 and the second end 2106 of the bracket block 2100. In various embodiments, a pressure gradient can be created between the proximal end and the distal end of the working device within the tissue T. More specifically, in at least one embodiment, when the tissue T located between the abutment 2140 and the bracket block 2100 has a substantially constant thickness and the height of the bracket block 2100 decreases linearly from the distal end to the proximal end of the working device, the pressure inside the tissue T can decrease linearly from the distal end of the end clamp to the proximal end of the end clamp. Similarly, in at least one embodiment, when the tissue T located between the abutment 2140 and the bracket block 2100 has a substantially constant thickness and the height of the bracket block 2100 decreases exponentially from the distal end to the proximal end of the end clamp, the pressure inside the tissue T may decrease exponentially from the distal end of the end clamp to the proximal end of the end clamp.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 43, the fabric T located between the bracket unit 2100 and the abutment 2140 may not have a constant thickness over its entire length. In at least one such situation, the tissue T located between the proximal end 2146 of the stop 2140 and the second end 2106 of the bracket block 2100 may be thicker than the tissue T located between the distal end 2145 of the stop 2140 and the first end 2105 of the bracket block 2100. Thus, in In such situations, a thicker tissue T can essentially be located above the shorter proximal end 2106 of the bracket block 2100, and a thinner tissue T can essentially be located above the higher distal end 2105. In use, the trigger sleeve 2152 st The rod 2150 can be moved distally along the pin of the rod 2151 so that the start clutch 2152 engages with the cam part 2143 of the stop 2140 and rotates the stop 2140 to the bracket block 2100, as shown in FIG. 44. After the stop 2140 is turned to the fully closed position, the fabric T can be compressed between the surfaces 2119 and 2141 in contact with the fabric, and the pressure or compressive force applied to the fabric T can be constant or at least substantially constant over the entire thickness even with taking into account that the height of the bracket block 2100 between the proximal and distal ends of the working device may be unstable. More specifically, since a thicker fabric T may be associated with a higher bracket unit 2100, and a thinner fabric T may be associated with a lower bracket unit 2100, the total or total height of the fabric T and the bracket unit 2100 may be constant or at least substantially constant between the proximal and distal ends of the end clamp, and thus the compression of a given total height by the abutment 2140 may be constant or at least substantially constant over the entire thickness.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 43 and 44, the bracket unit 2100 may have an asymmetric configuration. In at least one such embodiment, the height of the bracket block 2100 at its first end 2105 may be, for example, greater than the height of the bracket block 2100 at its second end 2106. In certain embodiments, the bracket block 2100 and / or the groove 2130 of the bracket block may comprise one or more alignment and / or holding elements, which may be configured to ensure that the bracket unit 2100 can be located within the groove 2130 of the bracket unit in only one orientation, i.e. in an orientation in which the first end 2105 is located at the distal end 2135 of the bracket block groove 2130 and the second end 2106 is located at the proximal end of 2136. In various alternative embodiments, the bracket block 2100 and / or bracket block groove 2130 may comprise one or more alignment and / or holding elements that can be configured to arrange the bracket unit 2100 in the groove 2130 of the bracket unit in more than one orientation. For example, as shown in FIG. 45, the bracket block 2100 can be located inside the groove 2130 of the bracket block so that the first end 2105 of the bracket block 2100 can be located at the proximal end 2136 of the groove 2130 of the bracket block, and the second end 2106 can be located at the distal end 2135. Thus, in various embodiments a smaller height of the bracket block 2100 may be located in close proximity to the distal retaining wall 2137, and a larger height of the bracket block 2100 may be located in close proximity to the proximal retaining wall e 2138. In at least one such embodiment, the brace unit 2100 may be appropriately positioned to apply a constant or at least substantially constant fixing pressure to the tissue T so that the thicker portion is located inside the distal end of the end clamp, and more the thin part is inside the proximal end of the end clamp. In various embodiments, the brace unit 2100, for example, may be selectively oriented within the groove 2130 of the brace unit. In at least one such embodiment, the alignment and / or retaining elements of the brace block 2100 may be symmetrical, and the surgeon may selectively orient the brace block 2100 inside the groove 2130 of the brace block 2130 in the orientations shown, for example, in FIG. 43 and FIG. 45.

In addition to the above, the implantable block body 2110 may include a longitudinal axis 2109 that can extend between the proximal and distal ends of the end clamp when the brace block 2100 is located in the groove 2130 of the brace block. In various embodiments, the thickness of the block body 2110 may substantially decrease and / or substantially increase between the first end 2105 and the second end 2106 along the longitudinal axis 2109. In at least one such embodiment, the distance, or height, between the bottom surface 2118 and the contact with a fabric surface 2119 may substantially decrease and / or substantially increase between the first end 2105 and the second end 2106. In certain embodiments, the thickness of the block body 2110 may both increase or decrease shatsya along the longitudinal axis 2109. In at least one such embodiment, the thickness of the housing unit 2110 may comprise one or more portions whose thickness is increased, and one or more parts, which can decrease the thickness. In various embodiments, the bracket unit 2100 may comprise a plurality of brackets 2120 located therein. During use, as described above, the brackets 2120 may become deformed when the stop 2140 moves to the closed position. In certain embodiments, each bracket 2120 may have the same or at least substantially the same height. In at least one such embodiment, the height of the bracket can be measured, for example, from the bottom of the base to the top, or the tip, of the highest leg of the bracket.

In various embodiments, the brackets within the bracket unit may have different heights. In at least one such embodiment, the bracket block may comprise a first group of brackets having a first bracket height that is located in the first part of the crush block body and a second group of brackets having a second bracket height that is located in the second part of the crush block body. In at least one embodiment, the first bracket height may be greater than the second bracket height, and the first bracket group may be located at the first end 2105 of the bracket block 2100, and the second bracket group may be located at the second end of the bracket 2106. In an alternative embodiment, the higher a first group of brackets may be located at the second end 2106 of the bracket block 2100, and a lower second group of brackets may be located at the first end of 2105. In certain embodiments, many groups can be used brackets, each of which has a different bracket height. In at least one such embodiment, a third group having an intermediate height of brackets may be located in the block body 2110 between the first group of brackets and the second group of brackets. In various embodiments, each bracket in a row of brackets in a bracket block may have a different height. In at least one embodiment, the highest bracket in a row may be located at the first end of the row of brackets, and the shortest bracket may be located at the opposite end of the row of brackets. In at least one such embodiment, the brackets located between the highest bracket and the shortest bracket can, for example, be positioned so that the height of the brackets decreases between the highest bracket and the shortest bracket.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 46, the end clamp of the surgical stapler may include an abutment 2240, a groove for the brace unit 2230, and a brace unit 2200 supported by the groove 2230 of the brace unit. The bracket block 2200 may comprise a casing 2210 of a crushable implantable block and a plurality of brackets located therein, such as, for example, brackets 2220a and 2220b. In various embodiments, the bracket block chute 2230 may comprise a block support surface 2231 and a plurality of bracket grooves formed therein, such as, for example, the bracket grooves 2232a and 2232b. In at least one such embodiment, the brace unit 2200 may comprise two outer rows of brackets 2220a and two inner rows of brackets 2220b, wherein the support grooves 2232a may be configured to support brackets 2220a, and the support grooves 2232b may be configured to support brackets 2220b. As represented in FIG. 46 and 47, the stop 2240 may comprise a plurality of recesses 2242 formed therein to form brackets that can be adapted to receive and deform the brackets 2220a and 2220b when the stop 2240 moves to the bracket block 2200. In at least one such embodiment, the lower the surfaces of the support grooves 2232a may be located at a first distance 2201a from the upper surfaces of the recesses 2242 to form brackets, and the lower surfaces of the support grooves 2232b may be located at a second distance 2201b from the upper surfaces of Lubes 2242 for the formation of brackets. In at least one such embodiment, the support grooves 2232b are located closer to the abutment 2240 due to the raised step on the supporting surface 2231 in which they are formed. Due to the different distances 2201a and 2201b in different embodiments, the outer rows of brackets 2220a and the inner rows of brackets 2220b may become different in height when deformed. In various situations, the brackets, which, during deformation, have acquired different heights in the formed state, may apply different fixing pressure or force to the stitched fabric T. In addition to the above, the brackets may have different heights of the unformed bracket. In at least one such embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46, the outer brackets 2220a may have an initial height in the unformed state that is greater than the initial height in the unformed state of the inner brackets 2220b. As represented in FIG. 46 and 47, the inner brackets 2220b having a lower height in an unformed state than the outer brackets 2220a can also have a lower height in the formed state than the outer brackets 2220a. In various alternative embodiments, the inner brackets 2220b may have a greater height in an unformed state than the outer brackets 2220a, while still having a lower height of the deformed bracket than the outer brackets 2220a.

In various embodiments, in addition to the above, the emphasis 2240 can be moved to the closed position, as shown in FIG. 47, for compressing the block body 2210 and deforming the brackets 2220a and 2220b. In certain embodiments, a surgical stapler comprising an end clamp shown in FIG. 46 and 47, may, for example, further comprise a cutting element that can be adapted to dissect the tissue T located between the abutment 2240 and the brace unit 2200. In at least one such embodiment, the abutment 2240, the groove 2230 of the brace unit and / or the bracket unit 2200 can form a groove configured to slide into the cutting element. More specifically, the stop 2240 may comprise a portion of the groove 2249, the chute 2230 of the bracket unit 2230 may comprise a portion of the groove 2239, and the bracket 2200 may comprise a portion of the groove 2203 that may be aligned or at least substantially aligned relative to each other when the stop 2240 is in a closed or at least substantially closed position. In various embodiments, the cutting element can be moved from the proximal end of the end clamp to the distal end of the working device after closing the stop 2240 and deforming the brackets 2220a, 2220b. In at least one embodiment, the cutting element can be moved independently of the deformation process of the brackets. In certain embodiments, the cutting element can be advanced along with the deformation of the brackets. In any case, in at least one embodiment, the cutting element may be configured to dissect tissue along a path extending between the inner rows of brackets 2220b.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 47, the inner brackets 2220b may have a lower height after forming than the outer brackets 2220a, the inner brackets 2220b may apply a higher fixing pressure or force to the fabric adjacent to the cut line created by the cutting element. In at least one such embodiment, a higher fixing pressure or force exerted by the inner brackets 2220b can provide various therapeutic effects, such as reducing bleeding from the cut tissue T, while a lower fixing pressure created by the outer brackets 2220a can provide flexibility inside stitched fabric. In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 46 and 47, the abutment 2240 may further comprise at least one portion of the supporting material attached thereto, such as, for example, the supporting material 2260. In at least one such embodiment, the legs of the brackets 2220a, 2220b may be configured to dissect the supporting material 2260 and / or passing through holes in the supporting material 2260 when the brace unit 2200 is compressed by the stop 2240, followed by interaction with the recesses 2242 to form brackets in the stop 2240. When the legs of the brackets 222 are deformed 0a, 2220b, the legs can again come into contact with and / or cut into support material 2260. In various embodiments, support material 2260 may improve hemostasis and / or provide additional strength to the stitched fabric.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 46 and 47, the lower surface of the block housing 2210 may have a step contour matching or at least substantially matching the step contour of the block supporting surface 2231. In certain embodiments, the bottom surface of the block body 2210 may be deformed to match, or at least substantially match, the outline of the block support surface 2231. In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 48, an end clamp, for example, similar to the end clamp shown in FIG. 46 may comprise a bracket block 2300 located therein. The bracket block 2300 may have a crushable implantable block housing 2310 comprising an inner layer 2312 and an outer layer 2311, wherein, in addition to the above, in at least one embodiment, the outer layer 2311 may be made of waterproof material. In various embodiments, the outer layer 2311 may extend around the brackets 2220a, 2220b and may be located between the brackets 2220a, 2220b and the support grooves 2232a, 2232b, respectively. In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 49, an end clamp, for example, similar to the end clamp shown in FIG. 46 may comprise a bracket block 2400 located therein. Like a bracket block 2300, a collapsible, implantable housing 2410 of a block 2400 may comprise an inner layer 2412 and an outer layer 2411. However, in at least one embodiment, the block housing 2410 may not have a groove for the cutting element. In at least one such embodiment, a cutting element may be necessary, for example, to dissect the inner layer 2412 and / or the outer layer 2411 while advancing through the bracket unit.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 50, the end clamp of the surgical stapler may include an abutment 2540, a bracket block groove 2530, and a bracket block 2500 located in the bracket block groove 2530. Similar to the above, the bracket block 2500 may include a case 2510 crushable implantable block, the outer rows of brackets 2220a and the inner rows of brackets 2220b. The bracket block chute 2530 may comprise a flat or at least substantially flat block support surface 2531 and bracket brackets 2532 formed therein. The stop 2540 may comprise a stepped surface 2541 and a plurality of recesses for forming brackets, such as, for example, the forming recesses 2542a and 2542b formed therein. Similar to the above, the distance formed between the forming recesses 2542a and the support grooves 2532 may be greater than the distance between the forming recesses 2452b and the support grooves 2532. In various embodiments, the stop 2540 may further comprise a portion of the supporting material 2560 attached to the stepped surface 2541 of the stop 2540 In at least one such embodiment, the supporting material 2560 may abut, or at least substantially abut, the stepped surface 2541. In various x embodiments supporting material 2560 can be attached removably to the surface 2541 by means of at least one adhesive, such as, e.g., fibrin and / or protein hydrogel. In certain embodiments, the block body 2510 may also have a step profile that in at least one embodiment is parallel or at least substantially parallel to the step surface 2541 of the stop 2540. More specifically, in at least one embodiment, the stop 2540 may include steps 2548 extending towards the bracket block 2500, said steps 2548 may have a height equal to or at least substantially equal to the height of the steps 2508 extending from the block body 2510. In at least one such embodiment, as a result of the above, the size of the crush block body 2510 that can be gripped in the first brackets 2220a may, for example, be different from the size of the crush block body 2510 that can be gripped in the second brackets 2220b.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 51, the end clamp may include an abutment 2640, a groove 2530 of the brace unit 2530 and a brace unit 2600 located between them. The brace unit 2600 may include a crushable implantable unit body 2610 including an inner layer 2612, an outer layer 2611 and a plurality of brackets located inside such as brackets 2220a and 2200b. In various embodiments, the emphasis 2640 may comprise a plurality of recesses 2642 for forming brackets in the surface 2641, and the groove 2530 of the bracket block may comprise a plurality of grooves 2532 for forming brackets formed in the supporting surface 2531. As shown in FIG. 51, the surface of the abutment 2641 may be parallel or at least substantially parallel to the block support surface 2531, in which each forming recess 2642 may be located at an equal or at least substantially equal distance from the opposite and corresponding bracket support groove 2532. In various embodiments, the brace unit 2600 may include brackets having the same or at least substantially the same initial height of the unformed bracket, as well as the same or at least substantially the same height of the brace formed. In other specific embodiments, the outer rows of brackets may comprise brackets 2220a, and the inner rows of brackets may comprise brackets 2220b, and as described above, the brackets 2220a and 2220b may have different heights of unformed brackets. When the emphasis 2640 is moved toward the bracket block 2600 to the closed position, the brackets 2220a and 2220b can be formed so that they have the same or at least substantially the same height of the brace formed. In at least one such embodiment, the deformed outer brackets 2220a and the inner brackets 2220b may have the same (or substantially the same) number of crashed block body 2610, however, because the outer brackets 2220a have a large height in an undeformed state, than the inner brackets 2220b, and can have the same height in a deformed state, the outer brackets 2220a can create a greater clamping force than the inner brackets 2220b.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 52, the end clamp of the surgical stapler may include an abutment 2740, a groove 2530 of the brace unit 2530, and a brace unit 2700 located inside the groove 2530 of the brace unit. Similarly to the above, the brace unit 2700 may comprise a crushable implantable unit body 2710 comprising an inner layer 2712, an outer layer 2711 and a plurality of brackets located therein, such as, for example, brackets 2220a and 2220b. In at least one embodiment, the thickness of the block body 2710 may vary across its width. In at least one such embodiment, the block body 2710 may comprise a center portion 2708 and side portions 2709, the center portion 2708 may have a thickness that is greater than the thickness of the side portions 2709. In various embodiments, the highest portion of the block body 2710 may be housed in the central part 2708, and the lowest part of the block body 2710 may be located in the side parts 2709. In at least one such embodiment, the thickness of the block body 2710 may gradually decrease between the central hour length 2708 and side parts 2709. In certain embodiments, the thickness of the block body 2710 may decrease linearly and / or exponentially between the central part 2708 and the side parts 2709. In at least one such embodiment, the fabric contacting surface 2719 of the block body 2710 may contain two deviated, or inclined, surfaces, beveled downward in the direction from the Central part 2708 to the side parts 2709. In various embodiments, the implementation of the emphasis 2740 may contain two rejected, or inclined e, surface parallel or at least substantially parallel rejected tissue contact surfaces 2719. In at least one embodiment, the stop 2740 may further comprise at least one portion of the supporting material 2760 attached to the abutment surfaces 2740 rejected.

In various embodiments, in addition to the above, the inner rows of brackets in the bracket block 2700 may contain higher brackets 2220a, and the outer rows of brackets may contain shorter brackets 2220b. In at least one embodiment, the higher brackets 2220a may be located inside and / or adjacent to the higher central portion 2708, while the brackets 2220b may be located inside and / or adjacent to the side portions 2709. In at least one such embodiment, as a result of the above, the higher brackets 2220a can capture more material of the implant unit body 2710 than the shorter brackets 2220b. Such situations can lead to the fact that the brackets 2220a will exert a greater fixing pressure on the fabric T than the brackets 2220b. In certain embodiments, although higher brackets 2220a can capture more material of the block body 2710 than shorter brackets 2220b, higher brackets 2220a can have a greater height of the formed bracket than shorter brackets 2220b due to the oblique arrangement of the bracket-forming recesses 2742a and 2742b. Such considerations can be used to achieve the necessary fixing pressure inside the fabric captured by the brackets 2220a and 2220b, and thus, the fixing pressure in the brackets 2220a can be, for example, higher, lower, or equal to the fixing pressure applied to the fabric by the brackets 2220b. In various alternative embodiments of the end clamp shown in FIG. 52, the shorter brackets 2220b may be located inside and / or adjacent to the thicker central part 2708 of the block body 2710, and the higher brackets 2220a may be located inside and / or adjacent to the thinner side parts 2709. Moreover, although the bracket unit 2700 shown contains the inner and outer rows of brackets, the bracket block 2700 may contain additional rows of brackets, such as, for example, rows of brackets located between the inner and outer rows of brackets. In at least one such embodiment, the intermediate rows of brackets may include brackets having, for example, a height of the unformed bracket that is intermediate between the heights of the unformed brackets 2220a and 2220b, and a height of the formed bracket that is intermediate between the heights of the formed brackets 2220a and 2220b, eg.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 53, the end clamp of the surgical stapler may include an abutment 2840, a bracket block groove 2530, and a bracket block 2800 located inside the bracket block groove 2530. Similarly to the above, the brace unit 2800 may comprise a collapsible implantable unit body 2810 comprising an inner layer 2812, an outer layer 2811 and a plurality of brackets located therein, such as, for example, brackets 2220a and 2220b. In at least one embodiment, the thickness of the block body 2810 may vary across its width. In at least one such embodiment, the block body 2810 may include a central portion 2808 and side portions 2809, the central portion 2808 may have a thickness that is less than the thickness of the side portions 2809. In various embodiments, the lowest portion of the block body 2810 may be accommodated in the central part 2810, and the highest part of the block body 2808 may be located in the side portions 2809. In at least one such embodiment, the thickness of the block body 2810 may gradually increase between the central see page 2808 and the side portions 2809. In certain embodiments, the thickness of the block body 2810 may increase linearly and / or exponentially between the central portion 2808 and the side portions 2809. In at least one such embodiment, the fabric contacting surface 2819 of the block body 2810 may comprise two deflected, or inclined, surfaces that slope upward in the direction from the central part 2808 to the side parts 2809. In various embodiments, the stop 2840 may comprise two rejected ejected or inclined surfaces parallel or at least substantially parallel to the deflected fabric contact surfaces 2819. In at least one embodiment, the abutment 2840 may further comprise at least one portion of support material 2860 attached to the deflected surfaces of the abutment 2840. In various embodiments, in addition to the above, the outer rows of brackets in the bracket block 2800 may contain higher brackets 2220a, and the inner rows of brackets may contain longer brackets Kie braces 2220b. In at least one embodiment, the higher brackets 2220a may be located inside and / or adjacent to the higher side portions 2809, while the brackets 2220b may be located inside and / or adjacent to the central portion 2808. In at least one such embodiment, as a result of the above, the higher brackets 2220a can capture more material of the implantable block body 2810 than the shorter brackets 2220b.

As described above in relation to the embodiment presented in FIG. 46, for example, the bracket block chute 2230 may comprise a stepped bearing surface 2231 that can be configured to support the brackets 2220a and 2220b at different heights relative to the stop 2240. In various embodiments, the bracket chute 2230 of the bracket block 2230 may consist of metal and a support step surfaces 2231 can be formed on the supporting surface 2231, for example, by grinding. In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 54, the end clamp of the surgical device may comprise a brace block groove 2930 comprising a supporting insert 2935 located therein. More specifically, in at least one embodiment, the brace block groove 2930 may be formed so that it has a flat or at least at least one a substantially flat abutment surface 2931, for example, configured to support an insert 2935 containing stepped surfaces to support the brackets 2220a and 2220b in the bracket block 2200 at different heights. In at least one such embodiment, insert 2935 may comprise a flat or at least substantially flat bottom surface that may be located opposite the abutment surface 2931. Insert 2935 may further comprise abutment grooves, grooves, or grooves 2932a and 2932b that may be formed with the possibility of supporting brackets 2220a and 2220b, respectively, at different heights. Similarly to the above, insert 2935 may include a groove 2939 of the cutting element, configured to pass the cutting element through it. In various embodiments, the gutter for the bracket unit 2930 may consist of the same material as the support insert 2935, or of another material. In at least one embodiment, both the gutter for the bracket unit 2930 and the support insert 2935 may, for example, consist of metal, while in other embodiments, the gutter for the bracket unit 2930 may, for example, consist of metal, and the support insert 2935 may, for example, consist of plastic. In various embodiments, the support insert 2935 may be attached and / or welded to the groove for the bracket unit 2930. In certain embodiments, the support insert 2935 may be mounted in the groove for the bracket unit 2930 with snap and / or interference fit. In at least one embodiment, the support insert 2935 may be secured to the gutter for the bracket unit 2930 using adhesive.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 55, the end clamp of the surgical stapler may comprise an abutment 3040, a bracket block groove 3030, and a crushable implantable bracket block 3000 located in the bracket block groove 3030. Similarly to the aforementioned, the stop 3040 may comprise a plurality of recesses 3042 formed therein for forming brackets and a groove 3049 for the cutting element, which can be made for sliding insertion of the cutting element into it. Also, similarly to the above, the trough 3030 of the bracket unit 3030 may comprise a plurality of support grooves 3032 for the brackets formed therein and a groove 3039 for the cutting element, which can also be adapted for sliding insertion of the cutting element into it. In various embodiments, the bracket block 3000 may comprise a first layer 3011, a second layer 3012, and a plurality of brackets located therein, such as, for example, brackets 3020a and 3020b. In at least one embodiment, the height of the unformed brackets 3020a may be greater than the height of the unformed brackets 3020b. In various embodiments, the first layer 3011 may consist of a first compressible material, and the second layer 3012 may consist of a second compressible material. In certain embodiments, the first compressible material may be compressed with greater force than the second compressible material, while in other specific embodiments, the first compressible material may be compressed with less force than the second compressible material. In at least one embodiment, the first compressible material may consist of an elastic material with a first coefficient of elasticity, and the second compressible material may consist of an elastic material with a second coefficient of elasticity different from the first coefficient of elasticity. In various embodiments, the first compressible material may have a higher coefficient of elasticity than the second compressible material. In other specific embodiments, the first compressible material may have a lower coefficient of elasticity than the second compressible material. In various embodiments, the first compressible layer may have a first stiffness and the second compressible layer may have a second stiffness, the first stiffness being different from the second stiffness. In various embodiments, the first compressible layer may have a higher stiffness than the second compressible layer. In other specific embodiments, the first compressible layer may have lower stiffness than the second compressible layer.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 55, the second layer 3012 of the bracket block 3000 may have a constant or at least substantially constant thickness across the entire width. In at least one embodiment, the first layer 3011 may have a thickness varying in width. In at least one such embodiment, the first layer 3011 may comprise one or more steps 3008 that can increase the thickness of the block body 3010 in certain parts of the block body 3010, such as, for example, a central portion. As represented in FIG. 55, shorter brackets 3020b may be placed on or aligned with steps 3008, i.e. the thicker parts of the block body 3010 and the higher brackets 3020a may be located within the thinner parts of the block body 3010 or aligned with them. In various embodiments, as a result of the presence of higher and lower portions of the block body 3010, the stiffness of the block body 3010 may be greater along the inner rows of brackets 3020b than along the outer rows of brackets 3020a. In various embodiments, the first layer 3011 may be in contact with the second layer 3012. In at least one such embodiment, the first layer 3011 and the second layer 3012 may contain interconnected elements that can hold layers 3011 and 3012 together. In certain embodiments, the first layer 3011 may be a first laminate and the second layer 3012 may be a second laminate, wherein the first laminate may be adhered to the second laminate using one or more adhesives. In various embodiments, the bracket unit 3000 may comprise a groove 3003 of the cutting element, which may be adapted to slide into the cutting element.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 56, the brace unit 3100 may comprise a crushable implantable unit case 3110 comprising one layer of compressible material, as well as a plurality of brackets located therein, such as, for example, brackets 3020b. In at least one embodiment, the thickness of the block body 3110 may vary across its width. In at least one such embodiment, the block body 3110 may comprise steps 3108 extending along its side portions. In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 57, the brace unit 3200 may comprise a case 3210 of a crushable implantable unit containing one layer of compressible material, as well as a plurality of brackets located therein, such as, for example, brackets 3020b. In at least one embodiment, the thickness of the block body 3210 may vary across its width. In at least one such embodiment, the block body 3210 may comprise steps 3208 extending along its central portion. In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 58, the bracket block 3300 may comprise a casing 3310 of a crushable implantable block, wherein, similarly to the above, the thickness of the block casing 3310 may vary along its width. In at least one embodiment, the thickness of the block body 3310 may increase exponentially between the side portions and the central part of the block body 3310. In at least one such embodiment, the thickness of the block casing 3310 may be determined by an arcuate or curved profile and may include an arcuate or curved tissue contact surface 3319. In certain embodiments, the thickness of the block casing 3310 and the contour of the tissue contact surface 3319 may be determined by one radius curvature or, in an alternative embodiment, for example, several radii of curvature. In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 59, the brace block 3400 may comprise a crushable implantable block case 3410, wherein the thickness of the block case 3410 may increase linearly or at least substantially linearly between the side portions and the central part of the block case 3410.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 60, the brace unit 3500 may comprise a case 3510 of a crushable implantable unit and a plurality of brackets 3520 located therein. The body 3510 of the implantable unit may comprise a first inner layer 3512, a second inner layer 3513 and an outer layer 3511. In at least one embodiment, the first inner layer 3512 may have a first thickness and the second inner layer 3513 may have a second thickness, the second inner layer 3513 may be thicker than the first inner layer 3512. In at least one alternative embodiment, the outer inner layer 3512 may be thicker than the second inner layer 3513. In another alternative embodiment, the first inner layer 3512 may have the same or at least substantially the same thickness as the second inner layer 3513. In certain embodiments, each bracket 3520 may comprise a base 3522 and one or more deformable legs 3521 extending from the base 3522. In various embodiments, each leg 3521 may include a tip 3523 inserted in the first inner layer 3511, as well as each base 3522 brackets 3520 may be inserted into the second inner layer 3512. In at least one embodiment, the first inner layer 3512 and / or the second inner layer 3513 may contain at least one drug stored therein, and in various embodiments, the outer layer 3511 can encapsulate and isolate the first inner layer 3512 and the second inner layer 3513 so that the drug does not flow out of the bracket unit case 3510 until the brackets 3520 pierce the outer layer 3511. More specifically, in addition to the above, the emphasis can be pressed downward on the fabric opposite the surface 3519 of the bracket block 3500 in contact with the fabric so that the block body 3510 is compressed and the surface 3519 is moved down and at least partially below the ends of the brackets 3523 so that the ends of the brackets 3523 break or pierce the outer layer 3511. After piercing the outer layer 3511 with the legs of the brackets 3521, at least one drug M can flow out of the block case 3510 around the legs of the brackets 3521. In various situations, additional compression of the block body 3510 may result in extrusion of an additional amount of the drug M from the block body 3510, as shown in FIG. 61.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 60, the outer layer 3511 may comprise a waterproof or at least substantially waterproof shell that can be configured to, firstly, prevent the drug from leaking prematurely from the brace unit 3500, and secondly, to prevent premature fluid from entering the operating room the field, for example, into the bracket block 3500. In certain embodiments, the first inner layer 3512 may contain the first drug stored or absorbable in this layer, and the second in the inner layer 3513 may contain a second drug stored or absorbable in the layer, the second drug may be different from the first drug. In at least one embodiment, the initial compression of the block body 3510, leading to the breakthrough of the outer layer 3511, can essentially lead to the release of the first drug from the first inner layer 3512, and further compression of the block body 3510 can essentially lead to the release of the second drug from the second inner layer 3513. However, in such embodiments, portions of the first drug and the second drug can be detached simultaneously, although a large h st first liberating medicament may consist of a first drug, and most of the drug released after this, may consist of a second drug. In certain embodiments, in addition to the above, the first inner layer 3512 may consist of more compressible material than the second inner layer 3513, so that the initial compressive force or pressure, which may be weaker than the subsequent compressive force or pressure, can lead to more strong initial deformation in the first inner layer 3512 than in the second inner layer 3513. A stronger initial deformation inside the first inner layer 3512 can lead to the release of most the first drug from the first inner layer 3512 than the second drug from the second inner layer 3513. In at least one embodiment, the first inner layer 3512 may be more porous and / or more flexible than the second inner layer 3513. At least one such embodiment, the first inner layer 3512 may comprise a plurality of pores or voids formed therein, 3508, and the second inner layer 3513 may comprise a plurality of pores or voids formed therein, 3509, wherein In these embodiments, the pores 3508 can be configured to store the first drug in the first inner layer 3512, and the pores 3509 can be configured to store the second drug in the second inner layer 3513. In certain embodiments, the size and density of the pores 3508 inside the first inner layer 3512 and pores 3509 inside the second inner layer 3513 can be selected so as to provide the desired result described herein.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 60 and 61, the outer layer 3511, the first inner layer 3512 and / or the second inner layer 3513 may be formed from bioabsorbable material. In at least one embodiment, the first inner layer 3512 may consist of a first bioabsorbable material, the second inner layer 3513 may consist of a second bioabsorbable material, and the outer layer 3511 may consist of a third bioabsorbable material, the first bioabsorbable material, the second bioabsorbable material and / or the third bioabsorbable material may be different materials. In certain embodiments, the first bioabsorbable material may be bioabsorbable at a first speed, the second bioabsorbable material may bioabsorb at a second speed, and the third bioabsorbable material may bioabsorb at a third speed, the first speed, second speed and / or third speed may be different. In at least one such embodiment, when the material is biologically absorbed at a certain rate, that rate can be defined as the mass of material absorbed by the patient’s body per unit time. As you know, the organisms of different patients can absorb different materials at different speeds, and thus, to take into account such variability, such speeds can be described as average speeds. In any case, there may be a higher speed at which a larger mass of material is biologically absorbed per unit time than at a lower speed. In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 60 and 61, the first inner layer 3512 and / or the second inner layer 3513 may be formed from a material that biologically absorbable faster than the material that the outer layer 3511 consists of. In at least one such embodiment, the first inner layer 3512 and / or the second inner layer 3513 may consist of bioabsorbable foam, tissue sealant and / or hemostatic material, such as, for example, oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC), the outer layer 3511 may consist of a supporting material and / or a plastic material such as, for example, polyglycolic acid (PGA), commercially available under the trade name Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglexaprone 25 (PGCL), commercially available under the trade name Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL) and / or a mixture of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and / or PCL. In such embodiments, the first inner layer 3512 and / or the second inner layer 3513 can have an immediate effect on the tissue, for example, reducing bleeding from the tissue, and the outer layer 3514 can provide long-term structural support and bioabsorb at a lower rate.

Due to the lower bioabsorption rate of the outer layer 3511, in addition to the above, the outer layer 3511 can support or strengthen the structure of the tissue inside the line of brackets during the healing process. In certain embodiments, one of the first inner layer 3512 and the second inner layer 3513 may consist of a material that can biologically absorb faster than the other material, so that in at least one embodiment, one of the layers can provide an initial release of therapeutic material, and another layer may provide a sustained release of the same therapeutic material and / or other therapeutic material. In at least one such embodiment, the rate of release of therapeutic material from layer 3512, 3513 may be a function of the bioabsorption of the substrate layer in which the drug is resorbed or dispersed. For example, in at least one embodiment, the substrate containing the first inner layer 3512 can biologically absorb faster than the substrate containing the second inner layer 3513, and thus, the drug can, for example, be released from the first inner layer 3512 faster, than from the second inner layer 3513. In various embodiments, as described herein, one or more layers 3511, 3512 and 3513 of the block body 3510 may be glued to each other using at least one adhesive such as, for example, fibrin and / or protein hydrogel. In certain embodiments, the adhesive may be water soluble and may be configured to break the bond between the layers when the brace unit 3500 is implanted and / or after some time has passed. In at least one such embodiment, the adhesive may be bioabsorbable at a faster rate than the outer layer 3511, the first inner layer 3512 and / or the second inner layer 3513.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 62 and 63, a bracket block, such as, for example, bracket block 3600, may comprise a block body 3610 including a compressible first layer 3611, a second layer 3612 attached to the first layer 3611, and a removable compressible layer 3613 attached to the second layer 3612. In at least one such embodiment, the first layer 3611 may consist of compressible foam, the second layer 3612 may consist of a laminate adhered to the first layer 3611 using one or more adhesives, and the third layer 3613 may consist of a compressible foam glued removably to the second layer 3612, for example, using one or more adhesives. In various embodiments, the bracket block 3600 may further comprise a plurality of brackets, such as, for example, brackets 3620 located inside the block housing 3610. In at least one such embodiment, each bracket 3620 may, for example, comprise a base 3622 located in the third layer 3613 and one or more deformable legs 3621 extending upward from the base 3622 through the second layer 3612 and into the first layer 3611. In the process use, in addition to the above, the upper surface 3619 of the bracket body 3610 can be pressed down with an emphasis until the legs of the brackets 3621 pass through the upper surface 3619 and the target fabric until they come into contact with the emphasis. After sufficient deformation of the legs of the brackets 3621, the emphasis can be moved away from the bracket block 3600 so that its compressible layers can at least partially experience back expansion. In various situations, inserting brackets through the tissue can cause bleeding in the tissue. In at least one embodiment, the third layer 3613 may consist of absorbent material, such as, for example, protein hydrogel, which can drain blood from stitched tissue. In addition to or in place of the above, the third layer 3613 may consist of a hemostatic material and / or tissue sealant, such as, for example, lyophilized thrombin and / or fibrin, which may be configured to reduce bleeding from the tissue. In certain embodiments, the third layer 3613 may serve as structural support for the first layer 3611 and the second layer 3612, wherein the third layer 3613 may consist of bioabsorbable and / or non-bioabsorbable material. In any case, in various embodiments, the third layer 3613 may be separated from the second layer 3612 after implantation of the brace unit 3610. In embodiments where the third layer 3613 contains implantable quality material, the surgeon may choose whether to remove the third layer 3613 from the body 3610 blocks. In at least one embodiment, the third layer 3613 may be configured to separate completely from the second layer 3612.

In various embodiments, the first layer 3611 may consist of a first foam, and the third layer 3613 may consist of a second foam, which may be different from the first foam. In at least one embodiment, the first foam may have a first density and the second foam may have a second density, wherein the first density may be different from the second density. In at least one such embodiment, the second density may be higher than the first density, and thus, the third layer 3613 may be less compressible or have a lower compression ratio than the first layer 3611. In at least one alternative embodiment, the first density may be higher than the second density, and thus, the first layer 3611 may be less compressible or have a lower compression ratio than the third layer 3613. In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 64 and 65, the bracket block 3700, similar to the bracket block 3600, may comprise a block body 3710 comprising a first layer of compressible foam 3711, a second layer 3712 attached to the first layer 3711, and a third layer of compressible foam 3713 configured to separate and removably attached to the second layer 3712. In at least one such embodiment, the third layer 3713 may comprise a plurality of receiving grooves, or recesses, for brackets 3709, each of which may be configured to receive at least a portion of the flanges 3620, such as, for example, the base of the bracket 3622. In certain embodiments, the brackets 3620 can be slidably inserted into the receiving grooves 3709 of the brackets or, in other words, the third layer 3713 can be slidably moved relative to the brackets 3620, when, for example, the brace unit 3700 is located opposite the target fabric and is compressed by the stop. In at least one embodiment, the receiving grooves 3709 may be configured so that there is a gap between the brackets 3620 and the side walls of the receiving grooves 3709. In at least one such embodiment, as a result of the above, the brackets 3620 may not capture part of the third layer 3713 when the brackets 3620 undergo deformation, as shown in FIG. 64 and 65. In other specific embodiments, the ends of the receiving slots for the brackets 3709 next to the second layer 3712 can be covered by part of the third layer 3713, and thus at least part of the third layer 3713 can be caught by brackets 3620 when they are deformed. In any case, the third layer 3713 may contain, for example, one or more perforations and / or notches 3708, which can be configured to separate the third layer 3713 from the second layer 3712 in two or more parts, as shown in FIG. 64. In FIG. 64 shows the separation of one of the parts of the third layer 3713 using the apparatus 3755. In various embodiments, perforations 3708 may be located along a line between the first row of brackets and the second row of brackets.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 64 and 65, the bases 3622 of the brackets 3620 can be located inside the receiving grooves 3709, and in at least one embodiment, the side walls of the receiving grooves 3709 can be made to come into contact and hold with the possibility of releasing the legs of the brackets 3621 in position. In certain embodiments, although not shown in the figures, the third layer 3713 may comprise an elongated groove surrounding all of the brackets in the brace line. In at least one such embodiment, the bracket block, containing, for example, four rows of brackets, may comprise an elongated groove aligned with each row of brackets in the bottom layer of the bracket block. In addition to the above, at least a portion of the brace block 3600 and / or the brace block 3700 can be implanted in the patient’s body, and at least a portion of the brace block can be removed from the patient’s body. In at least one embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64 and 65, the first layer 3711 and the second layer 3712 can be gripped by brackets 3620 and implanted with brackets 3620, while the third layer 3713 can optionally be removed or separated from the brace unit 3700. In various situations, removing a portion of the implanted brace block can reduce the amount of material , which should absorb the patient’s body, which can provide various therapeutic effects. In the case of separation or removal of a portion of the brace block using an apparatus such as, for example, a laparoscopic apparatus 3755, the separated part of the brace block may be removed from the surgical field through a trocar, such as, for example, a trocar with a 5 mm hole. In certain embodiments, a block body may comprise more than one layer that may be removed. For example, the block body 3710 may comprise a fourth layer, the third layer 3713 of the block body 3710 may consist of hemostatic material, and the fourth layer may consist of a support layer. In at least one such embodiment, the surgeon may remove the backing layer and then, for example, decide whether to remove the hemostatic layer.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 66, a bracket block, such as, for example, bracket 3800, may comprise a block body 3810 including an outer layer 3811 and an inner layer 3812. The inner layer 3812 may consist of compressible foam, and the outer layer 3811 may at least partially surround the inner layer 3812. In at least one embodiment, the outer layer 3811 may include a first portion 3811a configured to be located on the first side of the inner layer 3812, and a second portion 3811b configured to be located on the second side of the inner a backing layer 3812, wherein the first part 3811a and the second part 3811b can be connected by a flexible joint, such as, for example, a joint 3809. In at least one such embodiment, at least one adhesive, such as, for example, fibrin and / or protein a hydrogel may be applied to the first side and / or second side of the inner layer 3812 to attach portions of the outer layer 3811 thereon. In various embodiments, the outer layer 3811 may comprise one or more fasteners extending therefrom. In at least one such embodiment, the outer layer 3811 may comprise a plurality of deformable legs 3821 extending from one side of the outer layer 3811 that can be installed in the compressible inner layer 3812. In at least one such embodiment, the legs 3821 may not protrude the second side of the inner layer 3812, while in at least one alternative embodiment, the legs 3821 can at least partially protrude from the inner layer 3812. The legs 3821 can be configured to poured inner layer 3812 and the second part 3811b of the outer layer 3811, if in use, the case 3810 crumpled block is crushed. In certain embodiments, the second portion 3811b of the outer layer 3811 may comprise holes, such as, for example, holes 3808, which may be configured to receive the legs of brackets 3821. In certain embodiments, at least portions of the bracket block 3800 may comprise a groove 3803 of the cutting element which can be made with the possibility of a sliding insertion of a cutting element into it. In at least one such embodiment, the groove of the cutting element 3803 may not completely extend through the thickness of the block body 3810, and thus, the cutting element may cut through the block body 3810 when moving relative to it.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 67, similarly to the bracket block 3800, the bracket block 3900 may comprise a block body 3910 including an inner layer 3812 and an outer layer 3811, the outer layer 3811 may include a first portion 3811a adjacent to the first side of the inner layer 3812 and a second portion 3811b, located adjacent to the second side of the inner layer 3812. In at least one embodiment, similar to that described above, the outer layer 3811 may contain one or more passing from it fasteners. In at least one such embodiment, the outer layer 3811 may comprise a plurality of deformable legs 3921 extending from one side of the outer layer 3811 that may be installed in the compressible inner layer 3812. In certain embodiments, each deformable leg 3921 may comprise at least one the hook protruding from it, or notch, 3923, which can be adapted to engage the second part 3811b of the outer layer 3811 and, thus, hold the outer layer 3811 with the inner layer 3812. By m in at least one such embodiment, the notches 3923 can be configured to protrude from the second side of the inner layer 3812 and pass through the holes 3808 in the second part 3811b of the outer layer 3811 so that the notches 3923 can engage on the outer surface of the outer layer 3811 and block the outer a layer 3811 with an inner layer 3812. For the manufacture of the bracket block 3900, the inner layer 3812 can be at least partially compressed so that the notches can protrude from it and enter the holes 3808. At least is, in one such embodiment, the bracket unit 3900 may be, for example, at least partially pre-compressed during insertion into the bracket unit. In certain embodiments, in addition to the above, at least a portion of the legs 3921 may be inserted into the first portion 3811a of the outer layer 3811, wherein in at least one embodiment, the outer layer 3811 may consist of a plastic material, such as, for example, polydioxanone (PDS) and / or polyglycolic acid (PGA), and a plastic material may be formed around at least a portion of the legs 3921.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 68-72, a brace block, such as, for example, a brace block 4000, may comprise a block body 4010 including a compressible first layer 4011 and a second layer 4012, as well as a plurality of brackets 4020 located inside the block body 4010. In certain embodiments, as presented in FIG. 70, each bracket 4020 may include a base 4022 and at least one deformable leg 4023 extending from the base 4022. In at least one embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the brace unit 4000 may be located between the groove of the brace unit and the stop 4040 of the end clamp of the surgical stapler, the second layer 4012 of the body 4010 of the block and / or the base 4022 of the brackets 4020 may be adjacent to the groove 4030 of the brace unit. In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 69, the second layer 4012 may include a layer of gaskets 4060, which are connected to each other by means of a support frame 4061 gaskets. In at least one such embodiment, the gaskets 4060 and the gasket support frame 4061 may comprise molded plastic material, such as, for example, polyglycolic acid (PGA). Each gasket 4060 may comprise one or more holes or slots 4062, which may be configured to receive a bracket leg 4021 passing through them, as shown in FIG. 70 and 71. Each gasket 4060 may further comprise a receiving groove 4063 formed therein, which may be configured to receive a base 4022 of the bracket 4020. In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 69, gaskets 4060 and / or gasket support frame 4061 may comprise a plurality of notches, perforations, or the like, which may be configured to separate gaskets 4060 from gasket support frame 4061 at a desired location. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 71, one or more pads 4060 may be connected to each other along a line containing, for example, perforations and / or notches 4064. During use, the compressible foam layer 4011 may be located opposite the target fabric T, and the block body 4010 may be compressed by a stop 4040 such so that the stop 4040 can deform the brackets 4020. When the brackets 4020 are deformed, the legs 4021 of each bracket 4020 can grab the fabric T, part of the first layer 4011 and the gasket 4060 inside the deformed bracket. When the bracket block chute 4030 is moved, for example, from the implanted bracket block 4060, the gasket support frame 4061 can be separated from the gaskets 4060 and / or the gaskets 4060 can be separated from each other. In certain situations, the gaskets 4060 may be separated from the frame 4061 and / or from each other during the deformation of the brackets 4020 with a stop 4040, as described above.

In the various embodiments described herein, the brackets from the bracket unit are fully formed by the stop when it is moved to the closed position. In other various embodiments, implementation, as shown in FIG. 73-76, the brackets of the bracket block, such as, for example, the bracket block 4100, can be deformed by the stop when it is moved to the closed position, as well as by the bracket ejector system that moves the brackets to the closed stop. The bracket block 4100 may comprise a crush block housing 4110, which may consist, for example, of foam, as well as a plurality of brackets 4120 at least partially located within the crush block housing 4110. In various embodiments, the bracket ejector system may include an ejector holder 4160, a plurality of bracket ejector 4162 located within the ejector holder 4160, and a bracket tray 4180 that can be configured to hold the bracket ejector 4162 in the ejector holder 4160. In at least one such embodiment, the brace ejectors 4162 may be located within one or more grooves 4163 in the ejector holder 4160, the side walls of the grooves 4163 may help guide the brace ejectors 4162 up in the direction of stop. In various embodiments, the brackets 4120 can be supported in the grooves 4163 by means of the brackets ejector 4162, in at least one embodiment, the brackets 4120 can be completely inside the grooves 4163 when the brackets 4120 and the brackets ejector 4162 are inoperative. In other specific embodiments, at least a portion of the brackets 4120 may extend upwardly through the open ends 4161 of the grooves 4163 when the brackets 4120 and the brace ejectors 4162 are inoperative. In at least one such embodiment, as primarily presented in FIG. 74, the bases of the brackets 4120 can be located inside the ejector holder 4160, and the ends of the brackets 4120 can be placed inside the casing of the squeeze unit 4110. In certain embodiments, about one third of the height of the brackets 4120 can be located inside the holder 4160 of the ejectors, and about two-thirds of the height of the brackets 4120 can located inside the block housing 4110. In at least one embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73A, the bracket block 4100 may further comprise, for example, a waterproof sheath or membrane 4111, a surrounding block housing 4110, and an ejector holder 4160.

In use, the bracket block 4100 can be located, for example, inside the groove of the bracket block, and the emphasis can be moved towards the bracket block 4100 in the closed position. In various embodiments, the emphasis may come into contact and compress the casing 4110 of the crumpled unit as it moves to the closed position. In certain embodiments, the emphasis may not be in contact with the brackets 4120 when it is in the closed position. In other specific embodiments, the implementation of the emphasis may be in contact with the legs of the brackets 4120 and at least partially deform the brackets 4120 when it moves to the closed position. In any case, the bracket block 4100 may further comprise one or more slides 4170 that can be advanced longitudinally inside the bracket block 4100 so that the slide 4170 can sequentially engage the bracket ejector 4162 and move the bracket ejector 4162 and the bracket 4120 to the stop. In various embodiments, the slide 4170 may slide between the bracket unit tray 4180 and the bracket ejectors 4162. In embodiments where closing the stop starts the process of forming the brackets 4120, moving the brackets 4120 up to the stop can complete the process of forming and deform the brackets 4120 to their fully formed state or at least to the desired height. In embodiments where closing the stop does not deform the brackets 4120, moving the brackets 4120 up to the stop can start and complete the process of forming and deforming the brackets 4120 to their fully formed state or at least to the desired height. In various embodiments, the slide 4170 can be advanced from the proximal end of the bracket block 4100 to the distal end of the bracket block 4100 so that the brackets 4120 located at the proximal end of the bracket block 4100 are fully formed before the brackets 4120 located at the distal end of the bracket block 4100. In at least one embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75, each slide 4170 may comprise at least one inclined, or deviated, surface 4711, which may be configured to slip under the brace ejectors 4162 and raise the brace ejectors 4162, as shown in FIG. 76.

In various embodiments, in addition to the above, the brackets 4120 can be formed so as to grab at least a portion of the tissue T and at least a portion of the body 4110 of the compressible brace unit 4100. After the brackets 4120 are formed, the abutment and groove 4130 of the surgical brace unit the stapler can be moved away from the implanted bracket unit 4100. In various situations, the unit tray 4180 can be fixedly engaged with the groove of the bracket unit 4130, and thus the unit tray 4180 can separate be removed from the case 4110 of the crushable unit while pulling the groove 4130 of the bracket unit from the case 4110 of the implantable unit. In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 73, the block tray 4180 may comprise opposing side walls 4181 between which the block body 4110 may be removably disposed. In at least one such embodiment, the collapsible block case 4110 can be compressed between the side walls 4181 so that during use the block case 4110 can be locked between them, and when the tray 411 is pulled out, the block can be removed to be removed from meshing with the tray 4180 block. In at least one such embodiment, the ejector holder 4160 4160 can be attached to the unit tray 4180 so that the ejector holder 4160, the ejectors 4162 and / or the slide 4170 can remain in the unit tray 4180 when the unit tray 4180 is removed from the surgical field. In other specific embodiments, the ejectors 4162 can be removed from the ejector holder 4160 and left in the operative field. In at least one such embodiment, ejectors 4162 may consist of a bioabsorbable material, such as, for example, polyglycolic acid (PGA), commercially available under the trade name Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglecaprone 25 (PGCL), commercially available under the trade name Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL) and / or a mixture of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and / or PCL. In various embodiments, the pushers 4162 can be attached to the brackets 4120 so that the pushers 4162 are placed together with the brackets 4120. In at least one such embodiment, each pusher 4162 may include a groove configured to receive, for example, the bases 4120 of the brackets, moreover, in at least one embodiment, the grooves can be configured to receive the bases of the brackets by pressing or snapping in.

In certain embodiments, in addition to the above, the ejector holder 4160 and / or the slide 4170 can be removed from the unit tray 4180. In at least one such embodiment, the slide 4170 can slide between the block tray 4180 and the ejector holder 4160 so that the slide 4170 can move the ejector holder 4160 up from the block tray 41 when the slide 4170 is moved to push the ejectors 4162 brackets and brackets 4120 up . In at least one such embodiment, the ejector holder 4160 and / or the slide 4170 may consist of a bioabsorbable material, such as, for example, polyglycolic acid (PGA), commercially available under the trade name Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglexaprone 25 (PGCL), commercially available under the trade name Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL) and / or a mixture of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and / or PCL. In various embodiments, the slide 4170 may be integrally formed and / or attached to a push rod or cutting element that pushes the slide 4170 through the bracket block 4100. In such embodiments, the slide 4170 may not be removed from the block tray 4180 and may leave on the surgical stapler, while in other embodiments in which the slide 4170 is not attached to the push rod, the slide 4170 can be left in the surgical field. In any case, in addition to the above, the compressibility of the block body 4110 allows the use of larger width brace blocks inside the end clamp of the surgical stapler, since the block body 4110 can be compressed when the stop of the stapler is closed. In certain embodiments, as a result of at least partial deformation of the brackets, when closing the stop, higher brackets can be used, such as, for example, brackets with a height of approximately 4.572 mm (0.18 inches), and approximately 3.048 mm (0.12 inches) from height the brackets may be located inside the compressible layer 4110, and the compressible layer 4110 in the uncompressed state may have a height of, for example, approximately 3,556 mm (0.14 inches).

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 77-80, a bracket block, such as, for example, bracket 4200, may comprise a collapsible block housing 4210, a plurality of brackets 4220 located therein, and a plurality of flexible side support elements 4234. In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 78, the brace unit 4200 may be positioned between the abutment 4240 and the groove of the brace unit 42, and in at least one embodiment, side support elements 4234 may be attached to the groove 4230 of the brace unit. When moved downward, the stop 4240 compresses the block body 4210 and at least partially deforms the brackets 4220, as shown in FIG. 79, the side portions of the block housing 4210 can be pulled out on the sides and push the side support members 4234 out. In at least one such embodiment, the side support members 4234 may be attached to the block body 4210, and the side support members 4234 may be separated from the block body 4210, as shown in FIG. 79, when the block body 4210 is distributed on the sides, as described above. In at least one embodiment, the transverse support elements 4234 may be adhered to the block body 4210 using at least one adhesive, such as, for example, fibrin and / or protein hydrogel. Similar to the above, closing the stop 4240 can only partially deform the brackets 4220, and the formation of the brackets 4220 can end with the movement of one or more slides 4270 through the brace block 4200, as shown in FIG. 80. In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 82 and 83, the slide 4270 may advance from the proximal end of the brace unit 4200 to the distal end of the brace unit 4200 using the cutting member 4280. In at least one such embodiment, the cutting member 4280 may be a cutting member, or knife, 4283, which may move through fabric T and / or case 4210 crumple block. In certain embodiments, the cutting member 4280 may comprise cam elements 4282 that can move along the outer surfaces of the branches 4230 and 4240 and move or hold the branches in position. In various embodiments, as a result of the foregoing, the final shape may be attached to the brackets 4220 at the same time or at least substantially simultaneously with the cutting of the fabric T. At least in one such embodiment, the slide 4270 may be located distally relative to the cutting element 4283 so that the fabric T, for example, is excised only when the previous part of the fabric is completely stitched with brackets.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 82 and 83, the slide 4270 may comprise individual sliding elements that are advanced together by the cutting element 4280. In at least one such embodiment, the slide 4270 may be located inside the bracket block 4200, and the trigger 4280 may slide into the bracket block 4200 using the trigger rod 4281 so that the cutting element 4280 engages with the slide 4270 and moves them distally. In certain embodiments, the slide 4270 may be coupled to each other. In any case, each slide 4270 may comprise an inclined surface, or cam, 4271, which may be configured to lift brackets 4220 aligned within a row of brackets. In certain embodiments, the inclined surfaces 4271 may be integral with the cutting element 4280. In at least one embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82 and 83, each bracket 4200 may include a base, at least one deformable element extending from the base, and a head 4229 molded onto and / or located around at least a portion of the base and / or deformable elements of the bracket 4200. In various embodiments such heads 4229 can be directly extruded, for example, by a slide 4270. More specifically, in at least one embodiment, the heads 4229 of the brackets 4220 can be made so that the inclined surfaces and 4271 slide 4270 could slip under the heads 4229 and directly contact with them without placing between them the ejector brackets. In such embodiments, each head 4229 may comprise at least one interacting inclined, or deviated, surface that can engage with the inclined surface 4271 of the slide 4270 so that the interacting inclined surfaces can push the brackets 4220 upward when the slide 4270 slides under brackets 4220.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 81, a brace unit, such as, for example, a brace unit 4300, may include a crush unit case 4310 and a plurality of brackets 4320 located inside the crush unit case 4310. Similar to the above, the brace unit 4300 may include flexible transverse support elements 4334 that can be attached to the groove of the brace unit and / or glued to a compressible housing 4310. In addition to the above, the flexible transverse support elements 4334 can be connected to each other by one or more beams, or connecting elements, 4335, which can be configured to hold the transverse support elements 4334 together. In use, the connecting elements 4335 may be configured to prevent or at least prevent premature separation of the transverse support elements 4334 from the block body 4310. In certain embodiments, the connecting elements 4335 may be configured to hold the transverse support elements 4334 together after pressing the brace unit 4300 in focus. In such embodiments, the transverse support elements 4334 may resist lateral bending or displacement of the transverse parts of the block body 4310. In certain embodiments, a cutting element, such as, for example, a cutting element 4280, may be able to cross-cut the connecting elements 4335 while moving the cutting element 4280 distally inside the block body 4310. In at least one such embodiment, the cutting element 4280 may be configured to push one or more slides, such as, for example, the slide 4270, distally to form the brackets 4320 with emphasis. The slide 4270 can guide the cutting edge 4283 so that the cutting element 4280 does not cut the connecting element 4335 until the brackets 4320 adjacent to this connecting element 4335 are fully formed or at least formed to the desired height. In various situations, the connecting elements 4335 together with the transverse support elements 4334 can prevent or at least reduce the lateral movement of the casing 4310 of the crush unit and at the same time prevent or at least reduce the lateral movement of the brackets 4320 located inside the block 4310. In such situations, the connecting elements 4335 can hold the brackets 4320 in position until they are deformed, after which the connecting elements 4335 can be dissected to release the transverse parts of the block case 4310. As indicated above, the transverse support elements 4334 can be connected to the groove of the brace unit and, thus, can be removed from the surgical field with the groove of the brace unit after implantation of the brace unit 4300. In certain embodiments, the transverse support elements 4334 may consist of implantable material and stay in the surgical field. In at least one embodiment, the connecting elements 4335 may be located between the block body 4310 and the tissue T, and after separating the connecting elements 4335 from the transverse support elements 4334, the connecting elements 4335 may remain implanted in the patient’s body. In at least one such embodiment, the connecting elements 4335 may consist of implantable material, and in certain embodiments, the connecting elements 4335 may consist, for example, of the same material as the transverse support elements 4334. In various embodiments, the connecting elements 4335 and / or transverse support elements 4334 may consist of a flexible bioabsorbable material, such as, for example, polyglycolic acid (PGA), commercially available under the trade name Vicryl, from limolactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglecaprone 25 (PGCL), commercially available under the trade name Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL) and / or a mixture of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and / or PCL. In various embodiments, the connecting element may comprise a sheet of material connecting to the transverse support elements 4334. In certain embodiments, the bracket unit may comprise connecting elements passing through the upper surface of the block body 4310, as well as connecting elements passing around the lower surface of the block body 4310 .

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 84, the bracket unit may comprise brackets, such as, for example, brackets 4420, which may include a wire portion inserted in the head portion. In at least one embodiment, the wire portion may consist of a metal, such as, for example, titanium and / or stainless steel, and / or plastic, such as, for example, polydioxanone (PDS) and / or polyglycolic acid (PGA). In at least one embodiment, the head portion may consist of metal, such as, for example, titanium and / or stainless steel, and / or plastic, such as, for example, polydioxanone (PDS) and / or polyglycolic acid (PGA). In certain embodiments, the wire portion of each bracket 4420 may comprise a base 4422 and deformable legs 4421 extending from the base 4422, the portion of the head of each bracket 4420 may comprise a head 4429 that may be configured to receive at least a portion of the base 4422. To assemble together parts of each bracket 4420, as shown in FIG. 85A-85C, the legs 4421 of the wire portion can be inserted into the hole 4426 in the head 4429, and the hole 4426 can be configured to guide the legs 4421 into the chamber for the base 4427. The wire portion can be further inserted into the head 4429 so that the legs 4421 exited the chamber for the base 4427, and the base 4422 of the wire portion entered the chamber for the base 4427. In at least one such embodiment, the chamber for the base 4427 may be rotatable within the head 4429 when entering the base 4422 into the chamber for the base 4427 so that the legs of the bracket 4421 are directed upward or at least substantially upward. In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 84, head 4429 may include outlet openings 4425, which may be configured to receive legs of brackets 4421.

In various embodiments, in addition to the above, the surgical stapler may include a slide 4470 configured to extend laterally through the brace block 4400 and the groove 4430 of the brace block and move the brackets 4420 located inside the block body 4410 in the direction of stop. In various situations, the slide 4470 can move from the proximal end of the bracket block groove 4430 to the distal end of the block groove for implantation of the block body 4410 and brackets 4420. In certain situations, the slide 4470 can be retracted or returned to the proximal end of the block groove 4430 and into the groove 4430 another bracket unit 4400 can be inserted in the unit. After placing the new bracket unit 4400 in the groove 4430 of the slide unit 4470, it can again be extended distally. In various embodiments, the surgical stapler may include one or more locking members that can prevent the slide 4470 from re-extending distally without placing a new bracket block 4400 in the block groove 4430. In at least one such embodiment, as shown in FIG. 84, the bracket block chute 4430 may include a blocking arm 4439 that can be configured to prevent or at least restrict the distal movement of the slide 4470. More specifically, the slide 4470 can be abutted against the shoulder 4439 if the slide 4470 does not at least partially raised up above the shoulder 4439 with, for example, a lifting member 4428 extending between the most proximal brackets 4420 inside the brace unit 4400. In other words, the slide 4470 cannot be advanced forward about absence most proximal staples 4420 in the new staple block 4400. Thus, if in the channel unit 4430 is used the bracket unit 4400, or if the block in the groove 4430 is not block the bracket 4400, the staple sled 4470 can not advance into the chute block 4430.

In addition to the above, as shown in FIG. 86, a brace unit, such as, for example, brace unit 4500, may be located within the groove 4530 of brace unit 4530 and may include a crush unit case 4510, a plurality of brackets 4520 located in the unit case 4510, and a tray or holder, 4580 of the unit. In various embodiments, the wrinkle block housing 4510 may comprise an outer layer 4511 and an inner layer 4512, wherein in at least one embodiment, the outer layer 4511 may hermetically enclose the inner layer 4512. In at least one such embodiment, the outer layer 4511 may pass between the inner layer 4512 and the tray 4580 block. In other specific embodiments, the outer layer 4511 can only partially surround the inner layer 4512, and in at least one such embodiment, the outer layer 4511 and the block tray 4580 can jointly enclose or at least substantially enclose the inner layer 4512. In various embodiments, in addition to the above, the brackets 4520 may be supported by the unit tray 4580, wherein the unit tray 4580 may comprise one or more support brackets of the channels configured to support brackets 4520. In certain embodiments, the unit tray 4580 may be attached to the unit body 4510, wherein in at least one such embodiment, the unit body 4510 may be traversed between opposing side walls of the unit tray 4580. In various embodiments, the side walls of the block tray 4580 may support the block body 4510 in the transverse direction, and in at least one such embodiment, the block tray 4580 may comprise one or more walls, or ribs, 4582, extending upward from the lower support member 4583 inside the case 4510 block. In at least one such embodiment, the block body 4510 may comprise one or more grooves, or grooves, which may be adapted to receive and / or engage with wall 4582. In various embodiments, walls 4582 may extend partially or nearly along the entire length of the housing 4510 block. In at least one such embodiment, walls 4582 may extend longitudinally between block 4500 between first row of brackets 4520 and second row of brackets 4520 through block 4500.

In various embodiments, the block body 4510 and / or the block tray 4580 may comprise cooperative holding elements that can provide a snap connection between the block tray 4580 and the block body 4510. In certain embodiments, the brace unit 4500 may be located within the unit groove 4530 so that the unit tray 4580 is adjacent to and / or attached to the unit groove 4530. In at least one embodiment, the tray 4580 can be detachably connected to the block groove 4530 so that after compressing the bracket block 4500 with a stop 4540 and deforming the brackets 4520, the block tray 4580 can be separated from the groove 4530 and the block and implanted into the block body 4510. In at least one such embodiment, the block tray 4580 may be made of bioabsorbable material, such as, for example, polyglycolic acid (PGA), commercially available under the trade name Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglexaprone 25 (PGCL), commercially available under the trade name Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL) and / or a mixture of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and / or PCL. In certain embodiments, the surgical stapler may further comprise a trigger and / or ejector that can slide between the groove 4530 of the brace unit 4530 and the lower ejection surface on the tray 4580 of the block, which can be configured to lift or remove the tray 4580 of the block from the groove 4530 blocks. In certain embodiments, the block body 4510 can be detachably connected to the block tray 4580 so that after compressing the bracket block 4500 with a stop 4540 and deforming the brackets 4520, the block body 4510 can be separated from the block tray 4580. In at least one such embodiment, the block tray 4580 may remain stationary in engagement with the block chute 4530 so that the block tray 4580 is removed from the operative field with the block chute 4530. In certain embodiments, the surgical stapler may further comprise a trigger and / or an ejector that can slide between the pallet for the bracket unit 4580 and the lower ejection surface of the unit body 4510, which may be configured to lift or remove the unit body 4510 from the unit tray 4580 . In at least one such embodiment, the brace unit 4500 may further comprise brace ejectors located between the unit tray 4580 and the brackets 4520 such that when the trigger is sliding, the distally brace ejectors and brackets 4520 can be pushed up towards the stop. In at least one such embodiment, the ejector brackets can be at least partially inserted inside the case 4510 crumpled block.

In various embodiments similar to those described above, the brace unit 4500 may comprise a blocking element that can be configured to prevent or at least limit the distal movement of the cutting element until a brace unit 4500 is placed inside the groove for the brace unit 4530 not shown in action position. In certain embodiments, the pallet for the brace unit 4580 may comprise a surface that lifts the cutting element up and above the interlock surface inside, for example, a groove for the brace unit 4530. If there is no brace unit 4500 in the groove of the block 4530 containing the block tray 4580, advancing the cutting element turns out to be impossible. In at least one embodiment, the most proximal brackets and / or any other appropriate brackets within the bracket block 4500 may include a lifting surface capable of sufficiently raising the cutting element above the locking surface. In addition to or instead of the above, the various parts of the bracket block 4500 may consist of materials having different colors. In such embodiments, the surgeon may be able to visually identify the presence of the non-powered and / or powered brace block in the groove for brace block 4530. In at least one such embodiment, the outer layer 4511 of the block body 4510 may have a first color, tray The block 4580 may have a second color, and the gutter 4530 for the bracket block may have a third color. When the surgeon sees the first color, he can determine that the block 4500 is in the idle position in the groove for the brace unit 4530. When the surgeon sees the second color, he can determine that the powered block 4500 is in the groove for the bracket unit 4530 and that the remaining tray 4580 for the unit needs to be removed. When the surgeon sees the third color, he can determine that there are no parts of the bracket block 4500 in the gutter for the brace unit 4530.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 87, a bracket block, such as, for example, bracket 4600, may comprise a collapsible implantable block body 4610 and a plurality of brackets 4620 located therein. Block block 4610 may include an outer layer 4611 and an inner layer 4612. In certain embodiments, the inner layer 4612 may contain many formed in it recesses, such as, for example, recesses, or cavities, 4615, which can contribute to the crushing of the block body 4610. In at least one such embodiment, the inner layer 4612 may comprise a folded or honeycomb cage, which may be configured to withstand the compressive force or pressure until the compressive force or pressure exceeds a certain threshold value. If the threshold value is not exceeded, the inner layer 4612 may be deformed with a linear or at least substantially linear relationship with respect to the applied compressive force or pressure. If the compressive force, or pressure, exceeds a threshold value, the inner layer 4612 can abruptly give in to the compressive load and become very bent or wrinkled. In various embodiments, the implementation of the frame of the inner layer 4612 may consist of many sublayers 4612a that can be connected to each other. In at least one embodiment, each sublayer 4612a may comprise a plurality of interleaved grooves and ribs, or waves, which can be aligned with the alternating grooves and ribs of an adjacent sublayer 4612a. In at least one such embodiment, the grooves of the first sublayer 4612a can be located adjacent to the ribs of the second sublayer 4612a, and the edges of the first sublayer 4612a can be similarly located adjacent to the grooves of the second sublayer 4612a. In various embodiments, adjacent sublayers 4612a may be adhered to each other and / or to the outer layer 4611 using at least one adhesive, such as, for example, fibrin and / or protein hydrogel. In FIG. 88, the brace block 4600 is shown after creasing the block body 4610 and deforming the brackets 4620 to grip and hold the fabric T against the block body 4610.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 89-91, a brace unit, such as, for example, a brace unit 4700, may include a crushable implantable unit body 4710 and a plurality of brackets 4720 located within the unit body 4710. Similarly to the above, the block body 4710 may comprise an outer layer 4711 and an inner layer 4712, wherein the inner layer 4712 may comprise a plurality of sublayers 4712a. Also similar to the above, each sublayer 4712a may comprise intermittent grooves 4717 and ribs 4718, which can be aligned with each other to form recesses, or cavities, 4715 between them. In at least one such embodiment, grooves 4717 and / or ribs 4718 may extend along axes that are parallel to each other and / or parallel to the longitudinal axis 4709. In various embodiments, the brackets 4720 can be aligned in many rows of brackets that can extend along axes that are parallel to each other and / and are parallel to the longitudinal axis 4709. In various alternative embodiments, as shown in FIG. 87 and 88, the brackets 4620 contained in the block body 4600 may extend along axes that are transverse or perpendicular to the axes formed by the grooves and ribs of the sublayers 4612a. As represented in FIG. 89-91, brackets 4720 may extend through grooves 4717 and ribs 4718, and the friction force between brackets 4720 and sublayers 4712a can hold brackets 4720 inside block body 4710. In certain embodiments, the plurality of sublayers 4712a may be formed from a support material and / or plastic material, such as, for example, polydioxanone (PDS) and / or polyglycolic acid (PGA), which may be configured to hold brackets 4720, for example, the standing position and / or holding the brackets 4720 aligned with each other, as shown in FIG. 89 and 90. In FIG. 91, the brace unit 4700 is shown after creasing the block body 4710 and deforming the brackets 4720 to grip and hold the fabric T against the block body 4710.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 89-91, the block body 4710 may elastically or elastically wrinkle upon compression. In at least one such embodiment, waves generated in each sublayer 4712a by grooves 4717 and ribs 4718 can become flat or at least substantially flat when the block body 4710 is compressed, resulting in creasing or at least substantially creasing formed between they are cavities 4715. In various situations, the block body 4710 or at least part of the block body 4710 may experience elastic or elastic back expansion after the compressive force or pressure is removed from the block body 4710. In at least one such embodiment, the connections between the grooves 4717 and the ribs 4718 of adjacent sublayers 4712a may remain unchanged or at least substantially unchanged when the block body 4710 is compressed so that, after releasing the compressive force from the block body 4710, the sublayers 4712a can move relative to each other friend and, thus, at least partially again expand the block body 4710. In certain embodiments, the block body 4710 may undergo plastic deformation or creasing under compression, and thus, the block body 4710 may not experience back expansion after the compression force or pressure has been removed from it. In certain embodiments, as presented in FIG. 92, a brace unit, such as, for example, brace unit 4800, may comprise a collapsible block body 4810 comprising an outer layer 4811 and an inner layer 4812, the inner layer 4812 may include a folded, honeycomb, frame having a plurality of recesses formed therein, or cavities, 4815. In various embodiments, the walls forming the frame of the inner layer 4812 may contain one or more weakened, or thin, sections 4819, which can be made so that the walls forming the frame break when the body 4810 of the block is compressed. In such situations, the block housing 4810 may be crushed upon implantation of the bracket block 4800.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 93-95, a bracket block, such as, for example, bracket block 4900, may comprise a block body 4910 comprising an outer layer 4911 and a plurality of crease elements 4912 located, for example, between the upper and lower portions of the outer layer 4911. As mainly represented in FIG. 93 and 94, the bracket unit 4900 may further comprise a plurality of brackets 4920, each bracket 4920 may be located inside the crease member 4912. More specifically, each crease member 4912 may include a first part 4912a, a second part 4012b and a third part 4012c, which together can form a cavity 4915 configured to receive a bracket 4920. In addition to the above, during use, the bracket block 4900 may be located inside the groove for the bracket block, and to the surface in contact with the fabric 4919 a compressive force is applied to compress the block body 4910. By moving the fabric contacting surface 4919 down, the crease elements 4912 may crease. In such situations, the second part 4912b of each crease element 4912 can be wrinkled into the corresponding first part 4912a, and similarly, the third part 4912c of each crease element 4912 can be wrinkled into the corresponding second part 4912b. By compressing the block body 4910 and creasing the crease elements 4912, the brackets 4920 located inside the crease elements 4912 can deform, as shown in FIG. 95. In various embodiments, the second portion 4912b of each crease member 4912 can be abraded against the corresponding first portion 4912a. After the compressive force applied to the collapsible member 4912 exceeds the holding force of the first part 4912a and the second part 4912b in the deployed position (FIG. 94), the first part 4912a and the second part 4912b can begin to slide relative to each other. Similarly, the third part 4912c of each crease member 4912 can be pressed by friction against the corresponding second part 4912b. After the compressive force applied to the crease member 4912 exceeds the holding force of the second part 4912b and the third part 4912c in the deployed position (FIG. 94), the second part 4912b and the third part 4912c can begin to slide relative to each other.

In many of the embodiments described herein, a bracket unit may comprise a plurality of brackets. In various embodiments, such brackets may consist of a metal wire deformed into a substantially U-shape configuration with two brace legs. Other embodiments are possible in which the brackets may have different configurations, such as two or more wires connected together containing three or more bracket legs. In various embodiments, the wire or wires used to form the brackets may have a circular or at least substantially circular cross-section. In at least one embodiment, the staple wires may have any other suitable cross-section, such as, for example, square and / or rectangular cross-sections. In certain embodiments, the brackets may consist of plastic wire. In at least one embodiment, the brackets may consist of plastic coated metal wire. In various embodiments, the block may comprise a crosslinker of any suitable type in addition to or instead of brackets. In at least one such embodiment, such a crosslinking element may comprise pivotable arms that fold when engaged with the stop. In certain embodiments, crosslinking elements consisting of two parts can be used. In at least one such embodiment, the brace unit may comprise a plurality of first parts of the stapling element, and the emphasis may comprise a plurality of second parts of the staple element that connect to the first parts of the staple element when the emphasis is pressed against the brace unit. In certain embodiments, as described above, the slide or ejector can advance inside the bracket unit to complete the brace formation process. In certain embodiments, the slide or ejector can advance inside the abutment to move one or more forming elements down to engage them with the opposite bracket unit and brackets, or staple elements located inside the block.

In various embodiments described herein, the bracket unit may comprise four rows of brackets located therein. In at least one embodiment, four rows of brackets may be located in two inner rows of brackets and two outer rows of brackets. In at least one such embodiment, the inner row of brackets and the outer row of brackets can be located on the first side of the groove for the cutting element, or the knife, inside the bracket unit, and the inner row of brackets and the outer row of brackets can likewise be located on the second side of the groove for the cutting element, or knife. In certain embodiments, the bracket unit may not contain a groove for the cutting element; however, instead of the groove for the bracket block, such a bracket block may comprise a special part adapted to be cut by the cutting element. In various embodiments, the inner rows of brackets may be located within the bracket unit so that they are at equal or at least substantially equal distance from the groove for the cutting element. Likewise, the outer rows of brackets can be positioned inside the bracket block so that they are at equal or at least substantially equal distance from the groove for the cutting element. In various embodiments, the bracket unit may comprise more or less than four rows of brackets located therein. In at least one embodiment, the bracket unit may comprise six rows of brackets. In at least one such embodiment, the bracket unit may comprise three rows of brackets on the first side of the groove for the cutting element and three rows of brackets on the second side of the groove for the cutting element. In certain embodiments, the bracket block may comprise an odd number of rows of brackets. For example, the bracket unit may contain two rows of brackets on the first side of the groove for the cutting element and three rows of brackets on the second side of the groove for the cutting element. In various embodiments, the rows of brackets may comprise brackets of the same or at least substantially the same height of the unformed bracket. In other specific embodiments, implementation, one or more rows of brackets may contain brackets with the height of the unformed brackets, different from the height of other brackets. In at least one such embodiment, the brackets on the first side of the groove for the cutting element may have a first height in the unformed state, and the brackets on the second side of the groove for the cutting element may have a second height in the unformed state, which, for example, differs from the first height.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 96A-96D, the end clamp of the surgical stapler may include a part for attaching a block, such as, for example, a bracket block groove 5030, a block with sewing elements removably located in a bracket block groove 5030, such as, for example, a bracket block 5000, and a jaw 5040 located opposite the bracket block 5000 and the groove 5030 of the bracket block. The bracket block 5000 may comprise a crease block body 5010 and a plurality of brackets 5020 and / or any other staple elements at least partially located in the crease block case 5010. In at least one such embodiment, each bracket 5020 may comprise a base 5022, as well as legs 5021 extending upward from the base 5022, wherein at least a portion of the legs 5021 may be inserted into the block body 5010. In various embodiments, the wrinkled block housing 5010 may comprise an upper or fabric contacting surface 5019 and a lower surface 5018, wherein the lower surface 5018 may be adjacent to and supported by the supporting surface 5031 of the groove 5030 of the bracket unit. Similar to the above, the supporting surface 5031 may include a plurality of supporting grooves 5032 made therein (FIG. 96D), for example, which may be configured to receive and support the bases 5022 of the brackets 5020. In various embodiments, the surgical stapler operating apparatus may further comprise a holding a matrix, such as, for example, a holding matrix 5050, which can be configured to engage the brackets 5020 and capture tissue between the matrix and the brackets. In at least one such embodiment, the retaining matrix 5050 may be removably mounted on the jaw 5040. During use, after positioning the brace unit 5000 in the groove for the brace unit 5030, the jaw 5040 and the retaining matrix 5050 attached thereto can move towards the brace block 5000 and the grooves for the bracket block 5030. In at least one embodiment, the jaw 5040 can move down along the axis 5099 so that the jaw 5040 and the groove for the bracket block 5030 remain vivo Recording parallel or at least substantially parallel to each other when the jaws 5040 closed. More specifically, in at least one such embodiment, the jaw 5040 can be closed so that the tissue-contacting surface 5051 of the holding matrix 5050 remains parallel or at least substantially parallel to the tissue-contacting surface 5019 of the bracket unit 5000 while moving the jaw 5040 in the direction bracket unit 5000.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 96A, the holding matrix 5050 can be detachably fixed to the jaw 5040 so that the relative movement between the holding matrix 5050 and the jaw 5040 when the matrix 5050 is attached to the jaw 5040 is small or absent. In at least one embodiment, the jaw 5040 may comprise one or more retaining elements, which may be configured to hold the retaining matrix 5050 in position. In at least one such embodiment, the retaining matrix 5050 may be snap-fit and / or tightened into the jaw 5040. In certain embodiments, the holding matrix 5050 may be adhered to the jaw 5040 using at least one adhesive. In any case, the jaw 5040 can be moved to a position in which the holding matrix 5050 is in contact with the fabric T and the fabric T is adjacent to the fabric contacting surface 5019 of the bracket unit 5000. When the fabric T is placed close to the bracket unit 5000 with the jaw 5040, the crumpled case 5010 of the bracket block 5000 may or may not be compressed by the jaw 5040. In any situation, in various embodiments, the legs 5021 of the brackets 5200 may not protrude through the tissue-contacting surface 5019 of the bracket block 5000, as before put on FIG. 96A. Moreover, as presented in FIG. 96A, the jaw 5040 can hold the tissue T against the compressible body 5010 without engaging the holding matrix 5050 with brackets 5020. Such embodiments may allow the surgeon to open and close the jaw 5040 several times to achieve the desired position of the distal workpiece in the surgical field without damaging the tissue T ". There are other embodiments in which the ends of the brackets 5023 can protrude through the fabric-facing surface 5019 even before the block body 5010 is compressed by the abutment plate 5040. After positioning the end clip in a suitable manner as shown in FIG. 96B, the jaw 5040 can be moved downward to the bracket block chute 5030 so that the compressible body 5010 is pressed against the stop 5040, and the fabric contacting surface 5019 is moved downward relative to the brackets 5020. As the surface 5019 is facing downward, the tips 5023 of the legs of the brackets 5021 can pierce the surface 5019 facing the fabric and at least partially pierce the “T” fabric. Under such circumstances, the holding matrix 5050 can be positioned above the brackets 5020 so that the holding holes 5052 of the holding matrix 5050 are matched (or practically matched) with the tips 5023 of the legs of the brackets 5021.

By pushing down the holding matrix 5050 along the axis 5099, as shown in FIG. 96C, the legs 5021 of the brackets 5020 may fit into the holding holes 5052. In various embodiments, the legs of the brackets 5021 may engage the side walls of the holding holes 5052. In certain embodiments, as described in more detail below, the holding matrix 5050 may comprise one or more holding elements, extending inwardly and / or around the holding holes 5052, which can engage the legs of the brackets 5021. In any case, the legs of the brackets 5021 can be held in the holding holes 5052. In various situations, the tips 5023 but ek brackets 5021 may be included in the retaining holes 5052 and thereby engage the friction force holding elements and / or side wall apertures 5052. By pushing the retaining matrix 5050 grounds the side brackets 5022 5020 5021 parentheses legs can slide relative to the side walls and / or retaining elements. As a result of the above, a sliding friction force can be generated between the legs of the brackets 5021 and the holding matrix 5050, and such a sliding friction force can create resistance when the holding matrix 5050 is pushed onto the brackets 5020. In various embodiments, when the holding matrix 5050 slides down along the legs 5021 of the brackets 5020 the sliding friction force between the holding matrix 5050 and the brackets 5020 may be constant or at least substantially constant. In certain embodiments, the sliding friction force may increase and / or decrease during the sliding of the holding matrix 5050 down along the legs of the brackets 5021 due to variations in the geometric shape of the legs of the brackets 5021, the holding holes 5052 and / or the holding elements extending in and / or around, for example, retaining holes 5052. In various embodiments, the housing 5010 of the compressible bracket unit 5000 may also resist when the retaining matrix 5050 is pushed onto the brackets 5020. More specifically, the housing 5010 of the collapsible block may consist, for example, of an elastic material that can exert a counteracting force on the holding matrix 5050, which increases as the distance over which the compressible block case 5010 is compressed increases. In at least one such embodiment, the increase in opposing force generated by the block body 5010 may be linearly proportional or at least substantially linearly proportional to the distance the block body 5010 is compressed. In certain embodiments, the increase in reaction force generated by the block body 5010 can be proportionally or at least substantially proportionally exponentially to the distance that the block body 5010 is compressed.

In various embodiments, in addition to the one described above, a trigger force sufficient to overcome the opposing and frictional forces described above can be applied to the jaw 5040 and the holding matrix 5050. In use, the holding matrix 5050 can be set to any appropriate depth with respect to the brackets 5020. In at least one embodiment, the holding matrix 5050 can be set at such a depth with respect to the bases 5022 of the brackets 5020 to secure together two or more layers of fabric and create inside tissue compressive force, or pressure. In various situations, a system comprising a holding matrix 5050 and brackets 5020 may allow the surgeon to select the amount of compressive force or pressure applied to the tissue, choosing the depth at which the holding matrix 5050 is set. For example, the holding matrix 5050 can be moved down to the brace bases 5022 5020 until a certain depth 5011 of placement of the holding matrix 5050 is reached (distance to the bottom of the supporting grooves 5032). A shorter depth of 5011 may result in an increase in compressive force (pressure) to be applied to the “T” fabric. A large depth of 5011 can lead to a reduction in compressive force (pressure), which will be applied to the fabric "T". In various embodiments, the compressive force applied to the fabric “T” may be linearly proportional (or almost linearly proportional) to the depth 5011 at which the holding matrix 5050 is located. In various situations, the compressive forces or pressures applied to the fabric T may depend from the thickness of the fabric T located between the holding matrix 5050 and the brace unit 5020. More specifically, at a given distance 5011, the compressive forces, or pressures, with a thicker layer of fabric T can be greater than with a thinner layer tissue T.

In various situations, in addition to the above, the surgeon can adjust the depth at which the retaining matrix 5050 is installed to take into account the thicker and / or thinner tissue located in the working apparatus, as well as to apply a specific or predetermined pressure to the tissue T regardless of its thickness. For example, the surgeon may set the holding matrix 5050 to a shallower depth 5011 when stitching a thinner tissue T or to a greater depth 5011 when stitching a thicker tissue T to obtain the same or at least substantially the same compressive pressure within the tissue. In certain embodiments, in addition to the above, the surgeon can selectively determine the amount of compressive pressure applied to the tissue T located between the holding matrix 5050 and the brace unit 5010. In various situations, the surgeon can engage the holding matrix 5050 with brackets 5020 and place it on the first distance from the bases 5022 of the brackets 5020 to apply a first compressive pressure to the fabric. In an alternative embodiment, the surgeon may position the holding matrix 5050 at a second distance from the bases 5022, which is less than the first distance, to apply a second compressive pressure to the tissue that is greater than the first pressure. In an alternative embodiment, the surgeon may position the holding matrix 5050 at a third distance from the bases 5022, which is less than the second distance, to apply a third compressive pressure to the tissue that is greater than the second pressure. In various embodiments, a crosslinking system comprising a holding matrix 5050 and brackets 5020 may be configured so that the surgeon is able to apply a wide range of compressive pressures to the target tissue.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 96D, the legs of the brackets 5021 can be inserted through the holding matrix 5050 so that the ends of the legs of the brackets 5023 extend above the upper surface of the holding matrix 5050. In at least one embodiment, as shown in FIG. 96C, the jaw 5040 may further comprise separating holes 5042 formed therein, which may be configured to receive the ends of the legs of the brackets 5023 as they pass through the retaining holes 5052 in the holding matrix 5050. In at least one such embodiment, the separating holes 5042 may be aligned with the holding holes 5052 so that the legs 5021 do not touch the jaw 5040. In various embodiments, the separating holes 5042 may have a depth sufficient to allow Oba legs of brackets 5021 are not in contact with the jaws 5040 no matter at what depth set retaining matrix 5050. Once the retaining matrix 5050 has entered into contact with the staples 5020 and located in the desired position, referring to FIG. 96D, the chute 5030 of the bracket unit 5030 and the jaw 5040 can be removed from the “T” fabric. More specifically, the bracket block chute 5030 can be disconnected from the implanted bracket block 5000, and the stop 5040 can be disconnected from the implanted holding matrix 5050. When moving the jaw 5040 from the holding matrix 5050 and moving the support elements of the brackets 5032 from the bases of the brackets 5022, the distance 5011 between the holding matrix 5050 and the bottom of the bases 5022 can be maintained even if the jaw 5040 and the groove 5030 of the bracket block no longer support them. In various embodiments, the resting friction force between the bracket legs 5021 and the holding matrix 5050 may be sufficient to hold the matrix 5050 in place, despite the biasing force exerted on the holding matrix 5050 by the compressed unit 5010 and / or the compressed fabric “T”. In at least one such embodiment, the block body 5010 may consist of an elastic material which, when compressed, is capable of exerting an elastic biasing force on the holding matrix 5050 and the brackets 5020, which can separate the holding matrix 5050 and the brackets 5020. This frictional force is counteracted by friction between legs 5021 brackets and a holding matrix 5050.

In various embodiments, as described above, the holding matrix may comprise a plurality of holding holes, with each holding hole being able to receive a leg of the fastener. In at least one embodiment, as shown in FIG. 97, a portion of the holding matrix 5150 may include a holding hole 5152, which is defined by the perimeter 5156. In various embodiments, the perimeter 5156 of the hole 5152 may have a circular or at least substantially circular profile and / or any other corresponding profile. In certain embodiments, the holding matrix 5150 may comprise one or more holding elements, such as, for example, holding elements 5153 that can extend into the opening 5152 and can be engaged to engage the legs of the fastener when it is inserted into the hole. In at least one such embodiment, each holding member 5153 may comprise a cantilever extending inward in the direction of the central axis 5159, i.e. toward the center of the hole 5152. In various embodiments, each cantilever may comprise a first end attached to the housing of the holding matrix 5158 and a second end forming the perimeter 5156 of the holding hole 5152. In certain embodiments, the perimeter 5156 of the holding hole 5152 may be defined by a first diameter, or width, and the leg of the fastener may be determined by a second diameter or width, the second diameter being larger than the first diameter. In at least one such embodiment, the leg of the fastener may be configured to come into contact and deflect one or more retaining elements 5153 to increase the diameter of the retaining hole 5152 when the legs of the fastener are inserted through it. In certain embodiments, in addition to the above, the leg of the fastener may be defined by a perimeter that is larger than the perimeter 5156 of the holding hole 5152 so that the leg of the fastener can expand the perimeter 5156 when it is inserted into the holding hole.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 97, the hole 5152 can be defined by deformable elements 5153, each deformable element 5153 can be deflectable relative to or independently of other deformable elements 5153. In at least one such embodiment, adjacent deformable elements 5153 can be separated by grooves 5154, which can be made in such a way as to allow each deformable element 5153 to expand relative to other elements. In certain embodiments, each groove 5154 may include a first end 5155 located in the housing of the holding matrix 5158, a second end opening inside the holding hole 5152, and a constant or at least substantially constant width between the first end 5155 and the second end. In other various embodiments, the width of each groove 5154 may be unstable, and the width of each groove 5154 may increase and / or decrease between its first and second ends. In certain embodiments, the first ends 5155 of the grooves 5154 may include an expanded part, such as an annular part, which can, firstly, reduce the stress of the bases of deformable elements 5153 attached to the housing of the holding matrix 5158, and, secondly, a method of increasing flexibility deformable elements 5153. In various embodiments, the geometric shape of the deformable elements 5153 and / or grooves 5154 can be chosen so as to provide the deformable elements 5153 with the necessary flexibility . In certain embodiments, the grooves 5154, for example, can be extended to create longer deformable elements 5153, which can be more flexible than deformable elements 5153 of shorter length. In at least one embodiment, the width of each deformable member 5153 may be selected so as to provide the necessary flexibility. More specifically, deformable elements with a smaller width may be more flexible than deformable elements with a larger width. In certain embodiments, as presented in FIG. 97, the first ends of the cantilevers of the deformable elements 5153 attached to the housing of the holding matrix 5158 may be wider than the second ends of the cantilevers. In at least one such embodiment, the cantilevers can linearly or at least substantially linearly narrow between their first and second ends.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 97, the housing of the holding matrix 5158 may comprise a flat or at least substantially flat sheet of material having a fabric contacting surface 5151 and an upper surface 5157. In at least one such embodiment, the fabric contacting surface 5151 and the upper surface 5157 may be parallel or at least substantially parallel to each other. In various embodiments, each deformable member 5153 may comprise a first part 5153a and a second part 5153b, with the first part 5153a extending in the first direction and the second part 5153b extending in the other or second direction. In at least one such embodiment, the housing of the holding matrix 5158 may form a plane, and the first parts 5153a of the deformable elements 5153 may lie in such a plane. In various embodiments, the second parts 5153b of the deformable members 5153 may extend at an angle relative to the first parts 5153a. In at least one such embodiment, the second parts 5153b may extend in directions extending from the upper surface 5157 of the holding matrix housing 5158, and in certain embodiments, the second parts 5153b may converge to the central axis 5159 of the holding hole 5152. In any case, in various embodiments the implementation of the second parts 5153b can be configured to deviate from the Central axis 5159 when inserting the legs of the fastener through the hole. In embodiments where the leg 5021 of the bracket 5020 is inserted into the holding hole 5152, the deformable elements 5153 can be deformed in a direction substantially from the bases 5122 of the brackets 5120. Thus, in certain embodiments, the deformable elements 5153 can deviate in a general direction that is the same or at least measure essentially coinciding with the direction in which the legs of the brackets 5021 are inserted.

In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. BD, each of the second parts 5153b of the deformable elements 5153 may contain a sharp tip, which, for example, can be slidable relative to the bracket foot 5021 when the bracket foot 5021 is inserted. The sharp ends of the second parts 5153b can also be pressed against the bracket foot 5021, if the leg of the bracket 5021 should extend in the opposite direction, i.e. in the direction of removing the leg of the bracket 5021 from the holding hole 5052. In certain situations, the second parts 5153b may be deflected relative to the side surface of the legs of the bracket 5021 at an angle exceeding 90 degrees, and thus the second parts 5153b may deepen, or penetrate, into the side surface the brace legs 5021, when a force is exerted on the brace leg 5021 to extend the brace leg 5021 from the retaining hole 5052. In certain embodiments of the surface of the brace legs, the brackets 5021 may include cutouts and / or recesses such as, for example, microcuts, which, for example, can be configured to receive the ends of deformable elements 5053. In at least one such embodiment, the ends of deformable elements 5053 can be gripped and embedded in the cutouts in the legs of the bracket 5021 when applied to the legs brackets 5021 pulling force. In various embodiments, as a result of the introduction of the second parts 5153b into the legs of the bracket 5021, forces striving to remove the legs of the bracket 5021 from the holding holes 5022 can only further install the second parts 5153b into the legs of the bracket 5021 and increase the force required to remove the legs of the bracket 5021. Moreover , due to the upward movement of the second parts 5153b in at least one embodiment, the second parts 5153b may be more pliable to insert the legs of the bracket 5021 into the holding hole 5152 and provide greater pull resistance but brackets 5021. Thus, in at least one embodiment, the force required to insert the brace legs 5021 into the holding hole 5022 may be less than the force required to remove the brace legs 5021 from the holding hole 5022. In various embodiments, the force required for removing the leg of the bracket 5021 from the holding hole 5022, there may be, for example, about 50 percent more force required to insert the leg of the bracket 5021 into the holding hole 5022. In various other embodiments, the sludge required to remove the leg of the bracket 5021 may, for example, be from about 10 to about 100 percent more than the force required to insert the leg of the bracket 5021. In certain embodiments, the force required to remove the leg of bracket 5021 can be, for example, about 100 percent, about 150 percent, about 200 percent and / or more than about 200 percent more than the force required to insert the legs of the bracket 5021.

In certain embodiments, as presented in FIG. 97, the second parts 5153b may be arranged in a circle around the hole 5152, and a recess may be formed between them. More specifically, the second parts 5153b may form a recess 5160, which may be configured to receive the end of the leg of the fastener when it is inserted into the holding hole 5152. In various embodiments, the second parts 5153b of the deformable elements 5153 may comprise annular or at least substantially annular contours that can together form, for example, an annular or at least substantially annular profile of a recess 1560. In at least one such embodiment, the second Asti 5153b may form a recess in the form of a cone or truncated cone. In various embodiments, the recess can be made by a suitable number of deformable elements, for example 4 deformable elements 5153 (see FIG. 97), 6 deformable elements 5153 (see FIG. 98) or 8 deformable elements 5153 (see FIG. 99), eg. In certain embodiments, as presented in FIG. 100, deformable elements of a holding matrix, such as, for example, a holding matrix 5250, may form a pyramidal contour or at least a substantially pyramidal contour. In various embodiments, the holding matrix 5250 may comprise a plurality of holding holes, such as, for example, a holding hole 5252, which may be formed by a perimeter 5256. In various embodiments, the perimeter 5256 may have a polygonal or at least substantially polygonal profile and / or any another relevant profile. In certain embodiments, the holding matrix 5250 may comprise one or more holding elements, such as, for example, holding elements 5253 that extend into the opening 5252 and can be engaged to engage the legs of the fastener when it is inserted through the hole. In at least one such embodiment, each holding element 5253 may comprise a cantilever extending inward in the direction of the central axis 5259, i.e. toward the center of the hole 5252. In various embodiments, each cantilever may comprise a first end attached to the housing of the holding matrix 5258 and a second end forming the perimeter 5256 of the holding hole 5252. In certain embodiments, the perimeter 5256 of the holding hole 5252 may be defined by a first diameter, or width, and the leg of the fastener may be determined by a second diameter or width, the second diameter being larger than the first diameter. In at least one such embodiment, the leg of the fastener may be configured to contact and deflect one or more retaining elements 5253 to increase the diameter of the retaining hole 5252 when the legs of the fastener are inserted through it. In certain embodiments, in addition to the above, the leg of the fastener may be defined by a perimeter that is larger than the perimeter 5256 of the holding hole 5252 so that the leg of the fastener can expand the perimeter 5256 when inserted into the holding hole.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 100, the hole 5252 can be defined by deformable elements 5253, each deformable element 5253 can be deflectable relative to or independently of other deformable elements 5253. In at least one such embodiment, adjacent deformable elements 5253 can be separated by grooves 5254, which can be made in such a way as to allow each deformable element 5253 to expand relative to other elements. In various embodiments, the implementation of the housing of the retaining matrix 5258 may comprise a flat or at least substantially flat sheet of material having a fabric contacting surface 5251 and an upper surface 5257. In at least one such embodiment, the tissue contacting surface 5251 and the upper surface 5257 may be parallel or at least substantially parallel to each other. In various embodiments, each deformable member 5253 may comprise a first part 5253a and a second part 5253b, with the first part 5253a extending in the first direction and the second part 5253b extending in the other or second direction. In at least one such embodiment, the housing of the holding matrix 5258 may form a plane, and the first parts 5253a of the deformable elements 5253 may lie in such a plane. In various embodiments, the second parts 5253b of the deformable members 5253 may extend at an angle relative to the first parts 5253a. In at least one such embodiment, the second parts 5253b may extend in directions extending from the upper surface 5257 of the housing of the holding matrix 5258, and in certain embodiments, the second parts 5253b may converge to the central axis 5259 of the holding hole 5252. In any case, in various embodiments the implementation of the second parts 5253b can be configured to deviate from the Central axis 5259 when inserting the legs of the fastener through the hole. In certain embodiments, as presented in FIG. 100, the second parts 5253b may be circumferentially around the hole 5252, and a recess may be formed between them. More specifically, the second parts 5253b can form a recess that can be adapted to receive the end of the leg of the fastener when it is inserted into the holding hole 5252. In various embodiments, the second parts 5253b of the deformable elements 5253 can form, for example, polygonal or at least essentially a polygonal recess. In various embodiments, the recess may be formed by a suitable number of deformable elements, for example 4 deformable elements 5253 (FIG. 100), which form a square, 6 deformable elements 5253 (FIG. 101), which form a hexagon, or 8 deformable elements 5253 (FIG. 102), which form an octagon.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 103, a holding matrix, such as, for example, a holding matrix 5350, may be formed from a flat or at least substantially flat sheet of material, such as, for example, titanium and / or stainless steel. In at least one such embodiment, a plurality of holes 5352 may be formed in the housing 5358 of the holding matrix 5350 using one or more stamping processes. The sheet of material can be placed in a stamping die, which when actuated can pierce certain parts of the material to form, for example, grooves 5354, holes 5355 of grooves 5354 and / or perimeter 5356 of the holding hole 5352. The stamping can also be configured to bend deformable elements 5353 in the appropriate configuration. In at least one such embodiment, the embossing stamp may deform the second parts 5353b by bending them upward relative to the first parts 5353a along the crease line 5353c. In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 104, a holding matrix, such as, for example, a holding matrix 5450, may comprise a plurality of holding holes 5452. As described above, the perimeter 5456 of each holding hole 5452 may be formed by a plurality of deformable elements 5453 separated by grooves or slots, 5454. At least in one such embodiment, each deformable element 5453 can be completely bent upward, and the free ends of the cantilevers containing deformable elements 5453 can form a perimeter 5456. In various In embodiments, the holding matrix 5450 may comprise a plurality of holes 5455 surrounding or at least substantially surrounding the holding hole 5452. In at least one such embodiment, the holes 5455 may be located in an annular array surrounding or enclosing a perimeter formed by fixed ends cantilevers of deformable elements 5453. In certain embodiments, each hole 5455 may have a circular or at least substantially circular perimeter and / or any other corresponding to the perimeter. In the process of using the holes 5455 can, firstly, reduce the stress of the bases of the deformable elements 5453 attached to the housing of the holding matrix 5458, and secondly, a method of increasing the flexibility of the deformable elements 5453. In various embodiments, the larger holes 5455 can provide a larger flexibility to deformable elements 5453 than smaller holes 5455. Moreover, holes 5455 located closer to deformable elements 5453 can provide greater flexibility than holes 5455 located further from deformable elements.

In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 105, a holding matrix, such as, for example, a holding matrix 5550, may comprise a plurality of holding holes 5552. Each holding hole 5552 may comprise an elongated groove 5554 with enlarged circular or at least substantially circular ends 5555. In at least one such embodiment the ends 5555 may be determined by a diameter that is larger than the groove 5554. In certain embodiments, the elongated groove 5554 and the ends 5555 may be located and / or centered along the longitudinal axis 5559. In various embodiments the implementation of the groove 5554 and the ends 5555 can form two opposite tongues 5553, which can be made with the possibility of engagement of the legs of the fastener and deviation when it is inserted through the groove. In at least one embodiment, ends 5555 with a larger perimeter or diameter may form longer tongues 5553, which may be more flexible than tongues 5553 formed by ends 5555 with a smaller perimeter, or diameter. In various embodiments, ends 5555 may have the same perimeter and diameter, and in at least one such embodiment, each tongue 5553 may be symmetrical about an axis perpendicular or at least substantially perpendicular to longitudinal axis 5559. In an alternative embodiment, ends 5555 may have other perimeters and / or diameters, and in at least one embodiment, each tongue 5553 may not be symmetrical about its axis. In at least one such alternative embodiment, the tabs 5553 can rotate about their axis when inserting the legs of the fastener through the retaining hole 5552. In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 106, a holding matrix, such as, for example, a holding matrix 5650, may comprise a plurality of holding holes 5652. Each holding hole 5652 may comprise an elongated groove 5654 with circular or at least substantially circular ends 5655. In at least one such embodiment the elongated groove 5654 and the ends 5655 may be located and / or centered along the longitudinal axis 5659. In various embodiments, each end 5655 may be determined by a diameter matching or at least substantially matching m with a groove width of 5654.

In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 107, a holding matrix, such as, for example, a holding matrix 5750, may comprise a plurality of holding holes 5752. Each holding hole 5752 may comprise a plurality of grooves, such as, for example, grooves 5754, with extended ends 5755. In at least one such embodiment of the implementation, the grooves 5754 and the ends 5755 may be located and / or centered along the longitudinal axis 5759. In various embodiments, the axes 5759 may extend in directions perpendicular or intersecting each other. In certain embodiments, the grooves 5754 and the ends 5755 can form, for example, four tongues 5753, which can be adapted to engage the legs of the fastener and deflect when inserted through the retaining hole 5752. In at least one embodiment, each tongue 5753 may have a triangular or at least substantially triangular configuration, such as, for example, an equilateral triangle. In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 108, a holding matrix, such as, for example, a holding matrix 5850, may comprise a plurality of holding holes 5852. Each holding hole 5852 may comprise a plurality of grooves, such as, for example, grooves 5854 having ends 5855, wherein grooves 5854 and ends 5855 may be located and / or centered along the longitudinal axes 5859. In various embodiments, axles 5859 may extend in directions perpendicular or intersecting each other. In certain embodiments, the grooves 5854 and the ends 5855 can form tongues 5853, which can be adapted to engage the legs of the fastener and deflect when inserted through the retaining hole 5852. In at least one embodiment, each tongue 5853 may have an arcuate profile. More specifically, each tongue 5853 may comprise a curved end compared to the pointed end shown in FIG. 105, which may be configured to contact the leg of the fastener.

In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 109, a holding matrix, such as, for example, a holding matrix 5950, may comprise a plurality of holding holes 5952. Each holding hole 5952 may comprise a plurality of grooves, such as, for example, grooves 5954, each groove 5954 may extend and / or be centered along axles 5959. In various embodiments, axles 5959 can intersect with each other, and in at least one such embodiment, axles 5959 can be positioned so that all axes 5959 pass through the center of the retaining hole 5952 and the sludge and at the same or at least substantially equidistant from each other. In at least one embodiment, each groove 5954 may include an open end directed toward the center of the retaining hole 5952, and a second, closed, end 5955 at the opposite end of the groove 5954. As described above, the grooves 5954 and the ends 5955 can form, for example, three tongue 5953, which can be adapted to engage the legs of the fastener and deflect when inserted through the retaining hole 5952. In various embodiments, each tongue 5953 may have an arcuate configuration between a neighbor the ends 5955 of the slots 5954. In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 110, a holding matrix, such as, for example, a holding matrix 6050, may comprise a plurality of holding holes 6052. Each holding hole 6052 may include a tongue 6053, which may be adapted to engage the legs of the fastener and deflect when inserted through the holding hole 6052. In at least one such embodiment, the tongue 6053 may include a base attached to the housing of the retaining matrix 6058, and a free end having an arcuate or curved profile 6056, which can It can be configured to contact the leg of the fastener. In certain embodiments, the leg of the fastener may be a brace leg consisting of a round wire, wherein the curved profile 6056 may be configured to match or at least substantially match the curved outer surface of the round wire.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 110, the housing of the holding matrix 6058 may comprise a plurality of grooves 6054 and holes 6055, which may be configured to form a tongue 6053 and various parts of the holding hole 6052. In at least one embodiment, the tongue 6053 may have a rectangular configuration with parallel or at least essentially parallel sides. In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 111, a holding matrix, such as, for example, a holding matrix 6150, may comprise a plurality of holding holes 6152. Each holding hole 6152 may include a tongue 6153, which may be adapted to engage the legs of the fastener and deflect when inserted through the holding hole 6152. In at least one such embodiment, the tongue 6153 may include a base attached to the housing of the holding matrix 6158, and a free end having an arcuate or curved profile 6156, which can It can be configured to contact the leg of the fastener. In various embodiments, the housing of the retaining matrix 6158 may comprise a plurality of grooves 6154 and holes 6155, which may be configured to form a tongue 6153 and various parts of the retaining hole 6152. In at least one embodiment, the tongue 6153 may have a cone configuration with arched sides. In at least one such embodiment, the tongue 6153, for example, may taper exponentially, the base being wider than the free end.

In various embodiments, as described above, the crosslinking system may comprise a plurality of brackets containing brace legs that are inserted through a plurality of holding holes in the holding matrix. In certain embodiments, as described in more detail below, the brackets can be held in the first jaw, and the holding matrix can be held in the second jaw, at least one of the first jaw and the second jaw can move to the other. In various situations, the brackets located inside the first jaw can be fixed in it so that the legs of the brackets are aligned with the holding holes when the holding matrix is engaged by the legs of the brackets. In certain embodiments, as presented in FIG. 112 and 113, the stapling system may comprise, for example, a brace unit 6200 located in the first branch of the surgical stapler, and, for example, a retaining matrix 6250 located in the second branch of the surgical stapler. As represented in FIG. 119 and 120, in addition to the above, the holding matrix 6250 may comprise a plurality of holding holes 6252, each holding hole 6252 may have a perimeter 6256 formed by one or more bendable elements 6253. In at least one such embodiment, in addition to as described above, the bendable elements 6253 forming each hole 6252 may form a recess 6201. In various embodiments, each recess 6201 may have, for example, a curved and / or concave surface that can It can be arranged to guide the tip of the bracket foot into the hole 6252 if the bracket foot is offset relative to the retaining hole 6252 and will initially come into contact, for example, with the bending elements 6253 and / or the surface 6251 in contact with the fabric.

In various embodiments, in addition to the above, the crosslinking system may further comprise a plurality of brackets 6220 containing brace legs 6221 that can be inserted through the retaining holes 6252 in the retaining matrix 6250. In at least one such embodiment, each bracket 6220 may have for example, a substantially U-shaped configuration comprising a base 6222 from which the legs of the bracket 6221 can extend upward. In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 115 and 116, the holding holes 6252 in the holding matrix 6250 may be arranged, for example, in two parallel or at least substantially parallel longitudinal rows that can extend along or parallel to the longitudinal axis of the holding matrix. In certain embodiments, the holding holes 6252 in the first row can be offset, or staggered, relative to the holding holes 6252 in the second row. In at least one such embodiment, each bracket 6220 may comprise a first bracket leg 6221 located in the holding hole 6252 in the first row, and a second bracket leg 6221 located in the holding hole 6252 in the second row, and thus, bases 6222 may extend in a direction intersecting the longitudinal axis of the holding matrix 6250. In at least one such embodiment, the brackets 6220 may be parallel or at least substantially parallel to each other. More specifically, the base 6222a of the bracket 6220a, for example, may be parallel or at least substantially parallel to the base 6222b of the bracket 6220b, which may be parallel or at least substantially parallel to the base 6222c of the bracket 6220c. In at least one embodiment, the legs 6221a of the bracket 6220a, for example, may form a plane parallel or at least substantially parallel to the plane formed by the legs 6221b of the bracket 6220b, which may be parallel or at least substantially parallel to the plane formed by the legs 6221 brackets 6220c.

In various embodiments, as presented in FIG. 112 and 114, the bracket block 6200 may comprise a plurality of brackets 6220, as well as an alignment matrix 6260 comprising a plurality of alignment guides, such as, for example, grooves, grooves and / or holes that can be made to align the brackets 6220. In various In these situations, the alignment matrix 6260 may be configured such that the legs 6221 of the brackets 6220 align with the retaining holes 6252 in the retaining matrix 6250 until the retaining matrix 6250 is engaged with the legs of the brackets 6221. In various embodiments, phenomena as presented in FIG. 117 and 118, the alignment matrix 6260 may comprise a plurality of alignment holes 6262, which may be able to tightly receive the legs 6221 of the brackets 6220. In at least one such embodiment, each bracket 6220 may include a base 6222 and two legs of the bracket 6221 extending from the base 6222, and the base 6222 of the brackets 6220 may extend around the bottom surface 6264 of the retaining matrix 6260, and the legs of the brackets 6221 may extend upward through the alignment holes 6262. In certain embodiments, each hole the winding hole 6262 may be circular or at least substantially circular and may be determined by a diameter that is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the bracket leg 6221 passing through it. In various embodiments, the alignment matrix 6260 may further comprise a plurality of convex elements 6263 that can extend upward from the upper surface 6261 of the alignment matrix 6260 and surround or at least partially surround the alignment holes 6262. In certain embodiments, the convex elements 6263 make it possible to obtain longer alignment holes 6262, and in various situations, longer holes 6262 allow better control of the alignment of the legs of the brackets 6221 than shorter holes 6262.

During use in various embodiments, the first jaw supporting the brace unit 6200 may be located on one side of the stitched fabric, and the second jaw supporting the holding matrix 6250 may be located on the other side of the fabric. In certain embodiments, after the jaws are properly positioned relative to the fabric, the second jaw and the holding matrix 6250 can be moved toward the bracket 6200. In various embodiments, during insertion of the legs of the brackets 6221 through the holding holes 6252 in the holding matrix 6250, the tissue is in contact with or lower , the surface 6251 of the retaining matrix 6250 may be in contact with the fabric and press it against the fabric contacting, or upper, surface 6261 of the alignment matrix 6260. In other cing embodiments, as described in more detail below, the bracket unit 6200 may further comprise a housing block crushes disposed, for example, the upper surface of the alignment matrix 6261 6260, which may be in contact with tissue. In certain embodiments, as presented in FIG. 114 and 118, the alignment matrix 6260 may further comprise one or more openings 6203 formed therein, which may be configured to receive a portion of the fabric when the alignment matrix 6260 is placed adjacent to the fabric. In embodiments where the crush block body is located above and / or adjacent to the alignment matrix 6260, a portion of the crush block body may enter holes 6203 when the block body is compressed. The holding matrix 6250 may likewise comprise a plurality of holes 6202, which may be configured to receive at least a portion of the fabric when the holding matrix 6250 is placed adjacent to the fabric.

In addition to the above, when inserting the legs 6221 of the brackets 6220 through the holding holes 6252 of the holding matrix 6250, the ends of the legs of the brackets 6221 may protrude upward from the upper surface 6257 of the holding matrix 6250. In various situations, as described above, the ends of the legs of the brackets 6221 may remain unbent after inserts through retaining holes 6252. In certain embodiments, as shown in FIG. 121-124, the stapling system comprising the bracket block 6200 and the holding matrix 6250 may further comprise a plurality of protective caps or covers, such as, for example, caps 6270, which can be attached to the legs 6221 of the brackets protruding above the holding matrix 6250. In various in embodiments, each cap 6270 may completely or at least partially cover the sharp end of the bracket leg 6221 so that the sharp end does not come into contact with adjacent tissue. In at least one embodiment, as shown in FIG. 124, each cap 6270 may include an opening 6271 that can be configured to tightly receive the tip of the bracket leg 6221. In various embodiments, caps 6270 may consist of an elastomeric material, such as, for example, silicone, polyisoprene, sanoprene, and / or natural rubber. In at least one embodiment, the opening 6271 may have a perimeter or diameter that is smaller than the perimeter or diameter of the bracket leg 6221 inserted into it. In at least one such embodiment, the hole 6271 in the protective cap 6270 may expand to receive the bracket leg 6221. B various alternative embodiments, the caps 6270 may not contain holes, and the ends of the legs of the brackets 6221 may be configured to cut the caps 6270 when inserting the legs 6221 into them. For implementation, each cap 6270 can be mounted on the bracket foot 6221 until the base 6272 of cap 6270 abuts or is located adjacent to the upper surface 6257 of the holding matrix 6250. In various situations, caps 6270 can be configured to fit tightly on the ends of the legs of the brackets 6221 and can not be easily removed from them. In certain embodiments, each cap 6270 may have, for example, a conical or at least substantially conical outer surface. In various embodiments, caps 6270 may have any suitable contour, such as, for example, contours containing a parabolic or at least substantially parabolic outer surface.

In various embodiments, the crosslinking system described above can be placed, for example, using the surgical crosslinking apparatus shown in FIG. 125-127. In various embodiments, the working apparatus may comprise a first jaw, or a chute for the bracket block, 6230, which may be configured to support the bracket block 6200, and a second jaw 6240, which may be configured to support the holding matrix 6250 and the plurality of protective caps 6270 As mainly presented in FIG. 125, which shows the second jaw 6240 in an open configuration, the jaws 6230 and 6240 can be positioned relative to the fabric T so that the fabric T is located between the holding matrix 6250 and the brace block 6200. In various embodiments, as described above, the brace block 6200 may further comprise a casing of the collapsible block, such as, for example, the casing 6210 of the block, in which the brackets 6220 and the alignment matrix 6260 can be placed. In at least one such embodiment, the fabric T can be located closely to the upper surface of the housing block 6210. In certain embodiments, the second jaw 6240 may comprise a plurality of recesses, or holes, 6245 configured to receive a plurality of protective caps 6270, as well as one or more retaining elements, or latches, which may be configured to hold the holding matrix 6250 in position above caps 6270. In at least one such embodiment, the holding matrix 6250 may be configured to hold caps 6270 in holes 6245. In various embodiments, as set in FIG. 137, each hole 6245 may be configured to receive all or part of cap 6270. In certain embodiments, the openings 6245 may be large enough to be configured such that caps 6270 can be secured to them using, for example, at least one of the pressed and / or snap-in joints. In some embodiments, at least one adhesive may be used to attach caps 6270 to holes 6245. In at least one such embodiment, the adhesive can be selected so that the caps 6270 can separate from the second jaw 6240 after the caps 6270 are engaged by the legs of the brackets 6221 and the second jaw 6240 is moved away from the implanted fastener assembly. In certain embodiments, as presented in FIG. 138, the second jaw 6240 may further comprise at least one cover sheet 6246 that can be attached to the second jaw 6240 and can extend over the caps 6270 and hold them in the openings 6245. In at least one such embodiment, at least a portion of the coverslip the sheet 6246 may be attached to the jaw 6240, for example, using at least one adhesive. In at least one embodiment, during use, the cover sheet 6246 may be at least partially detached from jaw 6240 before insertion of the working device into the surgical field. In certain embodiments, the cover sheet 6246 may consist of an implantable material, such as, for example, PDS and / or PGA, which can cut through the legs of the brackets 6221 protruding from the retaining matrix 6250. In at least one such embodiment, the cover sheet 6246 may be fixed in a crosslinking system between covers 6270 and holding matrix 6250.

In addition to the above, as shown in FIG. 126, the jaw 6240 can be moved from the open position to the closed position, in which the tissue T is located close to the holding matrix 6250 and the block body 6210. In this position, the holding matrix 6250 may not yet engage with the brackets 6220. In various embodiments, the jaw 6240 may be moved between the open position and the closed position by means of an actuator 6235. In at least one such embodiment, the jaw 6240 may comprise extending from it a distal pin 6243 and a proximal pin 6244, wherein the distal pin 6243 can slide vertically or at least substantially vertically in the distal groove 6233 formed in the block groove 6230, and the proximal piece 6244 ft can slide vertically or at least substantially vertically into the proximal groove 6234 is also formed in the channel unit 6230 is bracketed. During use, the drive 6235 can be retracted proximally to push the pins 6243 and 6244 into the upper ends of the corresponding slots 6233 and 6234, as shown in FIG. 126. In at least one such embodiment, the drive 6235 may include a distal drive groove 6236 and a proximal drive groove 6237, the side walls of the drive grooves 6236 and 6237 may be able to contact the distal pin 6243 and the proximal pin 6244, respectively, and push the pins 6243 and 6244 upward when moving the 6235 actuator proximally. More specifically, when moving the actuator 6235, the proximal distal pin 6243 can slide upward along the inclined first portion 6236a of the distal drive groove 6236 into the intermediate, or second, part 6236b, and the proximal pin 6244 can similarly slide upward along the inclined first part 6237a of the distal drive groove 6237 in the intermediate, or second, part 6237b. When both pins 6243 and 6244 move up, the jaw 6240 can rotate down toward the tissue T to the closed position.

In addition to the above, as shown in FIG. 127, the actuator 6235 can be further extended proximally to push the second jaw 6240 down to the first jaw 6230, compress the block body 6210 and engage the holding matrix 6250 and the plurality of protective caps 6270 with the legs of the brackets 6220. In at least one such embodiment, additional proximal movement of the actuator 6235 may cause the side walls of the drive grooves 6236 and 6237 to contact the pins 6243 and 6244, respectively, and push the pins 6243 and 6244 down toward the lower ends of the grooves 6233 and 6234, respectively. In such situations, the drive 6235 can be extended proximally so that, firstly, the distal pin 6243 exits the second part 6236b of the drive groove 6236 and enters the inclined third part 6236c, and the proximal pin 6244 likewise exits the second part 6237b of the drive groove 6237 and entered the inclined third part 6237c. By moving both pins 6243 and 6244 down, the second jaw 6240 can move down toward the first jaw 6230 to the activated position. In at least one such embodiment, the second jaw 6240 can be moved downward so that the retaining matrix 6250 remains parallel or at least substantially parallel to the upper surface of the block housing 6210 and / or parallel or at least substantially parallel to the alignment matrix 6260. In any case, after the retaining matrix 6250 and the protective caps 6270 enter into engagement with the legs 6221 of the brackets 6220, as shown in FIG. 129, the second jaw 6240 can be returned to the open or at least substantially open position. In at least one such embodiment, the actuator 6235 can be distally pushed to move the pins 6243 and 6244 into the upper ends of the slots 6233 and 6234, respectively, and then down to the lower ends of the slots 6233 and 6234 as soon as the pins pass through the intermediate parts 6236b and 6237b of the respective the drive grooves 6236 and 6237. After opening the second jaw 6240, the first jaw 6230 can be disconnected from the implanted brace unit 6200, and the first and second jaws 6230, 6240 can be removed from the implanted node with stapling elements, as shown in FIG. 128.

In FIG. 127 pins 6243 and 6244 are not shown mounted at the very bottom of the corresponding slots 6233 and 6234, although the holding matrix 6250 and caps 6270 are engaged with the legs of the brackets 6221. This situation may occur when a thick fabric T is located between the holding matrix 6250 and the block body 6210 As presented in FIG. 130, in situations where a thinner fabric T is located between the holding matrix 6250 and the block body 6210, the pins 6243 and 6244 can be pushed down into the corresponding grooves 6233 and 6234, as shown in FIG. 132. In general, in at least one such embodiment, the actuator 6235 can be pulled proximally to push the pins 6243 and 6244 up and down as described above and shown in FIG. 130-132 in a series of movements, and due to the smaller thickness of the fabric T, the holding matrix 6250 and the protective caps 6270 can extend further to the legs 6221 of the brackets 6220, as shown in FIG. 133 and 134. In various embodiments, due to the control capabilities provided by the holding matrix 6250, it is possible to obtain the same or substantially the same compressive force in the fixed tissue regardless of the thickness of the tissue captured by the working apparatus. In a number of embodiments, the adjustment capabilities provided by the holding matrix 6250 may allow the surgeon to select a larger compressive force or a lower compressive force applied to the tissue by selecting the depth at which the holding matrix 6250 is set. In at least one such embodiment, the installation range the holding matrix 6250 on the legs of the brackets 6221 can be determined, for example, by the length or range of lengths of the grooves 6233 and 6234.

In various embodiments, as described above, the protective caps 6270 may be made, for example, of soft or flexible material, which may be configured to grip the ends of the legs of the brackets 6221. In some embodiments, the protective caps 6270 may be made of bioabsorbable plastic, polyglycolic acid (PGA), commercially available under the trademark Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglycaprone 25 (PGCL), commercially available under the trademark Mo nocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL) and / or, for example, mixtures of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and / or PCL, and / or a biocompatible metal, such as, for example, titanium and / or stainless steel. As represented in FIG. 124, in at least one embodiment, each cap 6270 may not be connected to other caps 6270. In a number of other embodiments, one or more caps 6270 may be mounted on a holding matrix 6250. In at least one such embodiment, caps 6270 may be connected to the holding matrix 6250 using, for example, at least one adhesive, the holes 6271 in the caps 6270 can be aligned or at least substantially aligned with the holding holes 6252 in the hold vayuschey matrix 6270. As shown in FIG. 135, in various embodiments, a protective cap, such as, for example, cap 6370, may form an internal cavity, or dome, 6374, which may be configured to receive, for example, the tip of the bracket foot 6221. In at least one such embodiment cap 6370 may include a bottom 6372 and an opening 6371 extending through the bottom 6372. In various embodiments, the opening 6371 may be formed by one or more deflectable elements 6373, which may be deflectable The passage through the legs of the bracket 6221. In a number of embodiments, for example, two or more caps 6370 can be joined together to form an array of caps 6370. As shown in FIG. 136, in at least one such embodiment, the plurality of caps 6370 may be joined by a sheet of material 6375. In some embodiments, the sheet 6375 may be rigid enough to maintain the desired relative positioning and / or alignment of the caps 6370. In at least one embodiment, the caps 6370 can be made of a biocompatible metal, such as titanium and / or stainless steel, and sheet 6375 can be made of bioabsorbable plastic, polyglycolic acid (PGA), available in also under the trademark Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglexaprone 25 (PGCL), commercially available under the trademark Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL) and / or, for example, a mixture of PGA , PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and / or PCL. In various embodiments, sheet 6375 may be made from a bioabsorbable polymer comprising an antimicrobial agent, such as, for example, colloidal silver and / or triclosan embedded and / or dispersed, for example, in sheet 6375 and released upon bioabsorption.

In addition to the above, in various embodiments, the sheet 6375 may be formed around the caps 6370, for example, by injection molding, so that the caps 6370 are embedded in the material of the sheet 6375. In several other embodiments, the sheet 6375 can be formed, for example, by molding under pressure, with holes 6376 can be formed in sheet 6375 during injection molding and / or after completion of the injection molding process, for example, by stamping. In any case, the caps 6370 can be inserted into the holes 6376 and secured to them using pressing and / or snapping, and / or at least one adhesive. In a number of embodiments, each cap 6370 may comprise an annular groove that completely or at least partially surrounds the perimeter of cap 6370 and which may be configured to receive the perimeter of aperture 6376. In some embodiments, sheet 6375 may be made of flexible and / or ductile material allowing relative movement between the caps 6370. In at least one such embodiment, the flexible sheet 6375 may be made, for example, of rubber, plastic or silicone mat iala and caps 6370 may be made from a rigid material such as, for example, metal. In at least one such embodiment, similar to the above, the flexible material may be cast around the caps 6370. In a number of embodiments, the caps 6370 may, for example, be pressed into a pre-molded sheet 6375. In various embodiments, the hardness index of the flexible used can be selected. material to obtain the desired stiffness of the sheet 6375. In some embodiments, the sheet 6375 may be configured to contain a flexible strip. In any case, the sheet 6375 can facilitate the installation of the caps 6370 in the working device, since in this case, in the working device, you can arrange and / or combine many caps 6370 at the same time. In addition, after implantation, the sheet 6375 connecting the caps 6370 can, for example, act as a reinforcing or supporting element for tissue along the line of staples. In addition to or instead of using a sheet to connect the caps 6370, the caps 6370 can be connected together by many links. In at least one such embodiment, such links may be flexible and may allow relative movement between caps 6370.

As represented in FIG. 139 and 140, in various embodiments, a protective cap, such as, for example, cap 6470, may comprise a forming surface that can be deformed to the tip of the bracket leg. In at least one such embodiment, cap 6470 may include a base 6472, which may include a hole 6471 passing through it. In various embodiments, the hole 6471 may be more accurately able to receive a bracket leg, such as, for example the bracket foot 6221. In at least one embodiment, the hole 6471 may be formed by a diameter or perimeter that may be equal to or greater than the diameter or perimeter of the bracket foot 6221. In various embodiments, the The cap 6470 may further comprise a cavity, or dome, 6474, which may be configured to receive the tip of the leg of the bracket 6221 while inserting it into the cap 6470. As is mainly shown in FIG. 140, cap 6470 may further comprise an abutment, or forming surface 6473, which may be configured to deflect and deform the legs of bracket 6221. In various circumstances, forming surface 6473 may be, for example, curved and / or concave, and may be formed with the possibility of bending the legs of the bracket 6221 while inserting it into the cap 6470. In some embodiments, the leg of the bracket 6221 can be deformed so that it cannot be pulled back through hole 6471, and thus, cap 6470 can be is locked to the leg of the bracket 6221. In at least one such embodiment, the base 6472 of the cap 6470 may form a rim extending around the hole 6471, which may prevent the deformed leg of the bracket 6221 from being pulled out of the cavity 6474. In various circumstances, as a result of the above, one or more caps 6470 may or may not allow the retention of the retention matrix, such as, for example, the retention matrix 6250, or its disengagement from the brackets 6220. Although this is not shown in the figures, in various embodiments of the cap 6470 may be formed symmetrically or at least substantially symmetrical and the opening 6471 can be located on the central axis 6479 through the cap 6470. As also shown in FIG. 139, in various alternative embodiments, the hole 6471 may be offset relative to the central axis 6479. In at least one such embodiment, the offset hole 6471 may allow the bracket leg 6221 to contact the side of the forming surface 6473 and bend toward the other side of the forming surface 6473 instead contact with the center of the forming surface 6473, which may occur in embodiments with the above centered holes 6471.

As indicated above, in various embodiments, the holding matrix, such as, for example, the holding matrix 6250, can be made of a sheet of material and a plurality of holding holes 6252 passing through it. In at least some embodiments, the sheet of material containing the holding matrix 6250 may be rigid or substantially inflexible. In a number of other embodiments, the holding matrix may consist of an array of elements of the holding matrix and a plurality of flexible connectors, or links connecting the elements of the holding matrix. As represented in FIG. 141, in various embodiments, the holding matrix, or part of the holding matrix, 6550 may comprise a plurality of element housings 6505, which may be joined together by one or more connecting links 6507. In at least one embodiment, each element housing 6505 may comprise a plurality of deformable elements 6553, which form a holding hole 6552 therein. In a number of embodiments, the element bodies 6505 and the connecting links 6507 of the holding matrix 6550 can be formed at the same time and gut can be a single piece of material. In various embodiments, the holding matrix 6550 may be, for example, stamped or cast and made of a metal material, such as, for example, titanium and / or stainless steel. In at least one embodiment, the retention matrix 6550 may consist of plastic, for example polyetheretherketone (PEEK), polypropylene (trade name Prolene), polyester, polyethylene terephthalate (trade names Ethibond and Mersilene), polyvinylidene fluoride, polyvinylidene fluoride-co-polypropylene polyhexafluoropropylene-vinylidene fluoride (trade name - Pronova) and (or) long chain aliphatic polymers nylon 6 and nylon 6,6 (trade name - Ethilon & Nurolon), and can be formed by injection hydrochloric molding. In some embodiments, the element housings 6505 may not be formed integrally with the connecting links 6507. In various embodiments, it is possible to produce a plurality of individual element housings 6505, which are then joined together and embedded in a holding matrix. In at least one such embodiment, the element housings 6505 can be stamped from a metal material, such as, for example, titanium and / or stainless steel, and placed in a mold for molding plastic products, wherein the plastic material can be introduced into the mold under pressure to create, firstly, a rim 6506 of material surrounding or at least partially surrounding the housing of elements 6505, and secondly, connecting links 6507 extending from rims 6506. In some other embodiments, there may be one or more connecting grids are formed comprising openings formed in a plurality of rims 6506, each such opening being able to receive an element body 6505. In at least one embodiment, each housing of element 6505 may comprise an annular or at least substantially annular external perimeter, and, likewise, each rim 6506 may form a circular or at least substantially circular opening within itself, the diameter of the opening may be equal to or less than the diameter of the case of the element 6505. In at least one such embodiment, the cases of the elements 6505 can be pressed into or inserted into the holes of the rims 6505. In some embodiments, Ia body element 6505 may be fixed in the holes by means of at least one adhesive.

In addition to the above, in various embodiments, the holding matrix may comprise a plurality of element housings 6505 and a plurality of connecting links 6507 that can connect the element housings 6505 to any suitable array, for example, as shown in FIG. 142-145. Regardless of the location of the array, in various embodiments, the connecting links 6507 may be able to relative move the housings of the elements 6505 and the holding holes 6552. In at least one such embodiment, the grating of the bodies of the elements 6505 and the connecting links 6507 forming the holding matrix 6550 after the meshing with the fabric can be stretched, twisted, compressed and / or otherwise deformed to provide at least some mobility in the fabric, but at the same time, dotvraschat its significant displacement. In various embodiments, each link 6507 may comprise a flexible member configured to stretch, twist and / or compress to allow deformation of the holding matrix 6550, for example, between the holding elements of the matrix 6505. As shown in FIG. 141, each link 6507 extending from the rim 6506 may have a width that is less than the width of the element 6505 and / or rim 6506. As shown in FIG. 142-145, in certain embodiments, one or more links 6507 may comprise straight sections that, for example, extend along a line connecting adjacent bodies of elements 6506. In at least one such embodiment, each link 6507 may comprise a first end attached to a first rim 6506, and a second end attached to the second rim 6506. As also shown in FIG. 141, in certain embodiments, two or more links 6507 may be connected to each other. In at least one such embodiment, two or more links 6507 may be connected, for example, in an intermediate hinge 6509. In various embodiments, the hinge 6509 may comprise a narrowing in the cross section in one or more directions compared to the thickness in the cross section of the links 6507 that can provide, for example, the ability to move the connected links 6507 relative to each other. In a number of embodiments, the holding matrix 6550 may further comprise hinges 6508 that can connect the links 6507 to the rims 6506 and allow relative movement of the links 6507 and the rims 6506. Like hinges 6509, the hinges 6508 may include, for example, one or more narrowing of the cross section more directions compared to the thickness of the 6507 units in cross section.

In addition to the above, in various embodiments, the connected links 6507 may extend in different directions. In at least one such embodiment, the first link 6507 may extend in a first direction, and the second link 6507 may extend in a second direction, wherein the first direction may be different from the second direction. In a number of embodiments, the first link 6507 may extend along the first line, and the second link 6507 may extend along the second line, wherein the first line and the second line may intersect at an angle, such as, for example, approximately 30 degrees, approximately 45 degrees, approximately 60 degrees and / or approximately 90 degrees. In various embodiments, the hinges 6508 and / or hinges 6509 may be flexible hinges that allow links 6507 to move relative to each other several times without breaking the hinge. In some embodiments, hinges 6508 and / or hinges 6509 may contain brittle or easily collapsing parts that can be destroyed if the deformation is strong enough or too many. In at least one such embodiment, such fragile parts may allow one or more parts of the holding matrix 6550 to separate from another part of the holding matrix 6550. In various embodiments, hinges 6508 and / or hinges 6509 may, for example, comprise sections of the holding matrix 6550, which easier to cut than other parts of the holding matrix 6550. More specifically, the often implanted holding matrix and tissue fixed by the implanted holding matrix can be cut with a cutting element for I have various purposes, and to facilitate such a transverse dissection, for example, tracks or thin sections can be provided in hinges 6508 and / or hinges 6509, through which it will be easier for the cutting element to pass through the holding matrix 6550. In addition to the foregoing, in various embodiments the implementation of the connecting links 6507 may contain, for example, made on them one or more stamped or flattened sections to facilitate bending, tearing and / or incision of the connecting links 6507.

In various embodiments, the holding matrix may comprise a plurality of holding matrix elements, such as, for example, matrix element housings 6505 that can be embedded in a flexible sheet or strip of material. In at least one embodiment, the flexible sheet of material may be formed from a bioabsorbable elastomeric material, such as, for example, silicone, wherein the flexible sheet may be made with a plurality of holes formed therein. In at least one such embodiment, a continuous flexible sheet may be cast first, and then a plurality of holes may be punched in the flexible sheet. In various alternative embodiments, a flexible sheet may be molded and holes formed in it during the casting process. In any case, for example, the elements of the holding matrix 6505 can be inserted and fixed in a flexible sheet. Similarly to the foregoing, in a number of other embodiments, a flexible sheet may be formed around the elements of the matrix 6505. In at least one embodiment, the flexible sheet may be, for example, a woven mesh and / or any other suitable material. In addition to the above, such a woven mesh can be easily cut.

As represented in FIG. 146 and 147, in various embodiments, a crosslinking system comprising a retaining matrix, such as, for example, a holding matrix 6250, may further comprise a coating, such as, for example, a coating 6670, which may cover the ends of the legs of the brackets 6221 as they extend over the top the surface 6257 of the holding matrix 6250. In various embodiments, the coating 6670 may be attached to the holding matrix 6250. In some embodiments, the coating 6670 and / or holding matrix 6250 may include a holding element Nuts that can be configured to hold the coating 6670 on the holding matrix 6250. At least in one embodiment, at least one adhesive may be used to attach the coating 6670 on the holding matrix 6250. In at least one embodiment, coating 6670 may consist of one layer, although the coating 6670 shown has two layers, as described in more detail below. As mainly presented in FIG. 147, in various embodiments, the ends of the legs of the brackets 6221 may extend through the lower surface 6673 of the coating 6670, however, the coating 6670 may be sufficiently thick so that the ends of the legs of the braces do not extend through the upper surface 6675 of the coating 6670. As a result, in at least one such embodiment the implementation of the tips of the legs of the brackets 6221 may not protrude from the coating 6670. In various embodiments, the implementation of the coating 6670 may contain many layers. In at least one such embodiment, the coating 6670 may comprise a first layer 6671 and a second layer 6672. In at least one embodiment, the first layer 6671 and the second layer 6672 may be bonded to each other, in at least one embodiment the second layer 6672 may comprise a lower surface 6676 adhered to the first layer 6671. In various embodiments, the first layer 6671 and the second layer 6672 may have different thicknesses, although in some embodiments they may be the same thickness. In at least one embodiment, the first layer 6671 and the second layer 6672 may have substantially the same width and / or length. In alternative embodiments, layers 6671 and 6672 may have different widths and / or lengths.

In addition to the above, in various embodiments, the first layer 6671 may consist, for example, of compressible foam, mesh material and / or hydrogel, which can be cut by the legs of the brackets 6211. In at least one embodiment, the second layer 6672 may consist of a stronger material, or shell, such as, for example, PGA and / or PDS, and / or any suitable support material. In at least one such embodiment, the legs of the brackets 6221 may be capable of piercing the first layer 6671, however, in various embodiments, the legs of the brackets 6221 may not be able to pierce the second layer 6672. In some embodiments, the second layer 6672 may consist of material, possessing sufficient elasticity and / or strength to contact and displace the second layer 6672 with the foot of the bracket 6221, but without a notch or with a minimum notch with the tip of the foot of the bracket 6221. Although this is not shown in the figures, the coating can t consist of more than two layers, with one or more of these layers may be resistant to puncture. During use in at least one such embodiment, the holding matrix 6250 can be positioned on the tissue to be fixed and filed down so that the legs 6221 of the brackets 6220 pass through the fabric T and the holding holes 6252 in the holding matrix 6250 and enter the first layer 6271 coatings 6270. In various embodiments, the ends of the legs of the brackets 6221 may not be included or at least substantially not included in the second layer 6272 of the cover 6270. After the retaining matrix 6250 is placed in a suitable manner, the jaw 6240 ozhet be opened, so that the cover 6670 and 6250 holding the matrix can be separated from the jaws 6240, as shown in FIG. 146. As represented in FIG. 146, jaw 6640 may be configured to hold more than one holding matrix 6250 and cover 6670. In at least one such embodiment, jaw 6640 may include two grooves 6679, each of which may be configured to receive cover 6670 and located below holding matrix 6250 such that the tissue-contacting surface 6251 of each holding matrix 6250 will face down from the base of jaw 6240. In at least one such embodiment, the holding matrix 6250 and ytie 6270 can be placed in the jaws 6640 on each side of the groove 6678 of the cutting element. In use, the holding matrices 6250 and coatings 6670 can be placed at the same time and / or at the same depth with respect to bracket blocks located opposite them, such as blocks 6200, for example, located throughout the depth. Then, in various embodiments, the fixed tissue can be dissected along the cut line by a cutting element moving along the groove of the cutting element 6678, while the jaw 6640 can be opened again. In some embodiments, the coatings 6670 may not be attached to the holding matrix 6250. In at least one such embodiment, the coatings 6670 may be located in the grooves 6679 and may be held in the grooves 6679 by the holding matrices 6250, which may be secured to the jaw 6640. B in various embodiments, each holding matrix 6250 may have a larger width and / or length compared to respective coatings 6670, so that the holding matrices 6250 can completely hold the corresponding coatings 667 0 in the desired position. In a number of embodiments, each holding matrix 6250 may have, for example, the same length and / or width as the corresponding coating 6670.

In various embodiments, as described above, the crosslinking system may comprise a layer of material that can be attached to a holding matrix, such as, for example, a holding matrix 6250. As shown in FIG. 150, in at least one embodiment, a layer of material 6870 may be attached to the bottom surface 6251 of the holding matrix 6250. In some embodiments, the layer 6870 and / or holding matrix 6250 may include holding elements configured to hold the layer 6870 on the holding matrix 6250 In at least one embodiment, at least one adhesive may be used to adhere layer 6870 to retention matrix 6250. In any case, the layer 6870 may comprise a lower or fabric-facing surface 6873, which can be made to contact the fabric T by moving the holding matrix 6250 down in the direction of the brackets 6220 to engage the holding holes 6252 with the legs of the brackets 6221. At least in in one such embodiment, the layer 6870 may consist of a compressible material, such as bioabsorbable foam, which can be compressed between the bottom surface 6251 of the holding matrix 6250 and the fabric "T". In various embodiments, the layer 6870 may also include at least one drug stored and / or distributed in the layer. This drug may be released from layer 6870 as it is compressed. In at least one embodiment, the medicament may comprise at least one tissue sealant, hemostatic agent and / or antimicrobial material, such as, for example, silver ions and / or triclosan. In various embodiments, the compression of layer 6870 can cause the drug to extrude from layer 6870, so that all or at least a significant portion of the surface of tissue T will be coated with the drug. In addition, as the layer 6870 is compressed and the tissue T and layer 6870 are punctured by the legs of the brackets 6221, the drug can flow along the legs of the brackets 6221 and, for example, process the fabric just cut by the legs of the brackets 6221. In various embodiments, the housing of the holding matrix 6250 may comprise a first layer consisting of a biocompatible material, such as, for example, titanium and / or stainless steel, and the lower layer 6870 may comprise a second layer containing bioabsorbable material, such as oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC), bi logically active substances such as fibrin and / or thrombin (in liquid or lyophilized form), glycerol, absorbable porcine gelatin in the form of a gas, or a foam and / or antimicrobial agents such as, for example, silver ions and / or triclosan. Additional bioabsorbable materials may contain, for example, Surgicel Nu-Knit, Surgicel Fibrillar, collagen / ORC, which is a hybrid material with an integrated collagen matrix and is commercially available under the trademark Promogran, polyglycolic acid (PGA), commercially available under the trade Vicryl brand, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglecaprone 25 (PGCL), commercially available under the trademark Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL) and / or a mixture of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and / or PCL. Although in FIG. 150, only one layer 6870 is represented; any suitable number of layers may be used. In at least one embodiment, the first layer containing the first drug may be attached to the holding matrix 6250, and the second layer containing the second or other drug may be attached to the first layer. In at least one such embodiment, multiple layers may be used, with each layer may contain different drugs and / or a different combination of drugs.

As represented in FIG. 148, in various embodiments, the crosslinking system may comprise a layer of material 6770 attached to the bottom surface 6251 of the holding matrix 6250. In some embodiments, the layer 6770 and / or holding matrix 6250 may include holding elements configured to hold the layer 6770 on the holding matrix 6250 In at least one embodiment, at least one adhesive may be used to adhere layer 6770 to retention matrix 6250. In any case, the layer 6770 may contain a lower or fabric-facing surface 6773 that can be made to contact the fabric T by moving the holding matrix 6250 down in the direction of the brackets 6220 to engage the holding holes 6252 with the legs of the brackets 6221. At least in in one such embodiment, the layer 6770 may consist of a compressible material, for example, bioabsorbable foam, which can be compressed between the bottom surface 6251 of the holding matrix 6250 and the fabric "T". In various embodiments, the implementation of the layer 6770 may also include one (or more) capsule (cell) 6774, in which at least one drug can be stored. As represented in FIG. 149, in certain embodiments, the capsules 6774 can be aligned or at least substantially aligned with the retaining holes 6252 such that when the legs of the brackets 6221 are pushed through the fabric T and the layer 6770 of the legs of the brackets 6221 can puncture and / or otherwise disrupt the integrity of the capsules 6774 After the integrity of the capsules 6774 is violated, at least one drug M stored in the capsules 6774 may leak onto the “T” tissue. In at least one such embodiment, the drug M may include a fluid that can drain down the legs of the brackets 6221 and have a therapeutic effect on the tissue “T” cut by the legs of the brackets. As a result, the drug in capsules 6774 can provide local treatment of tissue. In a number of embodiments, capsules 6774 in sheet 6770 may contain various medications. For example, the first group of capsules 6774 may contain a first drug or a first combination of drugs, and the second group of capsules may contain another drug or a different combination of drugs. In various embodiments, the implementation of the layer 6770 may consist of a flexible silicone sheet, and the capsule 6774 may represent voids in the silicone sheet. In at least one such embodiment, the silicone sheet may comprise two layers that can be attached to each other, wherein capsules 6774 may be formed between the two layers. In various embodiments, the implementation of the layer 6770 may contain one or more thin or weakened parts, for example, in the form of partially perforated sections, which can facilitate incision of the layer 6770 and the violation of the integrity of the capsules 6774 legs 6221. In some embodiments, at least a portion of the capsules 6774 may be located in domes 6777, while domes 6777 may extend upward from sheet 6770. In at least one such embodiment, domes 6777 and / or at least a portion of capsules 6774 may be located in recesses 6201 formed h retention matrix 6250. In some embodiments, the capsule 6774 may comprise individual cells, are not related to each other. In a number of other embodiments, one or more capsules 6774 may be in fluid communication with each other, for example, through one or more channels, passages and / or ducts passing through layer 6770. Description of US Patent No. 7,780,685 under the heading “ADHESION AND MECHANICAL FASTENING ELEMENT ”, issued on August 24, 2010, is fully incorporated into this application by reference.

In addition to the foregoing, in various embodiments, a bracket block comprising a block body, brackets and / or alignment matrix may be loaded into the first end clamp jaw, and, similarly, a holding matrix and / or one or more coatings may be loaded into the second jaw of the end clamp. As represented in FIG. 151, in certain embodiments, a special apparatus, such as, for example, a block loader 6990, can be used to insert two or more blocks with stapling elements simultaneously into the end clamp. In at least one embodiment, the block loader 6990 may comprise a handle 6991 and a block holder 6992, wherein the block holder 6992 may include a first holding portion adapted to hold the bracket body 6210 of the bracket block 6200, and also a second holding portion adapted to retaining the block body 6980, which supports, for example, firstly, a plurality of protective caps 6270 and, secondly, a holding matrix 6250 along its lower surface. In various embodiments, each of the first and second holding parts may comprise one or more holding elements configured to detachably engage the block bodies 6210 and 6980. In use, as presented in FIG. 152 and 153, the end clamp may comprise a first or lower jaw 6230 and a second or upper jaw 6940, whereby the bracket block 6200 can be loaded into the first jaw 6230 and the block body 6980 is loaded into the second jaw 6940. Under various circumstances, the upper jaw 6940 can be moved from the open position (FIG. 152) to the closed position (FIG. 153) using a feeding device 6235. The use of a feeding device 6235 is described above and is not repeated for brevity. After moving the upper jaw 6940 to the closed position, as shown in FIG. 153, the distal end 6993 of the block holder 6992 can be inserted into the end clamp so that the bracket block 6200 slides through the distal end 6938 of the first branch 6930 into the first securing part, or trough 6939, of the first branch 6230. Similarly, the distal end 6993 of the holder 6992 blocks can be inserted into the end clamp so that the block body 6980 slides through the distal end 6948 of the second jaw 6940 into the second securing part, or gutter, 6949, of the second jaw 6940. The surgeon or other medical worker holding the handle 6991 of the loader 6990 b lock, can push the bracket block 6200 and the block body 6980 along the grooves 6939 and 6949, respectively, until the bracket block 6200 and the block body 6980 are completely installed in the grooves.

When mounting the brace block 6200 and the block body 6980, each of the brace block 6200 and the block body 6980 may engage with one or more holding parts of the respective jaws 6230 and 6940, as described in more detail below. In any case, after installing the bracket block 6200 and the block body 6980, as shown in FIG. 154, the block loader 6990 may be disconnected from the bracket block 6200 and the block body 6980 and removed from the end clip. In at least one such embodiment, the holding force fixing the bracket block 6200 in the first jaw 6230 may exceed the holding force fixing the bracket block 6200 on the block holder 6992, so that when pulling the block holder 6992 distally from the end clip, the bracket block 6200 can remain in the first jaw 6230. Similarly, the holding force fixing the block body 6980 in the second jaw 6940 may exceed the holding force fixing the block body 6940 on the block holder 6992, so when pulling erzhatelya block 6992 distally from the end clamp block body 6940 can remain second jaws 6940. After extracting unit 6990 of the terminal clamp loader loaded first and second jaws 6230 loaded jaws 6940 may be positioned relative to the crosslinkable tissue T. Referring to FIG. 155, the second jaw 6940 can be shifted from the open position (FIG. 154) to the actuated position (FIG. 155) to provide contact between the holding matrix 6250 and the plurality of protective caps 6270 on the block body 6980 and the brackets 6220 located in block 6200 .

As represented in FIG. 156 and 157, the second jaw 6940 can be opened again, and the plurality of protective caps 6270 and the holding matrix 6250 can be detached from the block body 6980 so that the caps 6270 and the holding matrix 6250 can mesh with the T fabric and the brace block 6200. In at least one embodiment, the block body 6980 may comprise a plurality of recesses in which a plurality of caps 6270 can be housed for removal, as well as one or more retaining grooves configured to hold the retaining matrix 6250 with the ability to remove. In various embodiments, the holding elements of the second jaw 6940, engaged with the block body 6980, can hold the block body 6980 in the second jaw 6940 after moving the second jaw 6940 to the open position. In a number of embodiments, the block body 6980 can be torn apart when the second jaw 6940 is moved to the open position, so that part of the block body 6980 is implanted with caps 6270 and holding matrix 6250, and part of the block body 6980 remains in the second jaw 6940. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 156 and 157, the holding elements of the first jaw 6230, engaged with the block body 6210, can hold the block body 6210 in the first jaw 6230 after moving the second jaw 6940 to the open position. In a number of embodiments, the block body 6210 can be torn apart at the moment of removal of the first jaw 6230 from the implanted block 6200, so that a part of the block body 6210 is implanted together with brackets 6220 and the alignment matrix 6260, and a part of the block body 6210 remains in the first jaw 6230 As presented in FIG. 158-160, in various embodiments, a brace block, such as, for example, a brace block 6900, may comprise one or more longitudinal retaining grooves 6913 extending along the length of the block body 6910, which may be configured to receive one or more longitudinal retaining rails guides 6916 extending from jaw 6930, for example, when inserting the bracket block 6900 into the jaw 6930. In at least one embodiment, during use, before slipping the bracket block 6900 through the distal end 69 38 of the retaining groove 6939, the end of the retaining grooves 6913 may be aligned, for example, with the distal ends of the retaining rails 6916.

As represented in FIG. 160, in various embodiments, jaw 6940 may include two retaining grooves 6949, each retaining groove 6949 may be configured to receive a block body 6980 comprising a plurality of caps 6270 and a holding matrix 6250. In some embodiments, each block body 6980 may contain one or more longitudinal retaining flanges 6917, which can be slidable along one or more longitudinal retaining rails 6918 of the second jaw 6940 with the introduction of buildings 6980 blocks in co corresponding holding grooves 6949 of the jaw 6940. In various embodiments, the holding ribs 6918 and the holding flanges 6917 can together hold the block body 6980 in the second jaw 6940 while separating the block bodies 6980 from the caps 6270 and the holding matrix 6250 therein. As shown in FIG. 159, in various embodiments, the second jaw 6940 may further comprise one or more distal protrusions or retaining elements 6915 extending therefrom, which may be removably lockable to block housings 6980 in respective holding channels. In at least one such embodiment, the second jaw 6940 may comprise a distal protrusion 6915 configured and positioned relative to each retaining groove 6949 such that each block body 6980 can bend from the protrusions 6915 when inserting the block bodies 6980 into the grooves 6949, wherein when the block housings 6915 are fully installed in the grooves 6949, the distal ends of the block housings 6980 can come off and snap onto the protrusions 6915. To remove the block bodies 6980 after their use, as described above, the block bodies 6980 can be pulled back over the protrusions 6915 and removed from the holding grooves 6949. Like the above, the first branch 6930 may include one (or more) distal holding bulge 6914, which protrudes from the jaw and can receive one (or more) retaining trough (groove) 6912 (FIG. 158) of the block body 6910 when the bracket block 6900 is fully installed.

In addition to the above, in various embodiments, a first block with stapling elements containing a plurality of first stapling elements located therein may be located in a first branch of a surgical stapling device, and a second block with stapling elements containing a plurality of second stapling elements placed therein , can be placed in the second branch of the surgical stapler. In use, the first jaw and / or second jaw can be moved toward each other to engage the first stapling elements with the second stapling elements and to fix the fabric between them. In a number of embodiments, the first block with cross-linking elements and the second block with cross-linking elements may mesh with each other when the first cross-linking elements mesh with the second cross-linking elements. In at least one embodiment, the housing of the first block with stapling elements can be made of a first compressible material, and the housing of the second block with stapling elements can be made of a second compressible material, while the first housing and / or second housing can be pressed close to sutured tissue. After tissue is attached, the first jaw can be moved away from the implanted first block with stapling elements, and the second jaw can be moved away from the implanted second block with stitching elements. After that, the first branch can be recharged with another first unit with stapling elements and the like, the second branch can be recharged with another second block with stapling elements and the like, and the surgical stapler can be reused. Although brackets may be used in a number of embodiments, other embodiments are provided using other types of cross-linking elements, such as, for example, two-component cross-linking elements that snap together when they engage with each other. In at least one such embodiment, the first block with crosslinking elements may comprise a first portion of a storage space for accommodating the first parts of the crosslinking elements, and the second block with crosslinking elements may comprise a second portion of the storage space for accommodating the second portions of the crosslinking elements. In various embodiments, in the crosslinking systems described herein, crosslinking elements may be used containing any suitable type of material and / or having any suitable shape. In some embodiments, the crosslinking elements may comprise piercing elements. Such piercing elements can be made, for example, of a polymer or composite material and / or of a multilayer carrier. An example of a multilayer carrier is a wire or sheet carrier with an elastomeric or polymer coating. It can be a thin sheet formed so that the piercing elements are oriented perpendicularly or at least substantially perpendicularly to the connecting element. The piercing elements may have a rectangular profile, a semicircular profile and / or the profile of any beam. In various embodiments, the fasteners described herein may be fabricated using any suitable method, such as, for example, a wire extrusion method. Another possibility is to use microprocessing to create hollow piercing elements. Such piercing elements may be made in a manner different from the method of extruding the wire, and may include a combination of materials.

As indicated above, the ends of the legs of the brackets passing through the holding matrix can be closed with one or more caps and / or caps. In a number of embodiments, the ends of the legs of the brackets may be deformed after being held through the holding matrix. In at least one embodiment, the jaw supporting the holding matrix may further comprise stop recesses located above and / or aligned with the holding holes, which may be able to deform the legs of the brackets protruding above the holding matrix. In various embodiments, the legs of each bracket may be folded inward, for example, toward each other and / or toward the center of the bracket. In a number of other embodiments, one or more legs of the bracket can be bent outward in the direction from the other legs of the bracket and / or from the center of the bracket. In various embodiments, regardless of the direction of curvature of the legs of the brackets, the ends of the legs of the brackets may be in contact with the housing of the holding matrix and may not go into the braced fabric. In at least one embodiment, deformation of the legs of the brackets after they are held through the holding matrix may block the holding matrix in place.

As represented in FIG. 161 and 162, in various embodiments, a surgical stapler, such as, for example, a surgical stapler 7000, may include a first jaw 7030 and a second jaw 7040, the second jaw 7040 can be moved to and from the first jaw 7030 by moving the drive 6235. The operation of the 6235 drive is described above and is not repeated for brevity. In various embodiments, the first jaw 7030 may comprise a distal end 7031 and a proximal end 7032, wherein the first jaw 7030 may form a groove extending between the distal end 7031 and the proximal end 7032, which is configured to receive a brace block. To illustrate the case of such a bracket unit is not shown in FIG. 161, however, such a bracket block may comprise a block housing, brackets 6220 and brackets ejectors 7012 placed under the brackets 6220 and placed in brackets 6220. In certain embodiments, although not shown in FIG. 161, for clarity, the second jaw 7040 may be configured to place a holding matrix, such as, for example, a holding matrix 6250, over the brackets 6220 and / or moving the holding matrix before engaging with the legs of the brackets 6220, as described above. In at least one embodiment, the surgical stapler 7000 may further comprise a slide 7010 located in the first jaw 7030 that can slide, for example, from the distal end 7031 of the first jaw 7030 to the proximal end 7032 and lift the ejectors of brackets 7012 and brackets 6220 supported thereon in the direction of the holding matrix and the second jaw 7040. In other various embodiments, for placement of the brackets 6020, the slide 7010 can move, for example, from the proximal end 7032 to the distal end 70 31. In at least one embodiment, the slide 7010 may include one or more inclined, or cam, surfaces 7011, which can be slidable under the ejector brackets 7012 and lift the ejector brackets 7012 up. In various embodiments, the surgical stapler 7000 may further comprise an extrusion or ejector rod operably connected to the sled 7010, which can be moved proximally and / or distally via a drive located, for example, on the handle and / or trunk of the surgical stapler 7000.

As also presented in FIG. 161, in various embodiments, the second jaw 7040 of the surgical stapler 7000 may comprise a frame 7041, a distal end 7048, and a proximal end 7049 opposite the distal end 7048. In some embodiments, the second jaw 7040 may further comprise a guide system containing one or more guides such as, for example, guides 7045 and 7046 extending along the longitudinal axis of the frame 7041, which, as described in more detail below, can be configured to guide one or more pores, or cam elements, which can engage and deform the legs of the brackets 6220 after passing the legs 6221 of the brackets 6220 through the holding matrix. In at least one such embodiment, the guides 7045 and 7046 may include a guide wire or rod extending, for example, along the upper part or surface of the frame 7041, around the distal shaft 7047 and back along the upper part or surface of the frame 7041. In various embodiments, as indicated above and mainly presented in FIG. 163 and 165, the second jaw 7040 may further comprise one or more stops or cams, such as, for example, the first stop 7050 and the second stop 7060, which can be moved longitudinally along the second jaw 7040 to deform the legs of the brackets 6220 after passing through the holding matrix . In at least one embodiment, the surgical stapler 7000 may further comprise a pusher, or drive, of a first stop 7051, coupled and / or functionally connected to a first stop 7050, which may be configured to extend the first stop 7050 proximally and / or push the first stop 7050 distally. Similarly, in at least one embodiment, the surgical stapler 7000 may further comprise a pusher, or actuator, of a second stop connected and / or functionally connected to a second stop 7060, which may be configured to push the second stop 7060 distally and / or pulling the second stop 7060 proximally. In various embodiments, the first stop 7050 may include guide grooves 7052, and the second stop 7060 may include guide grooves 7062, each of which may be adapted to receive a guide 7045 or a slide 7046. In at least one such embodiment, the guides 7045 and 7046 can be tightly received in the guide grooves 7052 and 7062 so as to prevent or at least minimize lateral or lateral movement between them.

In addition to the above, in a number of embodiments, the first stop 7050 can be pulled proximally, and the second stop 7060 can be pulled distally. As represented in FIG. 161, in at least one embodiment, the guides 7045 and 7046 and the distal shaft 7047 may comprise a block system configured to extend the second stop 7060 distally and / or extend the second stop 7060 proximally. In at least one such embodiment, the guide 7045 and the guide 7046 may comprise a continuous wire or rod extending around the distal rod 7047, while a portion of the continuous wire can be extended to guide the wire rod around the distal rod 7047. In various embodiments, the guide 7046, for example can be fixed on the second stop 7060 in such a way that when pulling a continuous pull in the first direction, the second stop 7060 can be pulled distally to the distal end of the 7048 sc 7040 Shea, and when pulling the continuous rod in the second, or opposite, direction of the second stop 7060 can be pulled proximally to the proximal end 7049. As shown in FIG. 163, in at least one embodiment, the guide 7046 may be secured in the guide groove 7062 so that a pulling force can be transmitted between them. In at least one such embodiment, the guide 7045 can be slidable in another guide groove 7062. In various embodiments, the first stop 7050 can operate independently of the second stop 7060 and the block system, and the guide grooves 7052 provided in the first stop 7050 can be made with the possibility of receiving rails 7045 and 7046 with the possibility of sliding so as to ensure the possibility of their relative movement. In various embodiments, continuous traction, which is guides 7045 and 7046, can be flexible enough to allow opening and closing of the upper jaw 7040. Continuous traction can also be flexible enough to allow vertical movement of the second stop 7060 toward the lower jaw 7030 and from her, as described in more detail below.

In various embodiments, referring again to FIG. 163 and 165, the first stop 7050 may include cam pushers 7055, which may engage in cam grooves or guide grooves, such as a cam groove 7070 (FIG. 166), made in the frame 7041 of the second jaw 7040. More specifically, in at least one an embodiment, the frame 7041 may comprise a first cam groove 7070 extending longitudinally along the first side of the frame 7041, and a second cam groove 7070 extending longitudinally along the second or opposite side of the frame 7041, with support rollers 7055 extending from the first side of the first stop 7050 , can t move along the first cam groove 7070, and the support rollers 7055 extending from the second side of the first stop 7050 can move along the second cam groove 7070. In at least one such embodiment, the contours of each cam groove 7070 may be identical or at least at least substantially identical, and the grooves may be aligned or at least substantially aligned with each other. Similarly, in various embodiments, the second thrust plate 7060 may include cam followers 7065 that can engage in cam grooves 7070 (FIG. 166) formed in a frame 7041 of the second jaw 7040. More specifically, in at least one embodiment, the support rollers 7065 extending from the first side of the second stop 7060 can move along the first cam groove 7070, and the support rollers 7065 extending from the second side of the second stop 7060 can move along the second cam groove 7070. In use, the support Circles 7055 of the first stop 7050 and the support rollers 7065 of the second stop 7060 can slide in the cam grooves 7070 so that when pulling proximally and / or pushing the distal first stop 7050 and the second stop 7060, the first stop 7050 and the second stop 7060 will follow the contours of the cam grooves 707070 In various embodiments, each cam groove 7070 may comprise a plurality of locking, or upper, parts 7071 and a plurality of guides, or lower, parts 7072, which may be configured to move the stops 7050 and 7060 vertically, that is, towards the lower jaw 7030 and away from it during the longitudinal movement of the stops 7050 and 7060, that is, between the distal end 7048 and the proximal end 7049 of the frame 7041, as described in more detail below.

As represented in FIG. 166, when the surgical stapler 7000 is inoperative, the first stop 7050 can be located at the distal end 7048 of the frame 7041, and the second stop 7060 can be located at the proximal end 7049 of the frame 7041. In addition, as shown in FIG. 167, when the surgical stapler 7000 is inoperative, the brackets 6220 located in the first jaw 7030 may not yet be inserted into the tissue T and / or the retention matrix located above it. In use, as presented in FIG. 168, the brackets 6220 can be pushed upward in the brackets of the bracket unit 7033 using the brace ejectors 7012. In addition, the first stop 7050 can move proximally from the distal end 7048 of the frame 7041 to the proximal end 7049 to engage the legs 6221 of the brackets 6220. At least in one embodiment, the brackets 6220 can be pushed upward until the first stop 7050 engages with their legs of the brackets 6221. In various embodiments, all brackets 6220 can be placed in the upward direction of the slide 7010 before how the first stop 7050 will be moved before contact with the legs of the brackets 6221, or, in an alternative embodiment, the slide 7010 can move proximally simultaneously with the proximal movement of the first stop 7050, although the slide 7010 can be well ahead of the first stop 7050 to place the brackets 6220 to their contact with the first focus 7050. As shown in FIG. 168, in various embodiments, cam grooves 7070 may be formed and positioned so that forming surfaces, such as, for example, forming, or cam, surfaces 7053 and 7054 of the first cam 7050 can contact at least a portion of the legs of the brackets 6221 when the first cam 7050 through the stop position, or the upper position. In various circumstances, each of the support rollers 7055 of the first stop 7050 can be placed in the locking part 7071 of the cam grooves 7070 so that the forming surfaces 7053 and 7054 are in the raised position and when the stop 7050 is in the stop position, only the brackets 6221 are partially formed. As represented in FIG. 169, as the first cam 7050 moves further along the cam grooves 7070, the cam followers 7055 of the first stop 7050 can be guided into the guides or lower parts 7072 of the cam grooves 7070 so that the forming surfaces 7053 and 7054 move vertically down to the legs of the brackets 6021 for bringing the legs of the brackets 6021 into their finally formed configurations. Then, with further movement of the first stop 7050 along the cam grooves 7070, the first stop 7050 can be fed vertically upward into another set of locking parts 7071 of the cam grooves 7070. As shown in FIG. 168 and 169, it can be noted that the first stop 7050 can engage only with part of the legs of the brackets without engaging the remaining legs of the brackets. In at least one such embodiment, the first stop 7050 can be configured to deform only a group of staple legs, for example, containing distal legs 6221 of brackets 6220. In at least one such embodiment, the first stop 7050 can be configured to deform distal legs brackets 6221 toward the center of brackets 6220. In various embodiments, the first stop 7050 can contact each proximal leg of the bracket 6221 twice, that is, the first forming surface 7053 and the second a mating surface 7054, which is aligned with the first forming surface 7053. In at least one such embodiment, the first forming surfaces 7053 can deform the distal legs of the brackets 6221 into a partially deformed configuration when the first stop 7050 is in the stopped position, or in the upper position, and the second forming surfaces 7054 can deform the distal legs of the brackets 6221 into a fully formed configuration when the first stop 7050 moves to an excited, or lower, position. As represented in FIG. 163 and 164, in various embodiments, the first stop 7050 may comprise a plurality of first forming surfaces 7053 and a plurality of second forming surfaces 7054 for deforming the distal legs 6221 of the brackets 6220 when the legs of the brackets 6221 are arranged in more than one row or line. In various embodiments, as described in more detail below, deformation of the proximal legs 6221 of the brackets 6020 may be performed, for example, by a second stop 7060.

In addition to the above, in various embodiments, the first stop 7050 can move from the distal end 7048 of the frame 7041 to the proximal end 7049 to deform all the distal legs 6221 of the bracket 6220. The reader will notice that the first stop plate 7050 can move up and down relative to undeformed proximal legs of brackets 6221. To compensate for such relative movements in various embodiments, the first thrust plate 7050 may include one (or more) clearance 7057 (FIG. 165), which can be made s with the possibility of receiving bent proximal legs 6221 brackets as the first emphasis 7050 bends the distal legs 6221 brackets. Similarly, as also presented in FIG. 163, the second stop 7060 may include a gap-forming groove 7067, which may be configured to use the vertical movement of the drive of the first cam 7051, which moves up and down when the first stop 7050 moves between the stop positions and the excited position, as described above. After all the distal legs of the brackets 6221 have been folded in at least one embodiment, the second stop 7060 can be moved from the proximal end 7049 of the frame 7041 to the distal end 7048 by means of the stop 7061. As described above, as shown in FIG. 170, the cam followers 7065 of the second stop 7060 can slide in the cam grooves 7070 so that the second stop 7060 moves between the stop positions or the upper positions and the excited or lower positions to deform the proximal legs of the brackets 6221, for example, inward to the centers of brackets 6220. Similar to the above, the second emphasis 7060 may contain many of the first forming, or cam, surfaces 7063 and many of the second forming, or cam, surfaces 7064, each of which can be made with the possibility of at least partial deformation and / or complete deformation of one or more proximal legs bracket 6021. As is also shown in FIG. 164, the second abutment 7060 may comprise a plurality of first forming surfaces 7063 and a plurality of second forming surfaces 7064, which may be able to deform the proximal legs 6221 of the brackets 6220 arranged, for example, in the form of a plurality of rows or lines. As also presented in FIG. 164, the first forming surfaces 7063 and the second forming surfaces 7064 of the second stop 7060 may not be aligned with the first forming surfaces 7053 and the second forming surfaces 7054 of the first stop 7050, and thus, the proximal legs 6221 of the brackets 6220 may be arranged in other rows or lines compared to the distal legs 6221 of the brackets 6220. As the reader may also note, the second stop 7060 may push the first stop 7050 while moving the second stop 7060 distally. In at least one such embodiment, the second abutment 7060 may push the first abutment 7050 back to the distal end 7048 of the frame 7041 so that the first abutment 7050 can be returned to its original idle position. After deformation of all the proximal legs 6221 of the brackets 6220, the second stop 7060 can be extended proximally and returned to its original idle position. In this way, the surgical stapler 7000 can be returned to its initial position, so that a new bracket unit can be located in the first jaw 7030, and a new holding matrix can be located in the second jaw 7040 to reuse the surgical stapler 7000.

In various embodiments, as described above, the surgical stapler may comprise two or more stops that can be moved longitudinally to engage multiple brackets in the transverse direction with the legs. In some embodiments, the surgical stapler may include an abutment that moves, for example, proximal to deform the first group of brace legs and, for example, distally to deform the second group of brace legs. In at least one such embodiment, such an abutment may comprise, for example, proximal facing forming surfaces and distally facing forming surfaces.

As represented in FIG. 171, in various embodiments, an abutment, such as, for example, an abutment 7140, may comprise a lower or fabric contacting surface 7141 and a plurality of forming recesses 7142 formed therein. At least in one embodiment, the abutment 7140 may comprise more than one plate such as, for example, a plate with recesses 7143, which can be welded to the frame 7144. In at least one such embodiment, each plate with recesses 7143 can be placed in the groove for the plate 7145 in the frame 7144 and welded to the frame 7144 h Res extending through the frame 7144 weld groove 7146 for receiving the longitudinal seam 7147. In various circumstances, a longitudinal seal 7147 may be a continuous weld extending over the entire length of the weld groove 7146, or, for example, a series of spaced apart spot welds extending along its entire length. In various embodiments, each recessed plate 7143 may comprise two or more parts of the plate welded together. In at least one such embodiment, each plate with recesses 7143 may include a first part of the plate 7143a and a second part of the plate 7143b, which can be welded together along the seam 7148. In various embodiments, the first part of the plate 7143a and the second part of the plate 7143b of each plate 7143 can be welded to each other before welding the plates 7143 to the plate grooves 7145 in the frame 7144. In at least one such embodiment, the first part of the plate 7143a and the second part of the plate 7143b may have interacting profiles Such as, for example, shown in FIG. 171 zigzag profiles that can be fitted together to form a tight seam 7148. In at least one embodiment, each plate 7143 may have a height of, for example, approximately 0.51 mm (711 inches), which may exceed the depth of the troughs for the plates 7145, so that their surfaces 7141 in contact with the fabric extend from the frame 7044 of the abutment 7040. As shown in FIG. 172, in certain embodiments, plates 7143 can be joined together, for example, using at least one weld 7149 at the distal ends of plates 7143.

As represented in FIG. 171 and 172, each plate with recesses 7143 may comprise a plurality of forming recesses 7142 formed therein. In various embodiments, forming recesses 7142 can be formed in plates 7143 using any suitable manufacturing process, such as, for example, grinding and / or electrode burning . As represented in FIG. 173 and 174, in at least one such embodiment, each forming recess 7142 can be produced, for example, by first forming a deep hole 7150, then forming an arched or curved surface 7151 around a deep hole 7150, and then forming a guide groove for the bracket foot 7152 in a curved surface 7151. In other various embodiments, the implementation of these stages can be performed in any applicable order. As represented in FIG. 175, in various embodiments, the recesses for forming the brackets 7142 can be formed in such a way that the inner edges 7153 of the forming recesses are separated by a constant or at least substantially constant gap 7154. In at least one such embodiment, the space 7154 can be, for example, approximately 0.203 mm (0.008 in). In addition, in at least one such embodiment, the forming recesses 7142 may be arranged in two or more rows, or lines, the center lines of which may be separated by a constant or at least substantially constant interval 7155. In at least one such embodiment the implementation interval of 7155 between the center lines may be, for example, approximately 0.889 mm (0.035 inches). As also presented in FIG. 175, in various embodiments, each forming recess 7142 may taper smoothly between a smaller width 7156 and a larger width 7157. In at least one such embodiment, a smaller width 7156 may be, for example, approximately 1.143 mm (0.045 inches) and a larger width 7157 may be approximately 1.905 mm (0.075 inches). In various embodiments, plates 7143 may be made of the same material as frame 7144. In at least one such embodiment, both plates 7143 and frame 7144 may be made of stainless steel, such as, for example, 300 grade stainless steel or 400, and / or, for example, from titanium. In various other embodiments, the plates 7143 and the frame 7144 may be made of different materials. In at least one such embodiment, plates 7143 may be made, for example, of ceramic material, and frame 7144 may be made, for example, of stainless steel and / or titanium. In various circumstances, depending on the materials used, for attaching the plates 7143 to the frame 7144, for example, at least one soldering process may be used in addition to or instead of the welding processes described above.

As represented in FIG. 176-178, in various embodiments, the abutment 7240 may comprise a frame 7244 and a plurality of plates with recesses 7243 that can be inserted into the frame 7244. Similarly to the above, each plate with recesses 7243 may include a plurality of forming recesses 7242 formed therein. At least in one embodiment, the stop frame 7244 may comprise retaining grooves 7246 formed therein, each of which may be configured to receive a retaining rail 7247 extending from a plate with recesses 7243. For installation plates with recesses 7243 to the frame 7244 abutment 7245 abutment side walls of the frame 7244 can be bent or moved apart, as illustrated in FIG. 177 to increase the width of the retaining grooves 7246 so that each retaining groove 7246 can receive the retaining rail guide 7247 of the plate with recesses 7243. After placing the retaining rail guides 7247 in the retaining grooves 7246, the side walls 7245 can be released, as shown in FIG. 178, thereby allowing the frame 7244 to elastically contract and / or return to its expanded state. In such circumstances, the retaining grooves 7246 may be compressed and thereby gripping the retaining rails 7247. In a number of embodiments, the retaining rails 7247 and / or the retaining grooves 7246 may contain one or more mating conical surfaces that, after releasing the curved retaining grooves 7246, may form a conical lock, which can hold the holding rails 7247 in the holding grooves 7246. Similar to the above, the plates with recesses 7243 can be made of the same material well, as the frame 7244, or from another material. In at least one such embodiment, plates 7243 may be made, for example, of ceramic material, and frame 7244 may be made, for example, of stainless steel and / or titanium. In various circumstances, depending on the materials used, for attaching the plates 7243 in the frame 7244, for example, at least one soldering process and / or at least one welding process can be used.

Shown in FIG. 179 and 180, the surgical stapling and dissecting apparatus 8010 may comprise a stop 8014 capable of being repeatedly opened and closed by pivotally attaching to an elongated groove for brackets 8016. The brace overlay unit 8012 may comprise a stop 8014 and a groove 8016, wherein the node 8012 can be proximally attached to the elongated the rod 8018, forming the working part 8022. When the bracket assembly 8012 is closed or at least substantially closed, the working part 8022 may have a sufficiently small cross section suitable for introducing the assembly Ia brackets 8012 through a trocar. In various embodiments, the assembly 8012 can be manipulated using a handle 8020 connected to the shaft 8018. The handle 8020 may include user controls, such as a rotary handle 8030 that rotates the elongated shaft 8018 and the brace overlay assembly 8012 around the longitudinal axis of the shaft 8018. Closing trigger 8026, which can rotate in front of pistol grip 8036 around pin 8152 of the closing trigger (FIG. 181), which is meshed laterally across the housing 8154 Ojať can be pressed to close the node 8012 stapling. In various embodiments, the release trigger release button 8038 may protrude outward on the handle 8020 while compressing the release trigger 8026 so that the release button 8038 can be pressed to release the release trigger 8026 and open the brace overlay 8012, as described in more detail below. . The trigger 8034, capable of pivoting in front of the closing trigger 8026, can act on the overlay brackets 8012 to simultaneously dissect and staple the tissue clamped in it. In various situations, described in more detail below, a plurality of trigger cycles performed using the trigger hook 8034 can be used to reduce the force the surgeon has to exert with his hand in each cycle. In some embodiments, the handle 8020 may include rotating right and / or left indicator wheels 8040, 8041 (FIG. 181), which may indicate a progression of a trigger. For example, for a full trigger path, three full trigger cycles of the trigger 8034 may be required, and therefore the indicator wheels 8040, 8041 can rotate up to a third of a revolution for each trigger cycle of the trigger 8034. As described in more detail below, the manual trigger 8042 , if necessary, allow the trigger system to be pulled back until the trigger path is complete, and, in addition, the trigger lever 8042 may allow the surgeon or other doctor to pull the trigger system back in case the trigger system the theme is stuck and / or out of order.

As shown in FIG. 179 and 181, the elongated shaft 8018 may comprise an outer part including a longitudinally reciprocating closing tube 8024 that pivots the stop 8014 to the closed position by proximal pressing the closing trigger mechanism 8026 of the handle 8020. The elongated groove 8018 may be connected to the handle 8020 with a frame 8028 (FIG. 181), which is located inside with respect to the closing tube 8024. The frame 8028 may be rotatably engaged with the handle 8020, so that the rotation of the rotary handle 8030 (FIG. 179) may cause rotation of the working portion 8022. As specifically shown in FIG. 181, the rotary handle 8030 may be formed of two half-shells, which may include one or more internal protrusions 8031, which may extend through one or more elongated side holes 8070 in the cover tube 8024 and engage the frame 8028. As a result of the above, the rotary handle 8030 and the frame 8028 can be rotated together or synchronously, so that the rotation position of the handle 8030 determines the rotation position of the working part 8022. In various embodiments, the longitudinal length of the longer hole 8070 is sufficient Olsha to provide longitudinal closing and opening movement of the closure tube 8024. With reference to ensure closing movement of the closure tube 8024 as shown mainly in FIG. 181 and 183, the upper part 8160 of the closing trigger 8026 can push forward the closing yoke 8162 by means of the closing link 8164. The closing link 8164 is pivotally attached to its distal end by a pin of the closing yoke 8166 to the closing yoke 8162, and also hinged by its proximal end the pin of the closing yoke 8168. In various embodiments, the closing trigger 8026 can be moved to the open position by means of a tension spring of the closing trigger 8246, which is proximally connected to the upper part 8160 of the closing trigger 8026 and the handle housing 8154 formed by the right and left half shells 8156, 8158. The tensile force exerted by the tension spring 8246 can be overcome by applying a closing force to the closing trigger 8026 for distal advancement of the traverse 8162, the closing link 8164 and the closing tube 8024.

When actuating or depressing the closing trigger 8026 as described above, the closing trigger release button 8038 can take a position such that the surgeon or other doctor can press the closing trigger release button 8038, if necessary, allowing the closing trigger 8026 and the rest of the surgical apparatus return to a non-working position. In various embodiments, the release button of the closing release mechanism 8038 may be connected to the pivoting locking lever 8172 via a central lateral hinge 8173 so that movement between the release button 8038 and the locking lever 8172 can be transmitted. Refer again to FIG. 181. The compression spring 8174 can bias the release button of the closing release mechanism 8038 proximally, i.e. clockwise around the central lateral hinge 8173, when viewed from the right, and the upper part 8160 of the closing trigger 8026 may include a proximal ridge 8170 with a rear slot 8171. When you press the closing trigger 8026, the pivoting locking lever 8172 can run onto the proximal ridge 8170 and when the closing trigger 8026 reaches the fully pressed position, it should be understood that under the pivoting locking lever 8172 will be the rear slot 8171 and the lever will fall into this rear slot 8171 and udet is locked in it under the pressure of compression spring 8174. At this moment, when manually pressing the release button of the closing release mechanism 8038, the rotary locking lever 8172 rotates up and out of the rear slot 8171, as a result of which the closing release mechanism 8026 will be unlocked and will return to its unlocked position .

After the proximal compression of the closing trigger 8026, as described above, the trigger 8034 can be pulled to the pistol grip 8036 to distally advance the trigger rod 8032 from the handle 8020. In various embodiments, the trigger 8034 can rotate around the trigger pin 8202, which runs laterally and connects to the right and left half shells 8156, 8158 of the handle 8020. A triggered trigger 8034 can advance the trigger gear 8150 with an engaged gear. The trigger mechanism 8150 with the clutch gear can be brought into a retracted, inoperative position by a spring 8184, which, firstly, is attached to the pistol grip 8036 of the handle 8020 and, secondly, is attached to one of the links, for example, the trigger mechanism 8150 with the clutch transmission, as described in more detail below. The spring 8184 may include a fixed end 8186 connected to the housing 8154 and a movable end 8188 connected to the proximal end 8190 of the steel strip 8192. The distally located end 8194 of the steel strip 8192 can be attached to the connecting element 8195 on the front link 8196a from the set of links 8196a 8196d forming a connecting rail 8200. The connecting rail 8200 can be flexible so that it can be easily pulled into the pistol grip 8036 and minimize the length of the handle 8020 and still form a straight rigid rack assembly capable of transmit significant starting force to and through or from the trigger rod 8032. As described in more detail below, the trigger 8034 may come into contact with the first link 8196a when the trigger 8034 is first actuated, come into contact with the second link 8196b with the second trigger 8034, and come into contact with the third link 8196c when the third actuation of the trigger 8034 and come into contact with the fourth link 8196d with the fourth actuation of the trigger 8034, and each actuation of the trigger 8034 can move distally translationally Rail 8200 for some distance. In various embodiments, in addition to the foregoing, a plurality of strokes of the trigger 1034 can rotate the right and left indicator control wheels 1040, 1041 to indicate the distance the connecting rail 8200 has been advanced.

As shown in FIG. 181 and 183, the 8250 backstop lock mechanism can prevent the back rail 8200 from being pulled back with the combined tension / compression spring 8184 between the start strokes. In various embodiments, the connecting slide tube 8131 abuts against the first link 8196a and connects to the trigger rod 8032 to transmit the trigger movement. The trigger rod 8032 extends proximally through the proximal end of the frame 8028 and through the through hole 8408 of the backstop 8266. The size of the through hole 8408 allows the trigger rod 8032 to be slidingly sliding during perpendicular alignment and held in an inclined position. The lower reed fastener 8271 extends proximally from the lower protrusion of the proximal end of the frame 8028, passing through the hole 8269 on the lower edge of the backstop 8266. This lower reed fastener 8271 guides the bottom of the backstop 8266 near the frame 8028 so that the plate the backstop 8266 is perpendicular when the trigger rod 8032 moves distally and allows the upper rear to deviate into the holding position when the trigger is attempted rod 8032 retract. The backstop lock compression spring 8264 is compressed distally by the proximal end of the frame 8028 and proximally abuts against the top of the backstop lock plate 8266, deflecting the backstop lock plate 8266 to the lock state. Counteracting the bias of the spring, the backstop lock tube 8268 slidably connects the sliding sliding tube 8131 and abuts against the backstop lock plate 8266. The proximal protruding backstop lock beam 8256 attached to the backstop lock cam tube 8268 extends over the closing cross member 8162.

As shown in FIG. 181, the automatic back lever 8289 is integrated into the surgical stapler and dissecting apparatus 8010 and causes the cutting element to be retracted at the end of the full trigger path. To this end, the distal link 8196d includes a shank 8290 protruding upward when the distal link 8196d extends into the rail groove 8291 (FIG. 181) formed in the closing traverse 8162. This shank 8290 is aligned to activate the lower proximal cam 8292 on the release lever of the back lock 8248 (FIG. 186). As shown in particular in FIG. 186 and 187, the parts formed in the right and left half-shells 8156, 8158 limit the movement of the release lever of the backstop 8248. The socket 8296 of the pin and the round pin 8293 formed respectively between the right and left half-shells 8156, 8158 are received through a longitudinally elongated hole 8294 made in the release lever of the reverse lock 8248, distal to the lower proximal cam 8292, which allows longitudinal movement, as well as rotation around the round pin 8293. In the right half-shell 8156, prok the imperviously open groove 8295 includes a proximal horizontal portion 8295a that communicates with the upwardly and distally inclined portion 8295b that receives the right rear pin 8297 (FIG. 187) near the proximal end of the back lock release lever 8248, thereby transmitting upward rotation as the backstop release lever 8248 reaches the most distal part of this movement. A blocking member formed in the right half-shell 8156 proximal to the backstop release lever 8248 prevents it from being proximal assembled by holding the right-hand rear pin 8297 in the proximal open groove 8295.

In addition to the foregoing, as shown in FIG. 187 and 188, the distal end 8254 of the reverse lock release lever 8248 is thus moved distally and downward, as a result of which the front right-hand pin enters the distally open stepped part 8299 formed in the right half-shell 8156, which the compression spring 8300 introduces into this contact (FIG. 188) attached to a left-handed hook 8301 on a backstop release lever 8248 between a right-hand front pin 8298 and a longitudinally elongated hole 8294. The other end of the compression spring 8300 is attached to ryuchok 8302 (FIG 186, 188, 189), formed in the right half-shell 8156 in a more proximal and lower position just under the closing traverse 8266. Thus, the compression spring 8300 pulls the distal end 8254 of the release lever lock backward 8248 down and back, in as a result, the front right-hand pin 8298 is blocked in the distally open stepped part 8299 during distal advancement. Thus, after engagement, as shown in FIG. 189, the backstop release lever 8248 remains in front, holding the backstop lock plate 8266 in a perpendicular position and, therefore, allowing the connecting rail 8200 to be pulled back. When the closing yoke 8266 is then pushed back when the end clip 8012 is released, the upwardly extending tail 8303 on closing traverse 8266 comes into contact with the lower distal cam 8305 of the backstop release lever 8248, lifting the front right-hand pin 8298 from the distal open stepped part 8299 so that the compression spring of the backstop 8264 can proximally push the cam tube 8268 backstop and the release lever backstop 8248 in the retracted position (FIG. 186).

In various embodiments shown in FIG. 179 and 189, the trigger 8034 may be operatively connected to the connecting rail 8200 in any suitable manner. As shown in particular in FIG. 180 and 185, the trigger 8034 rotates around the trigger pin 8202, which is connected to the housing 8154. The upper part 8204 of the trigger 8034 moves distally around the trigger pin 8202 as the trigger 8034 is pressed against the pistol grip 8036, stretching proximally the located trigger tension spring 8206 (FIG. 181) proximally connected between the trigger hook upper portion 8204 8034 and the housing 8154. The trigger hook 8034 upper portion 8204 engages the connecting rail 8200 each depressing the trigger by means of a spring-loaded lateral safety mechanism 8210. When the trigger is released, the lateral safety mechanism disengages from the connecting rail 8200, and the trigger may return to an unpressed or idle position. During use, the inclined right-hand track formed by the proximal and right-sloping surface 8284 in each of the links 8196a-8196d is engaged with the side safety assembly 8285. In particular, the safety slider 8270 (FIGS. 181 and 183) has a right and left lower guides 8272, which slide respectively in the left groove 8274 (FIG. 181), formed in the closing traverse 8266 under the groove 8291 rails, and the right groove 8275 in the rail of the closing traverse 8276, parallel to the groove 8291 rails and attached to the cover of the gutter 8277 rails, covering the right part of the gutter 8291 rails in the closing traverse 8266, located distal to the trajectory of the slider 8270 fuse. In FIG. 181, 182 and 185, a compression spring 8278 is attached between the hook 8279 at the upper proximal position of the railing of the traverse beam 8276 and the hook 8280 on the distal right slider of the fuse 8270 and holds the slider of the fuse 8270 pulled proximally until it contacts the upper part 8204 of the trigger 8034.

As shown in particular in FIG. 181, the fuse block 8318 is located on the slider of the fuse 8270, turning around the vertical rear pin 8320, which passes through the left proximal corner of the fuse block 8318 and the slider of the fuse 8270. A recess for the ejector block 8322 is formed on the distal part of the upper surface of the block 8318 for receiving the ejector block block 8324, pivotally connected by a vertical pin 8326, the lower end of which passes into the recess for the spring of the fuse 8328 on the upper surface of the slider of the fuse 8270. the fuse 8330 in the recess for the spring of the fuse 8328 protrudes to the right of the vertical front pin 8326 and causes the fuse block 8318 to turn counterclockwise when viewed from above, engaging with the inclined right-hand track 8282. A small coil spring 8332 in the recess for the ejector unit 8322 forces the ejector unit 8324 is rotated clockwise, when viewed from above, brings its proximal end into contact with a simulated protrusion 8334 formed in the closing traverse 82 66 above the gutter for rail 8291. As shown in FIG. 184, the more mechanically strong fuse spring 8330, superior to the small coil spring 8332, causes the fuse block 8318 to engage with the ejector block 8324 rotated clockwise. As shown in FIG. 185, when the trigger hook 8034 is fully depressed and release begins, the ejector unit 8324 hits the rib 8336 in the simulated protrusion 8334 as the fuse slider 8270 retracts, causing the eject unit 8324 to rotate clockwise when viewed from above, and thus eject the fuse block 8318 out of engagement with the connecting rail 8200. The shape of the recess for the ejector unit 8322 prevents the ejector unit 8324 from turning clockwise in a position perpendicular to the modeled protrusion 8334, and such a violation of the connection persists throughout the entire lead back, as a result of which interference of the ratchet mechanism is excluded.

In FIG. 181, 183, 190 and 195, the surgical stapler and dissecting apparatus 8010 may include a manual retraction mechanism 8500 for manually releasing the trigger mechanism, manual retraction and, in one embodiment (FIG. 196-202), additionally performs automatic Lead back at the end of the full launch path. As shown in FIG. 181, 190 and 191, in particular, the front idler gear 8220 is engaged with the upper left gear surface 8222 of the connecting rail 8200, the front idler gear 8220 is also engaged with the idler gear 8230 having a smaller right-handed ratchet gear 8231. Like the front idler gear 8220, and the rear intermediate gear 8230 are rotatably connected to the handle housing 8154, respectively, using the shaft of the front intermediate gear 8232 and the shaft of the rear intermediate gear 8234. The ends of the rear Ala 8232 pass through the corresponding right and left half shells of the housing 8156, 8158 and are attached to the left and right indicator control wheels 8040, 8041, and, since the rear shaft 8234 rotates freely in the handle housing 8154 and is connected by a tongue to the rear gear 8230, the indicator control wheels 8040 , 8041 rotate together with the rear gear 8230. The gear ratio between the connecting rail 8200, the intermediate gear 8220 and the rear gear 8230 can advantageously be selected so that, with an appropriate tooth size After the gear front surface 8222, the rear gear 8230 made no more than one revolution during the full starting path of the trigger mechanism with the clutch gear 8150. In addition to the gear mechanism 8502 clearly shows the completed starting path or progress, the gear mechanism 8502 can also be used to manually retract cutting element. In various embodiments, the smaller right-handed ratchet gear 8231 of the rear idler gear 8230 extends into the sleeve 8506 of the manual back lever 8042, which is specifically aligned with a vertical longitudinally aligned groove 8508 (FIG. 190) in half separating the sleeve 8506. The lateral through hole 8510 of the sleeve 8506 communicates with the upper recess 8512. The front portion 8514 is configured to receive a proximal directional locking fuse 8516 that pivots around the right-side lateral pin 8518 formed at the distal end of the upper recess 8512. The rear portion 8520 is shaped, configured to receive an L-shaped spring tongue 8522 that pushes the locking fuse 8516 down into engagement with a smaller right-handed ratchet gear 8231. Holding The latching part 8524 (FIGS. 186 and 193) protrudes from the right half-shell 8156 into the upper recess 8512, holding the locking guard 8516 from engaging with the smaller right-hand ratchet gear 8231 when the manual pullback lever 8042 is lowered (FIG. 193). The coil spring 8525 (FIG. 181) forces the manual retraction lever 8042 to move backward.

In use, as shown in FIG. 192 and 193, the combined tension / compression spring 8184 may be detached from the connecting rail in a distal position. As shown in FIG. 194 and 195, when the manual retraction lever 8042 is raised, the locking fuse 8516 rotates clockwise and is no longer held by the holding part 8524 and engages in the smaller right-hand ratchet gear 8231, turning the rear intermediate gear 8230 clockwise when viewed from the left. In response to this, the front idler 8220 rotates counterclockwise, retracting the connecting rail 8200. In addition, a right-hand curved rib 8510 protrudes from the sleeve 8506, the size of which allows it to come into contact with the release lever of the reverse lock 8248 and move it distally, releasing the locking mechanism backward stroke 8250 when turning the lever 8042 manual retraction.

As shown in FIG. 196-202, the automatic retraction mechanism 8600 for the surgical stapler and dissecting apparatus 8010a may include an automatic retraction at the end of the full starting trajectory implemented using the front idler gear 8220a having a tooth 8602 that moves inside the circular groove 8604 in the cam gear 8606 to collisions with the 8608 blocker after an almost complete revolution corresponding to three start cycles. In this situation, the right-side rib 8610 is rotated upward to contact the recess of the lower cam 8612 to distally move the release lever of the back lock 8248a. As shown, in particular, in FIG. 197, the backstop 8248a release lever includes a distal end 8254 operating as described above. A round pin 8293 and a pin socket 8296 formed between the right and left half shells 8156, 8158 pass through a substantially rectangular hole 8294a formed in the release lever of the backstop 8248a behind the lower cam 8192, which allows longitudinal movements as well as a blocking downward movement the distal end 8254 of the reverse lock release lever 8248a. In the right half-shell 8156, a horizontal proximal open groove 8295a near the proximal end of the reverse lock release lever 8248a receives the right-hand rear pin 8297.

During operation, before starting, as shown in FIG. 198, 198A, the connecting rail 8200, and the backstop 8268 cam tube are retracted, blocking the backstop 8250, while the backstop 8264 compression spring tilts the backstop plate 8266 proximally to the original backstop 8626 position, and the reverse lock release lever 8248a is retracted so that link 8196a is in contact with the front idler gear 8220a. The tooth 8602 is in the “six o’clock” position, and the full path of the circular groove 8604 runs counterclockwise from it, and the right-hand rib 8610 is located directly near the tooth 8602. As shown in FIG. 199, 199A, one start-up cycle was performed by displacing one distal link 8196b in contact with the front idler gear 8220a. The tooth 8602 has traveled one third of its path along the circular groove 8604 of the fixed cam gear 8606. As shown in FIG. 200, 200A, a second start-up cycle was performed, displacing another link 8196c in contact with the front idler gear 8220a. The tooth 8602 has traveled two-thirds of its way along the circular groove 8604 of the fixed cam gear 8606. As shown in FIG. 201, 201A, a third start-up cycle was performed by displacing one distal link 8196d in contact with the front idler gear 8220a. The tooth 8602 went around the entire circumference of the circular groove 8604 until it came into contact with the blocker 8608, causing the cam gear 8606 to turn counterclockwise (when viewed from the right), as a result of which the right-hand rib 8608 came into contact with the release lever of the back lock 8248a. As shown in FIG. 202, as a result, the backstop release lever 8248a moved distally, locking the right-hand front pin 8298 in the distally open stepped part 8299 and releasing the backstop 8250. Related surgical staplers are disclosed in US Patent No. 7,083,075, issued August 1, 2006, contents which is fully incorporated into the present application by reference.

As shown in FIG. 203, the stapling unit 9012 of the surgical stapler 9010 performs the functions of squeezing the tissue, pushing the staples and stapling the tissue by two separate movements longitudinally transmitted down the shaft 9016 relative to the frame of the shaft 9070. The frame of the shaft 9070 is attached proximally to the handle of the surgical stapler and connected to it for rotation around the longitudinal axis. An exemplary multi-stroke handle for a surgical stapler and dissecting apparatus is described in more detail in a simultaneously filed and patent application of the US patent “SURGICAL STITCHING MACHINE WITH MULTI-START POSITION INDICATOR AND TRANSMISSION MECHANISM”. No. 10 / 374,026, the description of which is fully incorporated herein by reference. Other applications of the present invention may include a single-cycle start, as described in a simultaneously filed and owned by the same authors US patent application entitled "SURGICAL STAPLING MACHINE HAVING SEPARATE INDEPENDENT CLOSING AND STARTING SYSTEMS", ser. No. 10 / 441.632, the description of which is fully incorporated herein by reference путем.

As shown, in particular, in FIG. 204, the distal end of the frame of the rod 9070 is attached to the groove for the brackets 9018. The stop 9022 has a proximal rotary end 9072, which is rotatably received at the proximal end 9074 of the groove 9018 of the brackets directly distal to its connection with the frame of the rod 9070. When the stop 9022 is turned down, the stop 9022 moves the tissue-contacting surface 9028 and the forming recesses 9026 to the opposite bracket block, described in more detail below. The pivot end 9072 of the stop 9022 includes a closure member 9076 located close to but distal to its pivot attachment to the bracket groove 9018. Thus, the closure tube 9078, the distal end of which includes a horseshoe-shaped hole 9080, engages with this closure element 9076, selectively forces the stop 9022 to make an opening motion with proximal longitudinal movement and a closing motion with distal longitudinal movement of the closure tube 9078 sliding over the rod frame 9070 in response to the action of a closing trigger similar to the above. The frame of the rod 9070 performs and directs the starting movement from the handle to the longitudinal reciprocating motion of the two-component cutting element and the starting rod 9090. In particular, the frame of the rod 9070 includes a longitudinal slot of the starting rod 9092, which includes the proximal part of the two-component cutting element and the starting rod 9090, in particular, a multilayer tapering trigger rod 9094. It should be understood that the multilayer tapering trigger rod 9094 can be replaced by a trigger rod of c flat and / or any other suitable material.

The three-horned element 9102 is the distal part of the two-component cutting element and the trigger rod 9090, which facilitates separate closing and starting, and also separates the stop 9022 from the elongated brackets 9018 when actuating. As shown, in particular, in FIG. 204 and 205, in addition to any fastening option, for example by soldering or adhesive, the cutting element and the trigger rod 9090 are configured such that a corresponding pin fastener 9106 is received in the vertical fastening receiving hole 9104 formed proximally in the three-horned element 9102, located distally on a multilayer tapering starting rod 9094, which allows each part to be formed from the selected material and processed separately, taking into account their unequal functions (for example, strength, flexibility, t ix). The three-horned element 9102 may advantageously be made of a material having properties suitable for forming a pair of upper pins 9110, a pair of middle pins 9112 and a lower pin or support 9114, as well as suitable for creating a sharp cutting edge 9116. In addition, they are integral and protruding proximally the upper ejector 9118 and the middle ejector 9120, covering the cutting edge 9116 from each vertical end, further form the fabric preparation area 9122, helping to direct the fabric to the sharp cutting edge 9116 before races echeniem. The middle ejector 9120 also serves to engage and start the bracketing apparatus 9012 by abutting the stepped central element 9124 of the wedge-shaped slide 9126 (FIG. 206) which acts on the formation of the brackets using the bracketing unit 9012, as described in more detail below. Due to the fact that these elements (for example, the upper pins 9110, the middle pins 9112 and the lower support 9114) form a single unit with the three-horned element 9102, their manufacture is simplified with stricter tolerances relative to each other in comparison with the assembly of many parts and the desired operation is ensured at startup and / or effective interaction with various blocking elements of the node overlay brackets 9012.

In FIG. 207 and 208, the brace overlay assembly 9012 is shown in the open position with the three-horn element 9102 fully retracted. During assembly, the lower support 9114 of the three-horn element 9102 passes through the widened hole 9130 in the bracket groove 9018, and then the three-horned element 9102 is moved further so that the three-horned the element 9102 distally slides along the lower track 9132 formed in the groove for the brackets 9018. In particular, the lower track 9132 includes a narrow groove 9133 opening in the form of an expanded groove 9134 on the lower surface of the groove for the brackets 9018 with azovaniem inverted T-shaped configuration in lateral cross-section, as shown in particular in FIG. 208 and 209, which communicates with the widened groove 9130. Assembled components proximally connected to the multilayer tapering trigger rod 9094 do not allow the lower support 9114 to move proximally further into the widened opening 9130 and allow disengagement. As shown in FIG. 210, a multilayer tapering trigger rod 9094 facilitates the insertion of the overlay assembly 9012 through the trocar. In particular, a more distal downward projection 9136 lifts the three-horned element 9102 in a fully retracted position. This is achieved by installing the downward-facing protrusion 9136 in a place where it rises upward at the proximal edge of the enlarged opening 9130 of the bracket groove 9018. As shown in FIG. 211, the multi-layered tapering trigger rod 9094 also improves the operation of some locking elements that can be integrated into the bracket groove 9018 by means of a more upwardly projecting protrusion 9138 that pushes down the frame of the rod 9070 at the initial stage of the trigger path. In particular, between the pair of square holes 9142 in the shaft frame 9070, a lateral shaft 9140 is disposed (FIG. 204). A clamping spring 9144, which encompasses the lateral shaft 9140, pushes down a portion of the multilayer tapering trigger rod 9094 protruding distally from the longitudinal groove for the trigger rod 9092, which engages at some suitable moment some advantageous locking elements. Such an ejection is more pronounced or limited solely to that portion of the starting path in which the upward projection 9138 is in contact with the clamping spring 9144.

In FIG. 207 and 208, the three-horned element 9102 is retracted, and its upper pins 9110 are located inside the recess of the abutment 9150 near the rotary proximal end of the abutment 9022. The vertical downward groove 9152 of the abutment (FIG. 203) extends to the abutment 9022 to the sides, passing into the inner track 9154 of the abutment, which captures the upper pins 9110 of the three-horned element 9102 during their distal movement during start-up, as shown in FIG. 210 and 211, structurally separating the emphasis 9022 from the groove 9018 for brackets. Thus, when the three-horned element 9102 is retracted, the surgeon can repeatedly open and close the overlay site of the brackets 9012 until the location and orientation of the tissue captured therein for dissection and stitching is satisfactory, and the three-horned element 9102 helps to correctly position the fabric even in the case of the use of the node overlay brackets 9012 reduced diameter and, therefore, reduced stiffness. In FIG. 203, 204, 206, 207, 209, and 215, a bracketing unit 9012 is provided with a removable bracket unit 9020 containing wedge-shaped slides 9126. A longitudinally aligned and parallel set of wedges grooves 9202 (FIG. 209) that are open downwardly receive corresponding wedges 9204 made as a unit with a wedge-shaped slide 9126. As shown in FIG. 209-211, the wedge-shaped slide 9126 thus lifts up a plurality of bracket ejectors 9206, vertically sliding inside the recesses 9208 of the bracket ejectors. In this illustrative embodiment, each bracket ejector 9206 includes two vertical pins, each of which moves upward into a corresponding hole 9210 or bracket cavity 9024 to push upward and deform the bracket 9023 placed therein by the forming bracket surface 9214 (FIG. 211) of the stop 9022 The Central starting recess 9216 (FIG. 204) formed in the bracket block 9020 in close proximity to the groove 9018 brackets ensures the passage of the lower horizontal part 9218 (FIG. 206) of the wedge-shaped slide 9126, as well as the bottom pins 9112 of the three-horned element 9102. More precisely, the bracket block tray 9220 (FIGS. 204, 209) is attached to and located below the bracket block plastic housing 9222, has recesses for the brackets ejectors 9208, brackets holes 9210 and a central starting recess 9216. As as the brackets 9023 are formed in this way on either side, the sharp cutting edge 9116 enters the vertical through groove 9230 extending along the entire longitudinal axis of the bracket block 9020, with the exception of only its most distal end.

The start of the overlay bracket 9012 starts as shown in FIG. 211, so that the two-component cutting element and the trigger rod 9090 are pulled proximally until the downward protrusion 9136 lifts the middle ejector 9120 on the three-horn element 9102 up and back, which allows you to insert a new bracket block 9020 into the groove 9018 for brackets with an open stop 9022 as shown in FIG. 203 and 207. As shown in FIG. 212, the two-component cutting element and the trigger rod 9090 are distally advanced a small distance, allowing the downwardly extending protrusion 9136 to enter the enlarged hole 9130 of the lower track 9132 by the action of a clamping spring 9144 opposite the upwardly extending protrusion 9138 of the multi-layer tapering starting rod 9094. The middle ejector 9120 prevents additional downward rotation, since it is located on the stepped central element 9124 of the wedge-shaped slide 9126, as a result of which the middle pin 9112 of the three-horned ele ment remains inside the central launch recess 9216. As shown in FIG. 213, the two-component cutting element and the trigger rod 9090 are distally actuated by advancing the wedge-shaped slide 9126, which leads to the formation of brackets 9023 and the dissection of the fabric 9242, sandwiched between the stop 9022 and the bracket block 9020, using a sharp cutting edge 9116. Further as shown in FIG. 214, the two-component cutting element and the trigger shaft 9090 are retracted, leaving the wedge-shaped slide 9126 in a distal position. As shown in FIG. 215, the middle pin 9112 is allowed to move down into the blocking recess 9240 formed in the groove for the brackets 9018 (also see FIG. 208, 211). Thus, if the wedge-shaped slide 9126 (not shown in FIG. 215) is not in the proximal position (i.e., if the bracket block 9020 is missing or used up), the operator will be able to tactilely feel that the middle pin 9112 abuts the distal edge blocking recess 9240. Related surgical staplers are disclosed in US Patent No. 7,380,696, issued June 3, 2008, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.

In various embodiments, as described above, the bracket unit may comprise a unit body including a plurality of parenthesis cavities formed therein. The block body may comprise a panel and an upper surface of the panel, each cavity for a bracket may form an opening in the surface of the panel. As described above, the brackets can also be located inside each cavity for the brackets so that the brackets are stored inside the block body until they are pushed out. Before being pushed out of the block body, in various embodiments, the brackets may be placed inside the block body so that the brackets do not protrude above the panel surface. Since in such embodiments, the brackets are under the surface of the panel, the possibility of damage and / or premature contact with the target tissue can be reduced. In various situations, the brackets can move between the inoperative position, in which they do not protrude from the block body, and the actuated position, in which they protrude from the block body and can come into contact with a stop located opposite the bracket block. In various embodiments, the abutment and / or forming recesses made in abutment may be located at a predetermined distance from the surface of the panel so that when the brackets are fed from the block body, the brackets are deformed, acquiring a predetermined height in the formed state. In some situations, the thickness of the fabric trapped between the abutment and the bracket unit can be changed, and therefore, thicker fabric can be gripped with some brackets, and thinner fabric can be gripped with some other brackets. In any case, the pressure or clamping force applied to the fabric by brackets may, for example, differ for different brackets or may differ between brackets at one end of a row of brackets and at the other end of a row of brackets. In some situations, the gap between the stop and the bracket block panel can be controlled so that the brackets overlap with some minimal clamping force within each bracket. However, in some such situations, there may still be significant variability in the clamping force within different brackets.

In the various embodiments described herein, the brace unit may comprise means for compensating for the thickness of the fabric trapped by the brackets installed from the brace unit. In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 216, the brace unit, for example, the brace unit 10000, may comprise a rigid first part, for example a support part 10010, and a compressible second part, for example, a tissue thickness compensator 10020. In at least one embodiment, as shown mainly in FIG. 218, the support portion 10010 may comprise a block body, an upper surface of the panel 10011 and a plurality of bracket cavities 10012, wherein, similarly to the foregoing, each bracket cavity 10012 may form an opening on the surface of the panel 10011. For example, the bracket 10030 can be removably mounted in the bracket cavity 10012. In at least one such embodiment, as shown mainly in FIG. 245, and as described in more detail below, each bracket 10030 may include a base 10031 and one or more legs 10032 extending from the base 10031. Before placing the brackets 10030, which is also described in more detail below, the bases 10031 of the brackets 10030 can be supported by ejector brackets located inside the supporting part 10010, and, at the same time, the legs 10032 of the brackets 10030 can at least partially be contained within the cavities 10012 of the brackets. In various embodiments, the brackets 10030 can be triggered from the idle position to the actuated position such that the legs 10032 pass through the tissue thickness compensator 10020, penetrate the upper surface of the tissue thickness compensator 10020, penetrate tissue T, and come into contact with a stop located opposite the bracket block 10000. When the legs 10032 are deformed against the stop, these legs 10032 of each bracket 10030 can grab a part of the fabric thickness compensator 10020 and a piece of fabric T inside each bracket 10030 and apply compression to the fabric cerned with the effort. In addition to the above, the legs 10032 of each bracket 10030 can be deformed downward to the base of the bracket 10031 to form a grip area of the bracket 10039 into which the fabric T and tissue thickness compensator 10020 can be gripped. In various situations, the grip area of the bracket 10039 can be formed between the inner surfaces of the deformed legs 10032 and the inner surface of the base 10031. The size of the grip area of the bracket may depend on several factors, for example, the length of the legs, the diameter of the legs, the width of the base and / or the degree of formation of legs.

In previous embodiments, the surgeon often needed to choose staples suitable for stitching tissue in height. For example, the surgeon could choose high braces for use on thick tissue and short braces for use on thin tissue. However, in some situations, the thickness of the stitched fabric was uneven, and therefore, some brackets might not achieve the desired configuration when activated. For example, in FIG. 250 shows the high staple used when working with a thin cloth. As shown in FIG. 251, when a tissue thickness compensator, such as a tissue thickness compensator 10020, is used when operating, for example, with thin tissue, a larger bracket may be given a preferred configuration when actuated.

Due to its compressibility, a tissue thickness compensator can compensate for the thickness of the tissue trapped by each bracket. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 245 and 246, a fabric thickness compensator, for example a fabric thickness compensator 10020, can use a larger and / or smaller portion of the grip area 10039 of each bracket 10030 depending on the thickness and / or type of fabric located in the grip area of the bracket 10039. For example, if the bracket 10030, a thinner fabric T is captured, a tissue thickness compensator 10020 can occupy a larger part of the grip area of the bracket 10039 than in a situation where a thicker fabric T is caught inside the bracket 10030. Accordingly, if a thicker fabric T is caught in the bracket 10030, the compensator t The thickness of the fabric 10020 may occupy a smaller portion of the grip area of the bracket 10039 than in a situation where a thinner fabric T is trapped inside the bracket 10030. Thus, a tissue thickness compensator can compensate for thinner and / or thicker fabric and allow compressive pressure to be applied to the fabric, independently or at least substantially independently of the thickness of the tissue captured by the brackets. In addition to the foregoing, a tissue thickness compensator 10020 can compensate for the difference in types or compression ratios of tissues captured by various brackets 10030. Turning now to FIG. 246, tissue thickness compensator 10020 can apply compressive force to vascular tissue T, which may include vessels V, and, as a result, limit bleeding through more compressible vessels V, while still applying the required compression pressure to surrounding tissue T. In various circumstances, in addition to the foregoing, a fabric thickness compensator 10020 can also compensate for conditions arising from improperly formed brackets. As shown in FIG. 247, improper formation of various brackets 10030 can lead to the formation of more extensive gripping areas 10039 in such brackets. Due to the elasticity of the fabric thickness compensator 10020, as shown in FIG. 248, a tissue thickness compensator 10020 located within improperly formed brackets 10030 can still exert sufficient compressive pressure on fabric T, although gripping areas 10039 formed by such improperly formed brackets 10030 can be enlarged. In various situations, a tissue thickness compensator 10020 placed between adjacent brackets 10030 can be displaced relative to fabric T by correctly formed brackets 10030 surrounding the malformed bracket 10030, and as a result, apply compressive pressure to the fabric surrounding and / or trapped inside the incorrectly formed bracket 10030. In various situations, a tissue thickness compensator can compensate for a difference in tissue density, which may be due, for example, calcification, fibrous zones and / or tissue, a wound has been subjected to cross-linking or processing.

In various embodiments, a fixed or unchanged tissue gap may be formed between the support portion and the abutment, as a result of which the brackets can be deformed to a predetermined height regardless of the thickness of the fabric gripped by the brackets. When using a tissue thickness compensator in such embodiments, the tissue thickness compensator can adapt to the tissue trapped between the abutment and the supporting portion of the bracket unit, and, due to its elasticity, the tissue thickness compensator can apply additional compressive pressure to the fabric. Turning now to FIG 252-257, the bracket 10030 is formed to a predetermined height H. With reference to FIG. 252, a tissue thickness compensator was not used, and fabric T occupies the entire area 10039 captured by the bracket. In FIG. 259, a bracket 10030 captures a portion of the tissue thickness compensator 10020, fabric T is compressed, and at least a portion of the gripper region of the bracket 10039 is occupied. In FIG. 254, the thin tissue T is gripped by the bracket 10030. In this embodiment, the compressed tissue T has a height of approximately 2 / 9H, and the compressed tissue thickness compensator 10020 has a height of, for example, approximately 7 / 9H. As shown in FIG. 255, a fabric T having an intermediate thickness is gripped by a bracket 10030. In this embodiment, the compressed fabric T has a height of approximately 4 / 9H, and the compressed tissue thickness compensator 10020 has a height of, for example, approximately 5 / 9H. As shown in FIG. 256, a fabric T having an intermediate thickness is gripped by a bracket 10030. In this embodiment, the compressed fabric T has a height of approximately 2 / 3H, and the compressed tissue thickness compensator 10020 has a height of, for example, approximately 1 / 3H. In FIG. 255, the thick tissue T is gripped by the bracket 10030. In this embodiment, the compressed tissue T has a height of approximately 8 / 9H, and the compressed tissue thickness compensator 10020 has a height of, for example, approximately 1 / 9H. In various situations, the tissue thickness compensator may have a compressed height of, for example, about 10% of the bracket grip height, about 20% of the bracket grip height, about 30% of the bracket grip height, about 40% of the bracket grip height, about 50% of the grip height brackets, about 60% of the bracket grip height, about 70% of the bracket grip height, about 80% of the bracket grip height and / or about 90% of the bracket grip height.

In various embodiments, the brackets 10030 in an unformed state may have any suitable height. For example, in some embodiments, the brackets 10030 may have an unformed height from about 2 mm to about 4.8 mm. For example, brackets 10030 may have an unformed height of approximately 2.0 mm, approximately 2.5 mm, approximately 3.0 mm, approximately 3.4 mm, approximately 3.5 mm, approximately 3.8 mm, approximately 4.0 mm, approximately 4.1 mm and / or approximately 4.8 mm. In various embodiments, the height H that the brackets may acquire after deformation may be due to the distance between the surface of the panel 10011 of the support portion 10010 and the opposite stop. For example, in at least one embodiment, the distance between the surface of the panel 10011 and the contact surface of the fabric may be approximately 2.464 mm (0.097 inches). The height H may also be due to the depth of the forming recesses made in the emphasis. In at least one embodiment, the depth of the forming depressions may be measured, for example, from a tissue contact surface. In various embodiments, as described in more detail below, the bracket unit 10000 may further comprise brace ejectors capable of lifting the brackets 10030 against the stop, and in at least one embodiment, capable of lifting or “bracing” the brackets above the surface of the panel 10011. In such In embodiments, the height H that the brackets 10030 acquire during formation can also be determined by the distance by which the brackets 10030 are brought out relative to the surface of the panel. For example, in at least one such embodiment, the brackets 10030 may be spaced out at a distance of about 0.711 mm (0.028 inches), so that after the brackets 10030 are formed, their height will be about 4.801 mm (0.189 inches). For example, in various embodiments, the height of the brackets 10030 after formation may be about 0.8 mm, about 1.0 mm, about 1.5 mm, about 1.8 mm, about 2.0 mm and / or about 2.25 mm For example, in some embodiments, the height of the brackets after forming may be from about 2.25 mm to about 3.0 mm. In addition to the foregoing, the height of the grip area of the bracket can be determined by the height of the bracket in the formed state and the thickness or diameter of the wire from which the bracket is made. In various embodiments, the height of the grip region 10039 of the bracket 10030 can be defined as the height of the bracket in the formed state H minus two wire diameters. For example, in some embodiments, the diameter of the bracket wire may be about 0.2261 mm (0.0089 in). In various embodiments, the diameter of the bracket wire, for example, may be from about 0.1753 mm (0.0069 inches) to about 0.3023 mm (0.0119 inches). For example, in at least one embodiment, the height H of the bracket 10030 in the formed state may be approximately 4.801 mm (0.189 inches), and the diameter of the wire for the bracket may be approximately 0.2261 mm (0.0089 inches), resulting in a height The grip area of the bracket is approximately 4.343 mm (0.171 in.).

In various embodiments, in addition to the foregoing, the tissue thickness compensator may have a height in an uncompressed (prior to installation) state and may be configured to deform to one of a plurality of heights in a compressed state. In some embodiments, the height of the tissue thickness compensator when uncompressed may be, for example, about 3.175 mm (0.125 in). In various embodiments, the height of the tissue thickness compensator when uncompressed may be, for example, approximately 2.032 mm (0.080 inches) or more. In at least one embodiment, the height of the tissue thickness compensator in an uncompressed (prior to installation) state may exceed the height of the brackets in the idle position. In at least one embodiment, the height of the uncompressed (prior to installation) tissue thickness expansion joint can be, for example, about 10% more, about 20% more, about 30% more, about 40% more, about 50% more , about 60% more, about 70% more, about 80% more, about 90% more and / or about 100% more than the height of the brackets in the idle position. In at least one embodiment, the height of the uncompressed (prior to installation) tissue thickness compensator may, for example, be no more than about 100% greater than the height of the brackets in the idle position. In some embodiments, the height of the uncompressed (prior to installation) tissue thickness compensator may be, for example, more than 100% greater than the height of the brackets in the idle position. In at least one embodiment, the tissue thickness compensator may have an uncompressed height equal to the height of the brackets in the idle position. In at least one embodiment, the tissue thickness compensator may have an uncompressed height that is less than the height of the brackets in the idle position. For example, in at least one embodiment, the height of the uncompressed (before installation) tissue thickness expansion joint can be about 10% less, about 20% less, about 30% less, about 40% less, about 50% less, about 60% less, about 70% less, about 80% less and / or about 90% less than the height of the brackets in the idle position. In various embodiments, the compressible second portion may have a height in the uncompressed state that is greater than the height of the stitched fabric T in the uncompressed state. In some embodiments, the tissue thickness compensator may have an uncompressed height that is equal to the height of the stitched fabric T in the uncompressed state. In various embodiments, the tissue thickness compensator may have a height in an uncompressed state that is less than a height of a stitched fabric T in an uncompressed state.

As described above, a tissue thickness compensator can be clamped inside a plurality of formed braces, regardless of whether a thin or thick fabric is gripped into the brackets. In at least one embodiment, the brackets within one line or row of brackets can be deformed so that the height of the grip area of each bracket is, for example, approximately 2.0 mm, with fabric T and fabric thickness compensator being compressed to this height . For example, in some situations, the height of the fabric T in a compressed state can be approximately 1.75 mm in the grip area of the bracket, while the height of the fabric thickness compensator in the compressed state can be approximately 0.25 mm in the grip area of the bracket, resulting in a total height of the grip area brackets will be approximately 2.0 mm. For example, in some situations, the height of the fabric T in the compressed state can be approximately 1.50 mm in the grip area of the bracket, while the height of the fabric thickness compensator in the compressed state can be approximately 0.50 mm in the grip area of the bracket, resulting in a total height of the grip area brackets will be approximately 2.0 mm. For example, in some situations, the compressed tissue height T can be approximately 1.25 mm in the grip area of the bracket, while the compressed tissue thickness compensator height can be approximately 0.75 mm in the grip area of the bracket, resulting in a total height of the grip area brackets will be approximately 2.0 mm. For example, in some situations, the height of the fabric T in a compressed state can be approximately 1.0 mm in the grip area of the bracket, while the height of the fabric thickness compensator in a compressed state can be approximately 1.0 mm in the grip area of the bracket, resulting in a total height of the grip area brackets will be approximately 2.0 mm. For example, in some situations, the compressed tissue height T can be approximately 0.75 mm in the grip area of the bracket, while the compressed tissue thickness compensator height can be approximately 1.25 mm in the grip area of the bracket, resulting in a total height of the grip area brackets will be approximately 2.0 mm. For example, in some situations, the height of the fabric T in the compressed state can be approximately 1.50 mm in the grip area of the bracket, while the height of the fabric thickness compensator in the compressed state can be approximately 0.50 mm in the grip area of the bracket, resulting in a total height of the grip area brackets will be approximately 2.0 mm. For example, in some situations, the height of the fabric T in a compressed state can be approximately 0.25 mm in the grip area of the bracket, while the height of the fabric thickness compensator in the compressed state can be approximately 1.75 mm in the grip area of the bracket, resulting in a total height of the grip area brackets will be approximately 2.0 mm.

In various embodiments, in addition to the foregoing, the height of the tissue thickness compensator in the uncompressed state may be less than the height of the brackets in the idle position. In some embodiments, the height of the tissue thickness compensator in an uncompressed state may be equal to the height of the activated brackets. In some other embodiments, the height of the tissue thickness compensator in an uncompressed state may be greater than the height of the activated brackets. In at least one such embodiment, the height of the fabric thickness compensator in an uncompressed state may be, for example, about 110% of the height of the formed bracket, about 120% of the height of the formed bracket, about 130% of the height of the formed bracket, about 140% of the height of the formed bracket, about 150 % of the height of the formed bracket, about 160% of the height of the formed bracket, about 170% of the height of the formed bracket, about 180% of the height of the formed bracket, about 190% of the height of the formed bracket, and / or about 200% of the height formed brackets. In some embodiments, the height of the tissue thickness compensator in an uncompressed state can be more than double the height of the brackets activated. In various embodiments, the height of the tissue thickness compensator in a compressed state may be, for example, from about 85% to about 150% of the height of the formed brace. In various embodiments, as described above, the height of the tissue thickness compensator may vary from a thickness in an uncompressed state to a thickness in a compressed state. In some embodiments, the thickness of the fabric thickness compensator in a compressed state can be, for example, about 10% of its thickness in an uncompressed state, about 20% of its thickness in an uncompressed state, about 30% of its thickness in an uncompressed state, about 40% of its thickness in an uncompressed state state, about 50% of its thickness in an uncompressed state, about 60% of its thickness in an uncompressed state, about 70% of its thickness in an uncompressed state, about 80% of its thickness in an uncompressed state and / or about 90% of its thickness in an uncompressed state. In various embodiments, the thickness of the tissue thickness compensator in an uncompressed state may, for example, be about twice, about ten times, about fifty times, and / or about one hundred times its thickness in a compressed state. In at least one embodiment, the thickness of the tissue thickness compensator in a compressed state can be, for example, from about 60% to about 99% of its thickness in an uncompressed state. In at least one embodiment, the thickness of the tissue thickness compensator in an uncompressed state can be at least 50% greater than its thickness in a compressed state. In at least one embodiment, the thickness of the tissue thickness compensator in an uncompressed state can be one hundred times greater than its thickness in a compressed state. In various embodiments, the compressible second portion may be elastic or at least partially elastic and may bias the fabric T against the deformed brace legs. In at least one such embodiment, the compressible second portion may elastically expand between the fabric T and the base of the bracket, pushing the fabric T against the legs of the bracket. In some embodiments, described in more detail below, a tissue thickness compensator may be located between tissue T and deformed brace legs. In various situations, as a result of the foregoing, a tissue thickness compensator can be configured to fill any gaps within the grip area of the bracket.

In various embodiments, the tissue thickness compensator may comprise a polymer composition. The polymer composition may contain one or more synthetic polymers and / or one or more non-synthetic polymers. The synthetic polymer may comprise a synthetic absorbable polymer and / or a synthetic non-absorbable polymer. In various embodiments, the polymer composition may comprise, for example, a biocompatible foam. The biocompatible foam may comprise, for example, porous foam with open cells and / or closed cells. The biocompatible foam may have a uniform pore morphology or gradient pore morphology (i.e., small pores gradually increase in size to large pores in one direction across the thickness of the material). In various embodiments, the polymer composition may comprise one or more of a porous framework, a porous matrix, a gel matrix, a hydrogel matrix, a solution matrix, a fibrous matrix, a tubular matrix, a composite matrix, a membrane matrix, a biostable polymer, a biodegradable polymer, and combinations thereof. For example, a tissue thickness compensator may include foam reinforced with a fiber matrix, or may contain foam having an additional hydrogel layer that expands in the presence of body fluids to further compress tissue. In various embodiments, the tissue thickness compensator may also comprise a coating on the material and / or a second or third layer expanding in the presence of body fluids to further provide tissue compression. Such a layer may be a hydrogel, for example, of synthetic and / or natural origin, which may be biologically stable and / or biodegradable. In specific embodiments, the tissue thickness compensator may be reinforced, for example, with fibrous nonwoven fabric or mesh-type fibrous elements that can provide additional flexibility, rigidity, and / or strength. In various embodiments, the tissue thickness compensator has a porous morphology showing a gradient structure, for example, small pores on one surface and larger pores on another surface. Such morphology may be more optimal for tissue ingrowth or hemostatic properties. Additionally, the gradient can be combined with a variable bioabsorption profile. A short-term resorption profile may be preferable to stop bleeding, while a long-term resorption profile can provide better healing of the tissue without separation of fluids.

Examples of non-synthetic polymers include, but are not limited to, lyophilized polysaccharide, glycoprotein, elastin, proteoglycan, gelatin, collagen, and oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC). Examples of synthetic resorbable polymers include, but are not limited to, poly (lactic acid) (PLA), poly (L-lactic acid) (PLLA), polycaprolactone (PCL), polyglycolic acid (PGA), poly (trimethylene carbonate) (TMC), polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), a copolymer of glycolide and ε-caprolactone (PGCL), a copolymer of glycolide and trimethylene carbonate, poly (glycerol sebacinate) (PGS), polydioxanone, poly (orthoesters), polyanhydrides, polyisides, polyisides tyrosine-based, tyrosine-based polyiminocarbonates, polycar tyrosine-based onates, poly (D, L-lactide-urethane), poly (B-hydroxybutyrate), poly (E-caprolactone), polyethylene glycol (PEG), poly [bis (carboxylate phenoxy) phosphazene], poly (amino acids), pseudo -fields (amino acids), absorbable polyurethanes and their combinations. In various embodiments, the implementation of the polymer composition may, for example, contain from about 50% to about 90% of the mass. the polymer composition PLLA and from about 50% to about 10% weight. PCL polymer composition. In at least one embodiment, the polymer composition may comprise, for example, about 70% by weight. PLLA and approximately 30% weight. PCL. In various embodiments, the polymer composition may, for example, contain from about 55% to about 85% of the mass. the polymer composition PGA and from 15% to 45% of the mass. PCL polymer composition. In at least one embodiment, the polymer composition may contain, for example, about 65% weight. PGA and approximately 35% weight. PCL. In various embodiments, the implementation of the polymer composition may, for example, contain from about 90% to about 95% of the mass. the polymer composition PGA and from about 5% to about 10% of the mass. polymer composition PLA.

In various embodiments, the synthetic resorbable polymer may comprise a bioresorbable biocompatible elastomeric copolymer. Suitable bioresorbable biocompatible elastomeric copolymers include, without limitation, copolymers of epsilon-caprolactone and glycolide (preferably with a molar ratio of epsilon-caprolactone to glycolide from about 30:70 to about 70:30, preferably from 35:65 to about 65:35, more preferably from 45:55 to 35:65); elastomeric copolymers of epsilon-caprolactone and lactide, including L-lactide, D-lactide or mixtures thereof, or copolymers of lactic acid (preferably with a molar ratio of epsilon-caprolactone and lactide from about 35:65 to about 65:35 and more preferably from 45:55 to 30:70), elastomeric copolymers of p-dioxanone (1,4-dioxan-2-one) and lactide, including L-lactide, D-lactide and lactic acid (preferably with a molar ratio of p-dioxanone and lactide from approximately 40:60 to approximately 60:40); elastomeric copolymers of epsilon-caprolactone and p-dioxanone (preferably with a molar ratio of epsilon-caprolactone to p-dioxanone from about 30:70 to about 70:30); elastomeric copolymers of p-dioxanone and trimethylene carbonate (preferably with a molar ratio of p-dioxanone and trimethylene carbonate from about 30:70 to about 70:30); elastomeric copolymers of trimethylene carbonate and glycolide (preferably with a molar ratio of trimethylene carbonate and glycolide from about 30:70 to about 70:30); an elastomeric copolymer of trimethylene carbonate and lactide, including L-lactide, D-lactide, mixtures thereof or lactic acid copolymers (preferably with a molar ratio of trimethylene carbonate and lactide from about 30:70 to about 70:30) and mixtures thereof. In one embodiment, the elastomeric copolymer is a copolymer of glycolide and epsilon-caprolactone. In another embodiment, the elastomeric copolymer is a copolymer of lactide and epsilon-caprolactone.

The descriptions given in US Pat. No. 5,468,253 under the name "ELASTOMERIC MEDICAL DEVICE", issued November 21, 1995, and US Pat. the entirety of this document by reference.

In various embodiments, the synthetic resorbable polymer may comprise, for example, one or more of a 90/10 poly (glycolide-L-lactide) copolymer commercially available from Ethicon, Inc. under the trade name VICRYL (polyglactic 910), a polyglycolide marketed by American Cyanamid Co. under the trade name DEXON, a polydioxanone marketed by Ethicon, Inc. under the trade name PDS, a statistical block copolymer of poly (glycolide trimethylene carbonate) marketed by American Cyanamid Co. under the trade name MAXON, a copolymer of 75/25 poly (glycolide-E-caprolactone-polyglexaprolactone 25) marketed by Ethicon under the trade name MONOCRYL.

Examples of synthetic non-absorbable polymers include, but are not limited to, polyurethane foam, polypropylene (PP), polyethylene (PE), polycarbonate, polyamides such as nylon, polyvinyl chloride (PVC), polymethyl methacrylate (PMMA), polystyrene (PS), polyester, polyester ether ( PEEK), polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), polytrifluorochloroethylene (PTFCE), polyvinyl fluoride (PVF), fluorinated ethylene propylene (FEP), polyacetal, polysulfone and combinations thereof. Synthetic non-absorbable polymers can include, without limitation, foam elastomers and porous elastomers, for example, silicone, polyisoprene and rubber. In various embodiments, the synthetic polymers may contain porous polytetrafluoroethylene (ePTFE) marketed by WL Gore &. Associates, Inc. under the trade name GORE-TEX Soft Tissue Patch and a urethane ester foam copolymer presented on marketed by Polyganics under the trade name NASOPORE.

The polymer composition of the tissue thickness compensator may be characterized, for example, by a coefficient of porosity, pore size and / or hardness. For example, in various embodiments, the porosity coefficient of the polymer composition may be from about 30% vol. up to about 99% vol. For example, in some embodiments, the porosity coefficient of the polymer composition may be from about 60% vol. up to about 98% vol. For example, in various embodiments, the porosity coefficient of the polymer composition may be from about 85% vol. up to approximately 97% vol. In at least one embodiment, the polymer composition may comprise, for example, about 70% by weight. PLLA and approximately 30% weight. PCL, and its porosity coefficient may be approximately 90% vol. As a result, in at least one such embodiment, the polymer composition will contain about 10% vol. copolymer. In at least one embodiment, the polymer composition may contain, for example, about 65% weight. PGA and approximately 35% weight. PCL, and its porosity coefficient may be from about 93% vol. up to about 95% vol. In various embodiments, the porosity coefficient of the polymer composition may be more than 85% vol. The pore size of the polymer composition can be, for example, from about 5 micrometers to about 2000 micrometers. In various embodiments, the pore size of the polymer composition may, for example, be from about 10 micrometers to about 100 micrometers. In at least one such embodiment, the polymer composition, for example, may comprise a copolymer of PGA and PCL. In some embodiments, the pore size of the polymer composition may, for example, be from about 100 micrometers to about 1000 micrometers. In at least one such embodiment, the polymer composition, for example, may comprise a copolymer of PLLA and PCL. In accordance with some aspects, the hardness of the polymer composition can be expressed as Shore hardness, which is defined as the long-term indentation resistance of a material and is measured by a durometer, for example, a Shore durometer. To measure the value of the durometer for a particular material, pressure is applied to it using the pressure tip of the durometer in accordance with ASTM D2240-00, entitled "Standard Method for Analyzing the Hardness of Rubber on a Durometer", which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. The pressing tip of the durometer can act on the material for a sufficient time, for example 15 seconds, after which readings are taken from the corresponding scale. Depending on the type of scale used, a value of 0 can be obtained if the pressing tip has completely penetrated into the material, and a value of 100 can be obtained if the penetration of the tip into the material is not observed. This value is dimensionless. In various embodiments, the value of the durometer can be determined on any suitable scale, for example, on scales of type A and / or type OO in accordance with ASTM D2240-00. In various embodiments, the implementation of the polymer composition of the tissue thickness compensator may have a Shore A value of, for example, from about 4 A to about 16 A, which corresponds to values from about 45 OO to about 65 OO on a Shore OO scale. In at least one such embodiment, the polymer composition may comprise, for example, a PLLA / PCL copolymer or a PGA / PCL copolymer. In various embodiments, the polymer composition of the tissue thickness compensator may have a Shore hardness value of less than 15 A. In various embodiments, the polymer composition of the tissue thickness compensator may have a Shore A hardness of less than 10 A. In various embodiments, the polymer composition of the tissue thickness compensator may have a Shore A hardness value of less than 5 A. In some embodiments, the polymeric material may have a hardness value Shore OO from about 35 OO to about 75 OO, for example.

In various embodiments, the polymer composition may have at least two of the properties described above. In various embodiments, the polymer composition may have at least three of the properties described above. The polymer composition may have porosity, for example, from 85% to 97% vol., Pore size from 5 micrometers to 2000 micrometers, shore hardness A from 4 A to 16 A, shore hardness OO from 45 OO to 65 OO. In at least one embodiment, the polymer composition may contain, for example, 70% by weight. the polymer composition PLLA and 30% weight. PCL polymer composition, have a porosity of 90% by volume, pore size from 100 micrometers to 1000 micrometers, shore hardness A from 4 A to 16 A and shore hardness OO from 45 OO to 65 OO. In at least one embodiment, the polymer composition may contain, for example, 65% by weight. PGA polymer composition and 35% weight. PCL polymer composition, having a porosity of 93% to 95% by volume, pore size of 10 micrometers to 100 micrometers, Shore A hardness of 4 A to 16 A and Shore OO hardness of 45 OO to 65 OO.

In various embodiments, the polymer composition may comprise a pharmaceutically active agent. The polymer composition may release a therapeutically effective amount of a pharmaceutically active agent. In various embodiments, the pharmaceutically active agent may be released as the polymer composition is dissolved / resorbed. In various embodiments, the pharmaceutically active agent may be released into a liquid, for example, into the blood, passing through or on top of the polymer composition. Examples of pharmaceutically active agents include, but are not limited to, hemostatic agents and drugs, for example fibrin, thrombin, and oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC); anti-inflammatory drugs, for example, diclofenac, aspirin, naproxen, sulindac and hydrocortisone; antibiotics and antimicrobial drugs or agents, for example triclosan, silver ions, ampicillin, gentamicin, polymyxin B, chloramphenicol; and anti-cancer agents, for example cisplatin, mitomycin, adriamycin.

In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 216, a brace block, such as, for example, a brace block 10000, may comprise a support portion 10010 and a compressible tissue thickness compensator 10020. As shown in FIG. 218-220, the support portion 10010 may comprise a panel surface 10011 and a plurality of brace cavities 10012 formed in the support portion 10010. Each brace cavity 10012 may have a shape and size that can be retrieved, removably, brackets, for example, brackets 10030. The bracket block 10000 may further comprise a plurality of brackets pushers 10040, each of which may be configured to support one or more brackets 10030 inside the brackets cavities 10012 when the brackets 10030 and the brackets pushers 10040 are in an unavailable floor zhenii. In at least one such embodiment, as shown mainly in FIG. 224 and 225, each bracket ejector 10040 may comprise, for example, one or more sockets or grooves 10041, for example, which may be configured to support brackets and restrict relative movement between brackets 10030 and bracket ejectors 10040. In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 218, the brace unit 10000 may further comprise a slide 10050 for actuating the brackets that can be moved from the proximal end 10001 to the distal end 10002 of the brace unit to sequentially lift the ejectors 10040 of brackets and brackets 10030 from their idle position to the stop located opposite the brace block 10000 In some embodiments, implementation, as shown mainly in FIG. 218 and 220, each bracket 10030 may comprise a base 10031 and one or more legs 10032 extending from the base 10031, each bracket may have, for example, at least one of a substantially U-shaped and substantially V-shaped. In at least one embodiment, the brackets 10030 can be configured so that the ends of the legs of the brackets 10032 are recessed relative to the panel surface 10011 of the support portion 10010 when the brackets 10030 are in an inactive position. In at least one embodiment, the brackets 10030 may be configured such that the ends of the legs of the brackets 10032 are flush with the panel surface 10011 of the support portion 10010 when the brackets 10030 are inoperative. In at least one embodiment, the brackets 10030 may be configured such that the ends of the brace legs 10032 or at least some portion of the brace legs 10032 protrude above the panel surface 10011 of the support portion 10010 when the brackets 10030 are in an inoperative position. In such embodiments, the brace legs 10032 can extend through the thickness compensator of the fabric 10020 and can be placed in it when the braces 10030 are in the idle position. In at least one such embodiment, the brace legs 10032 may protrude above the panel surface 10011, for example, by about 1.905 mm (0.075 inches). In various embodiments, the brace legs 10032 may protrude above the panel surface 10011, for example, from about 0.635 mm (0.025 in.) To about 3.175 mm (0.125 in.). In some embodiments, in addition to the foregoing, the tissue thickness compensator 10020 may, in an uncompressed state, have a thickness of from about 2.032 mm (0.08 inches) to about 3.175 mm (0.125 inches).

In use, in addition to the foregoing, and referring mainly to FIG. 233, an emphasis, such as an emphasis 10060, can be moved to the closed position opposite the bracket unit 10000. As described in more detail below, the emphasis 10060 can position the fabric, for example, close to the tissue thickness compensator 10020 and, in various embodiments, press the tissue thickness compensator 10020 close to the surface of the panel 10011 of the supporting part 10010. After the stop 10060 has taken a suitable position, it is possible to place the brackets 10030, as shown in FIG. 233. In various embodiments, as noted above, the slide for actuating the brackets 10050 can be moved from the proximal end 10001 of the bracket unit 10000 to the distal end 10002, as shown in FIG. 234. When advancing the slide 10050, these slide 10050 can come into contact with the ejectors 10040 brackets and lift the ejectors 10040 brackets up inside the cavities 10012 brackets. In at least one embodiment, the carrier rails 10050 and the bracket pushers 10040 each may contain one or more inclined surfaces that can together move the bracket pushers 10040 up from their idle position. In at least one such embodiment, as shown in FIG. 221-225, each bracket ejector 10040 may comprise at least one inclined surface 10042, and the slide 10050 may comprise one or more inclined surfaces 10052, which may be configured such that these inclined surfaces 10052 may slide beneath the inclined surface 10042 during distal advancement sled 10050 in the bracket unit. When the brackets pushers 10040 rise up in the respective parenthesis cavities 10012, the brackets pushers 10040 can lift the brackets 10030 upward so that the brackets 10030 can exit the brackets 10012 through the openings in the bracket panel 10011. In one example, the start sequence, as shown, mainly in FIG. 227-229, the slide 10050 may first contact the bracket 10030a and begin to lift the bracket 10030a up. With further distal advancement, the sled 10050 may begin to raise the brackets 10030b, 10030c, 10030d, 10030e and 10030f and all other subsequent brackets in turn. As shown in FIG. 229, the slide 10050 can push the brackets 10030 upward so that the bracket legs 10032 contact the opposite stop, deform to become the desired shape, and are ejected from the support part 10010. In various situations, the slide 10030 can move up and down several brackets simultaneously . If we consider the starting sequence shown in FIG. 229, the brackets 10030a and 10030b are moved to the fully actuated position and pushed out of the support portion 10010, the brackets 10030c and 10030d are in the process of being actuated and at least partially placed in the support portion 10010, and the brackets 10030e and 10030f are still located out of service.

As described above and as shown in FIG. 235, the legs 10032 of the bracket 10030 may protrude above the panel surface 10011 of the support portion 10010 when these brackets 10030 are in an idle position. If we additionally consider the starting sequence shown in FIG. 229, the brackets 10030e and 10030f are shown in an inactive position, and their bracket legs 10032 protrude above the panel surface 10011 and enter the fabric thickness compensator 10020. In various embodiments, the ends of the bracket legs 10032 or some other part of the bracket legs 10032 may not pass through the upper fabric contacting surface 10021 of the tissue thickness compensator 10020 when the brackets 10030 are in the idle position. As the brackets 10030 move from the idle position to the actuated position, as shown in FIG. 229, the ends of the brace legs may extend through the tissue contacting surface 10032. In various embodiments, the ends of the brace legs 10032 may include sharp tips capable of cutting through and penetrating the thickness compensator 10020. In some embodiments, the fabric thickness compensator 10020 may comprise a plurality of holes that can be adapted to receive the legs of the brackets 10032 and allow the legs of the brackets 10032 to slide relative to the fabric thickness compensator 10020. In some embodiments, the support portion 10010 may further comprise a plurality of ejectors 10013 protruding from the surface of the panel 10011. The pushers 10013 may be adjacent to the holes of the cavities of the brackets in the surface of the panel 10011 so that the leg brackets 10032 may at least partially maintained by these ejectors 10013. In some embodiments, ejector 10013 may be located at the proximal end and / or distal end opening of the cavity brackets. In various embodiments, the first ejector 10013 can be located on the first end of each hole of the bracket cavity, and the second ejector 10013 can be located on the second end of each hole of the bracket cavity so that each first ejector 10013 can support the first leg 10032 of the bracket 10030, and every second ejector 10013 could support the second leg of the 10032 bracket. In at least one embodiment, as shown in FIG. 235, each ejector 10013 may include a groove or groove, for example a groove 10016, into which the leg of the bracket 10032 can be slidably received. In various embodiments, each ejector 10013 may include a hook, protrusion and / or spike that may protrude from the panel surface 10011 and extend into the fabric thickness compensator 10020. In at least one embodiment, as described in more detail below, these hooks, protrusions and / or spikes can reduce the relative movements of the fabric thickness compensator 10020 and op ornogo part 10010. In some embodiments, the ends of the legs 10032 brackets may be located inside the ejectors 10013 and may not protrude above the upper surface of the ejectors 10013 when the brackets 10030 are in the off position. In at least one such embodiment, the pushers 10013 may determine the height of the pusher, and the brackets 10030 may not protrude above this height of the pusher when the brackets are in the idle position.

In various embodiments, a tissue thickness compensator, such as a tissue thickness compensator 10020, may be formed from a single sheet of material. In at least one embodiment, the tissue thickness compensator may comprise a continuous sheet of material capable of covering the entire upper surface of the panel 10011 of the support portion 10010, or, in an alternative embodiment, not covering the entire surface of the panel 10011. In some embodiments, the material sheet may cover the openings of the cavity brackets in the supporting part 10010, while in other embodiments, the sheet of material may contain holes that can be aligned or at least partially aligned with tverstiyami brackets cavities. In various embodiments, a tissue thickness compensator may be formed from multiple layers of material. In some embodiments, implementation, as shown in FIG. 217, the tissue thickness compensator may comprise a compressible core and a sheath surrounding this compressible core. In some embodiments, the shell 10022 may be configured to releasably hold the compressible core on the support portion 10010. In at least one such embodiment, the support portion 10010 may include one or more protrusions, such as protrusions 10014 (FIG. 220), for example extending from it, which can be embedded in one or more holes and / or grooves, such as holes 10024, for example, formed in the shell 10022. The protrusions 10014 and the holes 10024 can be made so that the protrusions 10014 can live the sheath 10022 on the support portion 10010. In at least one embodiment, the ends of the protrusions 10014 can be deformed, for example by thermal stretching, to increase the ends of the protrusions 10014 and thereby limit the relative movement between the sheath 10022 and the support part 10010. At least in one embodiment, the shell 10022 may contain one or more holes 10025 that can facilitate the release of the shell 10022 from the support portion 10010, as shown in FIG. 217. As shown in FIG. 226, the tissue thickness compensator may comprise a sheath 10222 including a plurality of holes 10223, the holes 10223 can be aligned or at least partially aligned with the holes of the brace cavities in the support portion 10010. In some embodiments, the core of the tissue thickness compensator may also include holes which are aligned or at least partially aligned with the holes 10223 in the sheath 10222. In other embodiments, the core of the tissue thickness compensator may have a continuous body and may 10223 extends below the holes so that the continuous body covers the openings of brackets cavities in the surface of the panel 10011.

In various embodiments, as described above, the tissue thickness compensator may comprise a sheath for releasably holding the compressible core on the support portion 10010. In at least one such embodiment, as shown in FIG. 218, the bracket unit may further comprise holding clips 10026, which may be configured to prevent premature separation of the shell and compressible core from the support portion 10010. In various embodiments, each holding clip 10026 may comprise holes 10028 that may be configured to receive these are protrusions 10014 extending from the supporting portion 10010 so that the holding clips 10026 can be held on the supporting portion 10010. In some embodiments, each holding The clamp clip 10026 may comprise at least one part of the pallet 10027 that can extend under the support part 10010 and support and hold the ejector brackets 10040 inside the support part 10010. In some embodiments, as described above, the fabric thickness compensator can be removably mounted on the support part 10010 with brackets 10030. More specifically, as also described above, the brace legs 10030 can extend into the fabric thickness compensator 10020 when the brackets 10030 are inoperative, thereby being held removably a tissue thickness compensator 10020 on the support portion 10010. In at least one embodiment, the legs of the brackets 10030 can contact the side walls of the respective cavities 10012 of the brackets, and due to friction between the legs of the brackets 10032 and the side walls, the brackets 10030 and the fabric thickness compensator 10020 can be held in position before placing the brackets 10030 from the brace unit 10000. When the brackets 10030 are brought into the working position, the fabric thickness compensator 10020 can be gripped in brackets 10030 and held close to the stitched fabric T. Subsequently and, when the abutment moves the abutment to the open position to release the fabric T, the support portion 10010 can be moved away from the tissue thickness compensator 10020, which remains sewn to the fabric. In some embodiments, an adhesive may be used to removably attach the tissue thickness compensator 10020 to the support portion 10010. In at least one embodiment, a two-component adhesive may be used, wherein in at least one embodiment, the first adhesive component may be applied to the surface of the panel 10011, and the second adhesive component may be applied to the fabric thickness compensator 10020 such that when the fabric thickness compensator 10020 placed close to the surface of the panel 10011, the first component can come into contact with the second component, as a result of which the adhesive is activated with the formation of a detachable connection between ensatorom tissue thickness and 10020 support portion 10010. In various embodiments may apply any other suitable means for creating a releasable connection between the retaining compensator tissue thickness and the clevis block supporting portion.

In various embodiments, in addition to the foregoing, the rails 10050 can advance from the proximal end 10001 to the distal end 10002, fully accommodating all the brackets 10030 contained within the brace block 10000. In at least one embodiment, as shown in FIG. 258-262, the slide 10050 can advance distally within the longitudinal cavity 10016 in the support portion 10010 by means of a trigger or holder 10052 of a cutting element of a surgical stapler. In use, the brace unit 10000 can be inserted into the groove of the brace unit in the jaw of the surgical stapler, for example, into the groove 10070 of the brace unit, and advance the trigger 10052 until it comes into contact with the slide 10050, as shown in FIG. 258. When the slide 10050 is distally advanced by the trigger 10052, the slide 10050 can come into contact with the extreme proximal ejector or brackets ejectors 10040 and actuate or eject the brackets 10030 from the bracket body 10010, as described above. As shown in FIG. 258, the trigger element 10052 may further comprise a cutting edge 10053 that can move distally along the groove for the cutting element made in the support portion 10010 as the brackets 10030 are actuated. In various embodiments, the corresponding groove of the cutting element may extend through a stop located opposite the bracket block 10000, so that in at least one embodiment, the cutting edge 10053 can protrude between the abutment and the supporting part 10010 and cut through the fabric and the compensator between them Thickness of fabric. In various situations, the trigger element 10052 can advance the slide 10050 distally until the slide 10050 reaches the distal end 10002 of the bracket block 10000, as shown in FIG. 260. At this point, the trigger element 10052 can be retracted proximally. In some embodiments, the trigger 10052 can retract the slide 10050 proximally, however, in various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 261, when the trigger element 10052 is retracted, the slide 10050 may remain at the distal end 10002 of the bracket block 10000. After the trigger element 10052 is pulled back enough, the emphasis can be opened again, the tissue thickness compensator 10020 can be separated from the support part 10010, and the remaining unimplanted part of the used bracket block 10000, including the supporting part 10010, can be removed from the groove 10070 bracket block.

After removing the used bracket block 10000 from the groove of the bracket block, in addition to the above, a new bracket block 10000 or any other suitable bracket block can be inserted into the groove of the bracket block 10070. In various embodiments, in addition to the foregoing, the bracket block chute 10070, the trigger element 10052 and / or the bracket block 10000 may include auxiliary elements capable of preventing the trigger element 10052 from distally moving a second, subsequent time without installing a new, not actuated of the bracket block 10000 into the groove 10070 of the bracket block. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 258, when pushing the trigger 10052 into contact with the slide 10050, and also when the slide 10050 is in the proximal inoperative position, the nose nose 10055 of the trigger element 10052 can be located on and / or over the support lip 10056 on the slide 10050 so that the trigger element 10052 held in a high enough position to prevent the fuse, or crossbar, 10054, extending from the trigger element 10052, from entering the fuse hole in the groove for the bracket unit. Since fuse 10054 will not fall into the fuse hole, in such a situation, fuse 10054 will not be able to abut against the distal side wall 10057 of the fuse hole while advancing the trigger element 10052. As the trigger element 10052 distally pushes the slide 10050, the trigger element 10052 can be supported in the upper starting position due to the fact that the supporting nose 10055 lies on the supporting protrusion 10056. When the starting element 10052 is retracted relative to the slide 10050, as described above and shown in FIG. 261, the trigger 10052 may move out of an elevated position and fall down because the nose nose 10055 no longer lies on the support lip 10056 of the slide 10050. In at least one such embodiment, the surgical brace may comprise a spring 10058 and / or any other suitable bias an element that can be configured to bias the trigger 10052 to a lower position. After fully pushing back the trigger element 10052, as shown in FIG. 262, the trigger element 10052 cannot again be distally advanced through the used bracket block 10000. More specifically, the trigger element 10052 cannot be held in the upper position by the slide 10050, because the slide 10050 at this point in the working sequence remains at the distal end 10002 of the bracket block 10000. Therefore, as noted above, if the trigger element 10052 is again advanced forward without replacing the bracket block, the fuse rail 10054 will contact the side wall 10057 of the fuse holder that will not allow once again to distally advance the trigger element 10052 into the bracket block 10000. In other words, after replacing the used bracket block 10000 with a new bracket block, the new bracket will have l proximal sled 10050 that will be able to hold the trigger 10052 in the upper position and provide the ability to again distally advance the trigger 10052.

As described above, the slide 10050 can be configured to move the bracket ejector 10040 between the first idle position and the second actuated position to eject the brackets 10030 from the support portion 10010. In various embodiments, the bracket ejectors 10040 after ejecting the brackets 10030 from the support portion 10010 may be inside cavities 10012 brackets. In some embodiments, the implementation of the support part 10010 may contain one or more retaining elements that can be configured to prevent the ejection or loss of the ejectors 10040 brackets from the cavities 10012 brackets. In various other embodiments, the slide 10050 may be configured to push the bracket ejectors 10040 out of the support portion 10010 together with the brackets 10030. In at least one embodiment, the bracket ejectors 10040 may be formed from a bioresorbable and / or biocompatible material such as, e.g. Ultem. In some embodiments, the bracket ejector can be connected to the brackets 10030. In at least one such embodiment, the bracket ejector can be molded on top of and / or around the base of each bracket 10030 so that the ejector is integral with the bracket. US Patent Application No. 11 / 541,123, entitled “SURGICAL BRACKETS HAVING COMPRESSIBLE OR REMOVABLE ELEMENTS FOR FIXING IN THEM FABRIC, AND SEWING MACHINES FOR USING SUCH BRACKETS”, sent in its entirety on September 29, 2006.

In various situations, in addition to the foregoing, a compressible tissue thickness compensator can move, twist and / or deviate relative to the underlying rigid supporting part of the bracket unit. In various embodiments, the support portion and / or any other suitable portion of the bracket unit may comprise one or more elements configured to limit relative movement between the tissue thickness compensator and the support portion. As described above, at least a portion of the brackets 10030 may protrude above the surface of the panel 10011 of the support portion 10010, in some situations, as shown in FIG. 263 and 264, the lateral loads applied to the fabric thickness compensator 10120, for example, can be resisted by brackets 10030 and / or hooks 10013 extending from the support portion 10010. In various situations, the brackets 10030, resisting the lateral movement of the fabric thickness compensator 10120, can tilt and / or bend inside the cavities 10012 brackets, and in various embodiments, the implementation, the cavity 10012 brackets and brackets 10030 can be made in shape and size with the ability to maintain the relative alignment of the legs 10032 brackets 10030 and forming recesses 10062 Located directly opposite the palm 10060, resulting in parentheses 10000 acquire the proper form in the making. In various embodiments, the brackets 10030 and / or hooks 10013 may be configured to prevent or at least limit lateral deformation within the tissue thickness compensator 10020, as shown in FIG. 264. In at least one embodiment, the brackets 10030 and / or hooks 10013, for example, may be configured to provide stiffness or restrict lateral and / or longitudinal movement of the first tissue contacting surface 10021 of the tissue thickness compensator relative to the second or lower surface 10029. In various embodiments, the bracket unit and / or the groove of the bracket unit in which the bracket unit is located may comprise at least one deformation minimizing element that may protrude up and restrict lateral and / or longitudinal movement or deformation compensator tissue thickness. A shell that at least partially surrounds the tissue thickness compensator, as described above, can also prevent or at least limit lateral and / or longitudinal movement or deformation of the tissue thickness compensator.

In various embodiments, also shown in FIG. 263 and 264, a tissue thickness compensator, such as a tissue thickness compensator 10120, may comprise a core 10128 and a sheath 10122. Sheath 10122 and a compressible core 10128 may be formed from different materials or, in an alternative embodiment, from one material. In any case, the shell 10122 may have a higher density than the core 10128. In cases where the shell 10122 contains the upper part of the fabric thickness compensator 10120, the ends of the legs of the brackets 10032 can be placed in the shell 10122. In embodiments where the shell contains a bottom part of the compensator for the thickness of the fabric 10120, the legs of the brackets 10032 can pass through the shell, as well as into the core. In any case, the sheath of the tissue thickness compensator can help keep the legs of the brackets 10032 aligned with the forming recesses 10062 of the stop 10060. In various embodiments, sheath 10122 may have a density that, for example, is about 10% more than the density of the core 10128, about 20% more than the density of the core 10128, about 30% more than the density of the core 10128, about 40% more than the density of the core 10128, about 50% more than the density of the core 10128, about 60% more density core 10128, approximately 70% higher than the density of core 10128, approximately 80% higher than the density of core 10128, approximately 90% higher than the density of core 10128 and / or approximately 100% higher than the density of core 10128. In various embodiments, cladding 10122 may, for example , have a density that is greater than the density of the core 10128 and less than twice the density of the core 10128. In various embodiments, the shell 10122 may, for example, have a density that is greater than twice the density of the core 10128. In different GOVERNMENTAL embodiments, in addition to the foregoing, the shell core 10122 and 10128 may be formed or manufactured simultaneously. In at least one such embodiment, a liquid containing any suitable material described herein can be molded into a dish or mold, and after solidification of the liquid, a shell or layer having a higher density than the rest of the material can be obtained. In various embodiments, multiple layers of material can be formed during a process in which one or more successive layers of material are poured onto a previously hardened layer. In some embodiments, two or more layers may be bonded to each other, for example, using an adhesive. In some embodiments, two or more layers, for example, can be fastened to each other by one or more fasteners and / or one or more mechanical interlocking elements. In at least one embodiment, adjacent layers may, for example, be joined together by one or more dovetail compounds. In some embodiments, the implementation of the shell may contain a sealed surface that can prevent or at least limit the penetration of fluid through it. In some other embodiments, the implementation of the shell may contain, for example, a porous structure with open cells.

In various embodiments, in addition to the foregoing, the sheath may be cut from the tissue thickness compensator. In at least one embodiment, the tissue thickness compensator may be cut from a larger block of material so that the tissue thickness compensator does not contain a sheath. In at least one such embodiment, the tissue thickness compensator may be formed, for example, from a homogeneous or at least substantially homogeneous material containing large pores.

In various embodiments, the bracket unit may comprise a plurality of brace cavities, within each of which a bracket is provided, the brace cavities may be arranged in a plurality of rows, and the emphasis located opposite the brace block may comprise a plurality of forming recesses corresponding to the brace cavities in the brace block. In other words, the emphasis may comprise a plurality of rows of forming recesses, where each forming recess may be located opposite the bracket cavity in the bracket unit. In various embodiments, each forming cavity may comprise, for example, two forming holes configured to receive legs 10032 of the bracket 10030, wherein each forming hole is configured to receive the bracket leg 10032 and form or bend the bracket leg 10032 to the other side legs 10032 brackets. In various situations, the legs 10032 may or may not fall into the forming holes incorrectly, as a result of which the legs of the brackets 10032 may become irregular during the starting sequence. In various embodiments described herein, the emphasis may comprise an array or mesh of forming recesses, each of which is configured to receive and form a bracket leg. In at least one such embodiment, the array of forming recesses may comprise a number of forming recesses that exceeds the number of brackets contained in the bracket unit. In at least one embodiment, the bracket unit may comprise, for example, six longitudinal rows of cavity brackets, the emphasis may comprise six rows of forming recesses aligned with six rows of cavity of brackets, and, in addition, may include forming recesses located between these rows of forming recesses. For example, on one side of the stop, the first row of forming cavities may be located, which can be placed above the first row of cavities of brackets, the second row of forming cavities, which can be placed above the second row of cavities of brackets, which is adjacent to the first row of cavities of brackets, and, in addition, a series of forming depressions located between the first row of forming depressions and the second row of forming depressions. In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 276-279, an emphasis 10260 may comprise six rows of forming recesses 10261, which may be arranged to fit over six corresponding rows of cavity brackets in the brace unit 10200. In at least one such embodiment, rows of intermediate forming recesses 10262 may be located between and / or adjacent to the rows of forming recesses 10261. In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 277, 278 and 280, each forming cavity 10261 and 10262 may have two forming holes, each forming hole may comprise a distal portion 10263, which may be configured to form or proximal bend the brace leg 10032, and a proximal portion 10264, which may be configured to form or distally bend brace legs 10032. In various other situations, the formation of the brackets 10030 may be performed in various other ways. For example, the bracket 10030 can be formed so that one leg 10032 is curved outward and the other leg 10032 is curved inward (FIG. 281), or so that both legs 10032 are curved outward (FIG. 282) depending on, firstly, into which forming hole the bracket leg 10032 enters and / or, secondly, whether the leg 10032 enters the proximal part 10263 or the distal part 10064 of each forming hole, for example.

In various embodiments, in addition to the foregoing, each forming recess 10261 and / or forming recess 10262, for example, may have a triangular or diamond shape. In at least one embodiment, each distal portion 10263 and / or each proximal portion 10264 of the forming recesses may have a triangular shape, and in at least one such embodiment, the triangular distal parts 10263 and the proximal parts 10264 may be located so that their vertices are directed in opposite directions. In some embodiments, the emphasis may comprise, for example, an array of substantially square forming recesses. In at least one such embodiment, the forming surface of each square forming recess may comprise an arched surface extending between the sides of the square. In some embodiments, the implementation of the emphasis may contain, for example, an array of round or spherical holes. In various embodiments, in addition to the foregoing, forming recesses 10261 can be located along one or more lines, similarly, forming recesses 10262 can also be located along one or more lines. In various other embodiments, forming recesses 10261 and / or forming recesses 10262 may be arranged in one or more circular rows. In at least one such embodiment, the forming recesses 10261 may be located along the main circumference, and the forming recesses 10262 may be located along the other circle. In various embodiments, the implementation of the main circle and the other circle may be concentric or at least substantially concentric. In some embodiments, forming recesses 10262 may be located, for example, along an inner circumference radially inside relative to the main circumference and / or along an outer circumference radially outside the main circumference. In various embodiments, the implementation of the main circle can be determined by the main diameter, the inner circle can be determined by the inner diameter, and the outer circle can be determined by the outer diameter. In at least one such embodiment, the inner diameter may be smaller than the main diameter, and the outer diameter may be larger than the main diameter.

In various embodiments, as described above, the emphasis can move from the open position to the closed position and compress the fabric with a tissue thickness compensator of the bracket unit, for example, fabric thickness compensator 10020. In various situations, the fabric thickness compensator can be adjacent to the supporting part before it is positioned relative to the fabric bracket block. In some embodiments, before moving the emphasis to the closed position, the tissue thickness compensator 10020 may occupy a position in which it abuts against the support portion 10018. In some other embodiments, the tissue thickness compensator 10020 may be in a position in which between the tissue thickness compensator 10020 and the supporting part 10018 there is a gap. In at least one such embodiment, the abutment can bias the fabric and fabric thickness compensator 10020 down until the fabric thickness compensator 10020 abuts the support portion 10018, at which point the emphasis can be moved to the closed position and create pressure within the fabric . In the event that the surgeon does not satisfy the location of the tissue between the abutment and the brace unit, the surgeon can open the abutment, adjust the position of the abutment and brace unit and close the abutment again. Due to such installation and reinstallation of the bracket unit relative to the fabric in various situations, the distal end of the tissue thickness compensator 10020 may, for example, separate from the support portion 10010. In some such situations, the distal end of the tissue thickness compensator 10020 may come into contact with the fabric and peel off or wrap around the support parts 10010. In various embodiments, as described in more detail below, the bracket unit may comprise one or more elements detachably held ya compensator tissue thickness on the underlying supporting part of the bracket unit.

In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 265, the bracket unit 10300 may comprise a support portion 10310, a tissue thickness compensator 10320 held by the support portion 10310, and a distal end 10302 including a nose portion 10303 configured to detachably hold the distal end 10325 of the tissue thickness compensator 10320 in the desired position. In at least one embodiment, the nose 10303 may include a groove 10305 configured to receive the distal end 10325 of the tissue thickness compensator 1320. In various embodiments, the distal end 10325 may be pressed or pinched into the groove 10305 so that the distal end 10325 can be held in place when the brace unit 10300 is positioned relative to the fabric. In at least one such embodiment, the groove 10305 may be oriented in a direction parallel or at least substantially parallel to the surface of the panel 10311 of the support portion 10310. In various embodiments, the groove 10305 may be horizontal to the surface of the panel 10311. In various other embodiments, as shown in FIG. 266, the bracket unit 10400 may include a support portion, a tissue thickness compensator 10420 supported by the support portion, and a distal end 10402 including a nose portion 10403 configured to detachably hold the distal end 10425 of the tissue thickness compensator 10420 in a desired position. In at least one embodiment, the distal end 10425 may include a protrusion extending from it, and the nose 10403 may include a vertical groove 10405 configured to receive a protrusion of the distal end 10425. In various embodiments, the distal end 10425 and / or departing from it the protrusion can be pressed or pinched into the groove 10405 so that the distal end 10425 can be held in place when the bracket unit 10400 is located relative to the fabric. In some embodiments, the tissue thickness compensator 10420 may include a groove, such as a groove 10429, that may be configured to receive at least a portion of the nose 10403. In at least one embodiment, the groove 10405 may be oriented in a direction perpendicular to or at least substantially perpendicular to the surface of the support portion panel 10411. In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 267, the brace unit 10500 may include a support portion, a tissue thickness compensator 10520 supported by the support portion, and a distal end 10502 including a nose portion configured to releasably hold the distal end 10525 of the tissue thickness compensator 10520 in the required position. In at least one embodiment, the nose can include a vertical groove 10505 configured to receive the distal end 10525 of the tissue thickness compensator 10520. In various embodiments, the distal end 10525 can be clamped or pinched into the groove 10505 so that the distal end 10525 can held in place when the bracket unit 10500 is positioned relative to the fabric.

In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 265, the tissue thickness compensator 10320 may comprise an upper surface 10324, which may be located above the upper surface 10304 of the nose 10303. Another embodiment in which the upper surface of the fabric thickness compensator is located above the nose of the bracket unit is shown in FIG. 238, the upper surface 10721 of the thickness compensator fabric 10720 is located, for example, above the upper surface 10004 of the bow 10003. During use, as shown in FIG. 265, the fabric can creep onto the upper surface 10304 of the bow 10303 and, in a certain situation, the fabric can come into contact with the distal end 10325 of the tissue thickness compensator 10320 and exert a force on the tissue thickness compensator 10320, which can lead to the separation of the tissue thickness compensator 10320 from the support portion 10310. In the embodiments described herein, a part of the distal end 10325 sandwiched in the bow 10303 can resist this separating force. In any case, after the optimal location of the tissue, Finally, the brace block 13000, the emphasis can be turned into the closed position and the fabric and tissue thickness compensator 10320 can be pressed close to the supporting part 10310. In at least one such embodiment, the emphasis can be rotated to the position in which it contacts the upper surface 10304 of the bow 10303, as a result, further stop rotation is prevented. In various situations, due to the fact that the upper surface 10324 of the tissue thickness compensator 10320 is located above the upper surface 10304 of the bow 10303, the upper surface 10324 may be pressed down towards the supporting part 10310 when closing the stop, and in some situations, the upper surface 10324 may be for example, depressed below the upper surface 10304 of the bow 10303. After placing the staples contained within the brace unit 10300 and dissecting the tissue thickness compensator 10320, as described herein, the support 10310 and the bow Part 10303 can be moved away from the tissue thickness compensator 10320 so that the distal end 10325 of the tissue thickness compensator 10320 can slide out of the groove 10305.

As described above, the emphasis, for example, emphasis 10060, can be rotated to the closed position, in which the emphasis 10060 is in contact with the upper surface of the nose portion 10004 of the bracket block, for example bracket bracket 10000. After the emphasis has reached the closed position, the compression ratio of the fabric thickness compensator, for example, a fabric thickness compensator 10020 will depend, inter alia, on the thickness in an uncompressed state or the height of the fabric thickness compensator, as well as on the thickness of the fabric. As shown in FIG. 236 and 237, the tissue thickness compensator 10920 may comprise an upper surface located at the same level or at least substantially flush with the upper surface 10004 of the nose 10003. In such embodiments, the upper surface of the tissue thickness compensator 10920 may be pressed below the upper surface 10004 of the bow 10003. As shown in FIG. 241 and 242, a tissue thickness compensator, such as a tissue thickness compensator 10820, may include an upper surface 10821 below the upper surface of the bow 10004 before the tissue thickness compensator 10820 is compressed by the fabric T and the stop 10060. In situations where the fabric T is relatively thin, as shown in FIG. 239 and 240, the tissue thickness compensator 10920 may undergo relatively small compression. As shown in FIG. 241 and 242, the tissue thickness compensator 10820 may undergo more compression if the tissue T is relatively thicker. In situations where the T fabric has both thin and thick sections, as shown in FIG. 243 and 244, the tissue thickness compensator 10820 can contract to a greater extent under the thicker fabric T, and to a lesser extent under the thinner fabric T. Thus, as described above, the tissue thickness compensator can compensate for differences in tissue thickness.

In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 268-270, the surgical stapler may comprise, firstly, a block chute 16670 adapted to receive a bracket block 16600, and secondly, a stop 16660 pivotally connected to the block chute 16670. The bracket block 16600 may comprise a support portion 16610 and a tissue thickness compensator 16620, the distal end 16625 of the tissue thickness compensator 16620 being held removably on the support portion 16610 by the nose 16603 on the distal end 16602 of the bracket block 16600. In at least one embodiment the nose 16603 may comprise a groove 16605 and may be formed of a flexible material. In use, as shown mainly in FIG. 269, the nose 16603 may bend downward to widen the opening of the groove 16605. In some embodiments, the nose 16603 may include slots or cutouts 16606 that may be configured to allow the nose 16603 to bend downward. In any case, in different situations, the widened opening of the groove 16605 can simplify the insertion of the distal end 16625 of the fabric thickness compensator 16620 into the groove 16605. After the fabric thickness compensator 16620 is properly positioned, the nose 16603 can be released and, due to the elasticity of the material of which the nose 16603 consists , the nose 16603 may return or at least substantially return to an unbent state and clamp the distal end 16625 of the tissue thickness compensator 16620 against the surface of the panel 16611, as shown in FIG. 270. During use, similarly to the foregoing, the distal end 16625 can be pulled out from the groove 16605 when the support portion 16610 is moved away from the stitched fabric. In various situations, the flexible nose 16603 may be configured to deflect upon disconnecting the tissue thickness compensator 16620 from the support portion 16610. In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 270, the tissue thickness compensator 16620 may comprise an upper surface 16621 aligned with or at least substantially aligned with the upper surface 16604 of the nose 16603.

In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 271, the surgical stapler may include, firstly, a groove 10770 configured to receive a brace unit 10700, and secondly, an emphasis 10760 rotatably coupled to a groove 10770 of the block. The brace unit 10700 may comprise a support portion 10710 and a tissue thickness compensator 10720. In various embodiments, a tissue thickness compensator 10720 can be held in place by the opener of the nose portion 10703, which can slide along the support portion 10710. In at least one embodiment, as shown, mainly in FIG. 272, the opener of nose portion 10703 may comprise one or more lateral grooves 10707, which, for example, may be configured to receive one or more rail guides extending along support portion 10710. In various embodiments, tissue thickness compensator 10720 may be located between the side grooves 10707. In some embodiments, the opener of the nose 10703 may further comprise a distal end 10702 and a cavity 10706 formed in the distal end 10702, and the cavity 10706 can also It can be configured to receive at least a portion of the support portion 10710. During use, the coulter of the nose portion 10703 can be worn on the support portion 10710 in the direction from the distal to the proximal end. In various embodiments, the tissue thickness compensator 10720 can be detachably attached to the nose coulter 10703 so that after activating the brackets through the tissue thickness compensator 10720, the tissue thickness compensator 10720 can be separated from the nose coulter 10703 by moving the supporting part 10710 and the nose coulter 10703 parts from the tissue thickness compensator 10720. In various embodiments, the upper surface 10721 of the tissue thickness compensator 10720 may be located below the upper surface 10704 of the bow 10703.

In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 273 and 274, the surgical stapler may include, firstly, a chute for bracket unit 11070 configured to receive a brace unit 11000, and secondly, an abutment 11060 rotatably coupled to chute 11070. Bracket block 11000 may comprise the support portion 11010 and the tissue thickness compensator 11020. In various embodiments, the tissue thickness compensator 11020 may be held in position by one or more longitudinal rail guides 11019 extending from the panel 11011 of the support portion 11010. In at least one embodiment, o Longitudinal rail guides 11019 may be placed in a tissue thickness compensator 11020. In some embodiments, implementation, as shown mainly in FIG. 274, the tissue thickness compensator 11020 may comprise a longitudinal recess 11029, which may be configured to receive longitudinal rail guides 11019. In at least one such embodiment, a recess 11029 may be configured and shaped, for example, to receive rail guides 11019 by fitting with an interference fit. Such elements, in addition to the foregoing, can be performed, for example, with the possibility of preventing or at least limiting the relative lateral movements between the tissue thickness compensator 11020 and the supporting part 11010 and, in addition, limiting the premature separation of the fabric thickness compensator 11020 from the supporting part 11010 In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 275, the surgical stapler may include, first, a groove for the bracket block 11170 configured to receive the bracket block 11100, and secondly, a stop 11160 rotatably connected to the groove 11170. The bracket block 11100 may comprise a support portion 11110 and tissue thickness compensator 11120. In various embodiments, tissue thickness compensator 11120 may be held in position by one or more longitudinal rows of spikes or teeth 11119 extending from panel 11111 of support portion 11110. In at least one embodiment, The longitudinal rows of spikes 11119 can be placed in a tissue thickness compensator 11120.

With respect to the embodiment shown in FIG. 273, in addition to the above, the tissue thickness compensator 11020 of the brace unit 11000 can gradually separate from the support portion 11010 as the brackets are ejected from the brackets 10012 made therein. More specifically, in addition to the foregoing, the brackets located in the brackets 10012 of the brackets can be pushed sequentially from the proximal end 11001 of the brace block 11000 to the distal end 11002 of the brace block 11000 so that the brackets can exert an upward biasing force on the tissue thickness compensator 11020, which leads to the shift of the tissue thickness compensator 11020 from the rail guides 11019. In such circumstances, the proximal end 11006 of the tissue thickness compensator 11020 can be separated from the supporting part 110 10 as the brackets are ejected from the most proximal cavities of 10012 brackets. Then, the tissue thickness compensator 11020 can gradually separate from the supporting part 11010 as the brackets are gradually ejected from the supporting part 11010 from the proximal end 11001 to the distal end 11002 of the brace unit 11000. When ejecting the brackets located in the most distal cavities 10012 of the brackets, the distal supporting part 11010 the end 11007 of the tissue thickness compensator 11020 may separate from the supporting portion 11010. With respect to the embodiment shown in FIG. 275, the tissue thickness compensator 11120 may gradually separate from the studs 1119 extending from the support portion 11110 as the brackets gradually eject from the brace block from the proximal end 11101 to the distal end 11102.

As described above, the tissue thickness compensator can gradually be separated from the support portion of the bracket unit as the brackets are gradually ejected from the support portion and contact with the tissue thickness compensator. In various embodiments, the brace legs, such as, for example, brace legs 10032, may be able to pass through the fabric thickness compensator without separating the fabric thickness compensator from the support portion. In such embodiments, the tissue thickness compensator may remain engaged with the support portion until the bases of the brackets, such as bases 10031, come into contact with the tissue thickness compensator and are pushed upward. However, in various embodiments, the planks and / or other holding elements extending from the support portion can, for example, counteract the separation of the tissue thickness compensator from the support portion. In some embodiments, as described in more detail below, the support portion may comprise holding elements that can be configured to gradually separate the tissue thickness compensator from the support portion as the brackets are gradually actuated from the bracket unit. Turning now to FIG. 283, the brace unit, such as, for example, the brace unit 11200, may include a support portion 11210 including retaining elements 11213 that can be removably held to compensate for the tissue thickness compensator 11220 (FIG. 284) on the support portion 11210. B in various embodiments, the holding elements 11213 may be located, for example, at the ends of each bracket cavity 11212, each holding element 11213 may include a guide groove 11216 formed therein, adapted to receive by sliding the leg 10032 of the bracket 10030. In such embodiments, both the legs of the brackets 10032 and the holding elements 11213 can be configured to releasably hold the tissue thickness compensator 11220 on the support portion 11210. When used, as shown in FIG. 284, the bracket ejectors 10040 contained within the support portion 11210 can be pushed upward by the slide 10050 as described above, the bracket ejectors 10040 can be configured to contact the holding members 11213 to at least partially separate the holding members 11213 from the supporting portion 11210 and moving the retaining elements 11213 outward from the brackets 10030 and the cavity 11212 of the brackets. By separating the holding elements 11213 from the support portion 11210 and / or moving them outward, as shown in FIG. 284, the holding elements 11213 may already be unable to hold the tissue thickness compensator 11220 on the support portion 11210, and as a result, the tissue thickness compensator 11220 may separate from the support portion 11210. Similarly, the tissue thickness compensator 11220 may gradually separate from the support portion 11210 as it gradually pushing the brackets 10030 from the bracket block in the direction of the stop, such as, for example, the stop 11260. In various embodiments, the ejectors of the brackets 10040 can be in contact with the holding elements 11213 when the upper surfaces of the ejector brackets 10040 reach the same level or at least substantially the same level as, for example, the surface of the panel 11211 of the support portion 11210. In such embodiments, the tissue thickness compensator 11220 may separate from the support portion 11210 in that moment and / or just before the brackets 10030 will be formed to their fully formed, or fully actuated, configuration. At least an aqueous such embodiment, as shown mainly in FIG. 285, the ejectors 10040 can be pushed out so much that they extend beyond the panel surface 11211 to completely form the brackets 10030 and during such an ejection, the retaining elements 11213 are separated from the support portion 11210. In various embodiments, as also shown in FIG. 284, the retaining elements 11213 can extend over the brackets 11212 or go into the brackets 11212 until they are separated or displaced outward, so that the ejectors 10040 can come into contact with the holding elements 11213 just at the moment when the ejectors 10040 reach the surface of the panel 11211. In any case, after separating the tissue thickness compensator 11220 from the support portion 11210, as shown in FIG. 285, the support portion 11210 can be moved away from the implanted tissue thickness compensator 11220.

As described above, the compressible tissue thickness compensator of the brace unit may gradually be separated from the support portion, or the body, of the brace unit as the brackets are actuated or pushed out of the brace unit. In various circumstances, this separation may include the gradual detachment of the tissue thickness compensator from the support portion, and in some circumstances, complete separation of the tissue thickness compensator from the support portion may not occur until the stop is opened and the support portion moves from the implanted tissue thickness compensator. In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 289, a brace block, such as, for example, brace block 11300, may comprise a fabric thickness compensator 11320 that is fixed so that it can be separated on the support portion 11310. In at least the water embodiment, the support portion 11310 may comprise a plurality of retaining elements protruding therefrom 11313, made in a detachable manner to compress and hold the longitudinal sides of the fabric thickness compensator 11320 on the support portion 11310. In at least an aqueous embodiment, each holding element 11313 may comprise an inwardly facing chute or groove 11316 that can be adapted to receive the longitudinal sides of the tissue thickness compensator 11320 therein. In various circumstances, the plurality of retaining elements 11313 may protrude along the first longitudinal side of the support portion 11310 and the plurality of retaining elements 11313 may protrude along the second longitudinal the sides of the support portion 11310, and in some circumstances, the holding elements 11313 may be configured to prevent, or at least limit, the lateral movement of the tissue thickness compensator 11320 and the support portion 11310, as well as preventing, or at least limiting, prematurely separating the tissue thickness compensator 11320 from the support portion 11310. In various embodiments, the holding elements 11313 may be integral with the support portion 11310, and in at least one embodiment, as shown in FIG. 290, the holding elements 11313 may be configured to detach, or at least partially detach, from the support portion 11310 to allow the tissue thickness compensator 11320 to separate from the support portion 11310, as shown, for example, in FIG. 291. In some embodiments, the abutment, such as, for example, abutment 11360, can be configured to compress the tissue thickness compensator 11320, and, in response to the pressure created within the tissue thickness compensator 11320, the fabric thickness compensator 11320 can expand laterally to at least partial detachment, or separation, of the retaining elements 11313 from the tissue thickness compensator 11320. In various embodiments, the implementation of the above-described advancement of the cutting element through the stop 11360 and the bracket block 11300 can lead to de the brackets contained in the block and simultaneous closer pressing of the stop 11360 and the bracket block 11300 to each other, which can exert additional compressive force on the tissue thickness compensator 11320 and thereby lead to the sequential detachment of the retaining elements 11313 as the cutting element passes through the bracket block 11300.

In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 292-294, a bracket block, such as, for example, bracket block 11400, may comprise a tissue thickness compensator 11420 that is removably mounted on the support portion 11410. In at least one embodiment, the bracket block 11400 may include one or more retaining bars 11413 which can be configured to hold the longitudinal sides of the tissue thickness compensator 11420 on the surface of the panel 11411. In at least one such embodiment, each retaining bar 11413 may comprise opposed to each other d of the other, shoulders 11418, which can form a chute 11416 between themselves. In such embodiments, one of the shoulders 11418 can be configured to extend over the thickness compensator 11420, and the other shoulder 11418 may be configured to extend under a protrusion 11419 extending from the support parts 11410. As shown mainly in FIG. 292, the size and configuration of the groove 11416 of each retaining bar 11413 may be selected to apply compressive force to the longitudinal sides of the tissue thickness compensator 11420 before using the brace unit 11400. In use, as shown mainly in FIG. 293, the bracket block 11400 can be placed inside the groove for the bracket block, and after the bracket block 11400 is appropriately placed, an emphasis, such as, for example, an emphasis 11460, can be moved to a position where it can compress the tissue thickness compensator 11420. Similarly to the above, the thickness compensator the fabric 11420 may expand laterally or outwardly in compression, and as a result, separate the retaining bars 11413 from the bracket block 11400. In some other embodiments, closing the stop 11460 may not lead to separation, or Do not lead to complete separation of the retaining bars 11413 from the bracket unit. In at least one such embodiment, the above-described advancement of the launch rod through the brace block 11400 may result in brackets 10030 from the support portion 11410 and simultaneously pressing the stop 11460 and the brace block 11400 closer to each other to apply compressive force to the tissue thickness compensator 11420, sufficient for expansion, the expansion joint for the thickness of the fabric 11420 sideways and the separation of the retaining bars 11413 from the bracket unit 11400. After the separation of the retaining bars 11413 from the bracket block 11400, as shown in FIG. 294, the support portion 11410 can be moved away from the implanted tissue thickness compensator 11420 and removed from the surgical field. In some alternative embodiments, implementation, as shown in FIG. 295, the bracket block 11400 ’may comprise retaining bars 11413’ which, similarly to the above, may comprise shoulders 11418 ’extending from them. In at least one such embodiment, each of the shoulders 11418 ’may include a wedge-shaped retainer 11417’, which may be removably adapted to hold the retaining bars 11413 ’on the bracket block 11400’. More specifically, in at least one embodiment, the support portion 11410 'of the brace block 11400' may comprise lower grooves 11419 ', which, together with the wedge-shaped latches 11417', may be configured to releasably hold the retaining bars 11413 'on the brace block 11400 and lock premature separation of the tissue thickness compensator 11420 from the support portion 11410 '. During use, similar to the above, the retaining strips 11413 ’can separate from the bracket block 11400’, for example, by applying sufficient compressive force to the fabric thickness compensator 11420.

In various circumstances, as described above and as also shown in FIG. 259 and 260, the slider block 10050 and the surgical stapler trigger 10052 can be moved from the proximal end 10001 of the brace block 10000 to the distal end 10002 (FIG. 219) of the brace block 10000 to bring the brace 10030 out of the supporting part 10010 to the working position. At least in some such circumstances, each bracket 10030 can be moved from the inoperative position to the actuated position and can be pushed out of the support portion 10010 to capture the entire tissue thickness compensator 10020 close to the fabric located between the stop 10060 and the brace block 10000. In some circumstances, the surgeon may need to activate not all brackets 10030 from the brace block 10000, and the surgeon may stop the slide 10050 and the trigger rod 10052 from stopping at the point between the proximal end 10001 and the distal end 10002 of the brace block 10000. In such circumstances, tissue thickness compensator 10020 can only be partially implanted in tissue T, and to separate the unimplanted portion of tissue thickness compensator 10020 from support part 10010, the surgeon can extend the support part 10010 from the partially implanted tissue thickness compensator 10020 so that the non-implanted part is separated or detached from the support part 10010. Although such embodiments may well be used in various circumstances, in FIG. 300-302 shows an improved embodiment in which a tissue thickness compensator, such as, for example, a tissue thickness compensator 11520 of the bracket unit 11500, may comprise a plurality of connected segments that can be configured to separate from each other. In at least one such embodiment, the tissue thickness compensator 11520 may, for example, comprise a first, or most proximal, segment 11520a, a second segment 11520b, detachably coupled to a first segment 11520a, a third segment 11520c, detachably connected to a second segment 11520b, a fourth segment 11520d detachably connected to a third segment 11520c, and a fifth segment 11520e connected detachably to a fourth segment 11520d. In various embodiments, the fabric thickness compensator 11520 may comprise at least one thin portion 11529 located between any two adjacent segments 11520a-11520e, which may be configured to form a predetermined tear-off or separation point at which the fabric thickness compensator segments may separate apart from each other. In some embodiments, the tissue thickness compensator may include any suitable set of perforated holes, thin sections, and / or any other means of creating a split point within the tissue thickness compensator. Turning primarily to FIG. 301, the stop 11560 is shown in the closed position and the trigger 10052 is shown in a partially extended position through the bracket unit 11500 so that the brackets 10030 lying at the base of the first segment 11520a, the second segment 11520b and the third segment 11520c are extended to the working position to capture the tissue thickness compensator 11520 close to the fabric T. In this position, the trigger 10052 is not yet extended to bring into operation the brackets 10030 lying at the base of the fourth segment 11520d and the fifth segment 11520e, for example. In the position shown in FIG. 302, the abutment 11560 is moved to the open position and the support portion 11510 of the bracket unit 11500 is moved from the portion of the tissue thickness compensator 11520 that has been implanted. As shown in FIG. 302, a thin portion 11529 (FIG. 300) located between the third segment 11520c and the fourth segment 11520d allowed the unimplanted portion of the tissue thickness compensator 11520 to separate from its implanted portion.

In various embodiments, in addition to the foregoing, the brace unit may comprise a plurality of cross-linking elements configured to hold, with the possibility of release, a tissue thickness compensator on the supporting portion of the brace unit. In some embodiments, the support portion may comprise a plurality of holes made, for example, in the surface of the panel, the suturing elements may extend through the tissue thickness compensator and may be releasably held in the holes of the support portion. In use, the fasteners may gradually separate from the support portion as the brackets gradually eject from the support portion. In at least one such embodiment, the fasteners can be implanted together with a tissue thickness compensator, and in at least one embodiment, the fasteners can be formed, for example, from at least one bioabsorbable material. In some embodiments, the fasteners may separate from the support portion after at least partially implanting the tissue thickness compensator and while moving the support portion from the implanted tissue thickness compensator. In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 323-325, a brace unit, such as, for example, brace unit 11600, may comprise a fabric thickness compensator 11620 that is removably secured to the support portion 11610 by a plurality of fasteners 11613. Each fastener 11613 may include a first end 11618 placed inside and / or otherwise associated with a fabric thickness compensator 11620, a second end 11618 connected to a support portion 11610, and a connector 11616 that connects the first end 11618 to the second end 11618. In various embodiments, fasteners 11613 may extend through without a groove 11615 of the cutting element formed in the support portion 11610. When using the trigger 10052 described above can move the cutting edge through the groove 11615 of the cutting element in the support portion 11610 and cut the fasteners 11613 to separate the tissue thickness compensator 11620 from the support portion 11610. In at least one such embodiment, the trigger rod 10052 can advance from the proximal end 11601 of the bracket block 11600 to the distal end 11602 of the bracket block 11600, in order, first, to distally advance the rails 10050 and warmly actuate the brackets 10030, as described above, and, secondly, gradually dissect and / or crease fasteners 11613 to gradually separate the tissue thickness compensator 11620 from the support portion 11610. In some embodiments, similar to the above, the fabric thickness compensator 11620 may comprise a plurality of detachable segments 11620a-11620e, each of which, for example, can be held onto the support portion 11610 by one or more fasteners 11613. If the trigger 10052 is stopped between the proximal end 11601 and a distal end 11602 of the bracket block 11600, as shown in FIG. 324, fasteners 11613 can help hold the non-implanted portion of the tissue thickness compensator 11620 on the abutment portion 11610 after opening the abutment 11660 and moving the abutment portion 11610 from the tissue T, as shown in FIG. 325. In various embodiments, in addition to the foregoing, the cutting edge 10053 of the trigger element 10052 may be configured to notch and / or break fasteners 11613. In some alternative embodiments, as shown in FIG. 327 and 328, the slider to accommodate the brackets, such as, for example, the slide 11650, may include a cutting edge 11653, which can be adapted to notch the connectors 11616 of the fasteners 11613 when moving the slide 11650 along the bracket block 11600. In at least one such an embodiment, each connector 11616 may comprise a cylindrical element extending between the T-shaped ends 11618 of the fasteners 11613, the cutting edge 11653 may include a concave profile 11653, which, for example, may be configured th receiving the cylindrical connector 11616.

As described above, the brace unit may be loaded into the groove of the brace unit of the surgical stapler. In various circumstances, the surgeon or other doctor may insert the brace block into the groove of the brace block by applying a downward force to the brace block to lock the brace block in place. In some such circumstances, for the application of such a downward force, the doctor may, for example, place his thumb on the upper surface of the brace block. In various embodiments, the upper surface of the bracket unit may comprise the upper surface of the tissue thickness compensator, wherein, as described above, the tissue thickness compensator may be compressible, and in some embodiments, the downward force exerted on the tissue thickness compensator may compress the thickness compensator tissue to such an extent that the doctor’s thumb touches the ends of the staples located in the supporting part. In various embodiments, an applicator for a brace block may be used to insert the brace block into the groove for the brace block, which may be configured to prevent, or at least limit, the likelihood of the doctor touching the brackets in the brace block. After appropriately positioning the brace block inside the chute of the brace block, as described in more detail below, the applicator may be separated from the brace block.

In some embodiments, implementation, as shown in FIG. 305 and 306, the applicator for the bracket unit may comprise a rigid cover, such as, for example, a cover 10080, which can be secured to the bracket unit 10000. In addition to the above, the cover 10080 can be configured to prevent, or at least limit, the likelihood of contact, for example, of the doctor’s thumb with the ends of the brackets 10030 located in the bracket unit 10000 when the bracket unit 10000 is inserted into the groove of the bracket unit. As shown in FIG. 307 and 308, the cover 10080 may be distributed over the upper surface 10021, or at least a portion of the upper surface 10021, of the fabric thickness compensator 10020, and may include, firstly, a lower surface 10081, which may be distributed over and / or abut into the tissue thickness compensator 10020, and secondly, the upper surface 10082, which can, for example, provide a surface on which the doctor can press to apply the required downward force. In use, the doctor may take the handle 10084 of the lid 10080, align the support portion 10010 of the bracket unit 10000 with the groove for the bracket unit, and at least partially insert the bracket unit 10000 into the groove of the bracket unit. The physician can then fully place the bracket block 10000 into the groove of the bracket block by applying a downward force to the top surface 10082 of the lid 10880, which can, in various embodiments, transmit the downward force directly to the support portion 10010. In at least one such embodiment, the lid 10080 may comprise proximal supports 10087, which may extend downwardly and contact the surface of the support portion panel 10011. In some embodiments, the cap 10080 may further comprise a distal abutment 10083, which can be abutted against the nose 10003. When a downward force is applied to the cap 10080, a downward force can be transmitted through the proximal supports 10087 and / or the distal abutment 10083 without transmission, or at least substantially without transmission, a downwardly directed force toward the supporting portion 10010 through a tissue thickness compensator 10020. In various circumstances, as a result of the above, h can not directly contact the tissue thickness compensator 10020. Also as a result of the above-described cap 10080 may not compress, or at least does not substantially compress, 10020 compensator tissue thickness when inserting the clevis block 10000 inwardly chute clevis block. In various embodiments, the cap may comprise any suitable number of supports configured to transmit downward force to the support portion without transmission, or at least substantially without transmission, downward force through the tissue thickness compensator. In some embodiments, the supports may extend along the distal end, proximal end and / or longitudinal sides of the tissue thickness compensator. In some embodiments, the supports may extend through a tissue thickness compensator. In at least one such embodiment, the supports may extend through holes in the tissue thickness compensator and abut against the panel of the support portion. In some embodiments, at least some of the supports may not contact the panel until a downward force is applied to the lid; however, in various embodiments, the lid may be configured to bend, or move, down to contact the supports with the panel of the support portion. At this point, bending or moving the lid down may be stopped, or at least substantially stopped.

As described above, the cover 10080 can be attached to the bracket block 10000 and used to control the position of the bracket block 10000. In various embodiments, the cover 10080 may comprise any suitable number of gripping elements that can be configured, for example, to be able to releasably hold the cover 10080 on the supporting part 10010 of the bracket block 10000. In at least one such embodiment, the cover 10080 may further comprise one or more retaining elements, such as, for example, a latch and 10088 and / or 10089. In various embodiments, the latches 10089 can be configured to extend around the sides of the bow 10003 and engage with the bottom surface 10009 (FIG. 306) of the bow 10003. Similarly, the latches 10088 can extend around the sides of the locking protrusions 10008 extending from the support portion 10010, and engage with the lower surfaces of the locking protrusions 10008. Such latches in various embodiments may be configured to place the lid 10080 over a region or region in of which the brackets are located inside the supporting part 10010. In any case, after the brace block 10000 is properly placed, the cover 10080 can be separated from the brace block 10000. In at least one embodiment, the doctor can apply an upward lifting force to the handle 10084 to separate the distal end of the cover 10080 from the distal end 10002 of the bracket block 10000. In at least one such embodiment, the latches 10088 and 10089 can open outward when the handle 10084 is lifted up so that the latches 10088 and 10089 can unbent around the latching protrusions 10008 and 10003, respectively, the bow. Then, the proximal end of the cover 10080 can be lifted from the proximal end 10001 of the bracket unit, and the cover 10080 can be moved from the bracket unit 10000.

In some embodiments, implementation, as shown in FIG. 309 and 310, an applicator for a brace block, such as, for example, a brace block applicator 10680, may be arranged to accommodate an upper tissue thickness compensator, such as, for example, a tissue thickness compensator 10690, relative to the stop in addition to placing a bracket block, such as for example, bracket block 10600, into the groove of the bracket block. Similarly to the foregoing, the applicator 10680 may comprise latches 10688 that can releasably engage with locking tabs 10608 extending from the support portion 10610 of the bracket unit 10600 so that the applicator 10680 can be held in position above the tissue thickness compensator 10620 of the bracket unit 10600. In various embodiments, the upper tissue thickness compensator 10690 can be removably mounted on the applicator for the bracket unit 10680 so that the emphasis of a surgical device, such as, for example, emphasis 10060, can be closed on the applicator 10680, engaged with the tissue thickness compensator 10690, and the tissue thickness compensator 10690 can be separated from the applicator 10680. In various embodiments, the tissue thickness compensator 10690 and / or the stop 10060 may comprise one or more retaining elements that may be provided with the ability to detachably hold the tissue thickness compensator 10690 on the stop 10060. In at least one such embodiment, the tissue thickness compensator 10690 may comprise, for example, a longitudinal rail 10695 extending from the upper surface 10691 of the fabric thickness compensator 10690, which can be received in a longitudinal groove 10065 of the cutting element made in the abutment 10060. In various embodiments, the fabric thickness compensator 10690 and the longitudinal rail guide 10695 may be formed from any suitable compressible material, for example , such as those described in this application, wherein the longitudinal rail 10695 may, for example, be pressed and / or inserted by a wedge into the groove 10065 of the cutting element. After the stop 10060 engages with the tissue thickness compensator 10690, the stop 10060 can be moved back to the open position, and in such circumstances, the tissue thickness compensator 10690 can separate from the applicator 10680. Then, the applicator 10680 can be separated from the bracket block 10600, so that the stop 10060 and the bracket block 10600 can be positioned relative to the fabric to be sewn and / or cut. In use, bringing the brackets to the working position a slide, such as the slide 10050 (FIG. 236), for example, can be extended distally through the bracket block 10600 trigger element 10052 (FIG. 236), for example, in order to push the brackets out of the bracket block 10060, as disclosed above. When the brackets are deformed, each bracket can capture part of the fabric thickness compensator 10690 close to the upper surface of the fabric and part of the fabric thickness compensator 10620 close to the lower surface of the fabric. At the same time, the trigger 10052 can extend the cutting edge 10053 (FIG. 236) through the tissue thickness compensator 10620 and / or the fabric thickness compensator 10690, in at least one embodiment, the cutting edge 10053 can advance through the longitudinal rail 10695 for notching the rail guide 10695 and gradually separating the tissue thickness compensator 10690 from the stop 10060. After placing the brackets, the stop 10060 can be opened again and moved from the implanted tissue thickness compensator 10690, and, similarly, about the port portion 10610 of the bracket block 10600 can be moved away from the implanted tissue thickness compensator 10620. In various embodiments, in addition to the foregoing, the tissue thickness compensator 10620 and / or the tissue thickness compensator 10690 may comprise a plurality of detachable segments that can be separated from each other if only parts of tissue thickness compensators 10620 and 10690 are implanted in brackets.

In various embodiments, in addition to the foregoing, the applicator 10680 may include one or more retaining elements, which may be removably capable of holding the tissue thickness compensator 10690 on the applicator 10680. In at least one such embodiment, as shown, main way in FIG. 310, the applicator 10680 may comprise a longitudinal retaining rail 10685, which may be adapted to receive into the longitudinal retaining groove 10694 formed in the lower surface 10692 of the tissue thickness compensator 10690, for example, when fitted with an interference fit. In various circumstances, the retaining rail 10685 and the retaining groove 10694 may be configured to hold the tissue thickness compensator 10690 in the applicator 10680 until 10060 applies sufficient upward lifting force to the tissue thickness compensator 10690, as described above. In at least one such embodiment, the retaining rail 10685 extending from the applicator 10680 may further comprise end stops 10686 located at the proximal and distal ends of the retaining rail 10685, which may be configured to prevent, or at least limit, the relative longitudinal movement of the tissue thickness compensator 10690 and the applicator 10680. In some embodiments, as also shown in FIG. 310, one or more adhesives can be placed on the contact surface 10691 of the fabric thickness compensator 10690, such as, for example, longitudinal adhesive strips 10693, so that when the stop 10060 contacts the fabric thickness compensator 10690, as described above, the adhesives can be releasably fixed tissue thickness compensator 10690 at stop 10060. In various embodiments, one or more adhesives may be used, for example, in addition to or instead of the compressible holding elements described above. In some embodiments, one or more adhesives can be used to releasably hold the tissue thickness compensator on the bracket applicator. In at least one embodiment, as shown in FIG. 310A, cover 10080, for example, may include one or more adhesive pads 12185, which may be removably capable of holding an upper tissue thickness compensator, such as, for example, tissue thickness compensator 12190, on top surface 10082 of cover 10080. in at least one such embodiment, similar to the embodiments described above, the emphasis may be closed on the tissue thickness compensator 12190 to engage with the longitudinal expansion rail retaining rail 12195 other aspects of fabric 12190. In some embodiments, a release mechanism may be placed between the fabric thickness compensator 12190 and the lid 10080, which can be used to break the adhesive bonds holding the fabric thickness compensator 12190 and the lid 10080 together, and separate the fabric thickness compensator 12190 from the lid 10080. In at least one embodiment, the release mechanism may comprise a tongue 12196 and a loop 12197, wherein the loop 12197 may include first and second ends secured to the tongue 12196. The loop 12197 may comprise, For example, a thread that can form a perimeter surrounding the adhesive pads 12185 so that when distally pulling the tab 12196, the thread can slide between the tissue thickness compensator 12190 and the lid 10080 and come into contact with the adhesive pads 12185. In such circumstances, the thread can lead to at least one of, for example, separating adhesive pads 12185 from tissue thickness compensator 12190, separating adhesive pads 12185 from cover 10080 and / or dissecting adhesive pads 12185.

In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 311, the bracket unit may comprise, for example, a support portion 10710, which, similarly to the foregoing, may comprise a longitudinal groove 10715 of the cutting element passing through it. In at least one such embodiment, the applicator for the bracket unit, such as, for example, the applicator 10780, may comprise a longitudinal holding and aligning member 10786 that can extend into the groove 10715 of the cutting member in the support portion 10710. In some embodiments, the holding member 10786 can be adapted to engage with the side walls of the groove 10715 of the cutting element, for example, when installed with interference, so that the applicator 10780 can detachably be held on the supporting part 107 10. In various embodiments, although not shown, the first part of the tissue thickness compensator may be located on the first side of the retaining element 10786, and the second part of the tissue thickness compensator may be located on the opposite or second side of the retaining element 10786. Similarly, the first and the second part of the tissue thickness compensator can be fixed to the supporting part 10710 of the bracket unit using, for example, retaining elements 10013. Also, similar to the above, the upper thickness compensator fabric 10790 can be detachably mounted on the applicator 10780 using a longitudinal holding element 10785 extending from the loading surface 10782 of the applicator 10780, and the holding element 10785 can be detachably mounted with interference in a longitudinal groove 10794, made, for example, on the lower surface 10792 of the compensator the thickness of the fabric 10790. In various embodiments, the implementation is also similar to the above, the compensator for the thickness of the fabric 10790 may further comprise a longitudinal retaining element 10795, passing and the upper surface 10791 of the fabric thickness compensator 10790, which can be detachably held, for example, in a longitudinal groove 10065 of the cutting element made in the abutment 10060. In at least one such embodiment, the longitudinal retaining element 10795 may have a wedge-shaped cross section containing an upper part, which larger than the lower part, and the lower part may, for example, secure the retaining element 10795 on the thickness compensator fabric 10790.

In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 312 and 313, the bracket block 10800, containing the support portion 10810 and the tissue thickness compensator 10820, can be loaded into the groove of the bracket block, for example, with the bracket block applicator 10880. Similarly to the foregoing, the bracket block applicator 10880 can also be configured to accommodate an upper tissue thickness compensator 10890, for example, relative to a stop, such as, for example, a stop 10060, so that when the stop 10060 is closed, the stop 10060 can come into contact with the tissue thickness compensator 10890 and engage with him. In at least one embodiment, the fabric thickness compensator 10890 may comprise a plurality of retaining legs 10895 extending from the upper surface 10891 of the fabric thickness compensator 10890, which may be adapted to engage with the stop 10060 and detach the fabric thickness compensator 10890 on the stop 10060. In at least one such embodiment, legs 10895 may be arranged in a longitudinal row, each leg 10895 may include at least one foot made with zmozhnostyu entry in made-ups 10060 10065 groove cutting element and engage with it. In some embodiments, some of the legs of the legs 10895 can extend in one direction and the rest of the legs can extend in the other direction. In at least one embodiment, some of the legs may extend in opposite directions. In any case, after the abutment 10060 engages with the tissue thickness compensator 10890, as shown in FIG. 313 and 314, the stop 10060 can be opened again, and the doctor can move the applicator for the bracket unit 10880 from the tissue thickness compensators 10820 and 10890. Then, as shown in FIG. 314A, an upper tissue thickness compensator 10890 may be located on the first side of the target fabric, and a tissue thickness compensator 10820, which may include a lower tissue thickness compensator, may be located on the second side of the fabric. After the proper location of the fabric thickness expansion joints 10820 and 10890, as shown in FIG. 314B, a cutting edge of a trigger element, such as, for example, a cutting edge 10053, can be advanced through the fabric and through tissue thickness compensators. In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 318, the applicator for the bracket unit, such as, for example, the applicator 12280, may comprise a tissue thickness compensator 12290 mounted on it with a possibility of separation, which, similarly to the above, can be inserted into the groove for the bracket unit, as shown in FIG. 319, and engaged with the stop 10060 while moving the stop 10060 to the closed position. In at least one such embodiment, the fabric thickness compensator 12290 may comprise a plurality of retaining elements 12295 extending upward from the upper surface 12291 of the fabric thickness compensator 12290, each holding element 12295 may comprise a plurality of flexible legs 12296 that can be inserted into a groove 10065 of the cutting element of the stop 10060. As shown mainly in FIG. 321 and 322, the flexible legs 12296 of each holding element 12295 can be separated by a gap 12298 so that when the legs 12296 are inserted into the groove 10065 of the cutting element, the legs 12296 can bend inward and then elastically return outward after passing the enlarged legs of the flexible legs 12296 through the groove 10065 cutting element. In various embodiments, the enlarged tabs of the flexible legs 12296 can bend behind the oppositely arranged holding protrusions 12297 formed on the stop 10060, and as a result of the interaction between the legs 12296 and the protrusions 12297, the tissue thickness compensator 12290 can be held on the stop 10060. Then, the applicator for the brace unit 12280 can be moved from the fabric thickness compensator 12290, as shown in FIG. 320. If, after implantation, the tissue thickness compensator 12290 is used close to the fabric, for example, with brackets placed from the bracket unit 10000, the stop 10060 can be opened again, and when the stop 10060 is moved from the implanted tissue thickness compensator 12290, the legs 12296 of the holding elements 12995 can bend inward so that they can be pulled out of the groove 10065 of the cutting element.

In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 315 and 316, a fabric thickness compensator, such as, for example, fabric thickness compensator 11990, can be longitudinally loaded into a stop, such as, for example, stop 11960. More specifically, in at least one embodiment, fabric thickness compensator 11990 may comprise one or more longitudinal rail 11995, which can be inserted into the distal hole in the groove 11965 of the cutting element of the stop 11960 and then proximally pushed out until the tissue thickness compensator 11990 is properly placed in the stop 11960. In at least one such embodiment e implementation, each rail 11995 may include a longitudinal holding tab 11996, which may be located, for example, behind the longitudinal holding protrusion 11997, which at least partially forms the groove 11965 of the cutting element. As shown in FIG. 316, the tab 11996 may extend in opposite directions for placement behind the retaining protrusions 11997 located on opposite sides of the groove 11965 of the cutting element. In various embodiments, a longitudinal gap 11998 may be formed between the rail guides 11995, which may be configured to allow the rail guides 11995 to bend inward to each other while separating the tissue thickness compensator 11990 from the stop 11960. In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 317, a tissue thickness compensator, such as, for example, a fabric thickness compensator 12090, may include one or more latches 12098 that can extend around the sides of the stop, such as, for example, the stop 12060. In use, the latches 12098 can engage with the stop 12060 and detachably hold the tissue thickness compensator 12090 on the abutment 12060. In at least one such embodiment, the abutment 12060 may comprise, for example, one or more recesses or retainer shoulders, 12097, each of which may be adapted to receive a latch extending from tab 12098. When using the latches 12098 can be bent outward and separated from the abutment 12060 when moving the abutment 12060 from the tissue thickness compensator 12090 after at least partial implantation of the tissue thickness compensator 12090.

As described above, the surgical stapler may include a gutter for the brace unit configured to receive the brace unit, an abutment pivotally coupled to the groove for the brace unit, and a trigger containing a cutting edge that is movable relative to the abutment and gutters for the bracket unit. In use, the brace block can be placed inside the chute of the brace block, and after at least partially spending the brace block, the brace block can be removed from the chute of the brace block and replaced with a new brace block. In some such embodiments, the gutter for the bracket unit, the abutment and / or trigger element of the surgical stapler can be reused with the removable bracket unit. In some other embodiments, the bracket unit may comprise a portion of the disposable assembly of the loading module, which may include, for example, a chute for the bracket assembly, an abutment and / or trigger, which may be replaced with the bracket assembly as part of the replacement of the disposable assembly of the loading module. Some variations of the disposable loading module assembly are disclosed in US Patent Application No. 12 / 031,817 entitled “DESIGNS FOR CONNECTING AN END CLIP FOR SURGICAL TURNING AND BINDING APPLIANCE”, filed February 15, 2008, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. As shown in FIG. 370, a disposable loading module, such as, for example, a disposable loading module 12500, may comprise a support portion 12510, an abutment 12560 rotatably coupled to the support portion 12510, and an elongated shaft 12570 extending from the support portion 12510. Similar to the bracket blocks described herein, the support portion 12510 may comprise a plurality of brace cavities 10012 and brackets, such as, for example, brackets 10030 placed, for example, in each bracket cavity 10012. The disposable loading module 12500 may further comprise a trigger 12552, which can be distally advanced to move the stop 12560 from the open position, as shown in FIG. 370, in the closed position. In various embodiments, the disposable loading module 12500 may further comprise a tissue thickness compensator 12520 located on and / or fixed to the support portion 12510, wherein when the stop 12560 is in its closed position, the stop 12560 may be located opposite the fabric thickness compensator 12520, and in some embodiments, the abutment 12560 may at least partially compress the tissue thickness compensator 12520 when the abutment 12560 is in its closed position. In any case, the trigger element 12552 can be advanced further to push the brackets out of the support portion 12510. As the brackets are ejected, the brackets can be deformed by the stop 12560 and grab at least part of the tissue thickness compensator 12520 inward. Then, the trigger element 12552 can be retracted proximally, the stop 12560 can be opened again, and the support portion 12510 can be moved away from the implanted tissue thickness compensator 12520.

In various embodiments, in addition to the foregoing, the tissue thickness compensator 12520 may be detachably mounted on the support portion 12510. In at least one such embodiment, the support portion 12510 may include a longitudinal retaining rail rail 12526 mounted on both sides thereof. moreover, each rail guide 12526 may contain one or more holes 12528, which can be configured to receive at least a portion of the thickness compensator fabric 12520. After at least partially implanting the tissue thickness compensator 12520, the tissue thickness compensator 12520 can be pulled out of the holes 12528 by moving the support portion 12510. In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 371-373, the disposable loading module 12600 may comprise a support portion 12610, a tissue thickness compensator 12620 mounted to separate on the support portion 12610, and one or more retaining rail guides 12626, which may be configured to extend under the tissue thickness compensator 12620 and securing the tissue thickness compensator 12620 to the supporting portion 12610. Each holding rail rail 12626 may comprise, for example, a plurality of holding hooks 12628, which may engage with the supporting portion 12610, on an example, through retaining grooves 12614 made in the support portion 12610. When used in at least one such embodiment, the tissue thickness compensator 12620 can be configured to separate from the retaining rail guides 12626 after at least partially implanting the tissue thickness compensator 12620 and moving the supporting portion 12610 from the tissue thickness compensator 12620. In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 374-376, the disposable loading module 12700 may comprise one or more retaining rail guides 12726, each of which may include a lower bar 12725, which may extend under the fabric thickness compensator 12720, and an upper bar 12727, which may extend over the upper surface 12621 of the thickness compensator fabric 12620. In some embodiments, the thickness compensator fabric 12620 may be at least partially compressed between the upper bars 12727 and the lower bars 12725 so that the retaining rail 1272 6 may detachably hold the tissue thickness compensator 12620 relative to the support portion 12610. In at least one such embodiment, each holding rail rail 12726 may comprise one or more holding hooks 12728 that may engage with the supporting portion 12610 to hold the holding rail guides 12726 on the supporting part 12610.

In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 377 and 378, the disposable loading module 12800 may comprise a holding member 12822, which may be configured to mount a tissue thickness compensator 12620 on the supporting portion 12610. In at least one such embodiment, the holding member 12822 may comprise a sheet of material placed adjacent to the surface panel 12611 supporting part, and the compensator for the thickness of the fabric 12620 can be attached to a sheet of material, for example, at least one adhesive. The holding member 12822 may further comprise a longitudinal holding rail 12825 configured to extend downward into the groove 12615 of the cutting member provided in the supporting portion 12610. In at least one such embodiment, the dimensions and configuration of the holding rail 12825 may be selected in such a way that it will be sandwiched between the side walls of the groove 12615 of the cutting element. When using the trigger element 12552 may contain a cutting edge, which can pass through the groove 12615 of the cutting element during the distal advancement of the trigger element 12552 and longitudinally cut the tissue thickness compensator 12620 and the retaining rail guide 12825. Also, when using brackets, ejected from the supporting part 12610, can pierce a holding member 12822, a fabric thickness compensator 12820 and a fabric located between the fabric thickness compensator 12820 and a stop 12560. In various embodiments, the holding member 12822 may be formed from biocompatible and / or bioabsorbable material. In some embodiments, the holding member 12822 may be formed of sufficiently compressible material to comprise a tissue thickness compensator defining a tissue thickness compensator 12620. In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 379-381, the disposable loading module 12900 may comprise a loading assembly including a lower portion 12922 that can be removably secured to a support portion 12610, an upper portion 12990 that can be removably secured to a removable support 12560, and a flexible connector an element 12991 connecting the lower part 12922 and the upper part 12990. Similarly to the above, the longitudinal holding rail rail 12825 can extend downward from the lower part 12922 and into the groove 12615 of the cutting element made in the supporting part 12610, thus Note that the lower portion 12922 may be releasably supported on the support portion 12610. Similarly, the longitudinal retaining rail 12995 may extend upward from the upper portion 12990 into the groove of the cutting element provided in the abutment 12560, so that the upper portion 12990 may be releasably hold on the stop 12560. As shown in FIG. 380 and 381, the tissue thickness compensator 12620 can be installed on the lower part 12922 of the loading unit, and to place the fabric thickness compensator 12620 relative to the supporting part 12610, the doctor can bend the upper part 12990 and the lower part 12922 to each other, place the loading unit between the stop 12560 and the supporting part 12610 and release the curved loading unit so that it can elastically expand and move the upper part 12990 close to the stop 12560 and the lower part 12922 close to the supporting part 12610. At least in one embodiment I, as shown in FIG. 382-384, the boot assembly may further comprise one or more locking hooks extending therefrom, such as, for example, locking hooks 12994, which may be removably connected to the upper part 12990 with a stop 12560 and / or to detachably connect the lower part 12922 with supporting part 12610.

In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 385, the disposable loading module 15900 may, for example, comprise a stop 15960 and a groove for the bracket block 15970, the groove for the bracket block 15970 may rotate relative to the stop 15960. In at least one such embodiment, the stop 15960 may not be able to rotate. In some embodiments, the fabric may be located between the abutment 15960 and the groove for the brace unit 15970, and then the groove for the brace unit 15970 can be rotated against the fabric to press the fabric against the abutment. In at least one such embodiment, the disposable loading module 15900 may further comprise a tissue thickness compensator 15920, which may be configured to contact the tissue.

As discussed above and as shown in FIG. 332, a brace unit, such as, for example, a brace unit 10000, may comprise a support portion 10010 and a tissue thickness compensator 10020, wherein a plurality of brackets 10030 can be stored at least partially in the support portion 10010 and can extend into a tissue thickness compensator 10020 when the brackets 10030 are in their inactive positions. In various embodiments, the ends of the brackets 10030 do not protrude from the thickness compensator of the fabric 10020 when the brackets 10030 are in their inactive positions. When the brackets 10030 are moved from their inactive positions to their actuated positions by the brace ejectors 10040, as discussed above, the ends of the brackets 10030 can pierce the tissue thickness compensator 10020 and / or pierce the top layer or sheath 10022. In some alternative embodiments, the ends of the brackets 10030 may extend through the upper surface of the tissue thickness compensator 10020 and / or sheath 10022 when the brackets 10030 are in their inactive positions. In any case, the brackets 10030, extending upward from the support part 10010 before installation, can tilt and / or deviate relative to the support part, as also discussed above. In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 329, a bracket block, such as, for example, bracket 13000, may comprise a plurality of guide elements, or stops, which may be configured to restrict the relative movement of the support portion 13010 of the bracket block 13000 and the ends of the brackets located therein. As shown mainly in FIG. 330, the brace unit 13000 may comprise a fabric thickness compensator 13020 mounted on the support portion 13010, and furthermore, a plurality of gaskets 13022 mounted on the upper surface 13021 of the fabric thickness compensator 13020. In various embodiments, each gasket 13022 may comprise a plurality of holes 13029, which can be adapted to slide and / or guide the legs 13022 of the brackets 13030. In addition to or instead of such holes, the gasket may contain any suitable e hole, such as, e.g., a groove, a guide and / or groove which can be configured to receive slidingly and / or guide legs 13022. In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 330, the ends of the brace legs 13032 may be located inside the holes 13029 when the brackets 13030 are in their inactive positions. In at least one such embodiment, the ends of the brace legs 13032 may protrude above the shims 13022 when the brackets are in their inactive positions. In some other embodiments, the ends of the brace legs 13032 may be located directly below the shims 13022 when the brackets 13030 are in their inactive positions, so that when the brackets 13030 move upward through the fabric thickness compensator 13020, the brace legs 13032 can enter the holes 13029 of the shims 13029 and slide through them. In any case, when the legs 13032 of the bracket 13030 are inside the spacers, the lateral and / or longitudinal movement of the legs of the bracket 13032 can be limited without blocking the vertical movement of the legs of the bracket 13032 when the brackets 13030 are brought into operation. When placing the brackets 13030, as shown in FIG. 331, the brace legs 13032 can slide upward through the spacers 13022 and pierce the fabric T, make contact with a stop located opposite the bracket unit 13030, and deform downwardly with the fabric T and tissue thickness compensator 13030.

In various embodiments, in addition to the foregoing, pads 13022 may be secured to a tissue thickness compensator 13020 using, for example, at least one biocompatible and / or bioabsorbable adhesive. In some embodiments, the liners 13022 and / or the retaining element passing through each liner can be at least partially placed in a tissue thickness compensator 13020. In at least one such embodiment, the tissue thickness compensator 13020 may comprise recesses formed therein that configured to at least partially receive the spacers 13022. In some embodiments, the thickness compensator for the fabric 13020 may be integral with, or formed around, the spacers 13022 in molding process during manufacturing. In various embodiments, gaskets 13022 may include separate stops that can move independently of one another. In at least one embodiment, as shown mainly in FIG. 330, each gasket 13022 may comprise interlocking and / or shaped elements that may be configured to allow and to some extent limit the relative lateral and longitudinal movement of the gaskets 13022. In at least one such embodiment, each gasket 13022 may comprise, for example, the protrusion 13026 and one or more recesses 13027, and the protrusion 13026 of the first gasket 13022 can be placed inside and / or aligned with the recesses 13027 adjacent to it of the second and third gaskets 13022. In various ways ah embodiment, between adjacent gaskets 13022 may be gaps which can allow 13022 gaskets move or slide relative to one another prior to contact with the adjacent gasket 13022. In some embodiments, gaskets 13022 can be freely connected to each other. In various embodiments, gaskets 13022 may be detachably connected to each other. In at least one such embodiment, the gaskets 13022 can be made in the form of a sheet of gaskets connected to each other, and when sufficient force is applied to such a sheet, one or more gaskets 13022 can separate from the rest. In some embodiments, implementation, as also shown in FIG. 329, the first sheet 13024 of gaskets 13022 can be placed on the first side of the longitudinal groove 13025 and the second sheet 13024 of gaskets 13022 can be placed on the second side of the groove 13025. In at least one embodiment, passing through the fabric thickness compensator 13020 the longitudinal groove 13025 can be configured to facilitate the passage of the cutting edge of the trigger element through the thickness compensator fabric 13020, and when the trigger element passes, the trigger element can apply a compressive force to the sheets 13024 and to separate or separate at least some gaskets 13022.

In various embodiments, the pads 13022 may be formed, for example, from biocompatible and / or bioabsorbable plastic. In some embodiments, gaskets 13022 may be formed, for example, from a solid material, a semi-solid material, and / or a flexible material. In some embodiments, the pads 13022 may be placed in a tissue thickness compensator such that the pads 13022 move with the tissue thickness compensator. In at least one such embodiment, the pads 13022 may be flexible enough to bend along with the top surface of the tissue thickness compensator. In some embodiments, the pads 13022 may be configured to remain in the tissue thickness compensator, while in some other embodiments, the pads 13022 may be configured to exit or separate from the tissue thickness compensator. In various embodiments, the pads 13022 may comprise an upper surface that is flush with the upper surface of the tissue thickness compensator. In some embodiments, the upper surfaces of the liners 13022 may be located above and / or below the upper surface of the tissue thickness compensator. In various embodiments, the upper surfaces of the pads 13022 can be positioned so that they are visible when looking at the upper surface of the fabric thickness compensator, while in other embodiments, the upper surfaces of the pads 13022 can be located, for example, below the layer of the fabric thickness compensator. In some embodiments, for example, guide elements may be formed on the upper surface of the tissue thickness compensator. In at least one such embodiment, the tissue thickness compensator may not contain a composite material and may, for example, be made from a single piece of material.

In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 338, the bracket unit may comprise, for example, a tissue thickness compensator 13620 and a sheath or topcoat 13621. In at least one such embodiment, for example, one or more shims or stops 13622 may be housed in the sheath 13621. B in some embodiments, each stop 13622 may comprise one or more openings 13629 made therein, which may be configured to receive the legs 13032 of the bracket 13030 when the brackets 13030 are in their inactive positions, as shown in FIG. 338. In use, in addition to the above, the brace legs 10032 can slide through the holes 13629 when the brackets 13030 move from their idle position to their activated position until the bases 13031 of the brackets 13030 are in contact with the fabric thickness compensator 13620 and, for example, will not press at least a portion of the tissue thickness compensator 13620 against the lower surfaces of the gaskets 13622. In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 333, the bracket unit may comprise, for example, a tissue thickness compensator 13120 and a sheath or topsheet 13122. In at least one such embodiment, the tissue thickness compensator 13120 may comprise, for example, conical legs, outgrowths and / or protrusions 13128, which may extend upward from the upper surface 13121 of the fabric thickness compensator 13120. The protrusions 13128 may be configured to receive and embrace the ends of the legs 13032 of the bracket 13030 when the brackets 13030 are in their inactive positions, as shown in FIG. 333. The top layer 13122 may also contain conical legs, outgrowths and / or protrusions 13129 that can be aligned, or at least substantially aligned, with protrusions 13128. When using the leg 10032, the brackets can pierce the protrusions 13128 and 13129 and exit the compensator fabric thicknesses 13120. In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 337, the bracket unit may comprise, for example, a tissue thickness compensator 13520 and a sheath, or topcoat, 13522. In at least one such embodiment, the sheath 13522 may comprise, for example, conical legs, outgrowths and / or protrusions 13529, which may extend upward from the upper surface 13521 of the fabric thickness compensator 13520. Similarly to the above, the protrusions 13529 can be configured to receive and embrace the ends of the legs 13032 of the bracket 13030 when the brackets 13030 are in their inactive positions, as shown in FIG. 337. When using legs 10032, the brackets can pierce the protrusions 13529 and exit the shell 13522.

In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 334, the bracket unit may comprise, for example, a tissue thickness compensator 13220 and a sheath or topsheet 13222. In at least one such embodiment, the tissue thickness compensator 13220 may comprise, for example, conical dimples and / or recesses 13128 that can extend down into the upper surface 13221 of the fabric thickness compensator 13220. In various embodiments, the ends of the brace legs 13032 can extend through recesses 13128 when the braces 13030 are in their inactive positions, as shown in FIG. 334. In at least one embodiment, topcoat 13222 may also comprise conical dimples and / or recesses 13229 that can be aligned or at least substantially aligned with recesses 13228. In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 335, the bracket unit may comprise, for example, a tissue thickness compensator 13320 and a shell or topsheet, 13322. In at least one such embodiment, the shell 13320 may comprise thickened portions 13329 that can extend downward into the upper surface 13321 of the tissue thickness compensator 13320 In various circumstances, the thickened portions 13329 may be configured to receive at least a portion of the legs 13032 of the bracket 13030 when the brackets 13030 are in their inactive positions, as shown in FIG. 335. In such embodiments, the thickened portions 13329 can hold the staple legs 13032 in such a way that the legs 13032 are aligned or at least substantially aligned with the recesses to form the stop brackets located opposite the fabric thickness compensator 13320. In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 336, the bracket unit may comprise, for example, a tissue thickness compensator 13420 and a shell or topsheet, 13422. In at least one such embodiment, the shell 13422 may comprise thickened portions 13429 that may extend upward from the top surface 13421 of the tissue thickness compensator 13420 In various circumstances, the thickened portions 13429 may be configured to receive at least a portion of the legs 13032 of the bracket 13030 when the brackets 13030 are in their inactive positions, as shown in FIG. 336. In such embodiments, the thickened portions 13429 can hold the staple legs 13032 in position so that the legs 13032 are aligned or at least substantially aligned with recesses to form the stop brackets opposite the fabric thickness compensator 13420.

In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 339 and 340, the bracket block may comprise, for example, a tissue thickness compensator 13720 and a sheath or topcoat 13721. In at least one such embodiment, the tissue thickness compensator 13720 may comprise, for example, pyramidal and / or step legs, outgrowths, and / or protrusions 13728, which may extend upward from the upper surface 13721 of the tissue thickness compensator 13720. The protrusions 13728 may be configured to receive and embrace the tips of the legs 13032 of the bracket 13030 when the brackets 13030 are in their inactive positions, as shown and FIG. 340. Similarly, the top layer 13721 may comprise pyramidal and / or step legs, outgrowths and / or protrusions 13729 that can be aligned, or at least substantially aligned, with protrusions 13728. In various embodiments, the casing 13721 may further comprise one or more teeth 13727 extending upward from protrusions 13729, which may be adapted to mesh with a fabric adjacent to the upper layer 13721 and block, or at least limit, the relative lateral and / or longitudinal movement of the fabric, the top layer 13721 and / or the ends of the legs of the brackets 13032. When using the legs 13032, the brackets can pierce the protrusions 13728 and 13729 and exit the tissue thickness compensator 13720 when the brackets 13030 move from their inoperative positions to their activated positions. In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 341 and 342, the bracket block may comprise, for example, a tissue thickness compensator 13820 and a sheath or topcoat 13821. In at least one such embodiment, the tissue thickness compensator 13820 may comprise, for example, pyramidal and / or step legs, outgrowths and / or protrusions 13828, which may extend upward from the upper surface 13821 of the fabric thickness compensator 13820. The protrusions 13828 may be configured to receive and embrace the tips of the legs 13032 of the bracket 13030 when the brackets 13030 are in their inactive positions, as shown and FIG. 342. Similarly, top layer 13821 may comprise pyramidal and / or step legs, outgrowths and / or protrusions 13829 that can be aligned, or at least substantially aligned, with protrusions 13828. In various embodiments, top layer 13821 may further contain one or more teeth 13827 extending downward into the tissue thickness compensator 13820, which may be configured to prevent or at least limit relative lateral and / or longitudinal movement of, for example, top layer 13821 and tissue thickness compensator 13820. When using legs 10032, the brackets can pierce the protrusions 13828 and 13829 and exit the tissue thickness compensator 13820 when the brackets 13030 move from their inoperative positions to their activated positions.

In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 343, the bracket unit may comprise a tissue thickness compensator, such as, for example, a tissue thickness compensator 13920, which may include ribs 13923 and grooves 13924 formed on it, wherein in at least one embodiment, grooves 13924 can be made between the ribs 13923 In various embodiments, each rib 13923 may have the same height, substantially the same height, or different heights. Similarly, each groove 13924 may have the same depth, substantially the same depth, or different depths. In various embodiments, the plurality of brackets 13030 may be at least partially placed within the thickness compensator of the fabric 13920 so that the ends of the brackets 13030 can be placed inside the ribs 13923. In at least one such embodiment, the legs 13032 of the bracket 13030 may, for example, not protrude from a tissue thickness compensator 13920 and / or a sheath or topcoat 13921 fixed to a tissue thickness compensator 13920 when the brackets 13030 are in their inactive positions. In various embodiments, ribs 13923 and / or grooves 13924 may extend laterally through the bracket unit. In at least one such embodiment, the bracket unit may comprise a longitudinal groove for the cutting element, wherein the ribs 13923 and grooves 13924 may extend in a direction transverse and / or perpendicular to the groove for the cutting element. In various circumstances, the ribs 13923 can be configured to hold the ends of the legs 13032 of the bracket in position until the brackets 13030 are moved from their idle position to its activated position. In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 344, the tissue thickness compensator and / or the sheath covering the tissue thickness compensator may include longitudinal ribs and / or grooves. In at least one such embodiment, the tissue thickness compensator may comprise an upper surface defined by ribs 14023 and grooves 14024, wherein grooves 14024 may, for example, be formed between ribs 14023. In various embodiments, the tissue thickness compensator may comprise a sheath 14021, which may include a plurality of holes 14029 made therein, each of which can be configured to receive a bracket leg 13032. In some embodiments, holes 14029 can be made in the ribs 14023, and the ends of the legs of the brackets 13032 can be located below the vertices 14028 of the ribs 14029, located on the same level with the vertices 14028 and / or located above the vertices 14028. In some embodiments, in addition to or instead of the above, holes 14029 can be made, for example, in grooves 14024. In some embodiments, each hole may be surrounded, or at least partially surrounded, for example, by a bulge that can strengthen the sheath and / or tissue thickness compensator around the holes. In any case, in addition to the foregoing, the sheath 14021 may be secured to the tissue thickness compensator in any suitable manner, including, for example, using at least one adhesive.

As described above and as also shown in FIG. 233, the surgical stapler may include a stop, such as, for example, a stop 10060, which can be moved between the open position and the closed position, for example, to compress tissue T against the tissue thickness compensator 10020 of the brace unit 10000. In various circumstances, the stop 10060 can rotate to the bracket block 10000 until its downward movement is stopped by some part of the bracket block 10000 and / or some part of the groove in which the bracket block 10000 is located. In at least one such circumstance p 10060 may turn downward until the nose portion 10003 of the bracket unit 10000 and / or the fabric T located between the nose portion 10003 and the bracket unit 10000 begins to obstruct its movement. In some circumstances, the stop 10060 may compress the tissue thickness compensator 10020 sufficiently enough to provide the contact of the fabric T with the ends of the brackets 10030. In certain circumstances, depending on the thickness of the fabric T, the stop 10060 can compress the fabric thickness compensator 10020 sufficiently enough to ensure that the stop 10060 contacts the brackets 10030 by that time when the stop 10060 reaches its fully closed position. In other words, in such circumstances, the emphasis 10060 can deform the brackets 10030 before the trigger 10052 is advanced into the bracket block 10000 to bring the brackets 10030 into position. Such circumstances may be acceptable in some embodiments; however, as shown in FIG. 358 and 359, other embodiments are provided in which a distal clearance element, such as, for example, element 10059, is used to limit the distance at which the stop 10060 can be closed before the trigger rod 10052 is advanced into the bracket block 10000. In various embodiments, element 10059 may extend upward from upper surface 10021 of tissue thickness compensator 10020 so that downward movement of stop 10060 can be blocked by pressing fabric T against element 1 0059 and creating a resistance effort between them. In use, as described above, the trigger 10052 can move distally into the bracket block 10000 to the distal end 10002 of the bracket block 10000 to push the brackets 10030 out of the support portion 10010. At the same time, the trigger element 10052 can engage with the stop 10060 and place the stop 10060 on the required distance from the surface of the panel 10011 (FIG. 218) of the supporting part 10010 above the formed brackets 10030. Thus, the trigger element 10052 can control the distance, or gap, between the contact surface of the contact 10060 with the fabric and the surface panel 10011 in a particular place, and this particular place can move distally while distally moving the trigger element 10052. In various circumstances, the size of this gap may be less than the gap between the stop 10060 and the surface of the panel 10011 and is controlled or set by the distal gap-setting element 10059 on the distal the end of the tissue thickness compensator 10020. In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 359, the edge 10053 of the cutting element of the trigger element 10052 can be configured to dissect the distal gap-setting element 10059 when the trigger element 10052 reaches the distal end of the tissue thickness compensator 10020, so that after cutting the element 10059, the trigger element 10052 can extend the stop 10060 down to the support part 10010 and reduce the clearance to the desired height when actuating the brackets 10030 at the distal end of the bracket unit 10000. In some alternative embodiments, the distal setting Op element may be configured to crease when approaching said actuator toward the distal end of the bracket unit. In at least one such embodiment, the distal gap setting element may comprise a column that can provide resistance to abutment, as described above, and then crumple sharply when the creasing strength of the gap setting element is reached when the trigger element approaches the distal end of the bracket unit. In at least one embodiment, the crushing strength may be, for example, approximately 44.5 Newton (10 fs). In some embodiments, the gap-setting element may be configured to fall downward on the panel of the support portion, for example, when a force is applied to the gap-setting element in excess of a predetermined value. In some other embodiments, the distal clearance can be controlled using the bow of the brace unit. In at least one such embodiment, the movement of the stop 10060 downward may be limited by the nose until the trigger element reaches the distal end of the block, at which point a compressive force applied to the nose may cause the nose to wrinkle. In some embodiments, the nose can comprise a cavity formed by the walls of the cavity, which can allow the cavity to crumple when a compressive force is applied to it that exceeds a predetermined value. In at least one such embodiment, the cavity may be formed by crushable walls.

In various embodiments, as described above, an abutment, such as, for example, an abutment 10060, can be moved between the open position and the closed position to compress the tissue thickness compensator between the abutment and the support portion of the brace unit. In certain circumstances, as shown in FIG. 360 and 361, the fabric thickness compensator of the bracket unit, such as, for example, the fabric thickness compensator 14120 of the bracket unit 14100, can expand laterally and / or longitudinally when the fabric thickness compensator 14120 is pressed against the supporting portion 14110 of the bracket unit 14100. In some embodiments, the ends and / or sides of the tissue thickness compensator 14120 may not be limited by the support portion 14110 and / or the stop 10060, and as a result, the tissue thickness compensator 14120 can expand in these directions without creating compressive pressure pressure, or at least undesirable compressive pressure, within the tissue thickness compensator 14120. In such embodiments, a trigger element, such as trigger element 10052 (FIG. 236), for example, extending through tissue thickness compensator 14120, may not experience excessive resistance to side of the undesirable compressive pressure inside the tissue thickness compensator 14120. In some other embodiments, as also shown in FIG. 360, the distal end 14125 of the tissue thickness compensator 14120 may be limited, for example, by the nose 14103 of the bracket unit 14100. In this particular embodiment, similarly to the above, the distal end 14125 of the tissue thickness compensator 14120 may be bounded by the nose 14103 to reduce the likelihood of premature separation of the compensator the thickness of the fabric 14120 from the supporting part 14110. In any case, as a result of the above, significant internal pressure can be created inside the distal end 14125, which can prevent encourage the trigger 10052 to advance, especially when the trigger 10052 reaches the distal end 14125. More specifically, in certain circumstances, the trigger 10052 can distally push, lift and / or move the tissue thickness compensator 14120 when it crosses the tissue thickness compensator 14120, and as a result inside the distal end 14125 of the tissue thickness compensator 14120 can be created even greater internal pressure. In order to at least partially quench this pressure inside the tissue thickness compensator 14120, the nose 14103 can be formed from a flexible material that can allow the nose 14103, for example, to distally bend and create additional space for the tissue thickness compensator 14120. In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 362 and 363, the nose of the bracket unit may comprise a part that can glide distally. More specifically, the nose portion 14203 of the bracket unit 14200 may include a sliding portion 14204 that can be slidably connected to the nose portion 14203 such that when the stop 10060 is closed and / or the trigger element 10052 moves into the distal end of the bracket block 14200, the sliding portion 14204 can glide distally and create additional space for the tissue thickness compensator 14200 and thereby at least partially weaken the internal pressure created in it. In at least one embodiment, one of the nose 14203 and the sliding part 14204 may contain one or more rail guides, and the other of the nose part 14203 and the sliding part 14204 may contain one or more gutters configured to slide into the rails . In at least one such embodiment, the grooves and rail guides may be configured to jointly limit the movement of the sliding portion 14204, for example, to a longitudinal distal path.

 SEQ PTO \ # "[000 #]" \ * MERGEFORMAT In various circumstances, in addition to the above, some brackets, such as, for example, the most distal brackets in the brace block, can capture most of the tissue thickness compensator compared to the proximal brackets in bracket block. As a result, in such circumstances, a greater compressive force will be applied to the tissue trapped in the distal brackets than the tissue in the proximal brackets. Such circumstances may occur when at least a portion of the tissue thickness compensator is moved toward and / or assembled at the distal end of the bracket unit when used as described above, even though the tissue thickness compensator can be formed from a substantially uniform material having essentially constant thickness. In various circumstances, it may be preferable that some brackets apply a greater compressive force to the fabric than the rest of the brackets, and in various embodiments, the design of the support portion and / or the tissue thickness compensator can be selected so as to control which brackets can be applied to the fabric more compressive force and which brackets can apply less compressive force to the fabric. As shown in FIG. 364, the brace unit 14300 may comprise a support portion 14310 and, in addition, a tissue thickness compensator 14320 located on the surface of the panel 14311 of the support portion 14310. Compared to the embodiments disclosed herein that comprise a support portion 14310 having a flat or the at least substantially flat surface of the panel, the surface of the panel 14311 may be tilted to one side or the other between the distal end 14305 and the proximal end 14306 of the support portion 14310. In at least one embodiment, the surface of the pa the part 14311 of the supporting part 14310 may have a surface height at its distal end 14305 that is less than the surface height at its proximal end 14306. In at least one such embodiment, the brackets 10030 at the distal end of the brace unit 14300 can extend a greater distance above the surface of the panel 14311 than brackets 10030 at the proximal end. In various alternative embodiments, the surface of the panel of the support portion may have a surface height at its distal end that is greater than a surface height at its proximal end. As also shown in FIG. 364, the tissue thickness compensator 14320 may have a thickness varying along its longitudinal length. In various embodiments, the tissue thickness compensator 14320 may, for example, have a thickness at its distal end 14325 greater than the thickness at its proximal end 14326. In at least one such embodiment, the tissue thickness compensator 14322 may comprise a lower surface 14322, which may be tilted to one side or another to match, or at least essentially match, tilted to one side or another of the surface of the panel 14311 of the supporting portion 14310. As a result, the upper or contacting fabric is The thickness 14321 of the fabric thickness compensator 14320 may comprise a flat, or at least substantially flat, surface on which fabric T can be placed. In any case, since the fabric thickness compensator 14320 is thicker at its distal end 14325, the distal brackets 10030 can capture a large a portion of the tissue thickness compensator 14320 compared with the proximal brackets 10030, and as a result, the distal brackets 10030 can exert a greater compressive force on the tissue T, especially with a constant, or at least substantially constant, gap I am waiting for the emphasis 10060 and the surface of the panel 14311 at the proximal and distal ends of the bracket block. In certain circumstances, however, the stop 10060 may not reach the fully closed position, and as a result, the gap between the stop 10060 and the surface of the panel 14311 may be larger at the distal end of the bracket block 14300 than at the proximal end. Under various circumstances, the distal brackets 10030 may not be fully formed and, as a result, the distal brackets 10030 may not apply the necessary compressive pressure to the tissue T. In embodiments where the tissue thickness compensator is thicker at the distal end of the brace unit, the tissue thickness compensator may compensate conditions created as a result of non-deformation of the brackets and apply sufficient pressure to the tissue T.

In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 365, a brace unit, such as, for example, brace unit 14400, may comprise a support portion 14410 and, in addition, a tissue thickness compensator 14420 located on the surface of the panel 14411 of the support portion 14410. Similarly to the above, the surface of the panel 14411 can be tilted to either / or the other side such that in at least one embodiment, the distal end 14405 of the support portion 14410 may, for example, have a panel surface height that is less than the panel surface height at the proximal end 14406. In some embodiments, the thickness compensator fabric 14420 may have a constant, or at least substantially constant, thickness along its length, and as a result, the upper, or in contact with the fabric, surface 14421 of the fabric thickness compensator 14420 may be parallel, or at least substantially parallel, the contour of the surface of the panel 14411. In various embodiments, the brackets 10030 of the brace unit 14400 can be fully placed in the tissue thickness compensator 14420 and the support portion 14410 when the brackets 10030 are in their inactive position. In some embodiments, the brackets 10030 located at the proximal end of the brace unit 14400 can be fully placed in the tissue thickness compensator 14420 and the support portion 14410 when the brackets 10030 are in their idle position, while due to the downward inclination of the surface of the panel 14411 and the upper of surface 14421, the ends of some brackets 10030, including brackets 10030 located at the distal end of brace unit 14400, may protrude from the upper surface 14421 of tissue thickness compensator 14420 when brackets 10030 are in their erabochem position.

In various embodiments, as described above, the tissue thickness compensator may be formed of one material, the entire tissue thickness compensator may have the same, or at least substantially the same, material properties, such as, for example, density, stiffness, coefficient of elasticity strength and / or elasticity at each of its points. In various other embodiments, as shown in FIG. 368, a fabric thickness compensator, such as, for example, fabric thickness compensator 14520, may comprise a plurality of materials or layers of materials. In at least one embodiment, the fabric thickness compensator 14520 may comprise a first or central layer 14520a, second or intermediate layers 14520b fixed to the first layer 14520a on both sides thereof, and a third or outer layer 14520c fixed to each of the second layers 14520b. In some embodiments, the intermediate layers 14520b may be secured to the center layer 14520a using at least one adhesive, and similarly, the outer layers 14520c may be secured to the second layers 14520 using at least one adhesive. In addition to or instead of adhesive, layers 14520a-14520c can be bonded together, for example, by one or more pairs of interlocking elements and / or fasteners. In any case, the inner layer 14520a can be formed, for example, from a first material having a first set of material properties, the intermediate layers 14520b can be formed from a second material having a second set of material properties, and the outer layers 14520c can be formed from a third material having third set of material properties. Such sets of material properties may include, for example, density, stiffness, coefficient of elasticity, strength and / or elasticity. In some embodiments, the bracket unit may comprise, for example, six rows of brackets 10030, the row of brackets 10030 may be at least partially located, for example, in each of the outer layers 14520c and in each of the inner layers 14520b, and wherein two rows of brackets 10030 may be at least partially located in the inner layer 14520a. In use, similar to the above, the brackets 10030 can be pushed out of the bracket block so that the legs 10032 of the brackets 10030 pierce the upper surface 14521 of the fabric thickness compensator 14520, pierce the fabric pressed against the upper surface 14521 firmly, and then contact the stop so that the legs 10032 are deformed with the grip of the tissue thickness compensator 14520 and the fabric inside the brackets 10030. Also, similarly to the foregoing, the fabric thickness compensator 14520 can be dissected by the launch element while moving the launch element through the bracket block. In at least one such embodiment, the trigger element can dissect the inner layer 14520a and tissue along a path defined, for example, by axis 14529.

In various embodiments, in addition to the foregoing, the rows of brackets 10030 located within the inner layer 14520a may comprise rows of brackets closest to the edges of the dissected tissue. Accordingly, the rows of brackets 10030 located inside the outer layers 14520c may contain rows of brackets farthest from the edges of the dissected tissue. In some embodiments, the first material constituting the inner layer 14520a may, for example, have a density higher than the density of the second material constituting the intermediate layers 14520b, and, likewise, the density of the second material may exceed the density of the third material constituting the outer layers 14520c. As a result, in various circumstances, the brackets 10030 located inside the inner layer 14520a can create a greater compressive force than the brackets 10030 located inside the intermediate layers 14520b and the outer layers 14520c. Similarly, the brackets 10030 located inside the intermediate layers 14520b can, for example, create a greater compressive force than the brackets 10030 located inside the outer layers 14520c. In various alternative embodiments, the first material constituting the inner layer 14520a may, for example, have a density that is lower than the density of the second material constituting the intermediate layers 14520b, and, similarly, the density of the second material may be less than the density of the third material constituting the outer layers 14520c . As a result, in various circumstances, the brackets 10030 located inside the outer layers 14520c can create a greater compressive force than the brackets 10030 located inside the intermediate layers 14520b and the inner layer 14520a. Similarly, brackets 10030 located inside the intermediate layers 14520b can, for example, create a greater compressive force than brackets 10030 located inside the inner layer 14520a. In various other embodiments, any other suitable combination of layers, materials, and / or material properties may be used. In any case, in various embodiments, the tissue thickness compensator layers 14520a-14520c of the fabric thickness 14520 may be configured to remain bonded to each other after implantation. In some other embodiments, tissue thickness compensator layers 14520a-14520c 14520 may be configured to separate from each other after implantation. In at least one such embodiment, the layers 14520a-14520c can be glued together using one or more bioabsorbable adhesives that can initially hold the layers together and then allow the layers to separate from each other over time.

As described above, the tissue thickness compensator of the bracket unit, such as, for example, fabric thickness compensator 14520, may comprise a plurality of longitudinal layers. In various other embodiments, as shown in FIG. 369, the bracket unit may comprise a tissue thickness compensator, such as, for example, a tissue thickness compensator 14620, which may comprise a plurality of horizontal layers. In at least one such embodiment, the tissue thickness compensator 14620 may comprise a first or lower layer 14620a, a second or intermediate layer 14620b fixed to the lower layer 14620a, and a third or upper layer 14620c fixed to the intermediate layer 14620b . In various embodiments, the first layer 14620a may comprise, for example, a flat, or substantially flat, lower surface 14626a and a triangular, or pyramidal, upper surface 14625a. In at least one such embodiment, the second layer 14620b may comprise a triangular, or pyramidal, lower surface 14626b, which may be configured to extend in parallel and abut against the upper surface 14625a of the first layer 14620a. Similarly to the foregoing, the second layer 14620b may comprise, for example, a triangular, or pyramidal, upper surface 14625b, which may extend parallel to and abut against the lower triangular, or pyramidal, surface 14626c of the third layer 14620c. In various embodiments, the upper surface of the third layer 14626c may comprise a flat, or at least substantially flat, fabric contacting surface 14621. Also, similarly to the foregoing, the tissue thickness compensator 14620 may be configured to at least partially accommodate six rows. brackets, such as, for example, brackets 10030, and the trigger element can cut through the fabric thickness compensator 14620 between the two innermost rows of brackets along a path running, for example, along axis 14629. Similar as described above, each layer 14620a, 14620b and 14620c can be made of different materials, which can have different material properties, and as a result of the triangular or pyramidal configuration of the layers 14620a-14620c, the fabric thickness compensator 14620 as a whole can have different properties at different points . For example, the outermost rows of brackets 10030 can absorb more than the third layer 14620c than the first layer 14620a, while the innermost rows of brackets 10030 can absorb less than the third layer 14620c than the first layer 14620a, and as a result, the fabric thickness compensator 14620 can for example, compressing the fabric gripped by the outermost brackets 10030, not like the tissue gripped by the innermost brackets 10030, even though the tissue thickness compensator 14620 may have the same, or at least substantially one and the same common in all t glasses thickness.

In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 286, the fabric thickness compensator of the bracket unit, such as, for example, the fabric thickness compensator 14720 of the bracket unit 14700, may contain, for example, voids, recesses, troughs and / or grooves made therein, which can change the thickness of the fabric thickness compensator 14720. At least in one such embodiment, the tissue thickness compensator 14720 can be placed close to the surface of the panel 14711 of the support portion 14710 of the bracket unit 14700 so that voids 14723 formed in the lower surface 14722 of the tissue thickness compensator 14720 can ut be opposite cavities 10012 defined brackets, but not others. In various embodiments, the voids 14723 may extend, for example, transversely to the groove 14715 of the cutting element of the support portion 14710, perpendicularly to the groove 14715 of the cutting element and / or parallel to the groove 14715 of the cutting element. In some embodiments, the voids 14723 may define a pattern of protrusions on the bottom surface 14722 of the tissue thickness compensator 14720. In any case, when placing brackets, such as, for example, brackets 10030, from the support portion 14710, as shown in FIG. 287 and 288, some brackets 10030 can grip the tissue thickness compensator 14720 inside the region containing the void 14723, while other brackets 10030 can grip the tissue thickness compensator 14720 inside the region located between the voids 14723. In addition to or instead of the above, the tissue thickness compensator 14720 may contain, for example, voids, recesses, grooves and / or grooves made in the upper or in contact with the fabric surface 14721. In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 366 and 367, the brace unit 14800, for example, may comprise a fabric thickness compensator 14820, which may include a plurality of pads 14823 extending in at least one of the upward directions from the upper surface 14821 of the fabric thickness compensator 14820, inward to the central groove 14825 and / or distal to the distal end of the bracket block 14800. In at least one such embodiment, the pads 14823 may be divided by grooves, grooves and / or grooves, such as, for example, the grooves 14824. As a result of the above, in various circumstances tvah total thickness compensator tissue thickness may vary between the rows of staples and / or vary between staples in one row of staples. In some circumstances, the protrusions, or thickened parts, can be made and arranged in such a way that they can move in the desired direction, for example, inward, while compressing the tissue thickness compensator.

In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 303, a brace unit, such as, for example, brace unit 14900, may comprise a support portion 14910 and, in addition, a tissue thickness compensator 14920 located adjacent to the support portion 14910. Similarly to the foregoing, the support portion 14910 may include brace ejectors that may lift upward, the brackets slide into the working position to raise the brackets, such as, for example, brackets 10030, at least partially located inside the support part 14910, to the stop, such as, for example, the stop 10060, located opposite the bracket block 14900 In some embodiments, the implementation of the support part 14910 may contain six rows of cavities of brackets, such as, for example, two outer rows of cavities of brackets, two inner rows of cavities of brackets and two intermediate rows of cavities of brackets located between the inner rows and outer rows, and the stop 10060 may contain six rows of forming recesses 10062, aligned, or at least essentially aligned, with cavities of brackets. In various embodiments, the inner rows of parenthesis cavities may include brackets ejectors 14940a located therein, the intermediate rows of parenthesis cavities may include brackets ejectors 14940b located therein and the outer rows of parenthesis cavities may include brackets ejector 14940c located therein, each of the brackets pushers 14940a may include a socket 14949a configured to support the brackets 10030, each of the brackets pushers 14940b may include a socket 14949b, with the possibility of supporting brackets 10030, and each of the ejectors of brackets 14940c may include a socket 14949c configured to support brackets 10030. In its inoperative positions, i.e. when the brackets pushers 14940a-14940c are located on the pusher supports 14926 that extend under the support portion 14910, the brackets pushers 14949a sockets 14949a can be positioned closer to the stop 10060 than the brackets pushers 14940b sockets and the brackets pushers sockets 14949b. In this position, the first forming distance between the sockets 14949a and the forming recesses 10062 located above the sockets 14949a can be determined, the second forming distance between the sockets 14949b and the forming recesses 10062 located above the sockets 14949b can be determined, and the third forming distance between the sockets 14949c and forming recesses 10062 located above the sockets 14949c, and in various embodiments, for example, the first forming distance may be less than the second forming its distance, and the second forming distance may be less than the third forming distance. When the brace ejectors 14940a-14940c move from their idle position (FIG. 303) to their actuated position, each brace ejector can move upward by an equal, or at least substantially equal, distance to the stop 10060 by the action of the brackets the slide so that the first ejectors 14940a push the corresponding brackets 10030 to the first height in the formed state, the second ejectors 14940b push the corresponding brackets 10030 to the second height in the formed state and rubs and pushers 14940c will push their corresponding brackets 10030 to a third height in the formed state, for example, the first height in the formed state may be less than the second height in the formed state, and the second height in the formed state may be less than the third height in the formed condition. Various other embodiments are also contemplated in which the first ejector brackets 14940a are displaced upward by a first distance, the second ejector brackets 14940b are displaced upward by a second distance and the third ejector brackets 14940c are displaced upward by a third distance, one or more of the first distance, the second distance and third distances may be different.

In various embodiments, as also shown in FIG. 303, the surface of the panel 14911 of the support portion 14910 may have a variable height relative to the fabric contacting surface 10061 of the abutment 10060. In some embodiments, such a change in height may occur in the transverse direction, and in at least one embodiment, for example, the height of the surface of the panel 14911, surrounding the inner rows of cavities of brackets may be greater than the height of the surface of the panel 14911 surrounding the outer rows of cavities of brackets. In various embodiments, the bottom surface 14922 of the tissue thickness compensator 14920 may be parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to the surface of the panel 14911 of the support portion 14910. In addition to the above, the thickness compensator of the fabric 14920 may also have a variable thickness, with at least in one embodiment, the upper, or tissue-contacting, surface 14921 of the tissue thickness compensator 14920 may be tilted inward from its outer or lateral edges. In at least one such embodiment, as a result of the foregoing, the tissue thickness compensator 14920, for example, may be thinner in the region located above the inner rows of brace cavities and thicker in the region located above the outer rows of brace cavities. In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 304, the panel surface of the support portion 15010 may comprise, for example, a stepped surface of the panel, for example, the highest sections of the stepped surface may surround the inner rows of cavity brackets and the lowest sections of the stepped surface may surround the outer rows of cavity brackets. In at least one such embodiment, regions of intermediate height may surround intermediate rows of cavity brackets. In some embodiments, a tissue thickness compensator, such as, for example, a tissue thickness compensator 15020, may include a bottom surface that can extend parallel to and abut against the panel surface of the support portion 15010. In at least one embodiment, the top, or in contact with the fabric, the tissue thickness compensator surface 15021 may comprise, for example, an arched, parabolic and / or curved surface, which in at least one such embodiment may extend from the first side the other side of the tissue thickness compensator 15020 to the second side of the tissue thickness compensator 15020, and its apex, for example, will be aligned, or at least substantially aligned, with the center of the brace unit 15000. In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 299, the bracket block 15300, for example, may include a support portion 15310, a plurality of ejectors 15340 brackets arranged to move in brackets cavities made in the support portion 15310, and a tissue thickness compensator 15320 located above the surface of the panel 15311 of the support portion 15310. Brace block 15300 may further comprise one or more parts of the tray 15326, which may be secured to the support portion 15310 and extend around the lower portion of the support portion 15310 and support the ejectors 15340 and brackets 15330 in their inactive positions. When the slides leading the brackets to the working position are moved through the bracket block, the slides can also be supported by the lower parts of the tray 15326 when the rails 15340 and 15330 lift the brackets upward through the fabric thickness compensator 15320. At least in one embodiment, the fabric thickness compensator 15320 may include the first, or inner, part 15322a located above the inner row of cavities of brackets, the second, or intermediate, part 15322b, located above the intermediate row of cavities of brackets, and the third, or external, part 15322c, disposed above the outer cavity adjacent brackets, wherein, for example, the inner portion 15322a may have a greater thickness than the intermediate portion 15322b, 15322b and the intermediate portion may have a greater thickness than the outer portion 15322c. In at least one embodiment, the tissue thickness compensator 15320 may comprise, for example, longitudinal grooves formed therein, which can create thinner portions 15322b and 15322c of tissue thickness compensator 15320. In various alternative embodiments, longitudinal grooves may be provided on the upper surface and / or in the lower surface of the tissue thickness compensator. In at least one embodiment, the upper surface 15321 of the tissue thickness compensator 15320 may comprise, for example, a flat, or at least substantially flat, surface.

In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 296, the bracket unit may comprise a tissue thickness compensator, such as, for example, a tissue thickness compensator 15120, which may comprise a plurality of parts having different thicknesses. In at least one embodiment, the tissue thickness compensator 15120 may comprise a first or inner part 15122a that may have a first thickness, second or intermediate parts 15122b extending from a first part 15122b, each of which may have a second thickness, and third or outer parts 15122c extending from second parts 15122b, each of which may have a third thickness. In at least one such embodiment, for example, the third thickness may exceed the second thickness, and the second thickness may exceed the first thickness, although any suitable thickness values may be used in various other embodiments. In various embodiments, tissue thickness compensator portions 15122a-15122c 15120 may comprise stepped portions with different thicknesses. In at least one embodiment, similarly to the foregoing, the brace unit may comprise several rows of brackets 10030 and a plurality of brace ejectors having different heights that can deform the brackets 10030 to different heights in the formed state. Also similar to the foregoing, the bracket block may comprise first brackets pushers 15140a that can push the brackets 10030 they support to the first height in the formed state, second brackets ejectors 15140b that can support the brackets they support to the second height in the formed state, and third brace pushers that can push the brackets 10030 they support to a third height in the formed state, for example, the first height in the formed state may be less e second height in the formed state, and the second height in the formed state may be less than a third the height in the formed condition. In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 296, each bracket 10030 may have the same, or substantially the same, height in an unformed, or inoperative, state. In some other embodiments, implementation, as shown in FIG. 296A, first pushers 15140a, second pushers 15140b and / or third pushers 15140c may support brackets of different heights in an unformed state. In at least one such embodiment, the first ejector brackets 15140a can support brackets 15130a having a first height in an unformed state, the second ejector brackets 15140b can support brackets 15130b having a second height in an unformed state, and the third ejector brackets 15140c can support brackets 15130c, having a third height in an unformed state, for example, a first height in an unformed state may be less than a second height in an unformed state, and a second height in an unformed state may be less than a third height in an unformed state. In various embodiments, as also shown in FIG. 296A, the ends of the brackets 15130a, 15130b and / or 15130c may lie, or at least substantially lie, in one plane, while in other embodiments, the ends of the brackets 15130a, 15130b and / or 15130c may not lie in the same plane. In some embodiments, implementation, as shown in FIG. 297, the brace unit may include a tissue thickness compensator 15220 having a plurality of parts with different thicknesses that can be implanted close to the tissue T with brackets 15130a, 15130b and 15130c, as described above. In at least one embodiment, as shown in FIG. 298, the brackets 15130a, 15130b and / or 15130c can be deformed to different heights in the formed state, the first brackets 15130a can be formed to the first height in the formed state, the second brackets 15130b can be formed to the second height in the formed state, and the third brackets 15130c be formed to a third height in the formed state, and wherein, for example, the first height in the formed state may be less than the second height in the formed state, and the second height in the formed state may be m less than a third height in the formed state. Other embodiments are also contemplated in which brackets 15130a, 15130b and 15130c may be formed to any corresponding height values in the formed state and / or any relative height values in the formed state.

In various embodiments, implementation, as described above, the emphasis of the surgical stapler may move between the open position and the closed position. In such circumstances, the abutment surface in contact with the fabric can be moved to its final or forming position when the abutment moves to its closed position. After moving the stop to the closed position, in some embodiments, the tissue-contacting surface can no longer be adjusted. In some other embodiments, implementation, as shown in FIG. 351, a surgical stapler, such as, for example, a surgical stapler 15500, may include an abutment groove 15560 and an adjustable tissue contacting abutment adjustment plate 15561 located within the abutment groove 15560. In such embodiments, the abutment plate 15561 may be raised and / or lowered inside the stop groove 15560 to adjust the position of the fabric contact surface of the stop plate 15561 relative to the bracket block opposite the stop plate 15561. In various embodiments, surgeons esky stapler 15500 may comprise adjusting slide member 15564 which, as shown in FIG. 356 and 357, can slide between the stop groove 15560 and the stop plate 15561 to adjust the distance between the stop plate 15561 and the bracket unit. In some embodiments, implementation, as also shown in FIG. 351 and 352, the surgical stapler 15500 may further comprise an actuator 15562 coupled to the adjusting sliding member 15564, which can be advanced proximally to proximal advance the adjusting sliding element 15564 and / or distally advanced to distally advance the adjusting sliding element 15564. In various embodiments, as also shown in FIG. 356 and 357, the drive 15562 can advance between two or more predefined positions to adjust the stop plate 15561, respectively, between two or more positions. In at least one embodiment, such preset positions may be marked on surgical stapler 15500 as 15563 marks (FIG. 351). In some embodiments, implementation, as shown in FIG. 357, the adjustment sliding member 15564 may comprise a plurality of abutment surfaces, such as, for example, a first abutment surface 15565a, a second abutment surface 15565b, and a third abutment surface 15565c that can be aligned with a plurality of plate-positioning surfaces, such as, for example, a first positioning surface 15569a, a second positioning surface 15569b and a third positioning surface 15569c, respectively, on the back side of the stop plate 15561 to set the stop plate 15561 in the first position. To set the stop plate 15561 in the second position, the drive 15562 and the sliding member 15564 can, for example, be advanced proximally to re-align the bearing surfaces 15565a-15565c of the sliding member 15564 with the positioning surfaces 15569a-15569c of the stop plate 15561. More specifically, as shown in FIG. . 356, the sliding member 15564 can be distally advanced so that the first supporting surface 15565a of the sliding member 15564 can be located behind the second positioning surface 15569b of the stop plate 15561, and so that the second supporting surface 15565b of the sliding member 15564 can be located behind the third positioning the surface 15569c of the stop plate 15561 to move the stop plate 15561 closer to the bracket unit. When the abutment plate 15561 moves from its first position to its second position, in such circumstances, the adjustable abutment plate 15561 can further compress the fabric T located between the abutment plate 15561 and the bracket unit. In addition to the above, the height of the brackets in the formed state can be adjusted by the position of the stop plate 15561 relative to the bracket unit, since the forming recesses made in the stop plate 15561, when adjusting the stop plate 15561 will move closer to and / or further from the bracket block. Although only two positions were discussed above, the sliding member 15564 can advance to a suitable number of positions to move the stop plate 15561 closer to and / or further from the bracket unit. In any case, after a suitable placement of the stop plate 15561, the sled to accommodate the brackets 15550 can be moved distally inside the bracket unit to raise the ejectors of the brackets 15540 and the brackets 15530 to the stop plate 15561 and stitch the fabric T, as shown in FIG. 354. Similar surgical staplers are described in US Patent Application No. 13 / 036,647, entitled “SURGICAL SEWING MACHINE,” filed February 28, 2011, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 353, the brace block may be placed inside the groove 15570 of the brace block 15570 of the surgical stapler 15500, which may comprise a tissue thickness compensator, such as, for example, a tissue thickness compensator 15520. When the stop plate 15561 moves to the bracket block, as described above, the stop plate 15561 can compress the tissue thickness compensator 15520 and / or the fabric T located between the stop plate 15561 and the tissue thickness compensator 15520. As the brackets 15530 are brought into operation, the brackets are turned to FIG. 355, brackets 15530 can compress or penetrate fabric thickness compensator 15520 close to fabric T. In various embodiments, when the stop plate 15561 is opposite the sliding member 15564 and the fabric is not yet placed between the stop plate 15561 and the fabric thickness compensator 15520, a gap is formed between the stop plate 15561 and the upper surface 15521 of the tissue thickness compensator 15520 when the stop plate 15561 is in the first position. When the stop plate 15561 is moved to the second position, the stop plate 15561 can contact the fabric thickness compensator 15520. In various alternative embodiments, when the stop plate 15561 is adjacent to the sliding member 15564 and the fabric is not yet placed between the stop plate 15561 and the fabric thickness compensator 15520, a gap can be created between the stop plate 15561 and the upper surface 15521 of the tissue thickness compensator 15520 when the stop plate 15561 is in the first position and / or second position. In at least one such embodiment, the abutment plate 15561 cannot contact the fabric thickness compensator 15520. In further alternative embodiments, when the abutment plate 15561 is adjacent to the sliding member 15564 and no fabric is placed between the abutment plate 15561 and the fabric thickness compensator 15520 , the stop plate 15561, for example, can contact the upper surface 15521 of the fabric thickness compensator 15520 regardless of whether the stop plate 15561 is in the first position and / or the second position and. Although only two positions of the stop plate 15611 are described herein, the stop plate 15611 may fit, or translate, into any suitable number of positions.

In various embodiments, as a result of the foregoing, the surgical stapler may include means for adjusting the height of the brackets in the formed state, which in various circumstances can compensate for the difference in tissue thickness. In addition, the surgical stapler may include other means to compensate for differences in tissue thickness and / or, for example, variations in tissue thickness. In at least one such embodiment, the abutment plate 15561 may be raised upward or outward from a bracket block opposite it to increase the height of the bracket in the formed or actuated state. Accordingly, the stop plate 15561 can be lowered downward or inward to the bracket unit located opposite it to reduce the height of the brackets in the formed or actuated state. In various embodiments, the adjustment of the stop plate 15561, for example, can adjust, for example, the gap between the forming recesses made in the stop plate 15561 and the height of the bracket ejectors in the actuated state, or more specifically, the height of the bracket ejector seats in the bracket action condition. Even with such possibilities, it is possible to adjust the height of the brackets in the formed state, for example, for working with thicker and / or thinner fabrics, the tissue thickness compensator also allows compensation for working with thicker and / or thinner fabrics and / or compensation for variation in tissue thickness as described above. In such embodiments, the surgeon may have at his disposal several means of compensation in the same surgical stapler.

As described above and shown in several embodiments, in the surgical stapler, a brace unit with a linear arrangement of the cavities of the brackets and brackets can be used, and to place the brackets from the brackets, the trigger element can be moved distally through the brace unit. In some embodiments, the bracket unit may comprise rows of cavity brackets and brackets that are curved. In at least one embodiment, as shown in FIG. 345 and 346, a surgical stapler, such as, for example, a stapler 15600, may comprise one or more circular or annular rows of cavity brackets formed in a circular or annular supporting portion 15610. Such circular rows of brackets may comprise, for example, a circular row of internal cavities 15612 brackets and a circular row of external cavities 15613 brackets. In at least one such embodiment, the circular rows of cavities of the brackets may surround a circular or annular hole 15615 made in a stapler 15600 in which the circular or annular cutting element can be positioned to move. In use, the fabric can be placed close to the surface 15611 of the panel of the supporting part 15610 and a stop (not shown) can be mounted on the surgical stapler 15600 through the drive passing through and / or placed inside the opening 15615 so that when the drive is actuated, the stop can be pressed against the supporting part 15610 and can press the fabric against the surface 15611 of the panel. After sufficiently pressing the fabric, the brackets located in the cavities 15612 and 15613 of the brackets can be pushed out of the supporting part 15610 and can pass through the fabric so that the brackets can come into contact with the stop and be sufficiently deformed to grasp the fabric. As the brackets are actuated and / or after all the brackets are actuated, a circular cutting element can be advanced to dissect the tissue. Then, the abutment can be moved from the support portion 15610 and / or separated from the surgical stapler 15600 so that the abutment and surgical stapler 15600 can be removed from the surgical field. Such surgical staplers 15600 and such surgical methods in various embodiments can be used, for example, to join two parts of the large intestine. In various circumstances, the circular lines of the brackets can be configured to hold together parts of the large intestine for the duration of tissue healing and at the same time allow the retained parts of the large intestine to expand elastically. Similar surgical staplers and surgical methods are disclosed in US Pat. No. 5,285,945 entitled "SURGICAL STAPER FOR APPLICATION OF ANASTOMOSIS", issued February 15, 1994, the contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.

In various embodiments, in addition to the foregoing, the tissue thickness compensator may, for example, be placed and / or secured closely to the support portion 15610 of the surgical stapler 15600. In at least one embodiment, the tissue thickness compensator may be formed from a circular or annular fragment a material having, for example, an inner radius and an outer radius. In some circumstances, the fabric may be positioned close to a given material ring, and if an emphasis is used to move the fabric to the supporting portion 15610, the fabric thickness compensator may be squeezed between the fabric and the surface of the panel 15611. In use, the brackets may be actuated through the thickness compensator fabric and fabric in such a way that the brackets can come into contact with the stop and deform in order to reach their activated position for gripping the parts of the fabric and the fabric thickness compensator . In various circumstances, in addition to the above, the ring of material containing the tissue thickness compensator must be sufficiently elastic to allow the parts of the large intestine surrounding the staple line to expand. In various embodiments, as also shown in FIG. 345 and 346, the flexible tissue thickness compensator 15620 may comprise, for example, a circular or annular flexible inner ring 15624, which in at least one embodiment may form a circular or annular opening 15625. In some embodiments, the inner ring 15624 may be configured in this way so that it is not caught by the brackets installed from the surgical stapler 15600; instead, in at least one embodiment, the inner ring 15624 may be radially placed inside with respect to the inner row of brace cavities 15612. In at least one such embodiment, the tissue thickness compensator 15620 may comprise a plurality of tongues, such as, for example, inner tongues 15622 and outer tongues 15623, extending from it such that the tongues can be at least partially gripped in brackets when they are deformed . More specifically, as shown mainly in FIG. 345, each inner tongue 15622 may comprise a head located above the bracket cavity 15612 made in the surgical stapler 15600, the head being attached to the inner ring 15624, for example, the neck 15626, and, likewise, each outer tongue 15623 may comprise a head, located above the bracket cavity 15613 made in the surgical stapler 15600, the head being attached to the inner ring 15624, for example, by the neck 15627. In various embodiments, the head of the inner tongues 15622 External tongues 15623 may have any suitable shape, such as, for example, round, oval and / or elliptical. The necks 15626 and / or 15627 can also be of any suitable shape, and in at least one embodiment, the necks 15627 connecting the heads of the outer tongues 15623 with the inner ring 15624 can be arranged to extend between adjacent inner cavities 15612 of the brackets in the supporting part 15610 so that the necks 15627 are not trapped inside the brackets placed from the inner cavities 15612 of the brackets.

In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 347 and 348, the flexible tissue thickness compensator 15720 may comprise, for example, a circular or annular flexible outer ring 15724. In some embodiments, the outer ring 15724 may be designed so that it is not caught by brackets mounted from a surgical stapler 15600; instead, in at least one embodiment, the outer ring 15724 may be located radially outward with respect to the outer row of cavities 15613 of the brackets. In at least one such embodiment, the tissue thickness compensator 15720 may comprise a plurality of tongues, such as, for example, internal tongues 15622 and external tongues 15623 extending therefrom such that the tongues can be at least partially gripped in brackets when they are deformed . More specifically, as shown mainly in FIG. 347, each inner tongue 15622 may comprise a head located above the bracket cavity 15612 made in the surgical stapler 15600, the head being attached to the outer ring 15724, for example, the neck 15726, and similarly, each outer tongue 15623 may comprise a head, located above the bracket cavity 15613 made in the surgical stapler 15600, the head being attached to the outer ring 15724, for example, by the neck 15727. In various embodiments, the head of the inner tongues 15622 and external 15623 tabs may have any suitable shape, such as, for example, round, oval and / or elliptical. The necks 15726 and / or 15727 can also be of any suitable shape, and in at least one embodiment, the necks 15726 connecting the heads of the inner tongues 15622 to the outer ring 15724 can be arranged to pass between adjacent outer cavities 15613 of the brackets so that the necks 15726 are not captured in brackets brought into working position from external cavities 15613 of brackets. In some alternative embodiments, the tissue thickness compensator may comprise a circular or annular flexible inner ring, a circular or annular flexible outer ring, and in addition, a plurality of tongues that can be connected to the inner ring and / or outer ring. In at least one embodiment, some tabs may be connected to the inner ring and some other tabs may be connected to the outer ring. In some embodiments, at least some of the tongues may be simultaneously connected to both the inner ring and the outer ring. In any case, in addition to the above, the inner tissue thickness compensator ring 15624 15620, the outer tissue thickness compensator ring 15724 15720 and / or any other suitable tissue thickness compensator can be elastically expandable and / or compressed to expand and / or compression of the tissue to which it was implanted. In addition, although circular or annular support rings are used in the various embodiments described herein, the tissue thickness compensator may comprise a support structure of any suitable shape for connecting tongues to it. In various embodiments, in addition to the foregoing, a circular cutting element promoted by a surgical stapler for dissecting tissue sandwiched between the abutment and the supporting part can also dissect the supporting material. In at least one such embodiment, the cutting element may, for example, separate the inner support ring from the reeds by dissecting their necks.

In various embodiments, in addition to the foregoing, the tissue thickness compensator may comprise detachable and / or relatively movable portions that can be configured to allow the tissue thickness compensator to expand and / or contract to move the tissue to which it was implanted. Turning now to FIGS. 349 and 350, a circular or circular tissue thickness compensator 15820 can be positioned closely and / or supported by a panel surface 15611 of a surgical stapler 15600 that can be held in an unfolded position (FIG. 349) as it is inserted into the fabric and, after implantation, the tissue thickness compensator 15820, the tissue thickness compensator 15820 may be configured to expand outward, as shown in FIG. 350. In various embodiments, the fabric thickness compensator 15820 may comprise a plurality of arcuate portions 15822 that can be joined together, for example, by an inner ring 15824. In at least one embodiment, the arcuate portions 15822 can be separated by seams 15828. At least in at least one other embodiment, the arcuate portions 15822 may be connected to each other, and in at least one such embodiment, the location of the perforations may allow the arcuate portions 15822 to be separated from each other. In any case, in various embodiments, each of the arcuate portions 15822 may contain interlocking elements, such as, for example, protrusions 15826 and recesses 15823, which may jointly limit the relative movement of the arcuate portions 15822 before implantation of the tissue thickness compensator 15820. In addition to the above, each the arcuate portion 15822 may be connected to the inner ring 15824, for example, one or more connectors 15827, which may be removably held to hold the arched parts 15822 in position. After using staples, such as, for example, staples 10030 stored inside the support portion 15610, to implant a tissue thickness compensator 15620 close to the tissue, as shown mainly in FIG. 350, connectors 15827 may separate from inner ring 15824 and allow tissue thickness compensator 15820 to at least partially expand to perform movement within the respective fabric. In various circumstances, all arched parts 15822 can be separated from the inner ring 15824, while in other circumstances only some of the arched parts 15822 can be separated from the inner ring 15824. In some alternative embodiments, the arched parts 15822 can be joined by flexible parts that can allow the arched parts 15822 move relative to each other, but do not separate from each other. In at least one such embodiment, the flexible parts cannot receive brackets and can be configured to stretch and / or contract to perform relative movement of the arched parts 15822. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 349 and 350, the tissue thickness compensator 15820 may comprise, for example, eight arcuate portions 15822. In some other embodiments, the tissue thickness compensator may comprise any suitable number of arcuate portions, such as, for example, two or more arcuate portions.

In addition to the foregoing, tissue thickness compensators 15620, 15720 and / or 15820, for example, can be configured to compensate for a larger and / or smaller tissue thickness trapped between the abutment and the supporting portion 15610 of the surgical device 15600. In various embodiments, the implementation is similar to the above. , the height of the brackets in the formed or actuated state can be adjusted by moving the stop to and / or from the support part 15610. More specifically, the stop can be moved closer to the support part 15610 to reduce the height of the brackets in the formed state, and, accordingly, the emphasis can be moved further from the supporting part 15610 to increase the height of the brackets in the formed state. As a result, in such embodiments, the surgeon can deflect the stop from the supporting part 15610 for working with thick tissue and bring the stop to the supporting part 15610 for working with thin tissue. In various other circumstances, the surgeon may decide not to adjust the stop position and rely on a tissue thickness compensator to work with thinner and / or thicker tissue. As a result, in various embodiments, the surgical apparatus 15600 may comprise at least two means for compensating for different tissue thicknesses and / or variations in tissue thicknesses.

In various embodiments, as described above, a tissue thickness compensator may be secured to the supporting portion of the bracket unit. In some embodiments, the bottom surface of the tissue thickness compensator may comprise one of a layer of hooks or a layer of loops, and the surface of a panel of the support portion may comprise another of a layer of hooks or a layer of loops. In at least one such embodiment, the hooks and loops can be adapted to engage with each other and detachably hold the tissue thickness compensator on the support portion. In various embodiments, each hook may comprise, for example, an enlarged head extending from the neck. In some embodiments, for example, a plurality of pads containing loops can be glued to the bottom surface of the fabric thickness compensator, and a plurality of pads containing hooks can be glued to the surface of the support portion panel. In at least one embodiment, the support portion may comprise, for example, one or more holes and / or recesses, which may be configured to receive an insert comprising hooks and / or loops. In addition to or instead of the foregoing, a tissue thickness compensator can, for example, be mounted removably against a stop using such hook and loop structures. In various embodiments, hooks and loops may comprise, for example, a fibrous surface.

In various embodiments, as described above, the bracket unit may comprise a support portion and a tissue thickness compensator fixed to the support portion. In some embodiments, as also described above, the support portion may comprise a longitudinal groove configured to receive the cutting element, and the tissue thickness compensator may comprise a retaining element that can be held in the longitudinal groove. In at least one embodiment, as shown in FIG. 386, the brace unit 16000 may include a support portion 16010 including the surface of the panel 16011 and a longitudinal groove 16015. The brace block 16000 may further comprise a tissue thickness compensator 16020 located above the surface of the panel 16011. In various embodiments, the tissue thickness compensator 16020 may include a longitudinal holding member 16025 itself which extends downward into the longitudinal groove 16015. In at least one such embodiment, the holding member 16025 can be pressed into the groove 16015 so that the interaction Between the holding member 16025 and the groove 16015 may prevent the relative movement of the support portion 16010 and the fabric thickness compensator 16020. In various embodiments, the fabric thickness compensator housing 16020 may be formed from the first material, and the holding element 16025 may be formed from the second or other material . In some embodiments, the body of the tissue thickness compensator 16020 may be formed of a material having a first strength, and the retaining element 16025 may be formed of a material having a second strength, the second strength may, for example, be higher than the first strength. When used in at least one embodiment, the brackets 10030 can be fed upward by the ejectors of the brackets 10040 so that the tips of the brackets 10030 can pass through the body of the tissue thickness compensator 16020, exit the tissue contacting surface 16021 and grab at least a portion of the fabric thickness compensator 16020 close to the target tissue. In various embodiments, a cutting member extending through a groove 16015 may cut through the holding member 16025 as the brackets 10030 are placed. In various embodiments, after implanting the tissue thickness compensator 16020, the holding member 16025 can be pulled out from the groove 16015. In some other embodiments, the thickness compensator body fabric 16020 may be configured to separate from the holding member 16025.

As shown in FIG. 387 and 389, the brace unit 17000 may comprise a support portion 17010 including the surface of the panel 17011 and a longitudinal groove 17015. The brace unit 17000 may further comprise a fabric thickness compensator 17020 located above the surface of the panel 17011. In various embodiments, the fabric thickness compensator 17020 may include a longitudinal holding member 17025 that extends downward into the longitudinal groove 17015. In at least one such embodiment, the holding member 17025 may be pressed into the groove 17015 so that the interactions The gap between the retaining element 17025 and the groove 17015 may prevent the relative movement of the supporting part 17010 and the tissue thickness compensator 17020. In various embodiments, the holding element 17025 can pass through the entire tissue thickness compensator 17020 to its upper surface 17021, and parts of the body 170 170 of the tissue thickness compensator 17020 may be secured to opposite sides of the holding member 17025. In at least one such embodiment, the holding member 17025 may also be provided with possibility of resistance, for example, lateral deflection compensator tissue thickness 17020. In various embodiments, body portion 17024 may be formed of a first material and the retaining member 17025 may be formed from a second, or another material. In some embodiments, parts of the housing 17024 may be formed of a material having a first strength, and the holding member 17025 may be formed of a material having a second strength, the second strength may, for example, be higher than the first strength. In various embodiments, in addition to the foregoing, a cutting element extending through a groove 17015 may cut through the retaining element 17025 as the brackets 10030 are placed. In various embodiments, after implanting the tissue thickness compensator 17020, the holding element 17025 can be pulled out from the groove 17015. In some in other embodiments, parts of the housing 17024 may be configured to separate from the holding member 17025.

As shown in FIG. 388, the brace unit 18000 may comprise a support portion 18010 including the surface of the panel 18011 and a longitudinal groove 18015. The brace unit 18000 may further comprise a fabric thickness compensator 18020 located above the surface of the panel 18011. In various embodiments, the fabric thickness compensator 18020 may include a longitudinal retaining element 18025 itself, which extends downward into the longitudinal groove 18015. In at least one such embodiment, the retaining element 18025 can be pressed into the groove 18015 so that the interactions e between the holding member 18025 and the groove 18015 may prevent the relative movement of the support portion 18010 and the tissue thickness compensator 18020. In various embodiments, the holding member 18025 may extend through the entire tissue thickness compensator 18020 to its upper surface 18021, and parts of the body 18024 tissue thickness compensator 18020 may be secured on opposite sides of the holding member 18025. In at least one embodiment, the holding member 18025 may comprise an enlarged portion 18026 that the second one can be inserted into the cavity 18016 formed in the groove 18015. In at least one such embodiment, the enlarged portion 18026 may prevent the retaining element 18025 from being removed from the groove 18015.

The devices described in this application may be configured to be disposed of after a single use, or may be configured to be used multiple times. However, in each case, after at least one use, the device can be reused after recovery. Recovery may include any combination of the steps of disassembling the device, then cleaning or replacing individual items and then reassembling. In particular, you can disassemble the device and selectively replace or remove in any combination any number of individual elements or parts of the device. After cleaning and / or replacing individual parts, the device can be reassembled in repair centers or in the operating unit immediately before surgery for subsequent use. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that various methods of disassembling, cleaning / replacing, and reassembling can be used in rebuilding a device. The use of such methods, as well as the resulting reconditioned device, are within the scope of this application.

Preferably, the present invention described in this application undergoes processing before use in a surgical operation. First, a new or used apparatus is obtained and, if necessary, cleaned. Then the device can be sterilized. According to one sterilization method, the apparatus is placed in a closed and sealed container, such as a plastic bag or a Tyvek bag (TYVEK). Then the container and the apparatus are placed in the field of exposure to radiation that can penetrate into the container, such as gamma radiation, X-rays or high-energy electrons. Radiation kills bacteria on the surface of the apparatus and in the container. Then the sterilized apparatus can be stored in a sterile container. A sealed container keeps the device in sterile condition until it is opened in a medical facility.

Any patent, publication, or other description that is fully or partially incorporated herein by reference is an integral part of this document to the extent that it does not conflict with the definitions, provisions, or other description presented herein. In this regard, the description provided in this document, to the extent necessary, prevails over any information contrary to the provisions of this document, which was incorporated into this document by reference. Any material or part thereof that is incorporated herein by reference and which contradicts the definitions, provisions, or other description presented herein is included in this document to the extent that between the incorporated material by reference and this description document no contradictions arise.

Although examples of industrial designs are presented in the description of the present invention, the present invention can be further modified within the spirit and scope of the present description. Thus, it is intended that the present application cover all possible variations, methods of use, or modifications of the present invention using its basic principles. Moreover, it is intended that the present application cover such deviations from the present description as are included in known or accepted practice in the field to which the present invention relates.

Claims (44)

1. An assembly for use with a surgical stapler, comprising: a block chute; a block casing located in said trough of a block, comprising: supporting part; a plurality of brace cavities formed in said support part, wherein each brace cavity comprises an opening in said support part; at least one deformation minimizing element extending from at least one of said block trough and said support portion; and an implantable compressible part, wherein said deformation minimizing element is engaged with said compressible part, said compressible part comprising: a first surface adjacent to said support portion; surface in contact with tissue; and a porous body extending between said first surface and said tissue-contacting surface, said porous body being sufficiently deflectable to allow said tissue-contacting surface to move laterally with respect to said first surface, said at least one minimizing deformation the element is configured to suppress lateral deflection of said porous body; and a plurality of brackets, with at least a portion of each of the brackets being stored so that the brackets can be removed in the cavity, and each of the brackets can be moved between the idle position and the triggered position, while each of the brackets can be deformed between the idle configuration and the launched a configuration where each said bracket moves between said idle position and said actuated position, and wherein said is squeezed the second part is adapted to be gripped in said brackets and acquires different heights in a compressed state in different said brackets when said brackets undergo deformation between said inoperative configuration and said actuated configuration. 2. The node according to claim 1, wherein said first surface comprises a shell on said porous body, said shell having a density that is higher than the density of said porous body. 3. The node according to claim 1, wherein said tissue-contacting surface comprises a shell on said porous body, said shell having a density that is higher than the density of said porous body. 4. The assembly according to claim 1, wherein said implantable compressible portion consists of a homogeneous material. 5. The assembly according to claim 1, wherein said at least one deformation minimizing element comprises a plurality of hooks inserted into said porous body with a possibility of extraction. 6. The assembly of claim 1, wherein said at least one deformation minimizing element comprises at least one side wall extending from said trough. 7. Bracket for use in a surgical stapler, which contains: block housing, comprising: a supporting part; a plurality of brace cavities formed in said support part, wherein each brace cavity comprises an opening in said support part; a plurality of stiffeners continuing from said support portion; and an implantable compressible part, wherein said stiffeners are at least partially inserted into said compressible part, said compressible part comprising: a first surface adjacent to said support portion; surface in contact with tissue; and a porous body extending between said first surface and said tissue-contacting surface, said porous body being sufficiently deflectable to allow said tissue-contacting surface to move in at least one lateral or longitudinal direction relative to said first surface, stiffening elements extend through said first surface and at least partially through said porous body, and wherein e stiffeners are adapted to suppress at least one of the lateral and longitudinal deflection of said porous body; and a plurality of brackets, with at least a portion of each of the brackets being stored so that the brackets can be removed in the cavity, each bracket can be moved between the idle position and the triggered position, and each bracket can be deformed between the idle configuration and the launched a configuration where each said bracket moves between said idle position and said actuated position, with each said sk the shell contains at least one deformable leg located with the possibility of extraction in said guide groove when said bracket is in said inoperative position, while said compressible part is capable of being gripped into said brackets and acquires different heights in a compressed state in different said brackets when said brackets undergo deformation between said inoperative configuration and said actuated configuration. 8. The bracket block according to claim 7, wherein said first surface comprises a shell on said porous body. 9. The bracket block of claim 8, wherein said shell has a density that is higher than the density of said porous body. 10. The bracket block according to claim 7, wherein said tissue-contacting surface comprises a shell on said porous body. 11. The bracket block according to claim 7, wherein said implantable compressible portion consists of a uniform material. 12. Bracket for use in a surgical stapler, which contains: block housing, comprising: a support portion comprising a proximal support end and a distal support end; a plurality of brace cavities formed in said support part, wherein each brace cavity comprises an opening in said support part; and an implantable compressible portion adjacent to said supporting portion, wherein said compressible portion comprises a distal compressible end; a holding member configured to releasably couple the distal compressible end to said distal abutment end; and a plurality of brackets, with at least a portion of each of the brackets being stored so that the brackets can be removed in the cavity, and each of the brackets can be moved between the idle position and the triggered position, while each of the brackets can be deformed between the idle configuration and the launched a configuration where each said bracket moves between said idle position and said actuated position, and wherein said is squeezed the second part is adapted to be gripped in said brackets and acquires different heights in a compressed state in different said brackets when said brackets undergo deformation between said inoperative configuration and said actuated configuration. 13. The bracket block of claim 12, wherein said retaining member extends from said distal abutment end of said block body. 14. The brace block according to claim 12, wherein said supporting part comprises a panel, wherein a groove is formed between said holding element and said panel, said distal compressible end being gripping and removable in said groove. 15. The bracket block according to claim 14, wherein said retaining element is deformable to grip said distal compressible end in said groove. 16. The bracket block of claim 14, wherein said groove is parallel to said panel. 17. The bracket block of claim 12, wherein said support portion comprises a panel and wherein said support portion comprises a groove configured to receive said distal compressible end of said support portion. 18. The bracket block of claim 17, wherein said groove is transverse to said panel. 19. The bracket block according to claim 12, wherein said retaining element is movable relative to said compressible part for gripping at least a portion of said compressible part between said holding element and said supporting part. 20. The brace unit according to claim 19, wherein one of said support part and said holding element comprises a rail, the other of said supporting part of said holding element comprises a groove adapted to receive said rail and said groove and said rail guide is configured to form a path along which said holding element can slide relative to said supporting part. 21. The brace block according to claim 12, wherein said distal compressible end consists of a first material having a first density, said compressible part comprising a housing consisting of a second material having a density that is lower than said first density, and wherein said distal compressible end extends from said body.

Images